IEC Motor Control Table of Contents

Transcription

1 IEC Motor Control Table of Contents Motor Protection Circuit Breakers Bul. M Motor Protection Circuit Breakers...Page - Bul. M Motor Circuit Protectors...Page - Bul. -H Rotary Mechanism for Molded Case Circuit Breakers...Page - Bul. A Manual Motor Starters...Page - Molded Case Circuit Breakers Bul. U Molded Case Circuit Breakers.Page - IEC Contactors Bul. /-K Miniature Contactors...Page - Bul. /-C Contactors...Page - Bul. S/S-C Safety Contactors...Page - Bul. Q-C Capacitor-Switching Contactors...Page - Bul. /-D Contactors...Page - Bul. S/S-D Safety Contactors...Page - Bul. -G Contactors...Page - IEC Renewal Parts... Page - Overload Relay Code Selection for IEC Starters... Page - IEC Overload Relays Bul. E Plus Solid-State Overload Relays...Page - Bul. -E (E and E) Solid-State Overload Relays...Web Bul. E and E Plus Solid-State Overload Relays...Page - Bul. -EF Solid-State Overload Relays.Page - Bul. -T Bimetallic Overload Relays...Page - Bul. -K Bimetallic Overload Relays...Page - Modular Protection System Bul. -P...Page - Mounting System Bul. A Mounting System...Page - Open Type Starters Combination Starters... Page - Bul. S/S Compact Combination Starter Assemblies...Page - Bul. T/T Combination Starters...Page - Eco and Compact Starters... Page - Bul. E/E Eco Starters...Page - Bul. S/S Compact Starters...Page - IEC Starters Bul. -C Reversing Starter...Web Bul. -C Reversing Starter...Web IEC Enclosed Starters Bul. H/H/M Combination Starters...Page - Bul. Reversing Starter...Page - Bul. Reversing Combination Starter...Page - Bul. Non-Reversing Starter...Page - Bul. Combination Starter...Page - Bul. Combination Starter...Page - Bul. E Multi-Speed Starter...Web Bul. / Pump Control Panels...Web Bul. Line Accessories and Modifications...Page - Bul. IEC Enclosures...Page - IEC Control, Load, and Disconnect Switches Bul. E IEC Load Switches...Page - Bul. L IEC Control and Load SwitchesPage - Bul. R IEC Fused and Non-Fused Disconnect Switches...Page - Information for this product line is available on the Industrial Controls Catalog web site:. Publication A-CAA-EN-P -

2 Bulletin M Motor Protection Circuit Breakers Product Overview! Bulletin M Motor Protection Circuit Breakers Current Range. A UL Listed for Motor Loads Short Circuit Protection Overload Protection Visible Trip Indication High Current Limiting High Switching Capacity The Bulletin M Motor Protection Circuit Breakers provide short circuit and overload protection for individual motor loads. Factoryinstalled internal accessories make installation and wiring easy. Table of Contents Product Selection Motor Protection Circuit Breakers... - Approximate Dimensions... - Standards Compliance IEC/EN -, -, --, -- IEC/EN - CSA, C. No. UL UL (I-, J-, L-Frame) Certifications CE Marked culus Listed (File No. E, NLRV(); E, NKJH(); E, DIVQ();) CCC CSA Certified ATEX General Information Motor Protection Circuit Breakers may provide the following protective and control functions. Disconnect for Motor Branch Circuit Branch-Circuit, Short-Circuit Protection (Magnetic Protection) Overload Protection (Thermal Protection) Switching (Manual) In North America, electrical codes require that an individual Motor Branch Circuit be protected by a UL/CSA Listed Fuse, Circuit Breaker or Self-Protected Combination Motor Controller. M-C, D and F Frames: The M-C, D and F frame Motor Protection Circuit Breakers may have culus Listings as Manual, Self-Protected Combination Motor Controllers and as Manual Motor Controllers (with optional approvals for Motor Disconnect and Group Installation). When UL/CSA listed as Manual, Self-Protected Combination Motor Controllers, the M Motor Protection Circuit Breakers provide all of the necessary NEC/CEC requirements for the protection and control of individual Motor Branch Circuits without additional protective devices. At some higher voltages and currents (particularly at V), a few of the M-C, D and F frame devices are only UL/CSA Listed as Manual Motor Controllers (with optional approvals for Motor Disconnect and Group Installation). In NEC/CEC Group Installations, these devices must be applied per the appropriate rules which require the use of an upstream Branch-Circuit, Short-Circuit Protective Device (BCPD). See the table on page - for the specific ratings of each Motor Protection Circuit Breaker. -CMN Frame: The -CMN frame Motor Protection Circuit Breakers are UL Listed/CSA Certified as Manual Motor Controllers (with optional approvals for Motor Disconnect and Group Installation). In NEC/CEC Group Installations, these devices must be applied per the appropriate rules which require the use of an upstream Branch-Circuit, Short-Circuit Protective Device (BCPD). See the table on page - for the specific ratings of each Motor Protection Circuit Breaker. M-I, J and L Frames: The M-I, J and L frame Motor Protection Circuit Breakers are culus Listed as Circuit Breakers as shown in the table on page -. In these cases, the M Motor Protection Circuit Breakers provide all of the necessary NEC/CEC requirements for the protection and control of individual Motor Branch Circuits without additional protective devices. For further details on the proper application of Motor Protection Circuit Breakers, please see the diagrams on the following pages. - Publication A-CAA-EN-P

3 Bulletin M Motor Protection Circuit Breakers Product Overview! C-Frame D-Frame F-Frame CMN-Frame I-Frame J-Frame L-Frame Max. Current I e A A A A A A A Current Rating. A. A. A A A A A Short Circuit Protection Standard Magnetic Trip High Magnetic Trip Magnetic Only Trip (MCP) Overload Protection Trip Class Standards Compliance: CSA., No. CSA., No. UL (Group Install.) (see ratings) (see ratings) (see ratings) (see ratings) UL Manual, Self Protected (Type E) (see ratings) (see ratings) (see ratings) UL (Overload Protection) UL IEC -, - IEC -- CE ATEX (IEC -) (up to A) (up to A) CCC (up to A) (up to A) Accessories Ext. Rotary Operator Flex Cable Operator Auxiliary Contacts Trip Indication Contacts Publication A-CAA-EN-P -

4 Bulletin M Motor Protection Circuit Breakers Catalog Number Explanation! Explanation Examples given in this section are for reference purposes. This basic explanation should not be used for product selection; not all combinations will produce a valid catalog number. M C E A KN CC GJ a b c d e f g h Code M Code C D F I J L a Bulletin Number Description Motor Protection Circuit Breakers (MPCBs) b Frame Size and Rating Description A A A A A A and A Interrupting Rating / Breaking Capacity Code Description Normal Break High Break Protection Type Code Description E Adj Thermal/ Fixed Mag ( x I n ) T Adj Thermal / Fixed Mag (... x I n ) Current Range Code Description Example A A =. A =. B B =. B =. C C = C = D D = D = E E = E = c d e f, g, h Factory-Installed Options f Miscellaneous See page - g Aux/Trip Contacts See page - h UV and Shunt Trips See page - - Publication A-CAA-EN-P

5 Bulletin M Motor Protection Circuit Breakers Wiring Diagram Group Installation with MPCBs There is only one Branch Circuit Protective Device (BCPD) for the Group Group installation has been successfully used for many years in the U.S. and Canada. It allows two or motors or one or more motors and other loads to be connected to the same branch-circuit. The most restrictive part of the conditions specified for Group Installation is the requirement for the protection of the conductors for each motor circuit. In the U.S. NEC for, a new rule for the conductor sizing was added for devices that are listed and marked Suitable for use as Tap Conductor Protection. Below is an example that illustrates installations involving multiple motors with a single BCPD protecting the entire Group. Bulletin M Motor Protection Circuit Breakers UL/CSA Listed for Group Installation Conductors from the BCPD to each motor must be a minimum of / the ampacity of the Branch Circuit conductors. Bulletin M Motor Protection Circuit Breakers UL/CSA Listed for Tap conductor Protection in Group Installations Conductors from the BCPD to manual motor controller listed as Tap Conductor Protection must be minimum of / the rating or setting of the BCPD. Conductors from the controller to the motor must be % of the motor FLA.! Group Installation: Single Motor Taps Must be / the ampacity of the Branch-Circuit conductors Branch Circuit conductors BCPD Branch Circuit Protective Device Fuses or Circuit Breaker Tap Conductor Protection in Group Installation: Conductors from BCPD to manual motor controller listed as Tap Conductor Protection must be minimum of / the rating or setting of the BCPD Tap Conductor Protection in Group Installation: Conductors to each motor sized normally at % of motor FLA Group Motor Installation Publication A-CAA-EN-P -

6 ! Bulletin M Motor Protection Circuit Breakers Wiring Diagram M-D Multiple Motor Installation with MPCBs Each Motor has an Individual Branch Circuit Protective Device Bulletin M Motor Protection Circuit Breakers (MPCBs) UL/CSA Listed as Type E Manual Self-Protected Combination Motor Controllers or UL/CSA Listed as Circuit Breakers These UL/CSA Listings allow the Bulletin M MPCBs to provide the branch-circuit, short-circuit protection (as well as overload protection) for each individual motor circuit. Additional short-circuit protection is not required for the protection of the individual motor circuits, leaving only the requirement for protection of the feeder circuit conductors by an upstream protective device. Below is an example that illustrates installations involving multiple motors, each with its own branch-circuit protection (BCPD). Bulletin M-J L (Inverse Time Circuit Breakers) may provide the branch-circuit protection for each individual motor circuit Bulletin M-C F (Type E Self-Protected Combination Motor Controllers) may provide the branch-circuit protection for each individual motor circuit Feeder Circuit Conductors Conductors to each motor sized normally at % FLA - Publication A-CAA-EN-P

7 Bulletin M Motor Protection Circuit Breakers Wiring Diagram Type E and Type F Combination Motor Controllers Most of the M-C F motor protection circuit breakers are UL listed as a manual Type E self-protected combination motor controller. Although there are many tests involved, one of the critical tests a self-protected combination motor controller must pass, is to perform electrical ops. and an additional mechanical ops. after a short circuit. By definition, a Type F combination motor controller consists of a Type E manual self protected combination motor controller and a magnetic or solid-state motor controller (such as a Bulletin -C contactor or an SMC). As with a manual Type E self-protected combination motor controller, additional short-circuit protection is not required for the individual motor circuits. A combination of a Bulletin M manual self protected combination motor controller and -C contactor can be listed as a Type E selfprotected combination motor controller. In this case, both the M and -C must pass the additional electrical and mechanical operational test. In some cases, this may require over sizing of the Bulletin M MPCB or the -C contactor to achieve weld free performance and meet the additional life requirements.! Publication A-CAA-EN-P -

8 Bulletin M Motor Protection Circuit Breakers Product Selection! Motor Protection Circuit Breakers Short Circuit Protection Standard Magnetic Trip ( x I e ) Motor Overload Protection Trip Class Rated Operational Current (I e ) [A] M-C Motor Current Adjustment Range [A] Magnetic Trip Current [A] M-D -CMN Max. Short Circuit Current [ka] Max. -phase Hp Ratings Max. kw, -Phase AC- V (I cu ) V (group motor) V V V V V /V V V C-Frame M-CE-A M-CE-A M-CE-A M-CE-A M-CE-B M-CE-B M-CE-B..... M-CE-B M-CE-B..... M-CE-C. M-CE-C... M-CE-C... M-CE-C... M-CE-C.. M-CE-C D-Frame M-DE-B..... M-DE-B M-DE-B..... M-DE-C. M-DE-C... M-DE-C... M-DE-C... M-DE-C.. M-DE-C F-Frame..... M-FE-C. M-FE-C... M-FE-C.. M-FE-C.. M-FE-C M-FE-C CMN-Frame M-F.. -CMN- -CMN- -CMN- -CMN- Horsepower/kW ratings shown in the table above are for reference. The final selection of the MPCB depends on the actual motor full load current. - Publication A-CAA-EN-P

9 Bulletin M Motor Protection Circuit Breakers Product Selection Motor Protection Circuit Breakers Short Circuit Protection Standard Magnetic Trip (Fixed at... x I e ) Overload Protection Trip Class... (Adjustable)! Rated Operational Current (I e ) [A] M-I M-J M-L Motor Current Adjustment Range [A] Magnetic Trip Current [A] Ultimate Interrupting Current [ka] (I cm ) -phase Hp Ratings Max. kw, -Phase AC- V V V V V V V /V V V I-Frame M-IE-C M-IE-D M-IE-D M-IE-D J-Frame M-JE-C M-JE-D M-JE-D M-JE-D M-JE-C M-JE-D M-JE-D M-JE-D L-Frame M-LE-D M-LE-D M-LE-D M-LE-D M-LE-D M-LE-D Horsepower/kW ratings shown in the table above are for reference. The final selection of the MPCB depends on the actual motor full load current. For IEC approvals and CE marking, add an "E" to the end of the Example: M-E-CE. Overload Protection adjustable Trip Class,,, or. Overload Protection fixed Trip Class. Publication A-CAA-EN-P -

10 Bulletin M Motor Protection Circuit Breakers Product Selection! High Inrush Motor Protection Circuit Breakers Short Circuit Protection High Magnetic Trip (Fixed at x I e ) Motor Overload Protection Trip Class Rated Operational Current (I e ) [A] Motor Current Adjustment Range [A] M-C Magnetic Trip Current [A] Max. Short Circuit Current [ka] Max. -phase Hp Ratings Max kw, -Phase AC- V (I cu ) M-D V (group motor) V V V V V /V V V C-Frame M-CT-A M-CT-A M-CT-A M-CT-A M-CT-B M-CT-B M-CT-B.... M-CT-B..... M-CT-B..... M-CT-C. M-CT-C D-Frame. M-DT-C... M-DT-C F-Frame M-F.. M-FT-C.. M-FT-C Horsepower/kW ratings shown in the table above are for reference. The final selection of the MPCB depends on the actual motor full load current. - Publication A-CAA-EN-P

11 Bulletin M Motor Protection Circuit Breakers Product Selection Motor Protection Circuit Breakers Screwless Short Circuit Protection Standard Magnetic Trip ( x I e ) Motor Overload Protection Trip Class! Rated Operational Current (I e ) [A] Motor Current Adjustment Range [A] Magnetic Trip Current [A] Max. Short Circuit Current [ka] Max. -phase Hp Ratings Max. kw, -Phase AC- V (I cu ) V (group motor) V V V V V /V V V C-Frame M-RCE-A M-RCE-A M-RCE-A M-RCE-A M-RCE-B M-RCE-B M-RCE-B M-RCE-B M-RCE-B M-RCE-C.. M-RCE-C Horsepower/kW ratings shown in the table above are for reference. The final selection of the MPCB depends on the actual motor full load current. Publication A-CAA-EN-P -

12 Bulletin M Motor Circuit Protectors Product Overview! Bulletin M Motor Circuit Protectors Current range. A UL Listed/Recognized for motor loads Short-circuit protection Overload protection must be provided separately Visible trip indication High current limiting High switching capacity The Bulletin M Motor Circuit Protectors provide short circuit protection for individual motor loads. Factory-installed internal accessories make installation and wiring easy. Certifications (. A) CE Marked culus Listed (File No. E, Guide No. NLRV, NLRV) CCC Certifications ( A) UR Recognized component (File No. E, Guide DKPU) CSA Certified (Cleass No. -) Table of Contents Product Selection Motor Circuit Protectors... - Approximate Dimensions... - Standards Compliance IEC/EN -,, --, -- IEC/EN - CSA, C. No. UL UL (H-, J-, L-, N-Frame) General Information Motor Circuit Protectors may provide the following protective and control functions. Disconnect for Motor Branch Circuit Branch-Circuit, Short-Circuit Protection (Magnetic Protection) Switching (Manual) In North America, electrical codes require that an individual Motor Branch Circuit be protected by a UL/CSA Listed Fuse, Circuit Breaker or Self-Protected Combination Motor Controller. M-C, D and F Frames: The M-C, D and F frame Motor Circuit Protectors have one UL/CSA Listing as Manual Motor Controllers (with optional approvals for Motor Disconnect and Group Installation). In NEC/CEC Group Installations, these devices must be applied per the appropriate rules which require the use of an upstream Branch-Circuit, Short-Circuit Protective Device (BCPD). See the table on page - for the specific ratings of each Motor Circuit Protector. The M-C, D and F Frame Motor Circuit Protectors are also UL/CSA Listed, together with a Bulletin C contactor and Bulletin overload relay, as part of our Bulletin T and T Self-Protected IEC Combination Starters. These starters are then able to provide all of the necessary NEC/CEC requirements for the protection and control of individual Motor Branch Circuits without additional protective devices. M-H, J and L Frames: The M-H, J and L frame Motor Circuit Protectors are UL/CSA Recognized as Circuit Breakers as shown in the table on page -. They are UL/CSA Recognized, rather than UL/CSA Listed, since they only provide short circuit protection and not thermal overload protection for the motor. M-H, J and L frame Motor Circuit Protectors (MCPs) are also UL/CSA Listed, together with a Bulletin C contactor and Bulletin overload relay, as part of our Bulletin IEC Combination Starters. These starters are then able to provide all of the necessary NEC/CEC requirements for the protection and control of individual Motor Branch Circuits without additional protective devices. - Publication A-CAA-EN-P

13 Bulletin M Motor Circuit Protectors Product Overview/Catalog Number Explanation Product Line Overview! C-Frame D-Frame F-Frame H-Frame J-Frame L-Frame N-Frame Max. Current I e A A A A A A A Current Rating.. A. A A Short Circuit Protection Standards Compliance: CSA., No. CSA., No. UL (Group Install.) UL (Recognized) IEC - CE CCC (up to A) Accessories Ext. Rotary Operator Flex Cable Operator Auxiliary Contacts Trip Indication Contacts Explanation Examples given in this section are for reference purposes. This basic explanation should not be used for product selection; not all combinations will produce a valid catalog number. Code M Code C D F H J L N a Bulletin Number Description Motor Circuit Protectors (MCPs) b Frame Size and Rating Description A A A A A A and A A and A Interrupting Rating / Breaking Capacity (I c at V) Code Description Normal Break High Break c M C N A KN CC GJ a b c d e f g h Code e Current Range Code Description Example A A =. A =. B B =. B =. C C = C = D D = D = E E = E = d Protection Type Description N Fixed Mag Only ( x I n ) P R Adj Mag Only (less than x I n ) - MCPs Adj Mag Only (greater than x I n ) - MCP's f, g, h Factory-Installed Options f Miscellaneous See page - g Aux/Trip Contacts See page - h UV and Shunt Trips See page - Publication A-CAA-EN-P -

14 ! Bulletin M Motor Circuit Protectors Wiring Diagram Group Installation with MCPs There is only one Branch Circuit Protective Device (BCPD) for the Group Group installation has been successfully used for many years in the U.S. and Canada. It allows two or motors or one or more motors and other loads to be connected to the same branch-circuit. The most restrictive part of the conditions specified for Group Installation is the requirement for the protection of the conductors for each motor circuit. Below is an example that illustrates installations involving multiple motors with a single BCPD protecting the entire Group. Bulletin M Motor Circuit Protectors UL/CSA Listed for Group Installation Conductors from the BCPD to each motor must be a minimum of / the ampacity of the Branch Circuit conductors. Motor Circuit Protectors do not provide thermal protection, so a separate overload relay must be used. Therefore, MCPs cannot be UL/CSA Listed for Tap Conductor Protection in Group Installations. Bulletin M-C F Group Installation: Single Motor Taps Must be / the ampacity of the Branch-Circuit conductors Branch Circuit conductors BCPD Branch Circuit Protective Device Fuses or Circuit Breaker Group Motor Installation - Publication A-CAA-EN-P

15 Bulletin M Motor Circuit Protectors Wiring Diagram -Phase Power Supply! Multi-Motor Installation Publication A-CAA-EN-P -

16 ! Bulletin M Motor Circuit Protectors Product Selection Motor Circuit Protectors Short circuit protection standard magnetic trip ( x I e ) Short circuit protection for component starters No motor overload protection separate Bulletin -E or -T product required for overload and installation protection For Trip Class motor applications M-C M-D M-F Rated Operational Current (I e ) [A] Magnetic Trip Current [A] Ultimate Interrupting Current [ka] Max. -phase Hp Ratings Max. kw, -Phase AC- V (I cu ) V (group motor) V V V V V /V V V C-Frame..... M-CN-A..... M-CN-A M-CN-A M-CN-A M-CN-B M-CN-B M-CN-B D-Frame M-DN-B... M-DN-B.... M-DN-B.... M-DN-C. M-DN-C... M-DN-C.. M-DN-C F-Frame.. M-FN-C.. M-FN-C M-FN-C Horsepower/kW ratings shown in the table above are for reference. The final selection of the manual starter depends on the actual motor full load current. Note: In applications with M-C_N, M-D_N and M-F_N as the short circuit protection device of heavy duty starting motors, the rated operational current I e of the above devices must be over-dimensioned with following factors: CLASS =. CLASS =. CLASS =. CLASS =. CLASS =. - Publication A-CAA-EN-P

17 Bulletin M Motor Circuit Protectors Product Selection Motor Circuit Protectors Short-Circuit Protection Magnetic Trip (Adjustable at... x I e ) Overload Protection None (Magnetic Trip Only)! Rated Operational Current (I e ) [A] M-H M-J M-L Magnetic Trip Current [A] Cam Setting -phase Hp Ratings Max. kw, -Phase AC- A B C D E F G H I V V V V V /V V V H-Frame M-HP-B... M-HP-B.. M-HP-C.. M-HP-C M-HP-C M-HP-C M-HP-D M-HR-D J-Frame M-JP-D M-JP-D M-JP-D M-JP-D M-JP-D M-JP-D M-JP-D L-Frame M-LP-D M-LP-D M-LP-D M-LP-D M-LP-D M-LP-D M-LP-D M-LP-D N-Frame M-NP-D M-NP-E The Hp and kw ratings shown are for reference only. They allow for a magnetic trip setting of at least up to X the motor FLA. However, the final selection of the MCP should be made based on motor full load current and the requirements of local electrical codes. The interrupting rating for MCPs is dependent upon the controller used. Please contact your local Rockwell Automation sales office or Allen-Bradley distributor for further information. Publication A-CAA-EN-P -

18 ! Bulletin M Motor Protection Circuit Breakers and Motor Circuit Protectors Application Ratings UL/CSA Listed Application Ratings Motor Protection Circuit Breaker (MPCB) Only - Max. Fuse or C.B. per NEC Group Motor Installation Max. Short Circuit Current [ka] UL Manual Motor Controller Motor Disconnect Max. Short Circuit Current [ka] Tap Conductor Protection Max. Short Circuit Current [ka] Publication A-CAA-EN-P UL Self-Protected (Type E) Combination Motor Controller Max. Short Circuit Current [ka] UL Inverse Time C.B. w/ul Motor Overload Protection Max. Short Circuit Current [ka] V V V V V V Y/V Y/V V V C-Frame M-CE-A M-CE-A M-CE-A M-CE-A M-CE-B M-CE-B M-CE-B M-CE-B M-CE-B M-CE-C M-CE-C M-CE-C M-CE-C M-CE-C M-CE-C D-Frame M-DE-B M-DE-B M-DE-B M-DE-C M-DE-C M-DE-C M-DE-C M-DE-C M-DE-C F-Frame M-FE-C M-FE-C M-FE-C M-FE-C M-FE-C M-FE-C CMN-Frame -CMN- -CMN- -CMN- -CMN- I-Frame M-IE-C M-IE-D M-IE-D M-IE-D J-Frame M-JE-C M-JE-D M-JE-D M-JE-D M-JE-C M-JE-D M-JE-D M-JE-D L-Frame M-LE-D M-LE-D M-LE-D M-LE-D M-LE-D M-LE-D For full voltage (delta) ratings above V or V, follow the NEC or CEC rules for group motor applications.

19 Bulletin M Motor Protection Circuit Breakers and Motor Circuit Protectors Application Ratings UL/CSA Listed Application Ratings Motor Protection Circuit Breaker (MPCB) Only, Continued Max. Fuse or C.B. per NEC UL Manual Motor Controller Group Motor Installation Motor Disconnect Tap Conductor Protection Max. Short Circuit Current [ka] Max. Short Circuit Current [ka] Max. Short Circuit Current [ka] UL Self-Protected (Type E) Combination Motor Controller Max. Short Circuit Current [ka] V V V V V V Y/V Y/V C-Frame M-CT-A M-CT-A M-CT-A M-CT-A M-CT-B M-CT-B M-CT-B M-CT-B M-CT-B M-CT-C M-CT-C D-Frame M-DT-C M-DT-C F-Frame M-FT-C M-FT-C For full voltage (delta) ratings above V or V, follow the NEC or CEC rules for group motor applications.! Publication A-CAA-EN-P -

20 ! Bulletin M Motor Protection Circuit Breakers and Motor Circuit Protectors Application Ratings UL Listed Application Ratings Motor Circuit Protectors Only Max. Fuse or C.B. per NEC UL Manual Motor Controller UL Instantaneous Trip Circuit Breaker (Magnetic Only) Group Motor Installation Motor Disconnect Motor Circuit Protector Max. Short Circuit Current [ka] Max. Short Circuit Current [ka] Max. Short Circuit Current [ka] V V V V V V C-Frame M-CN-A M-CN-A M-CN-A M-CN-A M-CN-B M-CN-B M-CN-B D-Frame M-DN-B M-DN-B M-DN-B M-DN-C M-DN-C M-DN-C M-DN-C F-Frame M-FN-C M-FN-C M-FN-C H-Frame M-HP-B M-HP-B M-HP-C M-HP-C M-HP-C M-HP-C M-HP-D M-HR-D J-Frame M-JP-C M-JP-C M-JP-D M-JP-D M-JP-D M-JP-D M-JP-D M-JP-D M-JP-D L-Frame M-LP-D M-LP-D M-LP-D M-LP-D M-LP-D M-LP-D M-LP-D M-LP-D N-Frame M-NP-D M-NP-E Separate overload protection is required. The interrupting rating for MCPs is dependent upon the controller used. Contact your local Rockwell Automation sales office or Allen-Bradley distributor for further information. - Publication A-CAA-EN-P

21 Bulletin M Motor Protection Circuit Breakers and Motor Circuit Protectors Application Ratings UL Listed Application Ratings - Motor Protection Circuit Breakers with Bulletin -K Contactors Max. Fuse or C.B. per NEC UL Manual Motor Controller Minimum Contactor Size Group Motor Installation Max. Short Circuit Current [ka] Motor Disconnect Max. Short Circuit Current [ka] UL Type F Combination Motor Controller UL Type E Self-Protected Combination Motor Controller Minimum Max. Short Circuit Current Minimum Max. Short Circuit Current Contactor [ka] Contactor [ka] V V V V Size Y/V Y/V Size Y/V Y/V C-Frame M-CE-A -K -K M-CE-A -K -K M-CE-A -K -K M-CE-A -K -K M-CE-B -K -K M-CE-B -K -K M-CE-B -K -K M-CE-B -K -K M-CE-B -K -K M-CE-C -K -K M-CE-C -K -K D-Frame M-DE-B -K -K M-DE-B -K -K M-DE-B -K -K M-DE-C -K -K M-DE-C -K -K For full voltage (delta) ratings above V or V, follow the NEC or CEC rules for group motor applications.! Publication A-CAA-EN-P -

22 ! Bulletin M Motor Protection Circuit Breakers and Motor Circuit Protectors Application Ratings UL Listed Application Ratings - Motor Protection Circuit Breakers with Bulletin -C Contactors Max. Fuse or C.B. per NEC UL Manual Motor Controller Minimum Contactor Size Group Motor Installation Max. Short Circuit Current [ka] Motor Disconnect Max. Short Circuit Current [ka] UL Type F Combination Motor Controller UL Type E Self-Protected Combination Motor Controller Minimum Max. Short Circuit Current Minimum Max. Short Circuit Current Contactor [ka] Contactor [ka] V V V V Size Y/V Y/V Size Y/V Y/V C-Frame M-CE-A -C -C -C M-CE-A -C -C -C M-CE-A -C -C -C M-CE-A -C -C -C M-CE-B -C -C -C M-CE-B -C -C -C M-CE-B -C -C -C M-CE-B -C -C M-CE-B -C -C M-CE-C -C -C M-CE-C -C -C M-CE-C -C -C M-CE-C -C -C M-CE-C -C M-CE-C -C M-DE-B D-Frame -C -C -C -C M-DE-B -C -C -C M-DE-B -C -C -C M-DE-C -C -C -C M-DE-C -C -C -C M-DE-C -C -C -C M-DE-C -C -C -C M-DE-C -C M-DE-C -C F-Frame M-FE-C -C -C -C M-FE-C -C -C -C M-FE-C -C -C -C M-FE-C -C -C -C M-FE-C -C -C -C M-FE-C -C -C -C CMN-Frame -CMN- -C -CMN- -C -CMN- -C -CMN- -C For full voltage (delta) ratings above V or V, follow the NEC or CEC rules for group motor applications. - Publication A-CAA-EN-P

23 Bulletin M Motor Protection Circuit Breakers and Motor Circuit Protectors Application Ratings UL Listed Application Ratings - Motor Circuit Protectors with Bulletin -C Contactors Max. Fuse or C.B. per NEC Minimum Contactor Size UL Manual Motor Controller Group Motor Installation Motor Disconnect UL Type E (Self-Protected) Combination Motor Controller Max. Short Max. Short Max. Short Circuit Current Max. Short Circuit Current Circuit Circuit Minimum [ka] [ka] Current [ka] Current [ka] Contactor V V V V Size Y/V Y/V C-Frame M-CN-A -C -C M-CN-A -C -C M-CN-A -C -C M-CN-A -C -C M-CN-B -C -C M-CN-B -C -C M-CN-B -C -C M-DN-B D-Frame -C -C -C M-DN-B -C -C M-DN-B -C -C M-DN-C -C -C M-DN-C -C -C M-DN-C -C -C M-DN-C -C F-Frame M-FN-C -C -C M-FN-C -C -C M-FN-C -C -C Separate overload protection is required. For full-voltage (delta) ratings above V or V, follow the NEC or CEC rules for group motor applications.! Publication A-CAA-EN-P -

24 Bulletin M Motor Circuit Protectors Application Ratings! Definition of Type Short Circuit Coordination: The contactor or starter must not endanger persons or plant in the event of a short circuit. No damage to the motor protection device or other parts may occur with the exception of welding of the contactor or starter contacts if these can be easily separated without appreciable deformation (such as with a screwdriver). In the event of short circuit, fast-opening, current-limiting Bulletin M Motor Protection Circuit Breakers make it possible to build economical, fully short-circuit coordinated starter combinations with Type coordination. Type Coordination V Max. Short Circuit Current [ka] For Use With Contactors Standard Motor Protection High Inrush Motor Protection Motor Circuit Protection V Below (or larger) C-Frame M-CE-A M-CN-A -C M-CE-A M-CT-A M-CN-A -C M-CE-A M-CT-A M-CN-A -C M-CE-A M-CT-A M-CN-A -C M-CE-B M-CT-A M-CN-B -C M-CE-B M-CT-B M-CN-B -C M-CE-B M-CT-B M-CN-B -C M-CE-B M-CT-B -C M-CE-B M-CT-B -C M-CE-C M-CT-B -C M-CE-C M-CT-C -C M-CE-C M-CT-C -C M-CE-C -C M-CE-C -C M-CE-C -C D-Frame M-DE-B M-DN-B -C M-DE-B M-DN-B -C M-DE-B M-DN-B -C M-DE-C M-DN-C -C M-DE-C M-DN-C -C M-DE-C M-DT-C -C M-DE-C M-DT-C M-DN-C -C M-DE-C -C M-DE-C M-DN-C -C F-Frame M-FE-C -C M-FE-C -C M-FE-C -C M-FE-C M-FN-C -C M-FE-C M-FT-C M-FN-C -C M-FE-C M-FT-C M-FN-C -C CMN-Frame -CMN- -C -CMN- -C -CMN- -C -CMN- -C -C contactors Type only - Publication A-CAA-EN-P

25 Bulletin M Motor Circuit Protectors Application Ratings Type Coordination V Max. Short Circuit Current [ka] Standard Motor Protection High Inrush Motor Protection Motor Circuit Protection V C-Frame For Use With Contactors Below (or larger) M-CE-A M-CN-A -C M-CE-A M-CT-A M-CN-A -C M-CE-A M-CT-A M-CN-A -C M-CE-A M-CT-A M-CN-A -C M-CE-B M-CT-A M-CN-B -C M-CE-B M-CT-B M-CN-B -C M-CE-B M-CT-B M-CN-B -C M-CE-B M-CT-B -C M-CE-B M-CT-B -C M-CE-C M-CT-B -C M-CE-C M-CT-C -C M-CE-C M-CT-C -C M-CE-C -C M-CE-C -C M-CE-C -C D-Frame M-DE-B M-DN-B -C M-DE-B M-DN-B -C M-DE-B M-DN-B -C M-DE-C M-DN-C -C M-DE-C M-DN-C -C M-DE-C M-DT-C -C M-DE-C M-DT-C M-DN-C -C M-DE-C -C M-DE-C M-DN-C -C F-Frame M-FE-C -C M-FE-C -C M-FE-C -C M-FE-C M-FN-C -C M-FE-C M-FT-C M-FN-C -C M-FE-C M-FT-C M-FN-C -C CMN-Frame -CMN- -C -CMN- -C -CMN- -C -CMN- -C! Publication A-CAA-EN-P -

26 ! Bulletin M Motor Circuit Protectors Application Ratings Type Coordination V Max. Short Circuit Current [ka] Standard Motor Protection High Inrush Motor Protection Motor Circuit Protection V C-Frame For Use With Contactors Below (or larger) M-CE-A M-CN-A -C M-CE-A M-CT-A M-CN-A -C M-CE-A M-CT-A M-CN-A -C M-CE-A M-CT-A M-CN-A -C M-CE-B M-CT-A M-CN-B -C M-CE-B M-CT-B M-CN-B -C M-CE-B M-CT-B M-CN-B -C M-CE-B M-CT-B -C M-CE-B M-CT-B -C M-CE-C M-CT-B -C M-CE-C M-CT-C -C M-CE-C M-CT-C -C M-CE-C -C M-CE-C -C M-CE-C -C D-Frame M-DE-B M-DN-B -C M-DE-B M-DN-B -C M-DE-B M-DN-B -C M-DE-C M-DN-C -C M-DE-C M-DN-C -C M-DE-C M-DT-C -C M-DE-C M-DT-C M-DN-C -C M-DE-C -C M-DE-C M-DN-C -C F-Frame M-FE-C -C M-FE-C -C M-FE-C -C M-FE-C M-FN-C -C M-FE-C M-FT-C M-FN-C -C M-FE-C M-FT-C M-FN-C -C CMN-Frame -CMN- -C -CMN- -C -CMN- -C -CMN- -C - Publication A-CAA-EN-P

27 Bulletin M Motor Protection Circuit Breakers and Motor Circuit Protectors Accessories Description Operator Position OFF ON Tripped Term. No. Description Connection Diagram For Use With O X O - N.O. Aux M-C, D, F; M-C-AFA X O X - N.C. Aux U-D (UL only in combination with M-C- AFC) M-C-AFA! Front-Mounted Auxiliary Contact -pole or -pole No additional space required Only per device O X O - N.O. Aux X O X - N.C. Aux O X O - N.O. Aux O X O - N.O. Aux M-C, D, F; U-D (UL only in combination with M-C- AFC) M-C-AFA M-C-AFA X O X - N.C. Aux X O X - N.C. Aux M-C-AFA O X O - N.O. Aux O X O - N.O. Aux M-C, D, F M-C-ASA Right Side-Mounted Auxiliary Contact -pole Adds mm to the width of the device Two per MPCB X O X - N.C. Aux X O X - N.C. Aux M-C, D, F M-C-ASA O X O - N.O. Aux X O X - N.C. Aux M-C, D, F M-C-ASA X = Contact Closed; O = Contact Open M Operator Overload (thermal) Trip Short-Circuit (magnetic) Trip Publication A-CAA-EN-P -

28 Bulletin M Motor Protection Circuit Breakers and Motor Circuit Protectors Accessories! Front-Mounted Trip Contact -pole Indicates tripping of device No additional space required Right-Side Mounted Trip Contact -pole Indicates tripping of motor protection circuit breaker Adds mm to the width of the circuit breaker One only per MPCB A right-side mounted auxiliary contact may be tandem mounted on top of this trip contact Description Operator Position OFF ON Tripped Term. No. Description O X O - N.O. Aux O O X - N.O. Trip (Short-Circuit & Overload) X O X - N.C. Aux O O X - O O X - O O X - O O X - X X O - X X O - O O X - X X O - X X O - Connection Diagram For Use With N.O. Trip (Short-Circuit & Overload) N.O. Trip (Short-Circuit & Overload) N.O. Trip (Short-Circuit) I>> N.O. Trip (Short-Circuit & Overload) N.C. Trip (Short-Circuit) N.C. Trip (Short-Circuit & Overload) N.O. Trip (Short-Circuit) N.C. Trip (Short-Circuit & Overload) N.C. Trip (Short-Circuit) I>> M-C, D, F; U-D (UL only in combination with M-C-AFC) M-C, D, F M-C, D, F M-C, D, F M-C, D, F M-C-AFARA M-C-AFARA M-C-ASARM M-C-ASARM M-C-ASARM M-C-ASARM O O X - X X O - N.O. Trip (Short-Circuit) N.C. Trip (Short-Circuit) M-C, D, F M-C-ASAM X = Contact Closed; O = Contact Open M Operator Overload (thermal) Trip Short-Circuit (magnetic) Trip - Publication A-CAA-EN-P

29 Bulletin M Motor Protection Circuit Breakers and Motor Circuit Protectors Accessories Accessories Screwless Description Operator Position OFF ON Tripped! Term. No. Description Connection Diagram For Use With O X O - N.O. Aux M-RC-AFA Front-Mounted Auxiliary Contact -pole or -pole No additional space required - Only per MPCB M-C, D, F; M-RC X O X - N.C. Aux M-RC-AFA O X O - N.O. Aux X O X - N.C. Aux O X O - N.O. Aux M-C, D, F; M-RC M-RC-AFA O X O - N.O. Aux M-RC-AFA Front-Mounted Trip Contact -pole Indicates tripping of device No additional space required O X O - N.O. Aux O O X - N.O. Trip (Short-Circuit & Overload) X O X - N.C. Aux O O X - N.O. Trip (Short-Circuit & Overload) M-C, D, F; M-RC M-RC- AFARA M-RC- AFARA X = Contact Closed; O = Contact Open M Operator Overload (thermal) Trip Short-Circuit (magnetic) Trip Publication A-CAA-EN-P -

30 Bulletin M Motor Protection Circuit Breakers and Motor Circuit Protectors Accessories! Description Operator Position OFF ON Tripped Term. No. Description Connection Diagram For Use With O X O - N.O. Aux -CMN -CA O X O - N.O. Aux Front-Mounted Auxiliary Contact Internal -pole per MPCB X O X - N.C. Aux X O X - N.C. Aux -CMN -CA -CMN -CA O X O - N.O. Aux X O X - N.C. Aux -CMN -CA O O X - O O X - N.O. Trip (Overload) N.O. Trip (Short-Circuit) a) Overload Trip b) Short-Circuit Trip -CMN -CT- X X O - N.C. Trip (Overload) -CMN -CT- Front-Mounted Trip- Indicating Auxiliary Contact Internal -pole per MPCB X X O - X X O - N.C. Trip (Short-Circuit) N.C. Trip (Overload) a) Overload Trip b) Short-Circuit Trip O O X - N.O. Trip (Short-Circuit) a) Overload Trip b) Short-Circuit Trip -CMN -CT- O O X - X X O - N.O. Trip (Overload) N.C. Trip (Short-Circuit) a) Overload Trip b) Short-Circuit Trip -CMN -CT- X = Contact Closed O = Contact Open M Operator Overload (thermal) Trip Short-Circuit (magnetic) Trip - Publication A-CAA-EN-P

31 Bulletin M Motor Protection Circuit Breakers and Motor Circuit Protectors Accessories Description Connection Diagram Trip Rating For Use With V, Hz M-C-UXJ V, Hz M-C-UXK V, Hz M-C-UXD Undervoltage Trip V, Hz M-C-UXC Left-side mounted Adds mm to the width V, Hz M-C-UXH of the circuit breaker V, Hz M-C-UXF M-C, D, F Automatically trips V, Hz M-C-UXA MPCB/MCP when voltage falls below V, Hz M-C-UXT % V, Hz M-C-UXN V, Hz/V, Hz M-C-UXB V, Hz/V, Hz M-C-UXM V, Hz M-C-UXVC V, Hz M-C-UCJ V, Hz M-C-UCK Undervoltage Trip V, Hz M-C-UCD Left-side mounted V, Hz M-C-UCC early make contacts integrated V, Hz M-C-UCH Adds mm to the width V, Hz M-C-UCF M-C, D, F of the circuit breaker V, Hz M-C-UCA Automatically trips MPCB/MCP when V, Hz M-C-UCT voltage falls below V, Hz M-C-UCN % V, Hz/V, Hz M-C-UCB V, Hz/V, Hz M-C-UCM V, Hz M-C-UCVC V, Hz M-C-SNJ V, Hz M-C-SNK V, Hz/V, Hz M-C-SND V, Hz M-C-SNH Shunt Trip Left-side mounted V, Hz M-C-SNF Adds mm to the width V, Hz M-C-SNA M-C, D, F of the circuit breaker V, Hz M-C-SNT Provides remote tripping of the MPCB/MCP V, Hz M-C-SNN V, Hz/V, Hz M-C-SNB V, Hz/V, Hz M-C-SNM V, Hz M-C-SNVC V DC M-C-SNZJ Undervoltage Trip Unit Internal, front-mounted Integrated short-circuit trip indication Automatically trips MPCB when voltage falls below % b) Short-Circuit Trip V, / Hz -CUV-KJ V, Hz/V, Hz -CMN -CUV-D V, Hz/V, Hz -CUV-A! Shunt Trip Unit Internal, front-mounted Integrated short-circuit trip indication Provides remote tripping of the MPCB b) Short-Circuit Trip V, / Hz -CRT-KJ V, Hz/V, Hz -CMN -CRT-D V, Hz/V, Hz -CRT-A M Operator Overload (thermal) Trip Short-Circuit (magnetic) Trip Publication A-CAA-EN-P -

32 Bulletin M Motor Protection Circuit Breakers and Motor Circuit Protectors Accessories! Description For Use With Anti-Tamper Shield Provides protection against inadvertent adjustment of the current setting pcs/pkg M-C, D, F M-C-CA Lockable Twist Knob For one padlock mm (/ in.) Ø shackle Can be locked in OFF position Locking Tag Padlock attachment to the lockable handles Up to three padlocks mm (/ in.) Ø shackle Black Red/Yellow M-C, D, F; U-D M-C-KN, M-C-KRY M-C-KN M-C-KRY M-C-M Padlockable Operating Knob Accepts mm (/ in.) Ø padlock shackle up to three padlocks Permits padlocking in the off position Door Coupling Handle For padlocks mm (/ in.) in diameter IP Protection/Type,, X, Interlock override capability Can be modified for locking in ON position Ships with coupling order extension shaft and legend plate separately Mounting depth (front of DIN Rail to front of enclosure door): - M-C:. mm ± mm (. in. ± / in.) - M-D:. mm ± mm (. in. ± / in.) - M-F:. mm ± mm (. in. ± / in.) - -CMN: mm +/- mm (. in. +/- / in.) Legend Plate Marking: "Hauptschalter" and "Main Switch" Marking: "Not-Aus" and "Emergency Off" Extension Shaft Cut to required length for mounting depth (front of DIN Rail to front of enclosure door): - M-C: mm (... in.) - M-D: mm (... in.) - M-F: mm (... in.) - -CMN: mm (... in.) Extension Shaft (Extended Length) Cut to required length for mounting depth (front of DIN Rail to front of enclosure door): - M-C: mm (.. in.) - M-D: mm (.. in.) - M-F: mm (.. in.) - -CMN: mm (.. in.) Black Red/Yellow Black Red/Yellow -CMN M-C, D, F -CMN M-C, D, F -CMN -CDN -CDRY M-C-DN, M-C-DRY, -CDN, -CDRY M-C-DN, M-C-DRY, -CDN, -CDRY -KN -KRY M-C-DN -CDN M-C-DRY -CDRY M-C-DFCN M-C-DFCRY M-C-DS M-C-DSL Coupler Included with Cat. Nos. M-C-DN and M-C-DRY M-C, D, F; U-D M-C-DNC IP Non-Metallic Enclosure Knockouts for M and M fittings Suitable for flexible cable with internal ground wire or conduit when externally grounded around the outside of the enclosure (no UL/CSA approval) Black Handle Red/Yellow Handle M-C M-C E-AYTG E-AYTJ Screw Adapter For screw arrangement of a motor protection circuit breaker pcs/pkg M-C, D, F; U-D M-C-N - Publication A-CAA-EN-P

33 Bulletin M Motor Protection Circuit Breakers and Motor Circuit Protectors Accessories Description For Use With ECO Connecting Module A For DOL and reversing starters Eco-starters mount on single DIN Rail (M on DIN Rail) Electrical and mechanical interconnection of M and -K contactors ECO Connecting Modules A Eco-starters mount on single DIN Rail (M on DIN Rail) Electrical and mechanical interconnection of M MPCB and -C (with AC coils or V DC electronic coils) contactors ECO Connecting Modules A Eco-starters mount on single DIN Rail (-C on DIN Rail) Electrical and mechanical interconnection of M MPCB and -C (with AC or DC coils) Connecting Modules and A Contactor and MPCB MUST BE mounted separately on () DIN Rails Electrical and mechanical interconnection of M and -C (with AC coils) Coil Modules A and A For use with Bulletin T/T -component starters Spacing Adapter Required for self-protected combination motor controller (Type E) applications of Bul. M-C, -D, and -F MPCBs. Not for use with bus bars. M-C to -K M-C to -C C M-D to -C C M-C, M-D to - C C M-C to -C C M-D to -C C M-D to -C C M-F to -C C M-F to -C M-C, -D to - C C M-D, -F to - C C M-C, -D M-F M-C-PEK M-C-PEC M-D-PEC M-C-PECA M-C-PNC M-D-PNC M-D-PNC M-F-PNC M-F-PNC M-C-PSC M-F-PSC M-C-TE M-F-TE! Feeder Block for Compact Busbar Supply of compact busbars Increases terminal capacity M-C M-F M-C-WBE M-F-WBE Feeder Terminal for Compact Busbar For supply of compact busbars Top feed overlaps compact busbar Meets IEC spacing requirements Feeder Terminal for Compact Busbar For supply of compact busbars Top feed overlaps compact busbar Meets UL Type E spacing requirements Three-Phase Compact Busbar for A Motor Protection Circuit Breakers A Max. Continuous Current mm spacing For use with front-mounted auxiliary contact Three-Phase Compact Busbar for A Motor Protection Circuit Breakers A Max. Continuous Current mm spacing For use with side-mounted auxiliary contact Three-Phase Compact Busbar for A Motor Protection Circuit Breakers A Max. Continuous Current mm spacing For use with front-mounted auxiliary contact Three-Phase Compact Busbar for A Motor Protection Circuit Breakers A Max. Continuous Current mm spacing For use with side-mounted auxiliary contact Terminal Cover For covering of unused compact bus bar terminals IPX finger protection M-C, -D M-C, -D M-F M-C-WTN M-C-WTEN M-F-WTE connections M-C-WN connections M-C-WN M-C, -D connections M-C-WN connections M-C-WN connections M-C-WN connections M-C-WN M-C, -D connections M-C-WN connections M-C-WN connections M-F-W connections M-F M-F-W connections M-F-W connections M-F-W connections M-F M-F-W connections M-F-W M-C, M-D M-C-WSN M-F M-F-WS Top Hat Rail Adpapter mm Adjusts the depth of the M-C to the M-D Allows the use of compact busbars accross both frame sizes Must be ordered in multiples of M-C -KBH Notes:. See Bulletin U for Internal and External Accessories for Bulletin M-H, J, L and N frames.. Bulletin M-I frame Accessories such as auxiliaries, alarms, undervoltage and shunt trips are only available as factory installed modifications. See page -. Publication A-CAA-EN-P -

34 Bulletin M Motor Protection Circuit Breakers and Motor Circuit Protectors Accessories! Description For Use With Pkg. Quantity Terminal End Cover. in. U-I-TC M-I Terminal End Cover. in. U-I-TC Terminal Shields (Plastic) IP Ingress Protection Padlockable Handle Lock Hasp Off only Padlocking Hasp Lock-OFF only End Cap Kit Provides -phase connections for terminal or bolt-on connections Metric Hardware Phase Barriers Provides additional phase clearance when special connections are required M-I U-I-TS M-I U-I-PL M-I U-I-ECM M-I U-I-PB Terminal Lugs Steel Terminal Copper/Aluminum wire #-/ AWG Terminal Lugs Stainless Steel Terminal Copper/Aluminum wire #-/ AWG Rotary Close Couple Handle International Black handle Rotary Close Couple Handle International Red/Yellow handle M-I M-I U-I-TLS U-I-TLS U-I-RCB U-I-RCR Operating Mechanism for External Handles M-I -H External Handles Black/Grey IP (Type /R//X/) Red/Yellow IP (Type /R//X/) Black/Grey IP (Type ) Red/Yellow IP (Type ) M-I -HM -HME -HM -HME Overload Pre-trip Auxiliary Contact (AX) Opens contactor coil circuit on overload before MPCB trips (Automatic reset) M-J, -L (MPCB only) U-J-ERRX - Publication A-CAA-EN-P

35 Bulletin M Motor Protection Circuit Breakers and Motor Circuit Protectors Accessories Description For Use With Pkg. Quantity Extension Shafts Standard Enclosure Working Depth [mm (in.)] Minimum () R-R Maximum () M-I Extended Minimum () R-R Maximum () Flex-Cable Operating ft. (. m) Cable U-I-FCX Mechanism ft. (. m) Cable U-I-FCX NEMA Type ////X ft. (. m) Cable U-I-FCX Flange-Mount Handle ft. (. m) Cable U-I-FCX Flex-Cable Operating ft. (. m) Cable M-I U-I-FCS Mechanism ft. (. m) Cable U-I-FCS Stainless Steel - Type /X ft. (. m) Cable U-I-FCS Flange Mount Handle ft. (. m) Cable U-I-FCS! DIN (#) symmetrical hat rail x. x m M-D M-F -C all pcs/kg -DR DIN (#) Symmetrical Rail mm x mm x m long Top Hat Rail (DIN # Symmetrical Rail) M-C M-D M-F -CMN pcs/kg -DR Publication A-CAA-EN-P -

36 ! Bulletin M Motor Protection Circuit Breakers and Motor Circuit Protectors Modifications M Factory Modifications (Open) Note: For modifications add (option code _) for desired features to cat. no. Available in North America only. f Miscellaneous Code Description Frame Size KN() Black Lockable Knob C, D, F, CMN KRY() Red/Yellow Lockable Knob C, D, F, CMN TE() Spacing Adapter for Self- Protected Starters (Type E) C, D, F MT STD Bus Bar Mount, Top C, D, F, H, CMN MU STD Bus Bar Mount, Universal J, K, L st Code st Code X Description Bottom Front Description Bottom Front Placeholder Only available on MCPs. J- and L-Frame MPCB only. g Aux / Trip Contacts - C, D, F g nd Code Aux / Trip Contacts - H, J, L nd Code X C R F N T Description Right Side X Placeholder X Placeholder A N.C. C N.O. + N.C. B N.O. D N.O. C N.O. + N.C. E N.C. D N.O. K N.C. (SC+OL) + N.C. (SC) E N.C. L N.O. (SC+OL) + N.O. (SC) R N.C. + N.O. (SC+OL) M N.C. (SC+OL) + N.O. (SC) S N.O. + N.O. (SC+OL) N N.O. (SC+OL) + N.C. (SC) st Code Description Bottom Front g Q Aux / Trip Contacts - CMN nd Code N.O. (SC) + N.C. (SC) Description Top Front X Placeholder X Placeholder C N.O. + N.C. K N.C. (OL) + N.C. (SC) D N.O. L N.O. (OL) + NO (SC) E N.C. M N.C. (OL) + N.O. (SC) Cannot be combined with option "h". N N.O. (OL) + N.C. (SC) Description Right Side Placeholder N.O. + N.C. N.O. + N.C. (Overload Function) N.O. + N.C. N.O. (SC+OL) + N.C. (SC) N.O. + N.C. and N.O. + N.C. (SC+OL) st Code st Code Description Left Side h UV and Shunt Trips - C, D, F nd Code Description Voltage G Undervoltage Trip J V AC, Hz P Description Left Side Only available on MCPs. Shunt Trip g Aux / Trip Contacts - I, N nd Code K D C H F A T N B VC M ZR ZQ ZJ ZW ZY ZZ ZB ZG ZE Description Right Side X Placeholder X Placeholder C N.O. + N.C. C N.O. + N.C. F N.O. + N.C. F N.O. + N.C. N N.O. (SC+OL) + N.C. (SC) N N.O. (SC+OL) + N.C. (SC) T N.O. + N.C. and N.O. + N.C. (SC+OL) T N.O. + N.C. and N.O. + N.C. (SC+OL) V AC, Hz V AC, Hz V AC, Hz V AC, Hz V AC, Hz V AC, Hz V AC, Hz V AC, Hz V AC, Hz and V AC, Hz V AC, Hz V AC, Hz and V AC, Hz V DC V DC V DC V DC V DC V DC V DC V DC V DC - Publication A-CAA-EN-P

37 Bulletin M Motor Protection Circuit Breakers and Motor Circuit Protectors Modifications M Factory Modifications (Open) Note: For modifications add (option code _) for desired features to cat. no. Available in North America only. st Code Description Top Front h UV and Shunt Trips - CMN nd Code G Undervoltage Trip KJ P Shunt Trip Cannot be combined with option "g". st Code G P Description Left Front Undervoltage Trip Left Front Shunt Trip h D A UV and Shunt Trips - H, J, L nd Code J D A B C J D B Description Voltage V AC, Hz and V AC, Hz V AC, Hz and V AC, Hz V AC, Hz and V AC, Hz Description UV Voltage V AC/DC V AC V AC V AC V AC Shunt Voltage V AC/DC V AC/DC V AC st Code G P st Code G P Description Left Front Undervoltage Trip Left Front Shunt Trip Description Left Front Undervoltage Trip Left Front Shunt Trip h UV and Shunt Trips - I h nd Code UV and Shunt Trips - N J D A B J D N B nd Code J D A B J D N B Description UV Voltage V AC V AC V AC V AC Shunt Voltage V AC/DC V AC and V DC V AC and V DC V AC and V DC Description UV Voltage V AC V AC V AC V AC Shunt Voltage V AC/DC V AC and V DC V AC and V DC V AC! Publication A-CAA-EN-P -

38 ! Bulletin M Motor Protection Circuit Breakers and Motor Circuit Protectors Specifications IEC Performance Data M-CE- A A A A B B B B B C C C C C C Rated Operational Current, I e [A] Magnetic Release Current [A].... Switching of Standard Three-Phase Motors AC- /V [kw] /V [kw] V [kw] V [kw] Back-Up Fuses gg, gl, only if I cc I cu /V [A] /V [A] /V [A] V [A] V [A] Ultimate Short Circuit Breaking Capacity I cu /V [ka] /V [ka] /V [ka] V [ka] V [ka] Rated Service Short Circuit Breaking Capacity I cs /V [ka] /V [ka] /V [ka] V [ka] V [ka] No back-up fuse required. - Publication A-CAA-EN-P

39 Bulletin M Motor Protection Circuit Breakers and Motor Circuit Protectors Specifications IEC Performance Data, Continued M-DE- M-FE- B B B C C C C C C C C C C C C Rated Operational Current, I e [A]... Magnetic Release Current [A] Switching of Standard Three-Phase Motors AC- /V [kw] /V [kw] V [kw] V [kw]..... Back-Up Fuses gg, gl, only if I cc I cu /V [A] /V [A] /V [A] V [A] V [A] Ultimate Short Circuit Breaking Capacity I cu /V [ka] /V [ka] /V [ka] V [ka] V [ka] Rated Service Short Circuit Breaking Capacity I cs /V [ka] /V [ka] /V [ka] V [ka] V [ka] No back-up fuse required.! Publication A-CAA-EN-P -

40 ! Bulletin M Motor Protection Circuit Breakers and Motor Circuit Protectors Specifications IEC Performance Data, Continued -CMN Rated Operational Current, I e [A] Magnetic Release Current [A] Switching of Standard Three-Phase Motors AC- /V [kw]./. / / / /V [kw]./ / / / V [kw] /./ / / V [kw] / / / / Back-up fuses gg, gl,, only if I cc I cu /V [A] /V [A] V [A] V [A] Ultimate short-circuit breaking capacity I cu /V [ka] /V [ka] V [ka] V [ka] Rated service short-circuit breaking capacity I cs /V [ka] /V [ka] V [ka] V [ka] No back-up fuse required. Power ratings: Preferred values according to IEC -. - Publication A-CAA-EN-P

41 Bulletin M Motor Protection Circuit Breakers and Motor Circuit Protectors Specifications IEC Performance Data, Continued M-CN- A A A A B B B Rated Operational Current, I e [A] Magnetic Release Current [A].... Switching of Standard Three-Phase Motors AC- /V [kw]..... /V [kw] V [kw] V [kw] Back-Up Fuses gg, gl, only if I cc I cu /V [A] /V [A] /V [A] V [A] V [A] Ultimate Short Circuit Breaking Capacity I cu /V [ka] /V [ka] /V [ka] V [ka] V [ka] Rated Service Short Circuit Breaking Capacity I cs /V [ka] /V [ka] /V [ka] V [ka] V [ka] No back-up fuse required.! Publication A-CAA-EN-P -

42 ! Bulletin M Motor Protection Circuit Breakers and Motor Circuit Protectors Specifications IEC Performance Data, Continued M-DN- M-FN- B B B C C C C C C C Rated Operational Current, I e [A]... Magnetic Release Current [A] Switching of Standard Three-Phase Motors AC- /V [kw] /V [kw]..... V [kw].... V [kw].... Back-Up Fuses gg, gl, only if I cc I cu /V [A] /V [A] /V [A] V [A] V [A] Ultimate Short Circuit Breaking Capacity I cu /V [ka] /V [ka] /V [ka] V [ka] V [ka] Rated Service Short Circuit Breaking Capacity I cs /V [ka] /V [ka] /V [ka] V [ka] V [ka] No back-up fuse required. - Publication A-CAA-EN-P

43 Bulletin M Motor Protection Circuit Breakers and Motor Circuit Protectors Specifications IEC Performance Data, Continued M-CT- A A A A B B B B B C C Rated Operational Current, I e [A] Magnetic Release Current [A]... Switching of Standard Three-Phase Motors AC- /V [kw] /V [kw] V [kw] V [kw] Back-Up Fuses gg, gl, only if I cc I cu /V [A] /V [A] /V [A] V [A] V [A] Ultimate Short Circuit Breaking Capacity I cu /V [ka] /V [ka] /V [ka] V [ka] V [ka] Rated Service Short Circuit Breaking Capacity I cs /V [ka] /V [ka] /V [ka] V [ka] V [ka] No back-up fuse required.! Publication A-CAA-EN-P -

44 ! Bulletin M Motor Protection Circuit Breakers and Motor Circuit Protectors Specifications IEC Performance Data, Continued M-DT- M-FT- C C C C Rated Operational Current, I e [A] Magnetic Release Current [A] Switching of Standard Three-Phase Motors AC- /V [kw].... /V [kw]. V [kw] V [kw] Back-up fuses gg, gl,, only if I cc I cu /V [A] /V [A] /V [A] V [A] V [A] Ultimate short-circuit breaking capacity I cu /V [ka] /V [ka] /V [ka] V [ka] V [ka] Rated service short-circuit breaking capacity I cs I cs /V [ka] /V [ka] /V [ka] V [ka] V [ka] No back-up fuse required. Consult your local Rockwell Automation sales office or Allen-Bradley distributor. - Publication A-CAA-EN-P

45 Bulletin M Motor Protection Circuit Breakers and Motor Circuit Protectors Specifications General Data Rated Insulation Voltage U i M-C M-D M-F -CMN IEC, SEV, VDE [V] UL, CSA [V] Rated Impulse Withstand Voltage U imp Pollution degree Main circuits U imp /Overvoltage Category kv/iii kv/iii Auxiliary circuits U imp /Overvoltage Category kv/iii kv/iii Rated Frequency [Hz] / Utilization Category IEC - (Circuit breaker) A A IEC -- (Motor starter) AC- AC- Life Span Mechanical [operations] Electrical (I e max.) [operations] (up to A) (up to A) Switching Frequency [operations/h] max. max. Ambient Temperature Storage [ C] Operation [ C] - + Climatic resistance Moisture change climate (--) C / % relative humidity and C / % relative humidity, cycles Dry heat (--) C, relative humidity < %, days Moisture heat (--) C, relative humidity %, days Site Altitude [m] to N.N. Protection Class IPX, when wired Resistance to Shock, Transport (--) g, ms, all axes, ms Resistance to Vibration, Opertion (--) g Rated Thermal Current I th up to C ambient temperature [A]... up to C ambient temperature [A]... Rated Supply Current I e [A]... Dependence on Temperature C [A] no reduction C [A] no reduction C [A] no reduction C [A] % current reduction of the upper rated current I e Overload Protection Characteristics IEC -- Motor protection (except Cat. Nos. M-CN, M-DN, M-FN) IEC Ambient Temperature Compensation [ C] - + Phase-loss Protection Differential release Trip class (except Cat. Nos. M-CN, M-DN, M-FN) fixed setting Magnetic Release Release current (+/- %) fixed setting x I e max. (for M-CE, M-DE, M-FE, M-CN, M-DN, M-FN) x I e max. (for M-CT, M-DT, M-FT) I e max. = maximum values of setting ranges fixed setting x I e max. Total Power loss P v Circuit Breaker at rated load operating temperature [W].. Main Disconnect Switch Application Yes, with accessories For utilization outside North America, assemblies (of products) shall comply to the IEC - requirements Application Conditions M manual motor starters are intended for use in closed areas without hazardous operating conditions such as dust or explosive or corrosive gases. Enclosures of appropriate manner need to be in place to protect devices in such environments.! Publication A-CAA-EN-P -

46 ! Bulletin M Motor Protection Circuit Breakers and Motor Circuit Protectors Specifications General Data, Continued Conformity to Standards M-C M-D M-F -CMN IEC -; -; --; EN -; -; --; UL ; CSA., No. IEC -; -; EN -; -; UL ; CSA., No. Approvals CE, UL, CSA CE, UL, CSA Terminal Parts Type of terminals Screwdriver Pozidriv No. /Blade No. Pozidriv No. /Blade No.. conductor. conductor. conductor. conductor. conductor. conductor. conductor. conductor [mm ]/[AWG] [mm ]/[AWG] [mm ]/[AWG] [mm ]/[AWG] [mm ]/[AWG] [mm ]/[AWG] [mm ]/[AWG] [mm ]/[AWG] /No. /No. /No. /No.. /No.. /No. /No. /No.. /No.. /No.. /No.. /No. /No. /No.. /No.. /No... / / Tightening torque [Nm]/[lb in]././ / Screwless M-RC Terminal Parts Type of terminals Screwdriver. conductor. conductor. conductor. conductor. conductor. conductor Accessories for Bulletin M Motor Protection Circuit Breakers Rated Thermal Current I th at C ambient temperature at C ambient temperature Contact Class Coordination According to NEMA (UL/CSA Standards) [A] [A] AC DC Auxiliary Contact Blocks for Front Mounting M-C-AFA, M-C-AFAR B Q Auxiliary Contact Blocks for Right-Side Mounting M-C-ASA, M-C-ASAR Back-Up Fuses gg, gl [A] Rated Supply Current [V] AC- [A].. DC- [V] [A]..... Terminal Parts Type of terminals Screwdriver Pozidriv No. /Blade No.. conductor. conductor. conductor. conductor. conductor. conductor [mm ]/[AWG] [mm ]/[AWG] [mm ]/[AWG] [mm ]/[AWG] [mm ]/[AWG] [mm ]/[AWG] [mm]/[awg] [mm]/[awg] [mm]/[awg] [mm]/[awg] [mm]/[awg] [mm]/[awg]..../../../no.../no. /No. /No.../../../../../../ B Q../../../../../../ Tightening torque [N m]/[lb in]../.../.. - Publication A-CAA-EN-P

47 Bulletin M Motor Protection Circuit Breakers and Motor Circuit Protectors Specifications Accessories for Bulletin M Motor Protection Circuit Breakers, Continued Actuating Voltage Pull-in Drop-out Rated Control Voltage min. max. Undervoltage Trip for Left-Side Mounting M-C-UX.. x U s.. x U s V Hz, V Hz V Hz Undervoltage Trip with Auxiliary Contacts for Left-Side Mounting M-C-UC.. x U s.. x U s V Hz, V Hz V Hz Shunt Trip for Left-Side Mounting M-C-SN.. x U s V Hz, V Hz V Hz On-Time % % % Coil Rating Pull-in Hold. VA, W VA, W. VA, W VA, W. VA, W VA, W Terminal Parts Type of terminals Screwdriver Pozidriv No. /Blade No.. conductor. conductor. conductor. conductor. conductor. conductor [mm]/[awg] [mm]/[awg] [mm]/[awg] [mm]/[awg] [mm]/[awg] [mm]/[awg]../no.../no.../no.../no.../no.../no. Tightening torque [N m]/[lb in]../.. Rated Thermal Current I th at C ambient temperature Compact Busbar Feeder Terminal Compact Busbar Compact Busbar Feeder Block M-C-WTN M-C-WTEN M-F-WTE M-C -W M-F -W M-C-WBE L, L, L M-C-WBE T, T, T M-F-WBE L, L, L M-F-WBE T, T, T [A] IEC /UL for use with. conductor [mm]/[awg]. / / M-C-W / for use with M-F-W. conductor [mm]/[awg]. / / / / for use with M-C-W / for use with M-F-W. conductor [mm]/[awg]. /. / /. / for use with M-C-W. / for use with M-F-W Tightening torque [N m]/[lb in]./ /./. / /! Accessories for Bulletin M Screwless M-RC Terminal Parts Type of terminals Screwdriver.. conductor. conductor. conductor. conductor. conductor. conductor [mm ]/[AWG] [mm ]/[AWG] [mm ]/[AWG] [mm ]/[AWG] [mm ]/[AWG] [mm ]/[AWG]..../../../No.../No.../No.../No. Publication A-CAA-EN-P -

48 ! Bulletin M Motor Protection Circuit Breakers and Motor Circuit Protectors Specifications Weights Description Weight [g] Cat.No. M-CE- M-DE- M-FE- M-CN- Motor Protection Circuit Breakers M-DN- M-FN- M-CT- M-DT- M-FT- -CMN- M-C-AFA M-C-AFA M-C-AFA M-C-AFA Auxiliary Contacts M-C-ASA M-C-AFARA M-C-ASAR M M-C-ASAM -CA M-C-UX Undervoltage Trip M-C-SN M-C-UC -CUV Trip Contact Blocks -CT Shunt Trip -CRT ` Weight [g] Cat.No. Anti-Tamper Cover M-C-CA Lockable Twist Knob M-C-KN M-C-KRY Locking Tag M-C-M Door Coupling Handle M-C-DN M-C-NRY Extension Shaft M-C-DS Legend Plate M-C-DFC Feeder Terminal M-C-WTEN M-F-WT M-C-WN M-C-WN M-C-WN Compact Busbars M-C-WN M-C-WN M-C-WN M-C-WN M-C-WN Top Hat Rail Adpapter -KBH - Publication A-CAA-EN-P

49 Bulletin M Motor Protection Circuit Breakers and Motor Circuit Protectors Specifications Accessories for Bulletin -CMN Circuit Breakers Rated Thermal Current I th up to C ambient temperature up to C ambient temperature NEMA contact class (UL/CSA-Approval) [A] [A] AC DC -CT Trip Contact Block for Flush Mounting on Cat. No. -CMN Circuit Breakers B Standard Pilot Duty R Light Pilot Duty -CRT, -CUV Undervoltage Trip and Shunt Trip for Flush Mounting on -CMN Circuit Breakers Make/Break max. voltage VA VA V VA VA V Back-Up Fuse gg, gl A A! Rated Current I e AC-: DC-: [V] [A] [V] [A] AC-: DC : Terminals Screwdriver.conduct or.conduct or.conduct or.conduct or [mm]/[awg] [mm]/[awg] [mm]/[awg] [mm]/[awg]../no.../no.../no.../no.../no.../no.../no.../no. Tightening torque [N m]/[lb in]./.../.. Operating Voltage -CUV Undervoltage Trip Unit for Right-Side Mounting on -CMN Circuit Breakers -CRT... Shunt Trip for Flush Mounting on -CMN Circuit Breakers Pick-up.. x U s.. x U s Drop-out.. x U s Duty cycle % ED % ED Control Voltage min. V Hz/ V Hz V Hz/ V Hz max. V Hz V Hz Coil Performance Pick-up Drop-out [VA/W] [VA/W] / / / / Terminals Terminal type Fine-stranded [mm] x.. x.. Coarse-stranded [mm] x.. x.. Tightening torque [Nm].. Coarse-stranded [AWG] No.. No.. Tightening torque [lb in].... Publication A-CAA-EN-P -

50 Bulletin M Motor Protection Circuit Breakers and Motor Circuit Protectors Specifications Cut-off current! Î s I cc asymmetrical I D I cc symmetrical The Bulletin -M limits solid short-circuit current I CC (prospective short-circuit current). I D is the maximum cut-off current (highest instantaneous value of the limited short-circuit current). This value is indicated in the following diagrams as a function of the progressive system short-circuit current. Bulletin M-C Circuit Breaker (Maximum Cut-Off Current) M-CE, -CN, -CT Max. Cut-Off Current, U e = V... Peak current [ka].... / A A A A A. A. A. A cos φ. A.. Prospective current [ka r.m.s] - Publication A-CAA-EN-P

51 Bulletin M Motor Protection Circuit Breakers and Motor Circuit Protectors Specifications Bulletin M-D Circuit Breaker (Maximum Cut-Off Current) M-DE, -DN, -DT Max. Cut-Off Current, U e = V!.. Peak current [ka].... / A A / A A. A. A cos φ.. A.. Prospective current [ka r.m.s] Bulletin M-F Circuit Breaker (Maximum Cut-Off Current) M-FE, -FN, -FT Max. Cut-Off Current, U e = V.. Peak current [ka]..... A / A A A A cos φ.. Prospective current [ka r.m.s] Publication A-CAA-EN-P -

52 Bulletin M Motor Protection Circuit Breakers and Motor Circuit Protectors Specifications! Bulletin M-C Circuit Breaker (Maximum Let-Through-Energy).E+ M-CE, -CN, -CT Max. Let-Through-Energy, U e = V Half-Cycle (Hz) Let-through energy [A s].e+.e+.e+ / A A A A A. A. A. A. A.E+. Prospective current [ka r.m.s] Bulletin M-D Circuit Breaker (Maximum Let-Through-Energy) M-DE, -DN, -DT Max. Let-Through-Energy, U e = V.E+ Let-through energy [A s].e+.e+ Half-Cycle (Hz) A A A / A A. A. A.E+. A.E+. Prospective current [ka r.m.s] - Publication A-CAA-EN-P

53 Bulletin M Motor Protection Circuit Breakers and Motor Circuit Protectors Specifications Bulletin M-F Circuit Breaker (Maximum Let-Through-Energy) M-FE, -FN, -FT Max. Let-Through-Energy, U e = V!.E+ Let-through energy [A s].e+.e+ Half-Cycle (Hz) A A A A A A.E+.E+. Prospective current [ka r.m.s] Time-Current Characteristic Bulletin M-C, -D, -F Motor Protection Circuit Breakers h Bulletin -CMN Motor Protector Release Time [s]. Tripping time [s]... Multiple of the set current I ef Multiple of set current I e F ) Thermal Release Trip Current The adjustable current-dependent delayed bimetal release protects motors against overload. The curve shows the mean operating current at an ambient temperature of C starting from the cold state. Careful testing and setting ensures effective motor protection even in the case of single-phasing. The overload characteristic is also valid for transformer protection. ) Magnetic Release Trip Current The instantaneous magnetic trip has a fixed operating current setting. This corresponds to times the maximum value of setting range. (Transformer protection up to x I e max.) At a lower setting it is correspondingly higher. Current Setting I ef The overload trip corresponds to a thermal overload relay in a motor starter conforming to IEC--. If a different value is prescribed (e.g., reduced I e for cooling medium having a temperature higher than C or a place of installation higher than m above sea level), the setting current is equal to the reduced rated current I e of the motor. Publication A-CAA-EN-P -

54 Bulletin M Motor Protection Circuit Breakers and Motor Circuit Protectors Approximate Dimensions! M-C, -D, -F Dimensions are shown in millimeters (inches). Dimensions are not intended to be used for manufacturing purposes. M-C M-D Mounting on mm DIN Rail Undervoltage/shunt trip Auxiliary contact (front mounted) Auxiliary contact (side mounted) - Publication A-CAA-EN-P

55 Bulletin M Motor Protection Circuit Breakers and Motor Circuit Protectors Approximate Dimensions Dimensions are shown in millimeters (inches). Dimensions are not intended to be used for manufacturing purposes. M-F! Mounting on mm DIN Rail Undervoltage/shunt trip Auxiliary contact (front mounted) Auxiliary contact (side mounted) M-RC, Screwless M-RC Mounting on mm DIN Rail Undervoltage/shunt trip Auxiliary contact (front mounted) Auxiliary contact (side mounted) Publication A-CAA-EN-P -

56 Bulletin M Motor Protection Circuit Breakers and Motor Circuit Protectors Approximate Dimensions! Dimensions are shown in millimeters (inches). Dimensions are not intended to be used for manufacturing purposes. M-C/D M-F Minimum distance to grounded parts or walls Mounting position/safety clearance of M-C, M-D, M-F M-C-TE Type E adapter on M-CE M-C-TE Type E adapter on M-DE M-C-TE Type E adapter on M-FE - Publication A-CAA-EN-P

57 Bulletin M Motor Protection Circuit Breakers and Motor Circuit Protectors Approximate Dimensions Dimensions are shown in millimeters (inches). Dimensions are not intended to be used for manufacturing purposes...!. Screw Adapter M-C-N for M-C/D and M-F Compact Busbar Feeder Terminal IEC Compact Busbar Feeder Terminal UL type E and IEC Mounting on mm DIN Rail Top Hat Rail Adapter mm M-C with Busbar Publication A-CAA-EN-P -

58 Bulletin M Motor Protection Circuit Breakers and Motor Circuit Protectors Approximate Dimensions! Dimensions are shown in millimeters (inches). Dimensions are not intended to be used for manufacturing purposes..... min..... b.. a M-C-DSL M-C-DS + mm.... c c + mm. M-C-D With -M-C-DS Shaft a b c c M-C. ±.. M-D. ±.. M-F... ±.. With -M-C-DSL Shaft a b c c M-C. ±.. M-D. ±.. M-F.. ±.. - Publication A-CAA-EN-P

59 Bulletin M Motor Protection Circuit Breakers and Motor Circuit Protectors Approximate Dimensions Dimensions are shown in millimeters (inches). Dimensions are not intended to be used for manufacturing purposes.! M-C-WBE E Ø Ø Ø E-AYT Publication A-CAA-EN-P -

60 Bulletin M Motor Protection Circuit Breakers and Motor Circuit Protectors Approximate Dimensions! Dimensions are shown in millimeters (inches). Dimensions are not intended to be used for manufacturing purposes. -CMN -CMN (.) ± (.). (..) min. (.). (.).. (..) (..) (.). (.) ± (.). (.) (..) Mounting position/safety clearance of -CMN -CD Note: See Bulletin U-H, J, L and N for dimensions of M-H, J, L and N frames. - Publication A-CAA-EN-P

61 Bulletin M Motor Protection Circuit Breakers and Motor Circuit Protectors Approximate Dimensions Dimensions are shown in millimeters (inches). Dimensions are not intended to be used for manufacturing purposes. Cat. Nos. M-H, -I, -J, -L, -N A C E G D! B F H H E E E E E H-Frame I-Frame J-Frame L-Frame N-Frame A B C D E F G H () (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) () () (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) () (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/). () (-/) (-/). (-/). (-/). (-/) (-/). (-/). (-/). (-/). (/) (/). (/). (/) (/). (/) (-/). (/). (/). (-/) Publication A-CAA-EN-P -

62 Bulletin -H Rotary Circuit Breaker Operating Mechanism Product Overview/Product Selection To obtain a complete Rotary Circuit Breaker Operating Mechanism, order the following: Rotary Circuit Breaker Operating Mechanism (Circuit Breaker is shown but not supplied with Operating Mechanisms) Operating Shaft Bulletin -H Rotary Circuit Breaker Operating Mechanisms Rotary circuit breaker operating mechanisms available up to A Adaptable to enclosures: IP (Type ) IP (Type, R,, X, ) Color coded on/off/reset handle indication The Bulletin -H Rotary Circuit Breaker Operating Mechanism permits door-mounted, rotary-operated circuit breaker disconnection of motor loads using Bulletin Disconnect Handles and Cutler- Hammer/Westinghouse G and H frame motor protectors in industrial applications. Operating handles are adaptable to IP (Type ) and IP (Type, R,, X, ) enclosures for door-mounted operation. A complete installation consists of operating mechanism, operating handle, operating shaft, plus user-supplied circuit breaker and enclosure. Table of Contents Product Selection... this page Accessories... - Standards Compliance IEC - CSA. No. UL Certifications UL Recognized (File no. E, Guide DHS) CSA Certified Operating Handle Your order must include: ) of the rotary circuit breaker operating mechanism, ) of the operating handle and operating shaft Product Selection Circuit Breaker Type Rotary Circuit Breaker Operating Mechanisms -H Operating Shafts R-R -H, -H Circuit Breaker Manufacturer Frame Size Frame Designation A GMCP -H Cutler- Hammer/Westinghouse A EDH, FD, FDB, FBC, HFD, HMCP -H A, A Dimensions are shown in millimeters (inches). For handle dimensions, see Bulletin R, page -. JD, JDB, JDC, HJD, HMCP ( A Frame) KD, KDB, KDC, HKD, HMCP ( A Frame) -H Circuit Breaker Enclosure Working Depth [mm (in.)] Description Frame Size Minimum Maximum Standard (-/) (-/) R-R A Extended (-/) (-/) R-R Standard () () R-R A Extended () () R-R Standard (-/) (-/) R-R / A Extended (-/) (-/) R-R - Publication A-CAA-EN-P

63 Bulletin -H Rotary Circuit Breaker Operating Mechanism Product Selection/Accessories Operating Handle Handle Type Frame Size Degree of Protection Handle Color IP (Type, R,, X, ) Black/Grey -HS Red/Yellow -HSE A IP (Type ) Black/Grey -HS Standard -HSE Red/Yellow -HSE IP (Type /R//X/) Black/Grey -HM Red/Yellow -HME,, A IP (Type ) Black/Grey -HM Long -HME Red/Yellow -HME Accessories Description Mounting Bracket Extension Provides added support for extended length operating shafts (R-R, R-R). -H -H Publication A-CAA-EN-P -

64 Bulletin A Manual Motor Starters Product Selection/Accessories -pole Manual Motor Starter For Economical Motor Starter Solutions Rated Operational Current I e Motor Current Adjustment Range Magnetic Release Operating Current Switching of Standard -phase AC Motors, AC-, AC- I cu = I cs -phase [kw] ( Hz) -phase [Hp] ( Hz) /V [A] [A] [A] V V V V V V [ka]..... A-CA-A..... A-CA-A..... A-CA-A...../../.. A-CA-A...../. / / A-CA-B..../../../. A-CA-B / -/ A-CA-B.../../../. A-CA-B..../.. A-CA-B.../. -/ A-CA-C./../. A-CA-C Power ratings: Preferred values according to IEC - UL approved as manual motor controller. Suitable for use in group motor applications: see page -. Description Connection Diagram For Use With I > A-C-AEA Auxiliary Contact for Flush Mounting -pole No additional space required I > A A-C-AEA A-C-AEA I > A-C-AEA I > I > A-C-ASA Auxiliary Contact for Left-side Mounting -pole Adds mm to the width of the Manual Motor Starter Use compact bus bars with mm spacing I > A A-C-ASA A-C-ASA Package Quantity = I > - Publication A-CAA-EN-P

65 Bulletin A Manual Motor Starters Accessories Description Trip Rating Connection Diagram For Use With V Hz A-C-UXJ V Hz A-C-UXK V Hz A-C-UXX V Hz A-C-UXF V Hz / V Hz A-C-UXT Undervoltage Trip Release D For right-side mounting V Hz / V Hz A-C-UXN U < A Adds mm to the width of V Hz / V Hz D I > A-C-UXB the Manual Motor Starter V Hz / V Hz A-C-UXM V Hz / V Hz A-C-UXD V Hz A-C-UXA V / Hz A-C-UXKD V Hz / V Hz A-C-UXVC V Hz A-C-SXJ V Hz A-C-SXK V Hz A-C-SXX V Hz A-C-SXF Shunt Trip Release V Hz / V Hz C A-C-SXT For right-side mounting V Hz / V Hz A A-C-SXN Adds mm to the width of C I > the Manual Motor Starter V Hz / V Hz A-C-SXB V Hz / V Hz A-C-SXM V Hz / V Hz A-C-SXD V Hz A-C-SXA V Hz / V Hz A-C-SXVC Terminal links x A-C-W Compact Bus Bars x A-C-W mm spacing for manual motor starters with flush-mounted A auxiliary contact blocks x A-C-W x A-C-W x A-C-W Compact Bus Bars x A-C-W mm spacing for manual motor starters with side-mounted A auxiliary contact blocks x A-C-W x A-C-W Bus Bar Feeder Terminal Supply of compact busbars Increases wiring capacity Blank Space Cover For covering unused terminal links A-C-W A-C-W A-C-WT A-C-WS Screw Adapter Hat (DIN) Rail x. mm, length mm A A-C-N Package Quantity = Publication A-CAA-EN-P -

66 Bulletin A Manual Motor Starters Accessories Enclosures for Surface Mounting With centre marks for two indicator lights Includes protective earth and neutral wire terminals Enclosures for Flush Mounting Includes protective earth and neutral wire terminals Description For Use With Protection Class: IP A A-C-EA Protection Class: IP (with seal and protective membrane) A A-C-EA Protection Class: IP A A-C-EE Protection Class: IP (with seal and protective membrane) A A-C-EE Button Membrane For IP enclosures Replacement part with four screws (mounting frame included) A-C-EA A-C-EE A-C-N Pilot Lights Length of connection leads mm, includes lamp, protection class IP. Green Red White Yellow Locking Arrangement For locking ON-button of the Manual Motor Starter For padlocks with ø mm V E-A, E-C, A-C-E -LG V E-A, E-C, A-C-E -LG V E-A, E-C, A-C-E -LG V E-A, E-C, A-C-E -LG V E-A, E-C, A-C-E -LG V E-A, E-C, A-C-E -LR V E-A, E-C, A-C-E -LR V E-A, E-C, A-C-E -LR V E-A, E-C, A-C-E -LR V E-A, E-C, A-C-E -LR V E-A, E-C, A-C-E -LW V E-A, E-C, A-C-E -LW V E-A, E-C, A-C-E -LW V E-A, E-C, A-C-E -LW V E-A, E-C, A-C-E -LW V E-A, E-C, A-C-E -LY V E-A, E-C, A-C-E -LY V E-A, E-C, A-C-E -LY V E-A, E-C, A-C-E -LY V E-A, E-C, A-C-E -LY A A-C-M Locking Arrangement Suitable for enclosures A-C-E For padlocks with ø mm A-C-E A-C-ME Emergency-Stop Push Button Set For use with enclosures Twist to release A-C-E A-C-MT Emergency-Stop Push Button Set For use with enclosures Key release A-C-E A-C-MK Package Quantity = - Publication A-CAA-EN-P

67 IEC Performance Data Bulletin A Manual Motor Starters Specifications A-CA- A A A A B B B B B C C Rated Operational Current I e [A] Magnetic Release Current [A].... Switching of Standard Three-Phase Motors AC-, AC- /V [kw]./.../.../../.../. /V [kw]..../.../.../.../../. V [kw]../../.../../../../ V [kw]../../.../. Back-Up Fuses gg, am, only if I cc I cu /V [A] No fuses required /V [A] V [A] V [A] Ultimate- (I cu ) and Rated Service (I cs ) Short Circuit Breaking Capacity I cu = I cs /V [ka] /V [ka] V [ka].. V [ka]. Power ratings: Preferred values according to IEC - UL / CSA Performance Data Manual Motor Controller (UL, CSA C. No., for group installation, in combination with a short-circuit protection device) A-CA- A A A A B B B B B C C Max. short-circuit current V [ka] V [ka] Motor load -phase V [Hp] / / / / V [Hp] / / / / -/ -phase V [Hp] / / -/ V [Hp] / V [Hp] / -/ -/ V [Hp] / Maximum rated current of protection device [A] Publication A-CAA-EN-P -

68 Bulletin A Manual Motor Starters Specifications General Data Rated Insulation Voltage U i A-CA EN/IEC [V] UL, CSA [V] Overvoltage Category / Pollution degree lll / Rated Impulse Withstand Voltage U imp Main circuits Auxiliary circuits Rated Frequency [Hz] Life Span Mechanical [operations] Electrical (I e max.) [operations] Switching Frequency [operations/h] max. Ambient Temperature Storage [ C] - + Operation [ C] - + Resistance to Climatic Stress C IV (according to IEC ) Moisture/heat resistance C, %, days Moisture/change resistance C, %/ C, %, cycles Site Altitude [m] Protection Class IP, when wired Resistance to Shock, transport [g] g, ms Resistance to Vibration Frequency range [Hz] in all directions [g]. Rated Thermal Current I th IEC up to C ambient temperature [A]. up to C ambient temperature [A]. Rated Supply Current I e Number of setting ranges Dependence on Temperature C [A] C [A] no reduction C [A] C [A] % current reduction of the upper rated current I e Overload Protection Characteristics EN/IEC -- Motor protection Ambient Temperature Compensation [ C] - + Trip Class Magnetic Release fixed setting Release current x I e max. I e max. = maximum values of setting ranges Total Power dissipation Manual motor starter at rated load [W] Main Supply Application Usable as main supply switch according to EN/IEC - with corresponding accessories [A] kv kv. - Publication A-CAA-EN-P

69 Bulletin A Manual Motor Starters Specifications Conformity to Standards Approvals/Markings Terminal Parts A-CA IEC -/ -/ -/ -- UL ; CSA., Part CE, culus Listed Type of terminals Screwdriver Pozidriv No. /Blade No. conductor [mm ]/[AWG] /No. conductor [mm ]/[AWG] /No. conductor [mm ]/[AWG] /No. conductor [mm ]/[AWG] /No. conductor [mm ]/[AWG]. /No. conductor [mm ]/[AWG]. /No. Tightening torque [N m]/[lb in]./ Specifications of Accessories A-C-AEA... Auxiliary Contact Block for Flush Mounting A-C-ASA... Auxiliary Contact Block for Left-side Mounting Rated Thermal Current Ith at C ambient temperature [A] at C ambient temperature [A] Contact Class Coordination According to NEMA (UL/CSA Standards) AC B Standard Pilot Duty B Standard Pilot Duty DC R Light Pilot Duty R Light Pilot Duty Back-Up Fuses gg, gl [A] Rated Supply Current [V] / / / / AC- [A].... DC- [V] [A] Terminal Parts Type of terminals Screwdriver Pozidriv No. /Blade No. conductor [mm]/[awg]../no.../no. conductor [mm]/[awg]../no.../no. conductor [mm]/[awg]. /No.. /No. conductor [mm]/[awg]. /No.. /No. conductor [mm]/[awg]. /No.. /No. conductor [mm]/[awg]. /No.. /No. Tightening torque [N m]/[lb in]././ Publication A-CAA-EN-P -

70 Bulletin A Manual Motor Starters Specifications Actuating Voltage A-C-UX... Undervoltage Release Unit for Right-side Mounting A-C-SX... Shunt Release for Right-side Mounting A-C-WT Supply Block Pull-in.. x U s.. x U s Drop-out.. x U s Rated Control Voltage min. V Hz, V Hz V Hz, V Hz max. V Hz V Hz On-Time % % Coil Rating Pull-in. VA, W. VA, W Hold VA,. W VA,. W Terminal Parts Type of terminals Screwdriver Pozidriv No. /Blade No. Pozidriv No. /Blade No. Pozidriv No. /Blade No. conductor [mm]/[awg]../no.../no. /No. conductor [mm]/[awg]../no.../no. /No. conductor [mm]/[awg]. /No.. /No. /No. conductor [mm]/[awg]. /No.. /No. /No. conductor [mm]/[awg]. /No.. /No. /No. conductor [mm]/[awg]. /No.. /No. /No. Tightening torque [N m]/[lb in]././ / A-C-W... Compact Bus Bar A-C-W... Compact Bus Bar Rated Insulation Voltage U i [V] Rated Thermal Current I th [A] IP Protection A-C-EA / -EE Enclosure IP A-C-EA / -EE Enclosure IP (with seal and protective membrane) -L... Indicator light Ambient Temperature [ C] Rated Operating Voltage [V],,, Cut-off current The Bulletin A-CA manual motor starter limits short-circuit current I cc (prospective short-circuit current). I D is the maximum cut-off current (highest instantaneous value of the limited short-circuit current). This value is indicated in the following diagram as a function of the system short-circuit current. IP I D Î s Icc asymmetrical I cc symmetrical - Publication A-CAA-EN-P

71 Bulletin A Manual Motor Starters Specifications A-CA Max. Let-Through (cut-off) Current, U e =...V. h h A-CA Time / current characteristics Max. Let-Through (Cut-Off) Current I D [ka]. cos ϕ..... A A.. A A. A. A A. A Tripping time t A [s]. Specified limits in compliance with IEC -- from the warm state ) Mean value from the cold state )... Prospective Short Circuit Current I cc [ka].. Multiple of the set current I ef Dispersion: t A ±%, I ef ±% Correspondingly the maximum forward i dt energy is limited. This value is indicated in the following diagram as a function of the system short-circuit current. Max. Let-Through Energy i dt * [A s]. A-CA Max. Let-Through Energy, U e =...V Half-Cycle (Hz) A A. A A. A. A A ) Operating Current of Thermal Releases: The adjustable inverse bimetal trip reliability protects motors against overloads. The curve shows the mean operating current at an ambient temperature of C starting from cold. In equipment at operating temperature, release time is less than or equal to release time from the cold state. ) Operating Current of Magnetic Releases: Electromagnetic instantaneous releases react at a fixed tripping current. At the upper thermal release setting, this tripping current is times the set current. Current To Be Set: Thermal releases meet the requirements for a thermal release of a starter in accordance with IEC -- f. If a different value is specified (such as reduced I e in motors with an ambient temperature higher than C or a site altitude > m above sea level), the rated operating current I e must be adjusted.. A.. Prospective Short Circuit Current I cc [ka] Performance categories per IEC -: I Rated short-circuit breaking capacity Operational after cu completing O-t-CO test sequence I Ultimate short-circuit breaking capacity Suitable for normal cs operation after completing O-t-CO-t-CO test sequence O = off CO = restart and off t = set delay, min Publication A-CAA-EN-P -

72 Bulletin A Manual Motor Starters Approximate Dimensions Approximate Dimensions Dimensions are shown in millimeters (inches). Dimensions are not intended to be used for manufacturing purposes. (-/) (/) (/) / (-/) (/) (-/). (/) (-/) (-/) (-/) A-CA Can be mounted on DIN Rail EN - Auxiliary contact block for side-mounting of A-C-ASA A-C-SX shunt release or A-C-UX undervoltage release A-CA with A-C-W Ø (/) (-/) (/) (-/) Mounting position/safety clearance of A-CA (-/) (/) (-/). (-/ (-/) (-/) ø. (/) A-C-N. (-/) (/) (/) (/) (-/) M M. (/). (/) (/)(/) A-C-EA / -EA A-C-WT - Publication A-CAA-EN-P

73 Bulletin A Manual Motor Starters Approximate Dimensions Dimensions are shown in millimeters (inches). Dimensions are not intended to be used for manufacturing purposes. (/). (-/) A-CA with A-C-WT (-/) (-/) Ø. (/) (-/) Cutout R (/)... (-/...-/). (-/). (-/)... (-/...-/) A-C-EE / -EE Publication A-CAA-EN-P -

74 Bulletin U Molded Case Circuit Breakers Product Overview Product Line Overview Bulletin U Molded Case Circuit Breakers. A Molded Case Circuit Breakers Thermal-Magnetic. A Electronic A LS Long Time/Short Time LSI Long Time/Short Time/High Instantaneous LSG Long Time/Short Time/Ground Fault LSIG Long Time/Short Time/High Instantaneous/Ground Fault Molded Case Switches A Factory- or field-installed accessories Flex cable operating mechanisms Rotary variable-depth operating mechanisms High interrupting ratings in compact dimensions Globally rated and approved product line for worldwide application Standards Compliance Certifications UL CSA C., No. EN/IEC - CCC (most frame sizes) UL Listed CSA Certified CE Marked KEMA Table of Contents Product Selection: A, D-Frame - A, G-Frame - A, H-Frame - A, J-Frame - A, K-Frame - A, L-Frame - A, M-Frame - A, N-Frame - A, R-Frame - Frame Reference D-Frame G-Frame H-Frame J-Frame K-Frame L-Frame M-Frame N-Frame R-Frame Max. Current I n A A A A A A A A A Current Range. A A A A A A A A A Thermal Magnetic Electronic: LS LSI LSII LSG LSIG LSIIG Interrupting Ratings: V (I cu ) V see V selection table V (I cu ) Molded Case Switches Flex Cable Operators Rotary Operators Internal Control Modules (Field installed) Standards Compliance (For information regarding specific breakers, please consult Standards compliance varies by catalog number.) UL UL File Nos. E, E E, Guide No. DIV Q CSA C., No. CSA File Nos.,, Class No. - IEC - CE KEMA CCC - Publication A-CAA-EN-P

75 Bulletin U Molded Case Circuit Breakers Catalog Number Explanation Examples given in this section are for reference purposes. This basic explanation should not be used for product selection; not all combinations will produce a valid cat. no. Refer to the tables on the following pages for descriptions of options. Complete Circuit Breaker Assemblies U H C C H a b c d e f g h Code U Code D G H J K L M N R a Bulletin No. Description Molded Case Circuit Breaker b Frame/Rating Description A A A A A A A A A Interrupting Rating/Breaking Capacity (based on I c at V) Code Description ka ka ka ka ka ka c d Protection Type Code Description C Fixed thermal/fixed magnetic D Fixed thermal/adjust magnetic E Adjust thermal/fixed magnetic F Adjust thermal/adjust magnetic Electronic (LSG long, short, G ground fault) Electronic (LSI long, short, H high instant) Electronic (LSIG long, short, I high instant, ground fault) Electronic (LSII long, short, J high instant, instantaneous maintenance mode) Electronic (LSIIG long, short, K high instant, instantaneous maintenance mode, ground fault) L Electronic (LS long and short time) S Molded case switch (Isolator) e Poles Code Description poles poles poles Code C D E f Current Range Description rr. A rr A rr A g Internal Control Modules Code Description A auxiliary contact B auxiliary contacts D alarm contact F auxiliary + alarm contact G Undervoltage release only P Shunt trip only Control Module Combinations Code Description H auxiliary contact + undervoltage release auxiliary contacts + undervoltage J release auxiliary + alarm contact + L undervoltage release N alarm contact + undervoltage release Q auxiliary contact + shunt trip R auxiliary contacts + shunt trip T auxiliary + alarm contact + shunt trip V alarm contact + shunt trip h Voltage Code See the following pages for voltage code descriptions: All frame sizes Page - Publication A-CAA-EN-P -

76 Bulletin U Molded Case Circuit Breakers Catalog Number Explanation Examples given in this section are for reference purposes. This basic explanation should not be used for product selection; not all combinations will produce a valid cat. no. Refer to the tables on the following pages for descriptions of options. Frames Code U Code J K L M a Bulletin No. Description Molded Case Circuit Breaker b Frame/Rating Description A A A A U J X a b c d e Interrupting Rating/Breaking Capacity (based on I c at V) Code Description ka ka ka ka ka ka c Code X d Protection Type Description Frame Only e Poles Code Description poles Trip Units U J T D D a b c d e f Code U a Bulletin No. Description Molded Case Circuit Breaker Code T c Trip Unit Description Trip unit e Poles Code Description poles Code J K L M b Frame/Rating Description A A A A Code C D E F G H I J K L S d Protection Type Description Fixed thermal/fixed magnetic Fixed thermal/adjust magnetic Adjust thermal/fixed magnetic Adjust thermal/adjust magnetic Electronic (LSG long, short, ground fault) Electronic (LSI long, short, high instant) Electronic (LSIG long, short, high instant, ground fault) Electronic (LSII long, short, high instant, instantaneous maintenance mode) Electronic (LSIIG long, short, high instant, instantaneous maintenance mode, ground fault) Electronic (LS long and short time) Molded case switch (Isolator) Code C D E f Current Range Description rr. A rr A rr A - Publication A-CAA-EN-P

77 Bulletin U Molded Case Circuit Breakers Product Selection A, D-Frame Product Selection A, D-Frame Standards UL CSA C., No. IEC / EN -, - Ratings HACR -Pole Thermal-Magnetic, Fixed Thermal-Fixed Magnetic Rated Current I n Thermal Trip (Fixed) I r = I n Magnetic Trip I m = Breaking Capacity ( Hz) [ka] V V V V Interrupting Rating ( Hz) [ka] [A] [A] [A] I cu I cs I cu I cs I cu I cs I cu I cs V AC Y/V AC Y/V AC.. x I n U-DD-A x I n U-DD-B x I n U-DD-B x I n U-DD-B x I n U-DD-B x I n U-DD-B x I n U-DD-B x I n U-DD-B x I n U-DD-C x I n U-DD-C x I n U-DD-C x I n U-DD-C x I n U-DD-C x I n U-DD-C Current limiting -Pole Thermal-Magnetic, Fixed Thermal-Fixed Magnetic Rated Current I n Thermal Trip (Fixed) I r = I n Magnetic Trip I m = Breaking Capacity ( Hz) [ka] V V V V Interrupting Rating ( Hz) [ka] [A] [A] [A] I cu I cs I cu I cs I cu I cs I cu I cs V AC Y/V AC Y/V AC.. x I n U-DD-A x I n U-DD-B x I n U-DD-B x I n U-DD-B x I n U-DD-B x I n U-DD-B x I n U-DD-B x I n U-DD-B x I n U-DD-C x I n U-DD-C x I n U-DD-C x I n U-DD-C x I n U-DD-C x I n U-DD-C Current limiting Publication A-CAA-EN-P -

78 Bulletin U Molded Case Circuit Breakers Accessories A, D-Frame Accessories Load terminal cover For UL compliance of front mount auxiliary contacts when installed on U-D Three-Phase Compact Busbar mm spacing Compliant with UL (UL Cat. NMTR) and IEC A max. continuous current mm spacing Description For Use With pcs/pkg M-C-AFA M-C-AFC connections U-D U-D-W connections U-D U-D-W connections U-D U-D-W connections U-D U-D-W Feeder Terminal for compact busbar Compliant with UL (UL Cat. NMTR) and IEC A max. continuous current U-D-W U-D-WTE Eco Connection Module A Eco-loadfeeders mount on single DIN Rail (U on DIN Rail) Electrical and mechanical interconnection of U and -C (with AC coils or V and V DC electronic coils) contactors U-D to -C -C U-D-PEC Flexible Wire Module A Contactor and U are separately mounted U-D to -C -C U-D-PF Note: See page - for additonal accessories suitable for Bul. U-D molded case circuit breakers. - Publication A-CAA-EN-P

79 Bulletin U Molded Case Circuit Breakers Specifications A, D-Frame Specifications General Data U-D Number of Poles and Rated Insulation Voltage U i IEC / EN [V] UL, CSA [V] Ratings HACR Suitable for continuous operation at percent of rating only if used in cubicle space for. A, cubicle space x x mm ( x x inches). Rated Impulse Withstand Voltage U imp Pollution degree Main circuits U imp /Overvoltage Category kv/iii Auxiliary circuits U imp /Overvoltage Category kv/iii Safe separation between main and auxiliary circuits up to V Rated Frequency [Hz] / Utilization Category IEC - (Circuit breaker) A Life Span Mechanical [operations] Electrical (I e max.) [operations] Switching Frequency [operations/h] max. Ambient Temperature Storage [ C] - + Operation [ C] - + ( with % I n current reduction) Climatic resistance Moisture change climate (--) C / % relative humidity and C / % relative humidity, cycles Dry heat (--) C, relative humidity < %, days Moisture heat (--) C, relative humidity %, days Site Altitude [m] to N.N. Protection Class IPX, when wired Overload Protection [ C] Yes acc. IEC/EN -, UL, CSA., Ambient Temperature Compensation - + Phase-loss Protection No phase loss protection Short circuit protection (Magnetic) fixed setting x I n Main Disconnect Switch Application Yes, with accessories Application Conditions For utilization outside North America, Assemblies (of products) shall comply to the IEC- requirements U circuit breakers are intended for use in closed areas without hazardous operating conditions such as dust or explosive or corrosive gases. Enclosures of appropriate manner need to be in place to protect devices in such environments. Standards UL; CSA C. No. ; IEC / EN -, - Certifiactions CE; culus listed Circuit Breaker, File No. E and E (accessories) Terminal specification U-D U-D Use C Cu wire only Terminal Parts Type of terminals Screwdriver Pozidriv No. / Blade No.. conductor. conductor. conductor. conductor. conductor. conductor. conductor. conductor [mm ]/[AWG] [mm ]/[AWG] [mm ]/[AWG] [mm ]/[AWG] [mm ]/[AWG] [mm ]/[AWG] [mm ]/[AWG] [mm ]/[AWG] / / / / /No. /No. /No. /No. Tightening torque [Nm]/[lb in]./ U-D-WTE U-D-W Use C Cu wire only Rated Thermal Current I th [A]. conductor [mm]/[awg]. /. conductor [mm ]/[AWG]. /. conductor [mm]/[awg]. /. conductor [mm]/[awg]. / Tightening torque [N m]/[lb in]./ Weights Description Weight [g] Cat.No. Circuit Breakers U-D Publication A-CAA-EN-P -

80 Bulletin U Molded Case Circuit Breakers Specifications A, D-Frame Bulletin U-D Molded Case Circuit Breakers (Maximum Cut-Off Current) U-DD Max. Cut-Off Current, Ue = V at Hz.. Peak current [ka]. A A A cos φ.. Prospective current [ka r.m.s] Bulletin U-D Molded Case Circuit Breakers (Maximum Let-Through-Energy) U-DD Max. Let-Through-Energy, U e = V.E+.E+ Half-Cycle (Hz) A A A Let-through energy [A s].e+.e+.e+.e+. Prospective current [ka r.m.s] - Publication A-CAA-EN-P

81 Bulletin U Molded Case Circuit Breakers Specifications/Approximate Dimensions A, D-Frame Time-Current Characteristic Tripping time [s] Tripping characteristic acc. to UL and IEC - ➀ conventional non-tripping current I nt =. I n ➁ conventional tripping current I t =. I n : t = <h ➂. I n : t = s max. Instantaneous tripping acc. to UL and IEC - ➃ Trip Curve : I n I / I n Approximate Dimensions, U-D Dimensions are shown in millimeters (inches). Dimensions are not intended to be used for manufacturing purposes.. (-/). (/) (-/). (/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/). (/) (-/). (-/). (-/) (/) (-/) (-/) (/). (/) (-/) (/). (/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (/) (/) Publication A-CAA-EN-P -

82 Bulletin U Molded Case Circuit Breakers Approximate Dimensions A, D-Frame Dimensions are shown in millimeters (inches). Dimensions are not intended to be used for manufacturing purposes. * (/) * (/) * (/) * (/) UL Minimum distance to grounded parts or walls Mounting position (/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) () (-/) U-D with Busbar (-/) Ø. Ø(/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/). (/) Screw Adapter M-C-N for U-D - Publication A-CAA-EN-P

83 Bulletin U Molded Case Circuit Breakers Product Selection/Accessories A, G-Frame UL Note: Terminal box lugs provided as standard CSA., No. Note: Accessories cannot be field installed to the G-Frame circuit breakers. Circuit breakers with one auxiliary contact are also available. ka, Thermal-Magnetic, Fixed Thermal-Fixed Magnetic Rated Current I n [A] Thermal Trip [A] I r = I n (Fixed) Magnetic Trip [A] I m = x I n Interrupt Rating (/ Hz) I cu /I cs [ka] Interrupt Rating [ka] V AC V AC V AC /V DC U-GC-C U-GC-C U-GC-C U-GC-C U-GC-C U-GC-C U-GC-C U-GC-C Time constant is ms min. ka, Thermal-Magnetic, Fixed Thermal-Fixed Magnetic Rated Current I n [A] Thermal Trip [A] I r = I n (Fixed) Magnetic Trip [A] I m = x I n Time constant is ms min. and poles of a -pole circuit breaker. Accessories External Accessories Interrupt Rating (/ Hz) I cu /I cs [ka] Interrupt Rating [ka] V AC V AC V AC /V DC U-GC-C U-GC-C U-GC-C U-GC-C U-GC-C U-GC-C U-GC-C U-GC-C U-GC-C U-GC-C U-GC-C U-GC-C U-GC-D Rotary, Variable-Depth Operating Mechanism UL Type ///X, IP Rotary handle in. (. cm) operating rod DIN Rail Adapter Allows -pole G-frame MCCB to mount to mm DIN Rail Description Black Handle Red/Yellow Handle Qty: Poles Poles U-G-RVMB U-G-RVMR U-G-DRA Supplied with breaker. DIN Rail Adapter Allows -pole G-frame MCCB to mount to mm DIN Rail Padlockable Handle Block Padlocking Hasp Lock-OFF only Replacement Mounting Hardware () M -. x mm Qty: Qty: Qty: U-G-DRA U-G-PL U-G-MHM Publication A-CAA-EN-P -

84 Bulletin U Molded Case Circuit Breakers Approximate Dimensions A, G-Frame Dimensions are in inches (millimeters). Dimensions are not intended to be used for manufacturing purposes. -Pole Dimensions A, PRESSURE COLLAR TERMINALS. (.). (.). (.). (.) Ø. (.). (.). (.). (.). (.). (.). (.). (.) - Publication A-CAA-EN-P

85 Bulletin U Molded Case Circuit Breakers Approximate Dimensions A, G-Frame Dimensions are in inches (millimeters). Dimensions are not intended to be used for manufacturing purposes. -Pole Dimensions Front View Side View Off. (.). (.). (.) Publication A-CAA-EN-P -

86 Bulletin U Molded Case Circuit Breakers Product Selection A, H-Frame UL CSA., No. IEC - CE KEMA (-pole MCCBs) CCC (-pole MCCBs) -Pole / ka, Thermal-Magnetic, Fixed Thermal-Fixed Magnetic Rated Current I n [A] Magnetic Trip [A] I m = x I n Breaking Capacity ( Hz) I cu /I cs [ka] Interrupting Rating ( Hz) [ka] V V V U-HC-C U-HC-C U-HC-C U-HC-C U-HC-C U-HC-C U-HC-C U-HC-C U-HC-C U-HC-C U-HC-C U-HC-C U-HC-D U-HC-D U-HC-D -Pole / ka, Thermal-Magnetic, Fixed Thermal-Fixed Magnetic Rated Current I n [A] Magnetic Trip [A] I m = x I n Note: Terminal box lugs provided as standard Breaking Capacity ( Hz) I cu /I cs [ka] Interrupting Rating ( Hz) [ka] V V V V V V /V U-HC-C U-HC-C U-HC-C U-HC-C U-HC-C U-HC-C U-HC-C U-HC-C U-HC-C U-HC-C U-HC-C U-HC-C U-HC-D U-HC-D U-HC-D - Publication A-CAA-EN-P

87 Bulletin U Molded Case Circuit Breakers Product Selection A, H-Frame -Pole / ka, Thermal-Magnetic, Fixed Thermal-Fixed Magnetic Rated Current I n [A] Thermal Trip [A] I r = I n (Fixed) Magnetic Trip [A] I m = x I n Breaking Capacity ( Hz) I cu /I cs [ka] Interrupting Rating ( Hz) [ka] V V V V V V /V Fixed U-HC-C Fixed U-HC-C Fixed U-HC-C Fixed U-HC-C Fixed U-HC-C Fixed U-HC-C Fixed U-HC-C Fixed U-HC-C Fixed U-HC-C Fixed U-HC-C Fixed U-HC-C Fixed U-HC-C Fixed U-HC-D Fixed U-HC-D Fixed U-HC-D -Pole / ka, Thermal-Magnetic, Fixed Thermal-Fixed Magnetic Rated Current I n [A] Thermal Trip [A] I r = I n (Fixed) Magnetic Trip [A] I m = x I n Breaking Capacity ( Hz) I cu /I cs [ka] Interrupting Rating ( Hz) [ka] V V V V V V /V Fixed U-HC-C Fixed U-HC-C Fixed U-HC-C Fixed U-HC-C Fixed U-HC-C Fixed U-HC-C Fixed U-HC-C Fixed U-HC-C Fixed U-HC-C Fixed U-HC-C Fixed U-HC-C Fixed U-HC-C Fixed U-HC-D Fixed U-HC-D Fixed U-HC-D -Pole / ka, Thermal-Magnetic, Fixed Thermal-Fixed Magnetic Rated Thermal Trip Magnetic Trip Breaking Capacity ( Hz) Interrupting Rating ( Hz) Current [A] [A] I cu /I cs [ka] [ka] I n [A] I r = I n (Fixed) I m = x I n V V V V V V /V U-HC-C U-HC-C U-HC-C U-HC-C U-HC-C U-HC-C U-HC-C U-HC-C U-HC-C U-HC-C U-HC-C U-HC-C U-HC-D U-HC-D U-HC-D Publication A-CAA-EN-P -

88 Bulletin U Molded Case Circuit Breakers Product Selection A, H-Frame -Pole / ka, Thermal-Magnetic, Fixed Thermal-Fixed Magnetic Rated Thermal Trip Magnetic Trip Breaking Capacity ( Hz) Interrupting Rating ( Hz) Current [A] [A] I cu /I cs [ka] [ka] I n [A] I r = I n (Fixed) I m = x I n V V V V V V /V U-HC-C U-HC-C U-HC-C U-HC-C U-HC-C U-HC-C U-HC-C U-HC-C U-HC-C U-HC-C U-HC-C U-HC-C U-HC-D U-HC-D U-HC-D -Pole / ka, Thermal-Magnetic, Fixed Thermal-Fixed Magnetic Rated Thermal Trip Magnetic Breaking Capacity ( Hz) Interrupting Rating ( Hz) Current [A] Trip [A] I cu /I cs [ka] [ka] I n [A] I r = I n (Fixed) I m = x I n V V V V V V /V Fixed U-HC-C Fixed U-HC-C Fixed U-HC-C Fixed U-HC-C Fixed U-HC-C Fixed U-HC-C Fixed U-HC-C Fixed U-HC-C Fixed U-HC-C Fixed U-HC-C Fixed U-HC-D Fixed U-HC-D Fixed U-HC-D Current limiting -Pole / ka, Thermal-Magnetic, Fixed Thermal-Fixed Magnetic Rated Thermal Trip Magnetic Breaking Capacity ( Hz) Interrupting Rating ( Hz) Current [A] Trip [A] I cu /I cs [ka] [ka] I n [A] I r = I n (Fixed) I m = x I n V V V V V V /V Fixed U-HC-C Fixed U-HC-C Fixed U-HC-C Fixed U-HC-C Fixed U-HC-C Fixed U-HC-C Fixed U-HC-C Fixed U-HC-C Fixed U-HC-C Fixed U-HC-C Fixed U-HC-D Fixed U-HC-D Fixed U-HC-D Current limiting Molded Case Switch UL Rated Thermal Trip Magnetic Breaking Capacity ( Hz) Interrupting Rating ( Hz) Current [A] Trip [A] I cu /I cs [ka] [ka] I n [A] I r = I n (Fixed) I m = x I n V V V V V V /V U-HS-D - Publication A-CAA-EN-P

89 Bulletin U Molded Case Circuit Breakers Accessories A, H-Frame Internal Control Modules Field Installed Description Diagram Mounting Location Auxiliary Contact (AX) Electrically indicates "ON/OFF" status of breakers () a-b AX OFF ON TRIP U-H-EA () a-b Right side ONLY U-H-EA Alarm Contact (AL) Electrically indicates when the breaker is in the "TRIPPED" state () M (make)- B (break) AL OFF ON TRIP U-H-ER Right side ONLY Auxiliary/Alarm Contact (AX/AL) Combination Combination of auxiliary contact and alarm contact () a-b () M (make)- B (break) AX AL OFF ON TRIP U-H-EAR Shunt Trip (SNT) Provides remote tripping of the circuit breaker Undervoltage trip not available when shunt trip is used V DC V, //DC V, //DC SNT S S Right side ONLY U-H-SNZQ U-H-SNJ U-H-SND Undervoltage Release (UVT) Automatically trips breaker when voltage falls between preset value, % Shunt trip is not available when undervoltage release is used V, / Hz V, / Hz V DC V, / Hz V, / Hz V, / Hz V, / Hz Note: For Factory-Installed internal control modules, please see page -. UVT U U Left side ONLY Left side ONLY U-H-SNB U-H-UJ U-H-UZJ U-H-UD U-H-UA U-H-UB U-H-UC Publication A-CAA-EN-P -

90 Bulletin U Molded Case Circuit Breakers Accessories A, H-Frame External Accessories Terminal End Cover. mm (. in.) diameter cable entry Terminal End Cover. mm (. in.) diameter cable entry Terminal Shields IP Ingress Protection Rating Flex-Cable Operating Mechanism Includes handle, cable, operating, and bail mechanism Pre-assembled and adjusted Non-Metallic - UL IP, Type ////X Flange Mount Operating Handle Flex-Cable Operating Mechanism Includes handle, cable, operating, and bail mechanism Pre-assembled and adjusted Stainless Steel - Type /X Flange Mount Operating Handle Flex-Cable Operating Mechanism Includes handle, cable, operating, and bail mechanism Pre-assembled and adjusted Painted metal Type / Flange mount operating handle Rotary, Variable-Depth Operating Mechanism UL Type ///X, IP Rotary handle in. (. cm) operating rod Rotary, Variable-Depth Operating Mechanism UL Type ///X, IP Rotary handle in. (. cm) operating rod Description Rotary, Variable-Depth Operating Mechanism with Internal NFPA Operating Handle External Type //X/ IP Rotary Handle in. (. cm) operating rod Rotary, Variable-Depth Operating Mechanism with Internal NFPA Operating Handle External Type //X/ IP Rotary Handle in. (. cm) operating rod U-H-TC U-H-TC For use with -pole MCCBs, line side U-H-TSLI For use with -pole MCCBs, load side U-H-TSLO For use with -pole MCCBs U-H-TS For use with -pole MCCBs U-H-TS ft (. m) Cable U-H-FCX ft (. m) Cable U-H-FCX ft (. m) Cable U-H-FCX ft (. m) Cable U-H-FCX ft (. m) Cable U-H-FCS ft (. m) Cable U-H-FCS ft (. m) Cable U-H-FCS ft (. m) Cable U-H-FCS ft (. m) Cable U-H-FMX ft (. m) Cable U-H-FMX ft (. m) Cable U-H-FMX ft (. m) Cable U-H-FMX ft (. m) Cable U-H-FMX ft (. m) Cable U-H-FMX Black Handle U-H-RVMB Red/Yellow Handle Black Handle Red/Yellow Handle Black Handle Red/Yellow Handle Black Handle Red/Yellow Handle U-H-RVMR U-H-RVMB U-H-RVMR U-H-NVMB U-H-NVMR U-H-NVMB U-H-NVMR Motor Operator Remotely opens, closes, and resets the circuit breaker V AC Motor Operator Remotely opens, closes, and resets the circuit breaker V DC For use with - or - pole MCCBs, V AC/DC For use with - or - pole MCCBs, V DC U-H-EOPD U-H-EOPZ Replacement Mounting Hardware () M -. x mm For use with - or - pole MCCBs U-H-MHM Supplied with breaker. - Publication A-CAA-EN-P

91 Bulletin U Molded Case Circuit Breakers Accessories A, H-Frame Rotary, Direct Couple Operating Mechanism Rotary handle - IP UL Type Breaker mounted End Cap Kit Provides three-phase connections for terminal or bolton connections Metric hardware provided Description Black Handle U-H-RCB Red/Yellow Handle U-H-RCR For use with -pole MCCBs Qty: U-H-ECM For use with -pole MCCBs Qty: U-H-ECM For use with -pole MCCBs Qty: U-H-ECM Phase Barriers Provides additional phase clearance when special connections that extend past the circuit breaker housing are required Qty: U-H-PB Padlock Kit Padlocking hasp Lock-OFF only Qty: U-H-PL Plug-in Base Adapters Plug-in provides power terminations and adapter for applications where the ability to quickly remove or replace the circuit breakers is required Plug-in Base Auxiliary Contacts Provides auxiliary contact functions to detect breaker installation status For use with -pole MCCBs Qty: U-H-PAD For use with - or -pole MCCBs Qty: U-H-PDK For use with -pole MCCBs Qty: U-H-DRA DIN Rail Adapter Allows MCCB to mount to mm DIN Rail For use with -pole MCCBs Qty: U-H-DRA For use with -pole MCCBs Qty: U-H-DRA Multi-Tap Terminal Lug Kit with IP terminal cover () # AWG or (). mm Qty: with terminal shield Qty: U-H-MTLA U-H-MTLAN U-H-MTLAN Multi-Tap Terminal Lug Kit with IP terminal cover () # AWG or (). mm Qty: with terminal shield U-H-MTLA () # AWG or (). mm Qty: U-H-MTLAN Publication A-CAA-EN-P -

92 Bulletin U Molded Case Circuit Breakers Approximate Dimensions A, H-Frame Dimensions are in inches. Dimensions are not intended to be used for manufacturing purposes. -Pole Molded Case Circuit Breakers. TOP. FNT FNT... RGT RGT.. TOP - Publication A-CAA-EN-P

93 Bulletin U Molded Case Circuit Breakers Approximate Dimensions A, H-Frame Dimensions are in inches. Dimensions are not intended to be used for manufacturing purposes. -Pole Molded Case Circuit Breakers... TOP FNT. FNT. RGT RGT. TOP FNT.. TOP Publication A-CAA-EN-P -

94 Bulletin U Molded Case Circuit Breakers Approximate Dimensions A, H-Frame Dimensions are in inches (millimeters). Dimensions are not intended to be used for manufacturing purposes. -Pole Molded Case Circuit Breakers Front Cover Cutout Front View -Pole Side View R. (.) C L Breaker. (.). (.) C L Handle. (.). (.). (.). (.) Ø. (.). (.). (.) H-Frame with Earth Leakage Module. (.). (.). (.). (.).. (.) (.).. (.) (.). (.). (.). (.) -Pole. (.). (.). (.). (.). (.). (.). (.). (.). (.). (.). (.) - Publication A-CAA-EN-P

95 Bulletin U Molded Case Circuit Breakers Product Selection A, J-Frame UL Note: Terminal box lugs must be ordered separately. See page - CSA., No. IEC - CE KEMA CCC (Pending) Breaker Frames Rated Current I n [A] Current limiting Breaking Capacity ( Hz) I cu /I cs [ka] Interrupting Rating ( Hz) [ka] V V V V V V V U-JX U-JX U-JX U-JX Trip Units Rated Current I n [A] Thermal-Magnetic Adjustment Range [A] Thermal Trip I r = I n (Fixed) Magnetic Trip I m = x I r U-JTD-C U-JTD-D U-JTD-D U-JTD-D U-JTD-D U-JTD-D U-JTD-D U-JTD-D Rated Current I n [A] Electronic Adjustment Range [A] Thermal Trip I r =.. x I n Magnetic Trip I m = x I r Protection Type LS U-JTL-C LSI U-JTH-C LSG U-JTG-C LSIG U-JTI-C LS U-JTL-D LSI U-JTH-D LSG U-JTG-D LSIG U-JTI-D LS U-JTL-D LSI U-JTH-D LSG U-JTG-D LSIG U-JTI-D LS U-JTL-D LSI U-JTH-D LSG U-JTG-D LSIG U-JTI-D Assembled Circuit Breakers with Thermal-Magnetic Trip Units Rated Current I n [A] Breaking Capacity/ Interrupting Rating [ka] Breaking Capacity/ Interrupting Rating [ka] Breaking Capacity/ Interrupting Rating [ka] V V V V V V U-JD-C U-JD-C U-JD-C U-JD-D U-JD-D U-JD-D U-JD-D U-JD-D U-JD-D U-JD-D U-JD-D U-JD-D U-JD-D U-JD-D U-JD-D U-JD-D U-JD-D U-JD-D U-JD-D U-JD-D U-JD-D U-JD-D U-JD-D U-JD-D Interrupting ratings shown are for V and V, respectively. The complete range of ratings can be found in the frame rating table on this page. Publication A-CAA-EN-P -

96 Bulletin U Molded Case Circuit Breakers Product Selection A, J-Frame Assembled Circuit Breakers with Electronic Trip Units Rated Current I n [A] Protection Type Breaking Capacity/ Interrupting Rating [ka] Breaking Capacity/ Interrupting Rating [ka] Breaking Capacity/ Interrupting Rating [ka] V V V V V V LS U-JL-C U-JL-C U-JL-C LSI U-JH-C U-JH-C U-JH-C LSG U-JG-C U-JG-C U-JG-C LSIG U-JI-C U-JI-C U-JI-C LS U-JL-D U-JL-D U-JL-D LSI U-JH-D U-JH-D U-JH-D LSG U-JG-D U-JG-D U-JG-D LSIG U-JI-D U-JI-D U-JI-D LS U-JL-D U-JL-D U-JL-D LSI U-JH-D U-JH-D U-JH-D LSG U-JG-D U-JG-D U-JG-D LSIG U-JI-D U-JI-D U-JI-D LS U-JL-D U-JL-D U-JL-D LSI U-JH-D U-JH-D U-JH-D LSI U-JG-D U-JH-D U-JG-D LSIG U-JI-D U-JI-D U-JI-D Interrupting ratings shown are for V and V, respectively. The complete range of ratings can be found in the frame rating table on page -. Molded Case Switch UL Rated Current I n [A] Thermal Trip I r = I n [A] Magnetic Trip [A] I m = x I n Breaking Capacity ( Hz) I cu /I cs [ka] Interrupting Rating ( Hz) [ka] V V V V V V V U-JS-D - Publication A-CAA-EN-P

97 Bulletin U Molded Case Circuit Breakers Accessories A, J-Frame Pictures shown are representative. Actual product may differ from product shown. Internal Control Modules Field Installed Description Diagram Mounting Location Auxiliary Contact (AX) Electrically indicates "ON/OFF" status of breakers () a-b AX OFF ON TRIP U-H-EA () a-b Right side ONLY U-H-EA Alarm Contact (AL) Electrically indicates when the breaker is in the "TRIPPED" state () M (make)-b (break) AL OFF ON TRIP U-J-ER Right side ONLY Auxiliary/Alarm Contact (AX/AL) Combination Combination of auxiliary contact and alarm contact Shunt Trip (SNT) Provides remote tripping of the circuit breaker Undervoltage trip not available when shunt trip is used Undervoltage Release (UVT) Automatically trips breaker when voltage falls between preset value, % Shunt trip is not available when undervoltage release is used () a-b () M (make)-b (break) AX AL OFF ON TRIP U-J-EAR Right side ONLY V DC U-H-SNZQ V, //DC U-H-SNJ V, //DC SNT S S U-H-SND V, / Hz Left side ONLY U-H-SNB V, / Hz V, / Hz V, / Hz V, / Hz Note: For Factory-Installed internal control modules, please see page -. Terminal Lugs UVT U U U-H-UJ U-H-UD U-H-UA U-H-UB V, / Hz Left side ONLY U-H-UC Description Frame Size Aluminum lugs, Al or Cu wire () MCM or () mm Qty: J U-J-TLA Terminal Lugs Stainless steel box lugs, Cu wire only () MCM or () mm Qty: J U-J-TLS Publication A-CAA-EN-P -

98 Bulletin U Molded Case Circuit Breakers Accessories A, J-Frame Pictures shown are representative. Actual product may differ from product shown. External Accessories Terminal Shields IP Ingress Protection Rating Flex-Cable Operating Mechanism Includes handle, cable, operating, and bail mechanism Pre-assembled and adjusted Non-Metallic - UL IP, Type ////X Flange Mount Operating Handle Flex-Cable Operating Mechanism Stainless Steel IP/ UL Type ////X Flange-Mount Operating Handle Flex-Cable Operating Mechanism Includes handle, cable, operating, and bail mechanism Pre-assembled and adjusted Painted metal Type / Flange mount operating handle Rotary, Variable-Depth Operating Mechanism UL Type ///X, IP Rotary handle in. (. cm) operating rod Rotary, Variable-Depth Operating Mechanism UL Type ///X, IP Rotary handle in. (. cm) operating rod Description U-J-TS ft (. m) Cable U-J-FCX ft (. m) Cable U-J-FCX ft (. m) Cable U-J-FCX ft (. m) Cable U-J-FCX ft (. m) Cable U-J-FCS ft (. m) Cable U-J-FCS ft (. m) Cable U-J-FCS ft (. m) Cable U-J-FCS ft (. m) Cable U-J-FMX ft (. m) Cable U-J-FMX ft (. m) Cable U-J-FMX ft (. m) Cable U-J-FMX Black Handle U-J-RVMB Red/Yellow Handle U-J-RVMR Black Handle U-J-RVMB Red/Yellow Handle U-J-RVMR Rotary, Variable-Depth Operating Mechanism with Internal NFPA Operating Handle External Type //X/ IP Rotary Handle in. (. cm) operating rod Rotary, Variable-Depth Operating Mechanism with Internal NFPA Operating Handle External Type //X/ IP Rotary Handle in. (. cm) operating rod Rotary, Direct Couple Operating Mechanism Breaker mounted Black Handle Red/Yellow Handle Black Handle Red/Yellow Handle Black Handle Red/Yellow Handle U-J-NVMB U-J-NVMR U-J-NVMB U-J-NVMR U-J-RCB U-J-RCR End Cap Kit Provides -phase connections for terminal or bolt-on connections Metric hardware U-J-ECM Phase Barriers Provides additional phase clearance when special connections that extend past the circuit breaker housing are required Qty: U-J-PB Padlock Kit Padlocking hasp Lock-OFF only Multi-Tap Terminal Lug Kit with IP terminal cover Qty: U-J-PL () # AWG or (). mm Qty: U-J-MTLA () # AWG or (). mm Qty: U-J-MTLA Ground Fault Leakage Module Current pickup settings are selectable from. A with time delays up to. Time delays are also selectable from Instantaneous. s for. A settings and above. A current pickup setting of. A defaults to an Instantaneous time setting regardless of the time dial s position. Two alarm contacts come as standard: a % pretrip and a % after trip contact, both based only on earth leakage current levels. A A For use with J- Frame -pole MCCBs up to A For use with J- Frame -pole MCCBs up to A U-J-GFP U-J-GFP Motor Operator Remotely opens, closes, and resets the circuit breaker V AC For use with - or - Pole MCCBs, V AC/DC For use with - or - Pole MCCBs, V DC U-J-EOPD U-J-EOPZ Replacement Mounting Hardware () M -. x mm For use with - or - Pole MCCBs U-J-MHM Supplied with breaker. - Publication A-CAA-EN-P

99 Bulletin U Molded Case Circuit Breakers Approximate Dimensions A, J-Frame Dimensions are in inches (millimeters). Dimensions are not intended to be used for manufacturing purposes.. (.) Front Cover Cutout Front View -Pole Side View. (.). (.) C L Breaker. (.). (.) R. (.). (.). (.) C L. (.) Handle. (.). (.). (.). (.) J-Frame with Earth Leakage Module Front View Side View Front Cover Cutout -Pole. (.) -Pole.. (.) (.). (.). (.). (.). (.). (.). (.). (.). (.). (.). (.). (.) R. (.). (.). (.). (.). (.). (.). (.). (.). (.) RESET TEST. (.). (.). (.). (.). (.). (.). (.). (.). (.) Publication A-CAA-EN-P -

100 Bulletin U Molded Case Circuit Breakers Product Selection A, K-Frame UL Note: Terminal lugs must be ordered separately. See page - CSA., No. Breaker Frames Rated Current I n [A] Current limiting. Trip Units and Rating Plugs Rated Current I n [A] Breaking Capacity ( Hz) I cu /I cs [ka] Interrupting Rating ( Hz) [ka] V V V V V V V U-KX U-KX U-KX Assembled Circuit Breakers, Thermal-Magnetic Trip Units Rated Current I n [A] Thermal-Magnetic Adjustment Range [A] Thermal Trip [A] I r = I n (Fixed) Magnetic Trip I m = x I n U-KTD-D U-KTD-D U-KTD-D U-KTD-D U-KTD-D U-KTD-D U-KTD-D U-KTD-D U-KTD-D U-KTD-D Breaking Capacity/ Interrupting Rating [ka] Breaking Capacity/ Interrupting Rating [ka] Rated Current I n [A] Thermal Trip I r =.. x I n Electronic Breaking Capacity/ Interrupting Rating [ka] V V V V V V Magnetic Trip I m = x I r Protection Type U-KD-D U-KD-D U-KD-D U-KD-D U-KD-D U-KD-D U-KD-D U-KD-D U-KD-D U-KD-D U-KD-D U-KD-D U-KD-D U-KD-D U-KD-D U-KD-D U-KD-D U-KD-D U-KD-D U-KD-D U-KD-D U-KD-D U-KD-D U-KD-D U-KD-D U-KD-D U-KD-D U-KD-D U-KD-D U-KD-D Assembled circuit breakers can be created by adding a trip unit and rating plugs (electronic only) to a circuit breaker frame. Example: U-KX + U-KTL-D + U-KRP-D Interrupting ratings shown are for V and V, respectively. The complete range of ratings can be found in the frame rating table on this page. LS LSI LSG LSIG U-KTL-D U-KTH-D U-KTG-D U-KTI-D Electronic trip units require the use of a rating plug. Thermal trip rating is determined by the rating plug selection and is not adjustable. Rating Plugs Thermal Trip I n [A] Thermal Trip I n [A] U-KRP-D U-KRP-D U-KRP-D U-KRP-D U-KRP-D U-KRP-D - Publication A-CAA-EN-P

101 Bulletin U Molded Case Circuit Breakers Product Selection A, K-Frame Assembled Circuit Breakers, Electronic Trip Units Rated Current I n [A] Thermal Trip I r =.. x I n Protection Type Breaking Capacity/ Interrupting Rating [ka] Breaking Capacity/ Interrupting Rating [ka] Breaking Capacity/ Interrupting Rating [ka] V V V V V V LS U-KL-D U-KL-D U-KL-D LSI U-KH-D U-KH-D U-KH-D LSG U-KG-D U-KG-D U-KG-D Electronic trip units require the use of a rating plug. Thermal trip rating is determined by the rating plug selection and is not adjustable. Interrupting ratings shown are for V and V, respectively. The complete range of ratings can be found in the frame rating table on page - Molded Case Switch UL Rated Magnetic Trip Breaking Capacity ( Hz) I cu /I cs [ka] Interrupting Rating ( Hz) [ka] Current I n [A] x I n V V V V V V V U-KS-D Optional Terminal Lug Kits Pictures shown are representative. Actual product may differ from product shown. Terminal Lugs Terminal Lugs Description Pkg. Quantity Aluminum lug, Al or Cu wire () MCM or () mm Aluminum lug, Al or Cu wire () MCM or () mm Aluminum lug, Al or Cu wire () / MCM or () mm Copper lug, Cu wire only () MCM or () mm Copper lug, Cu wire only () MCM or () mm Copper lug, Cu wire only () / MCM or () mm Aluminum lug, Al or Cu wire () / MCM or () / MCM, () mm or () mm Aluminum lug, Al or Cu wire () MCM or () mm U-K-TLAA U-K-TLA (includes shield) U-K-TLA U-K-TLCA U-K-TLC (includes shield) U-K-TLC (includes shield) U-K-TLAA U-K-TLAB Terminal Lugs Copper lug, Cu wire only () MCM or () mm (includes shield) U-K-TLCB Multi-Tap Terminal Lug Kit with IP terminal cover () # / AWG or () mm U-K-MTLA () # AWG or (). mm U-K-MTLA Publication A-CAA-EN-P -

102 Bulletin U Molded Case Circuit Breakers Accessories A, K-Frame Pictures shown are representative. Actual product may differ from product shown. Internal Control Modules Field Installed Description Diagram Mounting Location Auxiliary Contact (AX) Electrically indicates "ON/OFF" status of breakers () a-b AX OFF ON TRIP U-K-EA () a-b Right side ONLY U-K-EA Alarm Contact (AL) Electrically indicates when the breaker is in the "TRIPPED" state () M (make)-b (break) AL OFF ON TRIP U-K-ER Right side ONLY Auxiliary/Alarm Contact (AX/AL) Combination Combination of auxiliary contact and alarm contact () a-b () M (make)-b (break) AX AL OFF ON TRIP Right side ONLY U-K- EAR Shunt Trip (SNT) Provides remote tripping of the circuit breaker Undervoltage trip not available when shunt trip is used Undervoltage Release (UVT) Automatically trips breaker when voltage falls between preset value, % Shunt trip is not available when undervoltage release is used V, //DC V AC, V DC V AC, V DC SNT S S U-K-SNJ U-K-SND U-K-SNN V, / Hz Left side ONLY U-K-SNB V, / Hz U-K-UJ V DC U-K-UZJ V, / Hz U U-K-UD UVT V, / Hz U U-K-UA V, / Hz Left side ONLY U-K-UB - Publication A-CAA-EN-P

103 Bulletin U Molded Case Circuit Breakers Accessories A, K-Frame Pictures shown are representative. Actual product may differ from product shown. External Accessories Terminal Shields IP Ingress Protection Rating Flex-Cable Operating Mechanism Includes handle, cable, operating, and bail mechanism Pre-assembled and adjusted UL Type ////X Flange-Mount Operating Handle Non-Metallic Description U-K-TS ft (. m) Cable U-K-FCX ft (. m) Cable U-K-FCX ft (. m) Cable U-K-FCX Flex-Cable Operating Mechanism Includes handle, cable, operating, and bail mechanism Pre-assembled and adjusted UL Type /X Flange-Mount Operating Handle Stainless Steel Flex-Cable Operating Mechanism Includes handle, cable, operating, and bail mechanism Pre-assembled and adjusted Painted metal Type / Flange mount operating handle Rotary, Variable-Depth Operating Mechanism UL Type ///X, IP Rotary handle in. (. cm) operating rod Rotary, Variable-Depth Operating Mechanism UL Type ///X, IP Rotary handle in. (. cm) operating rod Rotary, Variable-Depth Operating Mechanism with Internal NFPA Operating Handle External UL Type ///X, IP Rotary Handle in. (. cm) operating rod Rotary, Variable-Depth Operating Mechanism with Internal NFPA Operating Handle External UL Type ///X, IP Rotary Handle in. (. cm) operating rod Rotary, Direct Couple Operating Mechanism Type Rotary Handle Breaker Mounted Rotary, Direct Couple Operating Mechanism Type Rotary Handle Breaker Mounted End Cap Kit Provides -phase connections for terminal or bolt-on connections Metric Hardware ft (. m) Cable U-K-FCS ft (. m) Cable U-K-FCS ft (. m) Cable U-K-FCS ft (. m) Cable U-K-FMX ft (. m) Cable U-K-FMX ft (. m) Cable U-K-FMX ft (. m) Cable U-K-FMX Black Handle U-K-RVMB Red/Yellow Handle U-K-RVMR Black Handle U-K-RVMB Red/Yellow Handle U-K-RVMR Black Handle U-K-NVMB Red/Yellow Handle U-K-NVMR Black Handle U-K-NVMB Red/Yellow Handle U-K-NVMR Black Handle U-K-RCG Red/Yellow Handle U-K-RCR Qty: U-K-ECM Padlock Kit Padlocking Hasp Lock-OFF only Qty: U-K-PL Phase Barriers Provides additional phase clearance when special connections that extend past the circuit breaker housing are required Qty: U-K-PB Supplied with breaker. Replacement Mounting Hardware () M -. x mm U-K-MHM Publication A-CAA-EN-P -

104 Bulletin U Molded Case Circuit Breakers Appropriate Dimensions A, K-Frame Dimensions are in inches (millimeters). Dimensions are not intended to be used for manufacturing purposes. Front Cover Cutout Front View Side View. (.). (.). R (. R). R (. R) C L Handle. (.). (.). (.). (.). (.). (.). (.). (.) ON OFF. (.) - Publication A-CAA-EN-P

105 Bulletin U Molded Case Circuit Breakers Product Selection A, L-Frame UL CSA., No. IEC - CE KEMA CCC Note: Terminal box lugs must be ordered separately. See page - Breaker Frames Rated Current I n [A] Current limiting Trip Units and Rating Plugs Breaking Capacity ( Hz) I cu /I cs [ka] Interrupting Rating ( Hz) [ka] V V V V V V V U-LX U-LX U-LX Rated Current I n [A] Thermal-Magnetic Adjustment Range [A] Thermal Trip I r = I n (Fixed) Magnetic Trip I m = x I n U-LTD-D U-LTD-D U-LTD-D U-LTD-D U-LTD-D U-LTD-D Rated Current I n [A] Rated Current, Instant. Maintenance Mode.. x I n [A] Electronic Adjustment Range [A] Thermal Trip I r =.. x I n Magnetic Trip I m = x I n Protection Type LSII U-LTJ-D LSG U-LTG-D LS U-LTL-D LSI U-LTH-D LSIG U-LTI-D LSIIG U-LTK-D LSII U-LTJ-D LSG U-LTG-D LS U-LTL-D LSI U-LTH-D LSIG U-LTI-D LSIIG U-LTK-D LSII U-LTJ-D LSG U-LTG-D LS U-LTL-D LSI U-LTH-D LSIG U-LTI-D LSIIG U-LTK-D Assembled Circuit Breakers, Thermal-Magnetic Trip Units Rated Current I n [A] Thermal Trip I r = I n Breaking Capacity/Interrupting Rating [ka] Breaking Capacity/Interrupting Rating [ka] V V V V U-LD-D U-LD-D U-LD-D U-LD-D U-LD-D U-LD-D U-LD-D U-LD-D U-LD-D U-LD-D U-LD-D U-LD-D Interrupting ratings shown are for V and V, respectively. The complete range of ratings can be found in the frame rating table on this page. Publication A-CAA-EN-P -

106 Bulletin U Molded Case Circuit Breakers Product Selection A, L-Frame Assembled Circuit Breakers, Electronic Trip Units Rated Current I n [A] Rated Current, Instant. Maint. Mode.. x I n [A] Thermal Trip I r =.. x I n Protection Type LS Breaking Capacity/ Interrupting Rating [ka] Breaking Capacity/ Interrupting Rating [ka] V V V V U-LL-D U-LL-D LSI U-LH-D U-LH-D LSII U-LJ-D U-LJ-D LSG U-LG-D U-LG-D LSIG U-LI-D U-LI-D LSIIG U-LK-D U-LK-D LS U-LL-D U-LL-D LSI U-LH-D U-LH-D LSII U-LJ-D U-LJ-D LSG U-LG-D U-LG-D LSIG U-LI-D U-LI-D LSIIG U-LK-D U-LK-D LS U-LL-D U-LL-D LSI U-LH-D U-LH-D LSII U-LJ-D U-LJ-D LSG U-LG-D U-LG-D LSIG U-LI-D U-LI-D LSIIG U-LK-D U-LK-D Interrupting ratings shown are for V and V, respectively. The complete range of ratings can be found in the frame rating table on page -. Rating plug not required with IMM trip module. Molded Case Switch UL Rated Current I n [A] Magnetic Trip I m = x I n [A] Breaking Capacity ( Hz) I cu /I cs [ka] Interrupting Rating ( Hz) [ka] V V V V V V V U-LS-D Terminal Lugs Pictures shown are representative. Actual product may differ from product shown. Terminal Lugs Terminal Lugs Description Aluminum lug, Al or Cu wire () MCM or () mm Copper lug, Cu wire only () MCM or () mm Aluminum lug, Al or Cu wire () MCM or () mm Copper lug, Cu wire only () MCM or () mm Aluminum lug, Al or Cu wire () MCM or () mm Copper lug, Cu wire only () MCM or () mm Qty: (includes shield) Qty: (includes shield) Qty: (includes shield) Qty: (includes shield) Qty: Qty: U-L-TLA U-L-TLC U-L-TLA U-L-TLC U-L-TLA U-L-TLC - Publication A-CAA-EN-P

107 Bulletin U Molded Case Circuit Breakers Accessories A, L-Frame Pictures shown are representative. Actual product may differ from product shown. Internal Control Modules Field Installed Description Diagram Mounting Location Auxiliary Contact (AX) Electrically indicates "ON/OFF" status of breakers () a-b AX OFF ON TRIP U-H-EA () a-b Right side ONLY U-H-EA Alarm Contact (AL) Electrically indicates when the breaker is in the "TRIPPED" state () M (make)-b (break) AL OFF ON TRIP U-J-ER Right side ONLY Auxiliary/Alarm Contact (AX/AL) Combination Combination of auxiliary contact and alarm contact () a-b () M (make)-b (break) AX AL OFF ON TRIP U-J-EAR Right side ONLY Shunt Trip (SNT) Provides remote tripping of the circuit breaker Undervoltage trip not available when shunt trip is used Undervoltage Release (UVT) Automatically trips breaker when voltage falls between preset value, % Shunt trip is not available when undervoltage release is used V, //DC U-H-SNJ V, //DC SNT S S U-H-SND V, / Hz Left side ONLY U-H-SNB V, / Hz U-H-UJ V, / Hz U-H-UD V, / Hz U-H-UA U UVT V, / Hz U U-H-UB V, / Hz Left side ONLY U-H-UC Note: For Factory-Installed internal control modules, please see page -. Publication A-CAA-EN-P -

108 Bulletin U Molded Case Circuit Breakers Accessories A, L-Frame Pictures shown are representative. Actual product may differ from product shown. External Accessories Terminal Shields IP Ingress Protection Rating Flex-Cable Operating Mechanism Includes handle, cable, operating, and bail mechanism Pre-assembled and adjusted UL Type ////X Flange-Mount Operating Handle Non-Metallic Description Flex-Cable Operating Mechanism Includes handle, cable, operating, and bail mechanism Pre-assembled and adjusted UL Type /X Flange-Mount Operating Handle Stainless Steel Flex-Cable Operating Mechanism Includes handle, cable, operating, and bail mechanism Pre-assembled and adjusted Painted metal Type / Flange mount operating handle Rotary, Variable-Depth Operating Mechanism UL Type ///X, IP Rotary handle in. (. cm) operating rod Rotary, Variable-Depth Operating Mechanism UL Type ///X, IP Rotary handle in. (. cm) operating rod Rotary, Variable-Depth Operating Mechanism with Internal NFPA Operating Handle External UL Type ///X, IP Rotary Handle in. (. cm) operating rod Rotary, Variable-Depth Operating Mechanism with Internal NFPA Operating Handle External UL Type ///X, IP Rotary Handle in. (. cm) operating rod U-L-TS ft (. m) Cable U-L-FCX ft (. m) Cable U-L-FCX ft (. m) Cable U-L-FCX ft (. m) Cable U-L-FCS ft (. m) Cable U-L-FCS ft (. m) Cable U-L-FCS ft (. m) Cable U-L-FMX ft (. m) Cable U-L-FMX ft (. m) Cable U-L-FMX Black Handle U-L-RVMB Red/Yellow Handle U-L-RVMR Black Handle U-L-RVMB Red/Yellow Handle U-L-RVMR Black Handle U-L-NVMB Red/Yellow Handle U-L-NVMR Black Handle U-L-NVMB Red/Yellow Handle U-L-NVMR Rotary, Direct Couple Operating Mechanism Breaker Mounted Black Handle U-L-RMX End Cap Kit Provides -phase connections for terminal or bolt-on connections Metric hardware provided Qty: U-L-ECM Padlock Kit Padlocking Hasp Lock-OFF only Phase Barriers Provides additional phase clearance when special connections that extend past the circuit breaker housing are required Qty: Qty: U-L-PL U-K-PB Ground Fault Leakage Module Current pickup settings are selectable from. A with time delays up to. s. Time delays are also selectable from Instantaneous. s for. A settings and above. A current pickup setting of. A defaults to an Instantaneous time setting regardless of the time dial s position. Two alarm contacts come as standard: a % pretrip and a % after trip contact, both based only on earth leakage current levels. Motor Operator Remotely opens, closes, and resets the circuit breaker V AC A A For use with L- Frame -pole MCCBs up to A For use with L- Frame -pole MCCBs up to A For use with - or - pole MCCBs, V AC/DC For use with - or - pole MCCBs, V DC U-L-GFP U-L-GFP U-L-EOPD U-L-EOPZ Supplied with breaker. Replacement Mounting Hardware () M -. x mm For use with - or - pole MCCBs U-L-MHM - Publication A-CAA-EN-P

109 Bulletin U Molded Case Circuit Breakers Approximate Dimensions A, L-Frame Dimensions are in inches (millimeters). Dimensions are not intended to be used for manufacturing purposes. R. (.). (.) Front Cover Cutout L-Frame with Earth Leakage Module Front View Side View Front Cutout View. (.). (.) C L Breaker. (.). (.). (.). (.). (.). (.) Front View -Pole. (.). (.). (.). (.). (.) Side View. (.). (.). (.). (.). (.). (.). (.). (.). (.). (.). (.). (.). (.). (.). (.). (.) -Pole. (.) -Pole. (.) -Pole. (.) -Pole. (.). (.). (.). (.). (.) -Pole. (.) -Pole. (.) -Pole. (.) -Pole. (.) Publication A-CAA-EN-P -

110 Bulletin U Molded Case Circuit Breakers Product Selection A, M-Frame UL Note: Terminal box lugs must be ordered separately. See page - CSA., No. IEC - CE KEMA CCC Breaker Frames Rated Current I n [A] Breaking Capacity ( Hz) I cu /I cs [ka] Interrupting Rating ( Hz) [ka] V V V V V V V U-MX U-MX Trip Units and Rating Plugs Rated Current I n [A] Thermal-Magnetic Adjustment Range [A] Thermal Trip I r = I n Magnetic Trip I m = x I n U-MTD-D U-MTD-D U-MTD-D U-MTD-D U-MTD-D U-MTD-D U-MTD-D U-MTD-D Rated Current I n [A] Adjustment Range [A] Thermal Trip I r =.. x I n Electronic Magnetic Trip I m = x I n A Thermal Trip I n [A] Rating Plugs Protection Type A LS Electronic Trip Unit A LSI Electronic Trip Unit A LSG Electronic Trip Unit A LSIG Electronic Trip Unit Thermal Trip I n [A] U-MTL-D U-MTH-D U-MTG-D U-MTI-D U-MRP-D U-MRP-D U-MRP-D U-MRP-D U-MRP-D Assembled Circuit Breakers, Thermal-Magnetic Trip Units Rated Current I n [A] Thermal Trip I r = I n Breaking Capacity/Interrupting Rating [ka] Breaking Capacity/Interrupting Rating [ka] V V V V U-MD-D U-MD-D U-MD-D U-MD-D U-MD-D U-MD-D U-MD-D U-MD-D U-MD-D U-MD-D U-MD-D U-MD-D U-MD-D U-MD-D U-MD-D U-MD-D Interrupting ratings shown are for V and V, respectively. The complete range of ratings can be found in the frame rating table on this page Assembled Circuit Breakers, Electronic Trip Units Rated Current I n [A] Thermal Trip I r =.. x I n Protection Type Breaking Capacity/ Interrupting Rating [ka] Breaking Capacity/ Interrupting Rating [ka] V V V V LS U-ML-D U-ML-D LSI U-MH-D U-MH-D LSG U-MG-D U-MG-D Select proper rating plug to cover thermal trip requirement. Interrupting ratings shown are for V and V, respectively. The complete range of ratings can be found in the frame rating table on this page. - Publication A-CAA-EN-P

111 Bulletin U Molded Case Circuit Breakers Product Selection/Accessories A, M-Frame Molded Case Switch UL Rated Magnetic Trip [A] Breaking Capacity ( Hz) I cu /I cs [ka] Interrupting Rating ( Hz) [ka] Current I n [A] I m = x I n V V V V V V V U-MS-D Accessories A, M-Frame Pictures shown are representative. Actual product may differ from product shown. Internal Control Modules Field Installed Description Mounting Location Diagram Auxiliary Contact (AX) Electrically indicates "ON/OFF" status of breakers () a-b OFF ON TRIP AX U-M-EA () a-b Right Side ONLY U-M-EA Alarm Contact (AL) Electrically indicates when the breaker is in the "TRIPPED" state () M (make)-b (break) AL OFF ON TRIP U-M-ER Right Side ONLY Auxiliary/Alarm Contact (AX/AL) Combination Combination of auxiliary contact and alarm contact () a-b () M (make)-b (break) AX AL OFF ON TRIP U-M- EAR Shunt Trip (SNT) Provides remote tripping of the circuit breaker Undervoltage trip not available when shunt trip is used Undervoltage Release (UVT) Automatically trips breaker when voltage falls between preset value, % Shunt trip is not available when undervoltage release is used V, //DC V AC, V DC V AC, V DC Right Side ONLY SNT S S U-M-SNJ U-M-SND U-M-SNN V, / Hz Left Side ONLY U-M-SNB V, / Hz U-M-UJ V, / Hz U-M-UD V, / Hz UVT U U U-M-UA V, / Hz Left Side Only U-M-UB Note: For Factory-Installed internal control modules, please see page - Publication A-CAA-EN-P -

112 Bulletin U Molded Case Circuit Breakers Accessories A, M-Frame Pictures shown are representative. Actual product may differ from product shown. External Accessories Description Flex-Cable Operating Mechanism Includes handle, cable, operating, and bail mechanism Pre-assembled and adjusted UL Type ////X Flange-Mount Operating Handle Non-Metallic Flex-Cable Operating Mechanism Includes handle, cable, operating, and bail mechanism Pre-assembled and adjusted UL Type /X Flange-Mount Operating Handle Stainless Steel Flex-Cable Operating Mechanism Includes handle, cable, operating, and bail mechanism Pre-assembled and adjusted Painted metal Type / Flange mount operating handle Rotary, Variable-Depth Operating Mechanism UL Type ///X, IP Rotary Handle in. (. cm) operating rod Rotary, Variable-Depth Operating Mechanism UL Type ///X, IP Rotary Handle in. (. cm) operating rod Rotary, Variable-Depth Operating Mechanism with Internal NFPA Operating Handle External UL Type ///X, IP Rotary Handle in. (. cm) operating rod Rotary, Variable-Depth Operating Mechanism with Internal NFPA Operating Handle External UL Type ///X, IP Rotary Handle in. (. cm) operating rod Copper lug, Cu wire Only () / MCM or () mm Terminal Lugs Aluminum lug, Al or Cu wire () / MCM or () mm Terminal Lugs Aluminum lug, Al or Cu wire () MCM or () mm Aluminum lug, Al or Cu wire () MCM or () mm ft (. m) Cable U-M-FCX ft (. m) Cable U-M-FCX ft (. m) Cable U-M-FCX ft (. m) Cable U-M-FCS ft (. m) Cable U-M-FCS ft (. m) Cable U-M-FCS ft (. m) Cable U-M-FMX ft (. m) Cable U-M-FMX ft (. m) Cable U-M-FMX Black Handle U-M-RVMB Red/Yellow Handle U-M-RVMR Black Handle U-M-RVMB Red/Yellow Handle U-M-RVMR Black Handle U-M-NVMB Red/Yellow Handle U-M-NVMR Black Handle U-M-NVMB Red/Yellow Handle U-M-NVMR Qty: U-M-TLC Qty: U-M-TLA Qty: U-M-TLA Qty: U-M-TLAA Copper lug, Cu wire only () / MCM or () mm Qty: U-M-TLC Phase Barriers Provides additional phase clearance when special connections that extend past the circuit breaker housing are required Qty: U-M-PB Padlock Kit Padlocking Hasp Lock-OFF only Qty: U-M-PL Replacement Mounting Hardware () M - x mm For use with - or -Pole MCCBs U-M-MHM Supplied with breaker. - Publication A-CAA-EN-P

113 Bulletin U Molded Case Circuit Breakers Approximate Dimensions A, M-Frame Dimensions are in inches (millimeters). Dimensions are not intended to be used for manufacturing purposes.. (.) Drilling Plan. (.) C L Breaker R. (.) Front View Side View R. (.). (.) C L Handle. (.). (.). (.). (.). (.). (.). (.). (.) Publication A-CAA-EN-P -

114 Bulletin U Molded Case Circuit Breakers Product Selection A, N-Frame UL Note: Terminal box lugs must be ordered separately. See page - CSA., No. IEC - CE KEMA CCC Assembled Circuit Breakers, Electronic Trip Units Rated Current Oper. I n [A] Instant. Maint. Mode.. x I n [A] Rating Plugs Rated Current I n [A] Adjustment Range I r [A] Thermal Trip I r =.. x I n Magnetic Trip I m = x I n Rated Operational Current I n [A] Protect. Type U-NRP-D U-NRP-D U-NRP-D U-NRP-E U-NRP-D U-NRP-E Breaking Capacity ( Hz) I cu /I cs [ka] Interrupting Rating ( Hz) [ka] V V V V V V V LS U-NL-E LS U-NL-E LSI U-NH-E LSII U-NJ-E LSG U-NG-E LSIG U-NI-E LSIIG U-NK-E LS U-NL-E LSI U-NH-E LSII U-NJ-E LSG U-NG-E LSIG U-NI-E Select proper rating plug to cover thermal trip equipment. Rating plug not required with IMM trip module. Magnetic trip adjustment range for MCCBs with IMM trip modules is x I n. LSIIG U-NK-E Molded Case Switch UL Rated Magnetic Trip Breaking Capacity ( Hz) I cu /I cs [ka] Interrupting Rating ( Hz) [ka] Current I n [A] x I n V V V V V V V U-NS-E - Publication A-CAA-EN-P

115 Bulletin U Molded Case Circuit Breakers Accessories A, N-Frame Pictures shown are representative. Actual product may differ from product shown. Internal Control Modules Field Installed Description Mounting Location Diagram Auxiliary Contact (AX) Electrically indicates "ON/OFF" status of breakers () a-b AX OFF ON TRIP U-N-EA Alarm Contact (AL) Electrically indicates when the breaker is in the "TRIPPED" state () a-b Right side ONLY U-N-EA () M (make)-b (break) Right side ONLY OFF ON TRIP AL U-N-ER Auxiliary/Alarm Contact (AX/AL) Combination Combination of auxiliary contact and alarm contact () a-b () M (make)-b (break) AX AL OFF ON TRIP U-N-EAR Terminal Lugs Shunt Trip (SNT) Provides remote tripping of the circuit breaker Undervoltage trip not available when shunt trip is used Undervoltage Release (UVT) Automatically trips breaker when voltage falls between preset value, % Shunt trip is not available when undervoltage release is used Terminal Lugs V, //DC V AC V AC, V DC Right side ONLY Description Pkg. Quantity Aluminum lug, Al or Cu wire () MCM or () mm Aluminum lug, Al or Cu wire () / MCM or () mm Aluminum lug, Al or Cu wire () / MCM or () mm Aluminum lug, Al or Cu wire () MCM or () mm Copper lug, Cu wire only () / MCM or () mm Copper lug, Cu wire only () / MCM or () mm Copper lug, Cu wire only () / MCM or () mm SNT Qty: Qty: Qty: Qty: Qty: Qty: Qty: S S U-N-SNJ U-N-SND U-N-SNN V, / Hz Left side ONLY U-N-SNB V, / Hz V, / Hz V, / Hz Note: For Factory-Installed internal control modules, please see page -. UVT U U U-N-UJ U-N-UD U-N-UA V, / Hz Left side ONLY U-N-UB U-N-TLA U-N-TLA U-N-TLA U-N-TLAA U-N-TLC U-N-TLC U-N-TLC Publication A-CAA-EN-P -

116 Bulletin U Molded Case Circuit Breakers Accessories/Approximate Dimensions A, N-Frame Pictures shown are representative. Actual product may differ from product shown. External Accessories Flex-Cable Operating Mechanism NEMA Type ////X Flange-Mount Handle Description ft. (. m) cable U-N-FCX ft. (. m) cable U-N-FCX ft. (. m) cable U-N-FCX Rotary, Variable-Depth Operating Mechanism Type / Rotary Handle in. (. cm) operating rod Black handle U-N-RMB Phase Barriers Provides additional phase clearance when special connections that extend past the circuit breaker housing are required Qty: U-N-PB Padlock Kit Padlocking Hasp Lock-OFF only Motor Operator Remotely opens, closes, and resets the circuit breaker V AC Qty: Qty: U-N-PL U-N-EOPD Motor Operator,..V AC Qty: U-N-EOPA Replacement Mounting Hardware () M - x mm For use with - or -pole MCCBs U-M-MHM Supplied with breaker. Approximate Dimensions Dimensions are in inches (millimeters). Dimensions are not intended to be used for manufacturing purposes. Front Cover Cutout. (.) Front View -Pole Side View R. (.) C L Breaker. (.). (.). (.). (.). (.). (.). (.). (.). (.) - Publication A-CAA-EN-P

117 Bulletin U Molded Case Circuit Breakers Product Selection A, R-Frame UL Note: Terminal box lugs must be ordered separately. See page -. CSA., No. IEC - CE KEMA CCC Assembled Circuit Breakers, Electronic Trip Units Rated Current I n [A] Adjustment Range I r [A] Select Rating Plug Select Rating Plug Select Rating Plug Select Rating Plug Select Rating Plug Select Rating Plug Protection Type Select proper rating plug to cover thermal trip equipment. Rating Plugs Rated Operational Current I n [A] Protection Type Breaking Capacity ( Hz) I cu /I cs [ka] Interrupting Rating ( Hz) [ka] V V V V V V V LS U-RL-E LSI U-RH-E LSG U-RG-E LSIG U-RI-E LS U-RL-E LSI U-RH-E LSG U-RG-E LSIG U-RI-E LS U-RL-E LSI U-RH-E LSG U-RG-E LSIG U-RI-E V LS U-RL-E LSI U-RH-E LSG U-RG-E LSIG U-RI-E LS U-RL-E LSI U-RH-E LSG U-RG-E LSIG U-RI-E LS U-RL-E LSI U-RH-E LSG U-RG-E LSIG U-RI-E A Frame A Frame A Frame Rated Operational Current I n [A] Rated Operational Current I n [A] U-RRP-E U-RRP-E U-RRP-E U-RRP-E U-RRP-E U-RRP-E U-RRP-E U-RRP-E U-RRP-E U-RRP-E U-RRP-E U-RRP-E U-RRP-E U-RRP-E U-RRP-E U-RRP-E U-RRP-E U-RRP-E Protection Type LS LSI LSG LSIG Short Time Range x I n x I n x I n x I n Short Time Delay ms ms Ground Fault Pickup A A Ground Fault Delay ms ms Protection Type Definitions L: Adjustable long delay pickup (by adjustable rating plug) S: Adjustable short delay pickup with fixed short delay time (It response) or adjustable short delat time (flat response) I: Adjustable instantaneous pickup by setting short delay time to instantaneous G: Adjustable ground fault pickup with adjustable ground fault delay (flat response) Publication A-CAA-EN-P -

118 Bulletin U Molded Case Circuit Breakers Accessories A, R-Frame Internal Control Modules Field Installed Auxiliary Contact (AX) Electrically indicates "ON/OFF" status of breakers Description () N.O-N.C. U-R-EA Auxiliary/Alarm Contact (AX/AL) Combination Combination of auxiliary contact and alarm contact () a, b () Make, Break U-R- EAR Shunt Trip (SNT) Provides remote tripping of the circuit breaker Undervoltage trip not available when shunt trip is used Undervoltage Release (UVT) Automatically trips breaker when voltage falls between preset value, % Shunt trip is not available when undervoltage release is used Note: For Factory-Installed internal control modules, please see. V DC or V AC U-R-SNN V AC U-R-SNB V AC Right hand only U-R-UVA V DC Right hand only U-R-UVZJ V DC Right hand only U-R-UVZZ V DC Right hand only U-R-UVZS V DC Right hand only U-R-UVZA V AC Right hand only U-R-UVN V DC Right hand only U-R-UVZQ V AC Right hand only U-R-UVD - Publication A-CAA-EN-P

119 Bulletin U Molded Case Circuit Breakers Accessories A, R-Frame External Accessories Description ft (. m) Cable U-R-FCX Flex-Cable Operating Mechanism Includes handle, cable, operating, and bail mechanism Pre-assembled and adjusted Non-Metallic - UL IP, Type ////X Flange Mount Operating Handle ft (. m) Cable U-R-FCX Rotary, Variable-Depth Operating Mechanism Type / Rotary Handle in. (. cm) operating rod Black Handle U-R-RMB Terminal Lugs Terminal Lugs Rear Connector A size Aluminum lug, Al or Cu wire () MCM or () mm A size Copper lug, Cu wire only () MCM or () mm A size Aluminum lug, Al or Cu wire () MCM or () mm A size copper rear connector A size copper rear connector A size copper rear connector Qty: Qty: Qty: Qty: Qty: Qty: U-R-TLA U-R-TLC U-R-TLA U-R-RCC U-R-RCC U-R-RCC Publication A-CAA-EN-P -

120 Push To Trip Bulletin U Molded Case Circuit Breakers Approximate Dimensions A, R-Frame Dimensions are in inches (millimeters). Dimensions are not intended to be used for manufacturing purposes.. (.). (.) CL Breaker. (.) Dia. ( Holes) Use,. (Mil) Dia. Bolts for Mounting Breaker Front View. (.) Side View. (.). (.). (.) CL Handle. (.). (.). (.). (.). (.). (.) R Typ.. (.). R (.). (.). (.) Front Cover Cutout C L Breaker. (.) C L Handle. (.) () (.) Front View -Pole. (.) Side View. (.). R (.) Tee Connectors May Be Rotated (.) Holes. Dia. (.). (.). (.) Approximate Weights. (.) (.). (.) U-R U-R U-R Weight lbs lbs lbs - Publication A-CAA-EN-P

121 Internal Control Modules Factory Installed For use with H-, J-, K-, L-, M-, and N-Frame Molded Case Circuit Breakers Mounting Location Left side only () Shunt Trip (SNT) or () Undervoltage Release (UVT) Bulletin U Molded Case Circuit Breakers Right side only Factory-Installed Modifications () Auxiliary contact (AX) or () Auxiliary contacts (AX) or () Alarm contact (AL) or () Alarm contact (AL) + Auxiliary contact (AX) Auxiliary and Alarm Contacts Suffix () AX - A () AX - B () AL - D () AX + () AL - F Undervoltage Release Combinations Suffix () UVT only - G () AX + () UVT - H () AX + () UVT - J () AX + () AL + () UVT - L () AL + () UVT - N Standard Voltage Suffix Codes Voltage [V] AC, / Hz J D A B Voltage [V] DC Undervoltage Release Combinations Suffix () UVT only - G () AX + () UVT - H () AX + () UVT - J () AX + () AL + () UVT - L () AL + () UVT - N Standard Voltage Suffix Codes Voltage [V] AC, / Hz J D A B Voltage [V] DC For additional voltages, consult your local Rockwell Automation sales office or Allen-Bradley distributor. Publication A-CAA-EN-P -

122 Bulletin Line IEC Contactors Product Overview Contactors Bulletin -K/-K -C/-C Q-C -D/-D -G Screw Terminals Thru-hole Threaded ( A) Spring Terminals ( A) ( A) Thru-hole Max. Current I e A A A A A Current Rating A A, A A A Features Contacts Coil Voltages Optional Overload Relays Optional Accessories Standards/ Certifications Mini-contactors Uniform panel mounting dimensions Panel mounting or mounting on mm DIN Rail AC or DC coil control Made of environmentally friendly materials power poles with internal N.O. or N.C. auxiliary contact, or power poles. Optional front-mounted - or -pole external auxiliary contact block. AC = V, /Hz DC = V Panel mounting or mounting on mm DIN Rail AC or DC coil control Reversible coil terminals (line or load side) Common accessories Made of environmentally friendly materials power poles with internal N.O. or N.C. auxiliary contact or power poles. Optional front- or sidemounted -, - or -pole external auxiliary contact block. AC = V, /Hz DC = V Panel mounting or mounting on mm DIN Rail AC or DC coil control Reversible coil terminals (line or load side) Common accessories Made of environmentally friendly materials main poles with frontmount resistor elements. Optional side-mounted -, - or -pole external auxiliary contact block. AC = V, /Hz DC = V Panel mounting only Made of environmentally friendly materials AC or DC coil control (conventional or electronic) Integrated PLC interface (electronic coil) power poles with external N.O. and N.C. side-mounted auxiliary contact. Optional sidemounted -pole external auxiliary contact blocks Conventional Coils Cat. Nos. - D D AC: V Hz, V Hz, V /Hz DC: V DC Electronic Coils Cat. Nos. - D D AC: V / Hz DC: V DC Cat. Nos. -D AC: V / Hz DC: V DC Cat. Nos. - D D AC: V / Hz DC: V DC Panel mounting AC or DC coil control Horizontal or vertical interlock Latching th pole power poles with N.O. and N.C. front-mounted auxiliary contact. Optional th pole and auxiliary contacts AC = V, /Hz DC = V Electronic or bimetallic Electronic or bimetallic Electronic Electronic Front-mount auxiliary contacts Surge suppressors Electronic timers Mechanical interlocks UL CSA IEC CE Marked CCC Front or side-mount auxiliary contacts Surge suppressors Electronic or pneumatic timers Mechanical interlocks Mechanical latches UL CSA IEC CE Marked CCC Side-mount auxiliary contacts Surge suppressors Electronic timers UL CSA IEC CE Marked Side-mount auxiliary contacts Surge suppressors IP terminal blocks Terminal shields Terminal covers Connecting components Terminal lugs Mechanical/electrical interlocks UL CSA IEC CE Marked CCC ( A - conventional coil; A - electronic coil) Auxiliary contact th pole Vertical interlock Horizontal interlock Mechanical latch UL CSA IEC CE Marked Product Selection Page - Page - Page - Page - Page - - Publication A-CAA-EN-P

123 Bulletin Line IEC Contactors Product Overview Safety Contactors Bulletin S-C/S-C S-D Screw Terminals Thru-hole Threaded ( A) Max. Current I e A A Current Rating A A Features Positively guided/mechanically linked auxiliary contacts Front-mounted auxiliary contacts: - Permanently fixed - Protective cover to prevent manual operation - Red contact housing for easy identification - Incorporates IEC -- Mechanically Linked symbol - Optional gold-plated bifurcated versions AC and DC operating coils SUVA third-party certification Mirror contact performance on auxiliary contacts, which are required in feedback circuit for modern safety applications. The N.C. auxiliary contacts will not change state when a power contact welds. SUVA third-party certification AC and DC operating coils "Mirror Contact" symbol Contacts main poles with N.C. mechanically linked feedback contacts main poles with N.C. mechanically linked feedback contacts Conventional Coils Cat. Nos. S-D D AC: V, Hz; V, Hz; V, /Hz DC: V Coil Voltages Optional Accessories Standards Compliance Certifications Product Selection Side-mount auxiliary contacts Surge suppressors Electronic timers Mechanical interlocks AC = V, /Hz DC = V EN/IEC - IEC -- Annex L Mechanically Linked Contacts IEC -- Annex H Mirror Contacts UL CSA C. No. EN culus Listed (File No. E; Guide NLDX, NLDX) SUVA Third-Party Certified CE Marked Electronic Coils Cat. Nos. S-D D AC: V, / Hz DC: V Cat. Nos. S-D AC: V / Hz DC: V Cat. Nos. S-D D AC: V, / Hz DC: V Side-mount auxiliary contacts Surge suppressors IP terminal blocks Terminal shields Terminal covers Connecting components Terminal lugs Mechanical/electrical interlocks EN/IEC - IEC --, Annex H Mirror Contacts IEC --/A: -, Annex F UL CSA C., No. culus Listed (File No. E; Guide No. NLDX, NLDX) SUVA Third-Party Certified CE Marked CCC ( A - conventional coil; A - electronic coil) Page - Page - Publication A-CAA-EN-P -

124 Bulletin -K, -K IEC Miniature Contactors Overview/Product Selection Product Selection -Pole AC- and DC-Operated Contactors Bulletin -K/-K IEC Miniature Contactors Compact size Same dimensions for AC and DC Full-voltage non-reversing and reversing contactors,, and A contactors rated at V IPX finger protection Optional integrated surge suppressor Compatible with Bulletin -K bimetallic overload relay Mirror contacts per IEC -- and mechanically linked contacts per IEC -- on main unit Your order must include: cat. no. (with coil voltage code) of the mini contactor specified and, if required, cat. no. of any accessories Allen-Bradley Bulletin -K miniature contactors are designed for commercial and light industrial applications where panel space is at a premium. These miniature devices, while mm wide, are shallower and have less panel depth requirements than standard IEC contactors. The miniature contactors have been designed with flexibility in mind. They are available with AC or DC operating coils, several contact ratings, and optional - or -pole adder decks in a variety of auxiliary contact configurations. Rated Operational Ratings for switching AC motors - AC-, AC-, AC- Auxiliary Contacts Current I e [A] -Phase kw ( Hz) Hp ( Hz) C -Phase -Phase AC- AC- V /V V V V V V V V V N.O. N.C. Screw Terminals.... / -/ -/ / -/... / -/ -/ Spring Clamp Terminals.... / / -/ -/. / May be ordered in package quantities of. Add letter M to the end of the cat. no. Example: -KZJM. The as listed is incomplete. Select a Coil Voltage Code from page - to complete the Example: V DC: -K becomes -KZJ. -Pole AC- and DC-Operated Contactors Rated Operational Current I e [A] Ratings for switching AC motors - AC-, AC- -Phase kw ( Hz) Hp ( Hz) Standards Compliance IEC/EN -,--,--,-- UL CSA.. No. NF F - Meets the material restrictions for European Directive //IEC-EU-RoHS Certifications CE Marked culus Listed (File No. E, Guide NLDX, NLDX) CCC Pkg. Qty. -K -K -K -K -K -K -KR -KR -KR -KR Contact Configuration, Main Pole C -Phase -Phase Pkg. AC- AC- V /V V V V V V V V V N.O. N.C. Qty. -K.... / -/ -/ -K -K -K / -/ -K -K -K... / -/ -/ -K -K May be ordered in package quantities of. Add letter M to the end of the cat. no. Example: -KZJM. The as listed is incomplete. Select a Coil Voltage Code from page - to complete the Example: V DC: -K becomes -KZJ. Table of Contents Product Selection... this page Accessories... - Specifications... - Approximate Dimensions Publication A-CAA-EN-P

125 Reversing AC- and DC-Operated Contactors Rated Operational Current I e [A] -Phase kw ( Hz) Ratings for switching AC motors - AC-, AC-, AC- Hp ( Hz) Bulletin -K, -K IEC Miniature Contactors Product Selection Auxiliary Contacts per Contactor C -Phase -Phase AC- AC- V /V V V V V V V V V N.O. N.C / -/ -K -K... -/ -/ -K Used for electrical interlocking The as listed is incomplete. Select a standard Coil Voltage Code from this page to complete the Example: V, / Hz: -K becomes -KKF. Bulletin -K reversing contactors are factory assembled and include contactors, mechanical interlock ( -KMCH) and wiring kit ( -KPR) for power and control circuit (electrical interlock). Wiring schematic see -KPR. Coil Voltage Code for screw type terminal versions The as listed is incomplete. Select a coil voltage code from the table below to complete the Example: V, Hz: -K becomes -KD. AC Voltages [V] Hz D Hz D B VC / Hz KJ KF KA KN DC Voltages [V] Standard ZQ ZJ ZD ZS ZA ZT with Integrated Diode DJ Coil Voltage Code for spring clamp type terminal versions The as listed is incomplete. Select a coil voltage code from the table below to complete the Example: V, Hz: -K becomes -KD. AC Voltages [V] Hz D Hz D / Hz KJ KF DC Voltages [V] Standard ZJ ZD with Integrated Diode DJ Publication A-CAA-EN-P -

126 Bulletin -K, -K IEC Miniature Contactors Assignment of Contacts Assignment of Contacts Device Combinations in Accordance with IEC - / -- Table valid for : AC / DC =.. x U s, T amb. = - C + C, normal position (horizontal rail mounting) Auxiliary Contact Blocks Circuit Diagram -KFAE -KFC -KFAE -KFB -KFC -KFAE -KFC -KFAE -KFC -KFAE -KFC -KFAZ -KFB -KFC -KFAZ -KFC -KFAE -KFC Control K -K -K -K A A Miniature Contactors -K (AC and DC Control) K -K -K -K A A Front Mounting -K -K -K K A A K -K -K -K A A R R K -K -K -K A AC/DC + = AC/DC + = + = + = AC/DC + = AC/DC + = + = + = + = AC/DC + = + = + = + = AC/DC + = AC/DC + = + = + = + = AC/DC AC/DC + = + = AC/DC + = AC/DC + = + = + = AC/DC + = AC/DC + = + = + = AC/DC + = + = + = AC/DC AC/DC + = + = AC/DC + = AC/DC + = + = + = + = A R R R R For other operating limits, please contact our technical consultant. Combination possible but not recommended, due to repeating or not consecutive sequence numbering T amb. max. + C T amb. max. + C and only allowed for coil voltage V DC or V AC - Publication A-CAA-EN-P

127 Bulletin -K, -K IEC Miniature Contactors Accessories Auxiliary Contact Blocks Description Front-Mounted Auxiliary Contacts Auxiliary contact blocks - and -pole versions Choice of contact configurations Snap on, no tools required Electronically-compatible bifurcated contacts for signals down to V/ ma Mirror Contact performance per IEC -- with DC coil contactors only Connection Diagrams Screw Type Spring Clamp Pkg. Terminals Terminals N.O. N.C. For Use With Qty. -K K -KFC -KRFC -K K -KFC -KRFC -K K -KFC -KRFC -K K -KFC -KRFC -K K -KFC -KRFC -K K -KFC -KRFC -K K -KFC -KRFC -K K -KFC -KRFC /-K, -K /-K, -K /-K, -K /-K, -K /-K, -K /-K, -K /-K, -K /-K, -K -KFAE -KRFAE -KFAE -KRFAE -KFAE -KRFAE -KFAE -KRFAE -KFAE -KRFAE -KFAZ -KRFAZ -KFAZ -KRFAZ -KFAE -KRFAE Timers Description Connection Diagrams For Use With Pkg. Qty. ~ Solid-State Timing Element V AC or DC Includes mm Hat Rail adapter On-Delay,. s On-Delay, s S O / I K N /-K, -K -KTS -KTS Publication A-CAA-EN-P -

128 Bulletin -K, -K IEC Miniature Contactors Accessories Control Modules Description Mechanical Interlock For interlocking of two adjacent contactors No added width to contactor assembly Front mount plug-in type Optional auxiliary contact blocks and suppressor modules mount onto the interlock V AC RC Suppressor Surge Suppressor Plug-in type Limits surge voltage on coil drop-off MOV Suppressor Connection Diagrams For Use With -K, -K (AC & DC Control) Pkg. Qty. -KMCH -KFSC V AC /-K, -K -KFSC V AC -KFSC V AC, V DC V AC, V DC V AC, V DC /-K, -K -KFSV -KFSV -KFSV Diode Suppressor V DC May be ordered in package quantities of. Add letter M to the end of the cat. no. Example: -KFSCM. /-K, -K -KFSD Connecting Components ECO Connecting Module A For DOL and reversing starters Eco-starters mount on single DIN Rail (M on DIN Rail) Electrical and mechanical interconnection of M MPCB and -K contactors Power Wiring Kit For Reversing and Star/Delta combinations. Star-point bridge not included. Min. interruption time ms Description Connects: M-C circuit breakers with -K contactors - (L) KM KM For Use With Pkg. Qty. M-C to -K M-C-PEK -K -KPR Feeder Terminal for Compact Bus Bars Max. current A Supply of compact bus bars -K -KWT Three-Phase Compact Bus Bars Max. current A For -K, A contactors mm spacing ( connections) For -K, A contactors mm spacing ( connections) May be ordered in package quantities of. Add letter M to the end of the cat. no. Example: M-C-PEKM. Combinations possible. Example: For contactor connections use one cat. no. -KW and one cat. no. -KW. Marking Systems Description -K -KW -K -KW Pkg. Qty. Label Sheet self-adhesive paper labels each, x mm -FMS Snap-In Marker Card -MX - Publication A-CAA-EN-P

129 Bulletin -C/-C IEC Contactors Overview/Product Selection Product Selection -Pole AC- and DC-Operated Contactors Ie [A] Bulletin -C/-C IEC Contactors Compact sizes from kw/ Hp ( A) AC and DC coil control Common accessories for all contactor sizes Front and side mounting of auxiliary contacts Electronic and pneumatic timing modules Space-saving coil-mounted control modules Reversible coil terminations (line or load side) All devices can be attached to mm DIN mounting Rail Environmentally friendly materials The Bulletin -C/-C IEC contactor family, along with a wide range of common accessories and Bulletin solid-state overload relays, provides the most compact and flexible starter component system available. Your order must include: cat. no. of the contactor specified with coil voltage code and, if required, cat. no. of any accessories and/or replacement coils. Ratings for Switching AC Motors AC-, AC-, AC- -Phase kw ( Hz) Hp ( Hz) Table of Contents Product Selection... this page Accessories... - Approximate Dimensions... - Standards Compliance EN/IEC --, -- IEC Type Coordination CSA C. No. UL Meets the material restrictions for European Directive //IEC-EU-RoHS Certifications CE Marked culus Listed (File No. E; Guide NLDX, NLDX) CCC Aux. Contacts V/ -Phase -Phase AC- AC- V V V V V V V V V V N.O. N.C. / -/ -/ -C -C... / -/ -C -C.... -C -C. -/ -C -C -C -/ -C -C -C./. -C -C -C -/ -C -C -C. -C -C -C -C -C -C -/ -C -C -C -C -C For screwless terminals, add an "R" after the letter "C" in the catalog number. Example: -C becomes -CR. Coil voltage code and terminal position see page - Publication A-CAA-EN-P -

130 Bulletin -C/-C IEC Contactors Product Selection -Pole AC- and DC-Operated Contactors Ratings for Switching AC Motors AC-, AC- I e [A] -Phase kw ( Hz) Hp ( Hz) Contact Configuration, Main Pole AC- AC- V V/ V V V -Phase -Phase V V V V V V N.O. N.C. / -/ -/... / -/ /./. -/ -C -C -C -C -C -C -C -C -C -C -C -C -C -C -C -C Three-phase ratings apply only to contactors with at least three N.O. power poles. For screwless terminals, add an "R" after the letter "C" in the catalog number. Example: -C becomes -CR. Coil voltage code and terminal position see page - - Publication A-CAA-EN-P

131 Bulletin -C/-C IEC Contactors Product Selection Reversing AC- and DC-Operated Contactors -CD -CZJ -CD I e [A] -Phase kw ( Hz) AC- AC- V V/V V V Ratings for Switching AC Motors AC-, AC-, AC- -Phase Hp ( Hz) -Phase Auxiliary Contacts Installed per Contactor V V V V V V N.O. N.C. / -/ -/ -C... / -/ -C.... -C. -/ -C -/./... -/ -C -C -C -C -C -C -C -C -C -C -C -C -C -C The N.C. auxiliary contact is supplied as part of the mechanical/electrical interlock. Coil Voltage Code and Terminal Position The as listed is incomplete. Select a coil voltage code from the table below to complete the Example: V, Hz: -C becomes -CD. [V] Hz Hz R K V W X Y KP D P S KG L F VA T N G B M C Hz Q J V X KP D KG H L A T I E N B C / Hz KJ KY KP KD KG KL KL KF KA KN KB Not available on /-C or -C contactors. DC Voltages [V] Standard ZR ZQ ZJ ZW ZY ZZ ZB ZG ZE ZD ZP ZS ZA ZF ZT -C C with Integrated Diode DJ Electronic with Integrated Diode EQ EJ EY ED EA -C C with Integrated Diode DR DQ DJ DW DY DZ DB DG DE DD DP DS DA DF DT Coil Terminal Position All contactors are delivered with the coil terminals located on the line side. For load side coil terminations, insert a U prior to the coil voltage code. Ordering example: -CUD. Publication A-CAA-EN-P -C Line Side -CU Load Side -

132 Bulletin Line IEC Contactors Assignment of Contacts Assignment of Contacts Auxiliary Contact Blocks Circuit Diagram Side Mounting -SB -SB -SB -SB -SB -SBL Control K -C_ -C_ -C_ -C_ A A K -C_ -C_ -C_ -C_ A A Contactors -C (AC and DC Control) -C_ -C_ -C_ -C_ -C_ -C_ -C_ K A A -C_ -C_ -C_ -C_ -C_ -C_ K A A -C_ -C_ -C_ -C_ K A A R R -C_ -C_ -C_ -C_ -C_ -C_ K A A R R R R AC/DC + = + = + = + = + = + = AC/DC + = + = + = + = + = + = AC/DC + = + = + = + = + = AC/DC + = + = + = + = + = + = AC/DC + = + = + = + = + = + = AC/DC + L = L + L = L + L = L + L = L + L = L + L = L Up to auxiliary contacts possible: contactor + front mounted (AC max. N.C. / DC max. N.C.), side mounted (AC max. N.O. / DC max. N.O. and max. N.C.). Early make and/or late break. Double numbering: because of double numbering only left-side mounting is recommended. - Publication A-CAA-EN-P

133 Bulletin Line IEC Contactors Assignment of Contacts Device Combinations in Accordance with IEC - / -- Auxiliary Contact Blocks Front Mounting -FA, -FAB -FA, -FAB -FB, -FBB -FC, -FCB -FA, -FAB -FBL -FA, -FAB -FB, -FBB -FC, -FCB -FA, -FAB -FA, -FAB -FAL -FA, -FAB -FA, -FAB -FB, -FBB -FB, -FBB -FC, -FCB Circuit Diagram Control K -C_ -C_ -C_ -C_ A A K -C_ -C_ -C_ -C_ A A Contactors -C (AC and DC Control) -C_ -C_ -C_ -C_ -C_ -C_ -C_ K A A -C_ -C_ -C_ -C_ -C_ -C_ K A A -C_ -C_ -C_ -C_ K A A R R -C_ -C_ -C_ -C_ -C_ -C_ K A A R R R R AC/DC + = + = + = + = + = + = AC/DC + = + = + = + = + = + = AC/DC + = + = + = + = AC/DC + = AC/DC + = + = + = + = + = + = AC/DC + L = L + L = L + L = L + L = L AC/DC + = + = + = + = + = + = AC/DC + = + = + = + = AC/DC + = AC/DC + = + = + = + = + = + = AC/DC + = + = + = + = + = + = AC/DC + L = L + L = L + L = L + L = L + L = L + L = L AC/DC + = + = + = + = + = + = AC/DC + = + = + = + = + = + = AC/DC + = + = + = + = + = + = AC/DC + = + = + = + = + = + = AC/DC + = + = + = + = + = + = Up to auxiliary contacts possible: contactor + front mounted (AC max. N.C. / DC max. N.C.), side mounted (AC max. N.O. / DC max. N.O. and max. N.C.). Early make and/or late break. Double numbering: because of double numbering only left-side mounting is recommended. Publication A-CAA-EN-P -

134 Bulletin S-C/S-C IEC Safety Contactors Overview/Product Selection Product Selection -Pole AC- and DC-Operated Contactors Bulletin S-C/S-C IEC Safety Contactors Mechanically linked N.C. auxiliary contacts Front-mounted auxiliary contacts Gold bifurcated Permanently fixed Protective cover to prevent manual operation Red contact housing foreasy identification Incorporates IEC -- Mechanically Linked symbol AC and DC operating coils SUVA Third-Party certification Bulletin S-C/S-C safety contactors provide mechanically linked positively guided contacts, required in feedback circuits of modern safety applications. The mechanically linked N.C. auxiliary contacts will not change state when a power pole welds. In addition, the gold-plated bifurcated auxiliary contacts are ideally suited for low-energy applications or feedback control circuits with multiple series-connected N.C. auxiliary contacts. Your order must include: cat. no. of the contactor specified with coil voltage code and, if required, cat. no. of any accessories and/or replacement coils. Ratings for Switching AC Motors AC-, AC-, AC- Table of Contents Product Selection... this page Accessories... - Approximate Dimensions... - Standards Compliance EN CSA C. No. UL EN/IEC - IEC -- Annex H Mirror Contacts IEC -- Annex L Mechanically Linked Contacts Meets the material restrictions for European Directive //IEC-EU-RoHS Certifications SUVA Third-Party Certified CE Marked culus Listed (File No. E; Guide NLDX, NLDX) Aux. Contacts I e [A] -Phase kw ( Hz) Hp ( Hz) V/ -Phase -Phase AC- AC- V V V V V V V V V V N.O. N.C. / -/ -/ S-C BC S-C BC... / -/ S-C BC S-C BC.... S-C BC S-C BC. -/ S-C BC S-C BC -/ S-C BC S-C BC./. S-C BC S-C BC -/ S-C BC S-C BC. S-C BC S-C BC S-C BC S-C BC -/ S-C BC S-C BC S-C BC S-C BC For other contact configurations and full product details, please contact your local Rockwell Automation sales office or Allen-Bradley distributor. If standard cross-stamped front-mount auxiliary contacts are required, remove the letter "B" before the letter "C" in the cat. no. Example: S- C BC becomes S-C C. Bifurcated front-mount auxiliary contacts on Cat. Nos. S-C C conform to mirror contact performance only. Coil voltage code and terminal position see page - S-C C Line Side S-CU C Load Side - Publication A-CAA-EN-P

135 Bulletin S-C/S-C IEC Safety Contactors Product Selection -Pole AC- and DC-Operated Contactors I e [A] AC-, AC-, AC- Ratings for Switching AC Motors Contact Configuration -Phase kw ( Hz) Hp ( Hz) Main Pole Auxillary Contacts AC- AC- V V/ V V V -Phase Coil voltage code and terminal position see page - -Phase V V V V V V N.O. N.C. N.O. N.C. / -/ -/... / -/ / S-C BC S-C BC S-C BC S-C BC S-C BC S-C BC S-C BC S-C BC For other contact configurations, please contact your local Rockwell Automation sales office or Allen-Bradley distributor. Three-phase ratings only apply to contactors with at least three N.O. power poles. If standard cross-stamped front-mount auxiliary contacts are required, remove the letter "B" before the letter "C" in the cat. no. Example: S- C BC becomes S-C C. Publication A-CAA-EN-P -

136 Bulletin S-C/S-C IEC Safety Contactors Product Selection Reversing AC- and DC-Operated Contactors Main Contacts Includes Mechanical/Electrical Interlock Includes Reversing Power Wiring I e [A] -Phase kw ( Hz) Ratings for Switching AC Motors AC-, AC-, AC- Hp ( Hz) Aux. Contacts Installed per Contactor AC- AC- V V/ V V V -Phase -Phase V V V V V V N.O. N.C. / -/ -/... / -/ / -/./. -/. -/ S-C BC S-C BC S-C BC S-C BC S-C BC S-C BC S-C BC S-C BC S-C BC S-C BC S-C BC S-C BC S-C BC S-C BC S-C BC S-C BC S-C BC S-C BC S-C BC S-C BC S-C BC S-C BC For other contact configurations, please contact your local Rockwell Automation sales office or Allen-Bradley distributor. If standard cross-stamped front-mount auxiliary contacts are required, remove the letter "B" before the letter "C" in the cat. no. Example: S- C BC becomes S-C C. One of the N.C. auxiliary contacts is supplied as part of the mechanical/electrical interlock. Bifurcated front-mount auxiliary contacts on Cat. Nos. S-C C conform to mirror contact performance only. - Publication A-CAA-EN-P

137 Bulletin S-C/S-C IEC Safety Contactors Product Selection/Assignment of Contacts Coil Voltage Code and Terminal Position The as listed is incomplete. Select a coil voltage code from the table below to complete the Example: V, Hz: S-C BC becomes S-CDBC. [V] AC, Hz R K V W X Y KP D P S KG L F AC, Hz Q J V X KP D KG H L AC, / Hz KJ KY KP KD KG KL KL Not available on S/S-C contactors [V] AC, Hz VA T N G B M C AC, Hz A T I E N B C AC, / Hz KF KA KN KB [V] Standard ZR ZQ ZJ ZW ZY ZZ ZB ZG ZE ZD ZP ZS ZA ZF ZT with Integrated Diode DJ S-C C Electronic with Integrated DC EQ EJ EY ED EA Diode S-C C with Integrated Diode DR DQ DJ DW DY DZ DB DG DE DD DP DS DA DF DT Coil Terminal Position All contactors are delivered with the coil terminals located on the line side. For load side coil terminations, insert a U prior to the coil voltage code. Example: S-CUDBC. Assignment of Contacts Safety Contactors with Main Contacts and Standard Front-Mount Auxiliary Contacts A A A K A S-C C C C K A S-C C C C K A S-C C C C K A K A K A A A A S-C C C C S-C C C C S-C C C C Publication A-CAA-EN-P -

138 K A A R R R R K A A S-C C C C S-C C C C K A A K A A S-C C C C S-C C C C Safety Contactors with Main Contacts and Standard Front-Mount Auxiliary Contacts Safety Reversing Contactors with Main Contacts and Standard Front-Mount Auxiliary Contacts Assignment of Contacts - Bulletin S-C/S-C IEC Safety Contactors S-C C C C K A A K A A K A A K A A S-C C C C S-C C C C S-C C C C K A A K A A K A A K A A S-C C C C K A A K A A S-C C C C K A A K A A Publication A-CAA-EN-P

139 Bulletin S-C/S-C IEC Safety Contactors Assignment of Contacts Safety Contactors with Main Contacts and Bifurcated Front-Mount Auxiliary Contacts K A K A K A A A A S-C BC C BC S-C BC C BC S-C BC C BC A A A K K K A A A S-C BC C BC S-C BC C BC S-C BC C BC A A A K K K A A A S-C BC C BC S-C BC C BC S-C BC C BC Safety Contactors with Main Contacts and Bifurcated Front-Mount Auxiliary Contacts A K A S-C BC C BC A R K A R S-C BC C BC A K A S-C BC C BC A K A R R S-C BC C BC Publication A-CAA-EN-P -

140 Bulletin S-C/S-C IEC Safety Contactors - Publication A-CAA-EN-P Assignment of Contacts Safety Reversing Contactors with Main Contacts and Bifurcated Front-Mount Auxiliary Contacts S-C BC C BC K A A K A A K A A K A A S-C BC C BC S-C BC C BC S-C BC C BC K A A K A A K A A K A A S-C BC C BC K A A K A A S-C BC C BC K A A K A A S-C BC C BC K A A K A A K A A S-C BC C BC K A A K A A S-C BC C BC K A A

141 Bulletin Q-C IEC Contactors Overview/Product Selection Q-CA Product Selection For Applications per IEC - (AC-b) Bulletin Q-C Capacitor-Switching Contactors Compact sizes Limits high inrush currents AC and DC coil control Reversible coil terminals Panel or mm DIN Rail mounting Environmentally friendly materials The Bulletin Q-C Capacitor-Switching contactors are designed for switching banks of capacitors. The unique design uses front-mounted resistor elements that limit the severely high inrush currents seen in these applications. This reduces stress to the contactors and the capacitors, as well as allowing a more compact and economical design without the use of air-core reactors. Your order must include: cat. no. of the contactor specified with coil voltage code and, if required, cat. no. of any accessories. Table of Contents Product Selection... this page Approximate Dimensions... - Standards Compliance IEC - CSA C. No. UL Meets the material restrictions for European Directive //IEC-EU-RoHS Certifications CE Marked culus Listed (File No. E, Guide NLDX, NLDX) Ratings for Switching Capacitor C -Phase Hz (kvar) -Phase Hz (kvar) Aux. Contacts V V V V V V V V V V V V N.O. N.C Q-C Q-C... Q-C Q-C Ratings for Switching Capacitor C -Phase Hz (kvar) -Phase Hz (kvar) Aux. Contacts V V V V V V V V V V V V N.O. N.C Q-C Q-C... Q-C Q-C For Applications per UL/CSA Ratings for Switching Capacitor Banks -Phase Hz (kvar) -Phase Hz (kvar) Aux. Contacts V V V V V V N.O. N.C Q-C Q-C... Q-C Q-C Coil Voltage Code The as listed is incomplete. Select a coil voltage code from the table below to complete the Example: V, Hz: Q-C becomes Q-CD. [V] Hz Hz R K V W X Y KP D P S KG L F VA T N G B M C Hz Q J V X KP D KG H L A T I E N B C / Hz KJ KY KP KD KG KL KL KF KA KN KB DC Voltages [V] - - Standard ZR ZQ ZJ ZW ZY ZZ ZB ZG ZE ZD ZP ZS ZA ZF ZT with Integrated Diode DJ Electronic with Integrated Diode EQ EJ ED EA Maximum Operational Rates Q-C operations/hour Q-C operations/hour Publication A-CAA-EN-P -

142 Bulletin -C/-C IEC Contactors Accessories Auxiliary Contacts (For -C C contactors) Description N.O. N.C. Connection Diagrams For Use With Standard Auxiliary Contact Bifurcated Auxiliary Contact -C all -FA -FAB C C -FB -FBB -C all -FA -FAB Auxiliary Contact Blocks for Front C C -FB -FBB Mounting - and -pole C C -FC -FCB Quick and easy mounting without -C all -FA -FAB tools C C -FB -FBB Electronic-compatible contacts down to V, ma -C all -FAL Mechanically linked performance L L C C -FBL between N.O. and N.C. poles and to the main contactor poles (except for -C all -FA -FAB L types) -C all -FA -FAB Models with equal function with several terminal numbering choices -C all -FA -FAB L = Late break N.C./early make C C -FB -FBB N.O. C C -FC -FCB Bifurcated version for switching down to V, ma also available -C all -FA -FAB C C -FC -FCB -C all -FA -FAB +L +L -C all -FAL Auxiliary Contact Blocks for Side Mounting without Sequence Terminal Designations - and -pole Two-way numbering for right or left mounting on the contactor Quick and easy mounting without tools Electronic-compatible contacts down to V, ma Mirror contact performance to the main contactor poles L = Late break N.C./early make N.O. -C all -SA -C all -SA -C all -SA -C all -SA -C all -SA L L -C all -SAL Auxiliary Contact Blocks for Side Mounting with Sequence Terminal Designations - and -pole Two-way numbering for right or left mounting on the contactor Quick and easy mounting without tools Electronic-compatible contacts down to V, ma Mirror contact performance to the main contactor poles L = Late break N.C./early make N.O. -C -SB -C -SB -C -SB -C -SB -C -SB L L -C -SBL Max. number of auxiliary contacts that may be mounted: AC and V DC electronic coil contactors max. N.O. contacts on the front of the contactor, N.O. contacts on the side, N.C. front or side, total. DC coil contactors max. N.O. contacts on the front of the contactor or max N.O. contacts on the side, N.C. front or side, total. Double numbering Left-side mounting only is recommended for -C -C due to double numbering. For screwless terminals (front mount only), insert "CR" after the "-" in the catalog number. Example: -FA becomes -CRFA. - Publication A-CAA-EN-P

143 Bulletin -C/-C IEC Contactors Accessories Control Modules (For -C C contactors) Description Pneumatic Timing Modules Pneumatic timing element contacts switch after the delay time. The contacts on the main control relay continue to operate without delay. On-Delay. s Range. s Range Off-Delay. s Range. s Range Connection Diagrams For Use With -C or -CF with AC or V DC -FPTA electronic coils -FPTA -C all, -CF all -FPTB -FPTB Electronic Timing Modules On-Delay Delay of the contactor or control relay solenoid. The contactor or control relay is energized at the end of the delay time.. s Range -ETA s Range -C or -CF -ETA s Range with V, / Hz or V DC coils -ETA. s Range -ETAZJ s Range -ETAZJ -C or -CF with V DC s Range coils -ETAZJ Electronic Timing Modules Off-Delay Delay of the contactor or control relay solenoid. After interruption of the control signal, the contactor or control relay is deenergized at the end of the delay time.. s Range -C C or -ETBKJ s Range -CF with V -ETBKJ s Range / Hz coils -ETBKJ. s Range -ETB s Range -C or -CF -ETB s Range with V / Hz coils -ETB Electronic Timing Modules Delay of the contactor solenoid. Contactor K (Y) is deenergized (off) and K (D) is energized (on) after the end of the set Y end time. (Switching delay at ms.) Continuous adjustment range High repeat accuracy Transition Time Y Contactor s Range -C with V, / Hz coils -ETY Mechanical Interlocks For interlocking of two contactors. Common interlock for all Bul. -C contactor sizes Interlocking of different sizes possible Mechanical and electrical interlocking possible in one module by means of integrated auxiliary contacts mm dovetail connector included Mechanical only, without auxiliary contacts Mechanical/ electrical interlock with N.C. auxiliary contacts -C (except -C, -C) -C (except -C, -C) -MCA -MCA Mechanical Latch Following contactor latching, the contactor coil is immediately de-energized (off) by the N.C. auxiliary contact (-). Electrical or manual release N.O. + N.C. auxiliary contacts Suitable for all Bul. -C contactor sizes, A Cannot be used with side-mounted auxiliary contacts on -CF DC relays. Maximum command duration. s -C with AC or V DC electronic coils (except - C) -FL Coil Voltage Code The cat. no. as listed is incomplete. Select a voltage suffix code from the table below to complete the cat. no. Example: V, Hz: -FL becomes -FLD. Voltage [V] Hz K Y KP D VA KA N G B Hz J D KA T N B For special voltages, consult your local Rockwell Automation sales office or Allen-Bradley distributor. Publication A-CAA-EN-P -

144 Bulletin -C/-C IEC Contactors Accessories Control Modules (For -C C contactors), Continued Description Voltage Range Connection Diagrams For Use With DC Interface (Electronic) Interface between the DC control signal (PLC) and the AC operating mechanism of the contactor. Requires no additional surge suppression on the relay coils Surge Suppressors For limitation of coil switching transients. Plug-in, coil mounted. Suitable for -C contactor sizes, A. RC, varistor, and diode versions. RC Module AC operating mechanism Varistor Module AC/DC operating mechanism Diode Module DC operating mechanism Input: V DC Output: V AC Input: V DC Output: V AC Input: V DC Output: V AC V AC, / Hz V AC, / Hz V AC, / Hz V AC/ V DC V AC/ V DC V AC/ V DC V AC V DC -C with AC coils V AC -C with AC coils -C with AC coils or -C -C with DC coils -C -C with DC coils For screwless terminals, insert "CR" after the "-" in the catalog number. Example: -FSC becomes -CRFSC. -JE -JE -JE -FSC -FSC -FSC -FSV -FSV -FSV -FSV -FSD Assembly Components (For -C C contactors) -S -SCCA -SCFA Description For Use With Pkg. Quantity Dovetail Connectors For use in contactor and starter assemblies. Single Connector mm Spacing -C -S Dovetail Connectors For use in contactor and starter assemblies. -S Dual Connector mm Spacing Protective Covers Provides protection against unintended manual operation For contactors and front-mounted auxiliary contacts, pneumatic timers, and latches -C all -SCCA -FA, -FB, -FC, -FP, -FL; -SCFA Reversing Power Wiring Kits For reversing connection with a solid-state or thermal overload relay -C C -PW -C C -PW -C -PW -PW -C C -PW DIN (#) symmetrical hat rail x. x m M-D M-F -C all -DR - Publication A-CAA-EN-P

145 Bulletin -C/-C IEC Contactors Accessories Wye-Delta/Star-Delta Starter Kits Wye-Delta power wiring kits were designed to aid in the field assembly of open-transition wye-delta starters that use Bulletin -C contactors. These kits include line, load, and start-point (shorting) connections. Assembling a wye-delta starter requires the use of the following additional components: Contactors Overload Relay -MCA Mechanical/Electrical Interlock -ETY Electronic Y-Δ Timer -S Base Coupler for M to M contactor (optional) -PW -Phase Rating kw ( Hz) Hp ( Hz) Use with - Delta Wye Pkg. V /V V V V V V V M M S Qty.. C C C -PW.. C C C -PW. C C C -PW. C C C -PW C C C -PW C C C -PW C C C -PW C C C -PW C C C -PW C C C -PW C C C -PW Package Quantity = Marking Systems (For -C C contactors) Description Pkg. Qty. Must be ordered in multiples of package quantities. Label Sheet self-adhesive paper labels each, x mm Marking Tag Sheet perforated paper labels each, x mm, to be used with a transparent cover Transparent Cover To be used with marking tag sheets Marking Tag Adapters To be used with marking tag: System V/V Marking Tag Adapters To be used with marking tag: System W -FMS -FMP -FMC -FMA -FMA Publication A-CAA-EN-P -

146 Bulletin -C/-C IEC Contactors Accessories Terminal Kits (For -C C contactors) Description Max. Current Ratings and Wire Sizes Pkg. Qty. Stab Connector Kit Dual stab (. in.) for -C coil terminals For -C C contactors Stab Connector Kit Dual stab (. in.) for -C power terminals For -C C contactors -SC -SC -Pole Terminal Lug Kit For -C C (Line side) -Pole Terminal Lug Kit For -C C (Load side) -Pole Terminal Lug Kit For -C C (Line and load side) -Pole Terminal Lug Kit For -C -Pole Terminal Lug Kit For -C C -Pole Paralleling Kit For -C C -Pole Paralleling Kit For -C C C C UL/CSA (Encl.) C C UL/CSA (Encl.) C C UL/CSA (Encl.) C C UL/CSA (Encl.) C C UL/CSA (Encl.) C C UL/CSA (Encl.) C C UL/CSA (Encl.) A ( mm, fine stranded w/ ferrule) A ( mm, coarse stranded/solid) A (# AWG, stranded/solid) A ( mm, fine stranded w/ ferrule) A ( mm, coarse stranded/solid) A (# AWG, stranded/solid) A ( mm, fine stranded w/ ferrule) A ( mm, coarse stranded/solid) A (# AWG, stranded/solid) A ( mm, fine stranded w/ ferrule) A ( mm, coarse stranded/solid) A (# AWG, stranded/solid) A ( mm, fine stranded w/ ferrule) A ( mm, coarse stranded/solid) A (# / AWG, stranded/solid) A ( mm, fine stranded w/ ferrule) A ( mm, coarse stranded/solid) A (# / AWG, stranded/solid) A ( mm, fine stranded w/ ferrule) A ( mm, coarse stranded/solid) A (# / AWG, stranded/solid) -CTN -CTL -CT -CT -CT -CP -CP Must be ordered in multiples of the package quantity. mm max. according to IEC ; actual max. mm. SEMI-F Voltage Sag Immunity Module Description Input Voltage For Use With Options SEMI-F Module Meets SEMI-F voltage sag immunity requirements Direct mounting to coil terminals of -C contactors and -CF control relays Requires DC coil contactor Optional s ON-delay timer version V AC V AC -C C -CF -C C -CF without timer with s ON-delay timer Contactor must have DC coil at the same voltage as AC input. Example: for V AC control, select -CZJ (V DC coil). -CSF -CSFA - Publication A-CAA-EN-P

147 Bulletin -D/-D IEC Contactors Product Overview Bulletin -D IEC Contactors V V V Electronic and conventional coils AC & DC Integrated PLC interface Low power pick-up & hold-in Wide voltage ranges Complete range of accessories Environmentally friendly Compact dimensions The Bulletin -D/-D contactor family, along with a wide range of common accessories and Bulletin electronic overload relays, provides the most compact and flexible starter component system available. Your order must include: cat. no. of the contactor specified with coil voltage code and, if required, cat. no. of any accessories and/or replacement coils. Table of Contents Product Selection... - Accessories... - Specifications... - Approximate Dimensions... - Standards Compliance IEC -- IEC Type Coordination CSA C. No. UL Certifications CE Marked culus Listed (File No. E, Guide NLDX, NLDX) CCC ( A - conventional coil; A - electronic coil) Publication A-CAA-EN-P -

148 Bulletin -D/-D IEC Contactors Product Selection -Pole AC-Operated Contactors Conventional and Electronic AC Coils Main Contacts Non-Reversing or Reversing -D -D... I e [A] I e [A] Switching of -phase motors AC-, AC- Auxiliary contacts C C kw ( Hz) Hp ( Hz) N.O. N.C. AC- AC- V V V V V V V V V V Non-Reversing Contactor Reversing Contactor -D -D -D -D -D -D -D -D -D -D -D -D -D -D -D -D -D -D -D -D -D -D -D -D -D -D -D Coil Voltage Codes for AC Control Conventional Coil [V] -D... -D Hz K Y D A T N B G M C Hz J X D H A T N B C -D / Hz KP KN KG KL KF KA KT Electronic Coil w/ EI. Interface [V] -D...-D / Hz EJ EY EP ED EG EA EN -D / Hz EP ED EG EA EN -D -D / Hz EP ED EG EG EA ET EN EB EM Signal voltage of the -D electronic interface: nominal U e : V DC/I e : ma Pickup voltage:.v DC...V DC Dropout Voltage:.V DC...+.V DC Not available with /-D. - Publication A-CAA-EN-P

149 Bulletin Line IEC Contactors Product Selection -Pole DC-Operated Contactors Conventional and Electronic DC Coils Main Contacts Non-Reversing or Reversing I e [A] -D Switching of -phase motors AC-, AC- -D... Auxiliary contacts C C kw ( Hz) Hp ( Hz) N.O. N.C. AC- AC- V V V V V V V V V V Non-Reversing Contactor Reversing Contactor -D -D /L -D L -D /L -D L -D -D /L -D L -D /L -D L -D -D -D L -D /L -D L -D -D -D -D -D -D -D -D -D -D -D -D -D -D -D -D -D -D Coil Voltage Codes for DC Control Conventional Coil [V] -D...-D DC ZJ ZY ZD ZS ZA Electronic Coil w/ EI Interface [V] -D...-D DC EZJ EZY EZD EZA -D DC EZD EZA -D -D DC ED EA For conventional DC coils, the pickup winding must be interconnected with the N.C. late-breaking auxiliary contact(s). Signal voltage of the -D electronic interface: nominal U e : V DC/I e : ma Pickup voltage:.v DC...V DC, Dropout Voltage:.V DC...+.V DC. Publication A-CAA-EN-P -

150 Bulletin Line IEC Contactors Product Selection Auxiliary contacts with sequence numbering. Cat. Nos. -D D Electronic and Conventional AC Coils, Electronic DC Coils Contact Configuration Left Side Mounting Auxiliary contact configurations Cat. Nos. -D D Electronic and Conventional AC Coils, Electronic DC coils Right Side Mounting N.O. N.C. Outside Inside For Use With Inside Outside -DS- -DS- -DS- -DS- -D Sequence starts with / / / / -DS- -DS- -DS- -DS- -D Sequence starts with / / / / -DS- -DS- -DS- -DS- -D Sequence starts with / / / / -DS- -DS- -DS- -DS- -D Sequence starts with / / / / -DS- -DS- -DS- -DS- -D Sequence starts with / / / / Supplied with Contactor Contact Configuration Auxiliary contact configurations Left Side Mounting Right Side Mounting N.O. N.C. Outside Inside For Use With Inside Outside -D Sequence starts with -DS- -DS- -DS- -DS- -D Sequence starts with / / / / -DS- -DS- -DS- -DS- -D Sequence starts with / / / / -DS- -DS- -DS- -DS- -D Sequence starts with / / / / -DS- -DS- -DS- -DS- -D Sequence starts with / / / / Contactor cat. nos. -D D Conventional DC coils Supplied with Contactor Supplied with Contactor Contact Configuration Auxiliary contact configurations Left Side Mounting Right Side Mounting N.O. N.C. Outside Inside For Use With Inside Outside -D L Sequence starts with -D L Sequence starts with -DS- -DS- -DS-L -DS- -D L Sequence starts with / / / / -DS- -DS- -DS-L -DS- -D L Sequence starts with / / / / -DS- -DS- -DS-L -DS- -D L Sequence starts with / / / / With conventional DC control, the pickup winding must be interconnected with the N.C. late-breaking auxiliary contacts. - Publication A-CAA-EN-P

151 Bulletin Line IEC Contactors Overview/Product Selection Bulletin S-D Safety Contactors V V V Electronic and conventional coils AC & DC Integrated PLC interface Low power pick-up & hold-in Wide voltage ranges Complete range of accessories Environmentally friendly Compact dimensions Bulletin S-D safety contactors were designed to address the needs of modern safety applications requiring feedback and monitoring of the energy isolating switchgear used in hazardous motion loads. The S-D meets these needs through its "mirror contact" design. If a power contact welds, the N.C. auxiliary contacts will not change state. This feature provides reliable indication about the open/closed status of the main power poles. In addition, the gold-plated bifurcated auxiliary contacts are ideally suited for low-energy applications or feedback control circuits with multiple series-connected N.C. auxiliary contacts. Product Selection... this page Accessories... - Approximate Dimensions... - Standards Compliance IEC -- IEC - Annex F IEC Type Coordination CSA C. No. UL Certifications CE Marked culus Listed (File No. E, Guide NLDX, NLDX) SUVA Certified CCC ( conventional coil; electronic coil) Your order must include: cat. no. of the contactor specified with coil voltage code and, if required, cat. no. of any accessories and/or replacement coils. Product Selection -Pole AC-Operated Contactors Table of Contents I e [A] Switching of -phase motors AC-, AC- Auxiliary contacts C C kw ( Hz) Hp ( Hz) N.O. N.C. AC- AC- V V V V V V V V V V / S-D BC / / / S-D BC / / S-D BC S-D BC S-D BC S-D BC S-D BC S-D BC S-D BC Preferred values according to IEC -. The N.C. contacts meet IEC - Annex F requirements for mirror contact performance. The N.C. mirror contacts are wired in series or parallel and must be used as monitoring contacts with feedback to the safety circuit. Higher kw rating only applies to contactors with electronic coil. If standard cross-stamped auxiliary contacts are required, remove the letter "B" before the letter "C" in the cat. no. Example: S-D BC becomes S-D C. Coil voltage code see page - Publication A-CAA-EN-P -

152 Bulletin S-D IEC Contactors Product Selection Coil Voltage Codes for AC Control Conventional Coil [V] S-D S-D S-D AC, Hz K Y D A T N B G M C AC, Hz J X D H A T N B C AC, / Hz Electronic Coil w/ PLC Interface [V] S-D S-D S-D S-D S-D I e [A] AC, / Hz AC, / Hz AC, / Hz KP KN KG KL KF KA KT EJ EY EP ED EG EA VN EN EP ED EG EA EN EP ED EG EG EA ET EN EB EM Signal voltage of the S-D electronic interface U e : V DC/I e : ma Pick-up voltage:.v DC.V DC Drop-out voltage: -.V DC +.V DC Not available with S-D. -Pole DC-Operated Contactors Switching of -phase motors AC-, AC- C C kw ( Hz) Hp ( Hz) N.O. AC- AC- V V V V V V V V V V Auxiliary contacts Conventional Coil Electronic Coil / S-D LC S-D BC / / /L S-D LC S-D BC / / /L S-D LC S-D BC S-D BC S-D BC S-D BC S-D BC S-D BC S-D BC Preferred values according to IEC -. The N.C. contacts meet IEC - Annex F requirements for mirror contact performance. The N.C. mirror contacts are wired in series or parallel and must be used as monitoring contacts with feedback to the safety circuit. For conventional DC coil only. The pickup winding must be interconnected with the N.C. late-breaking auxiliary contacts. Higher kw rating only applies to contactors with electronic coil. If standard cross-stamped front-mount auxiliary contacts are required, remove the letter "B" before the letter "C" in the Example: S- D BC becomes S-D C. Coil Voltage Codes for DC Control Conventional Coil [V] S-D S-D DC ZJ ZY ZD ZS ZA ZT Electronic Coil w/ EI Interface [V] S-D S-D DC EZJ EZY EZD EZA S-D DC EZD EZA S-D DC ED EA Signal voltage of the cat. no. S-S electronic interface U e : V DC/I e : ma Pick-up voltage:.v DC.V DC Drop-out voltage: -.V DC +.V DC N.C. - Publication A-CAA-EN-P

153 Bulletin -D IEC Contactors Accessories Auxiliary Contacts Description No. of N.O. Contacts No. of N.C. Contacts Connection Diagram For Use With Standard Auxiliary Contact Bifurcated -D left or right inside mounting -DS- -DS-BH Auxiliary Contacts Side-mounted Without IEC sequence terminal designations Standard contacts V/ ma Bifurcated contacts for signals down to V/ ma L -D Left or Right Inside Mounting -D left or right inside mounting -D left or right inside mounting -DS- -DS-BH -DS-L -DS- -DS-BH -D left or right outside mounting -DS- -DS-BH Auxiliary Contacts Electronic-compatible auxiliary contacts Ideal for use when switching low-power control circuits With IEC sequence terminal designations Contact ratings: AC-, V,. A AC-, DC-,...V,... ma Auxiliary Contacts Side-mounted Without IEC sequence terminal designations Standard contacts V/ ma Bifurcated contacts for signals down to V/ ma L -D left or right inside mounting -D left or right inside mounting -D left or right inside mounting -D left or right inside mounting -DS-B -DS- -DS-BH -DS- -DS-BH -DS-L Auxiliary Contacts Electronic-compatible auxiliary contacts Ideal for use when switching low-power control circuits Without IEC sequence terminal designations Contact ratings: AC-, V,. A AC-, DC-,...V,... ma Marking Systems (For -D D contactors) -D left or right inside mounting -DS-B Description Pkg. Qty. Must be ordered in multiples of package quantities. Label Sheet self-adhesive paper labels each, x mm Marking Tag Sheet perforated paper labels each, x mm, to be used with a transparent cover Transparent Cover To be used with marking tag sheets Marking Tag Adapters To be used with marking tag: System V/V Marking Tag Adapters To be used with marking tag: System W Publication A-CAA-EN-P -FMS -FMP -FMC -FMA -FMA -

154 Bulletin -D IEC Contactors Accessories Suppressor Modules Description Suppressor Module for Bul. -D Contactors For limiting surge voltage when coil circuits are interrupted Supplied as standard on all conventional DC coil contactors and all electronic coil contactors (as part of the supply module or delivered with separate suppressor module) For overvoltage category IV (IEC for -D...-EI) e.g., lightning protection requirements. For surge pulse > kv Package Quantity = Connection Diagram Suppressor Rating For Use With RC Module (AC control) for contactors with conventional coil...v, Hz;...V, Hz -DFSC...V, Hz;...V, Hz -D...-D -DFSC...V, Hz;...V, Hz -DFSC...V, Hz;...V, Hz -DFSC Varistor Module for contactors with conventional coil V AC -DFSV...V AC -D...-D -DFSV...V AC -DFSV...V AC -DFSV Varistor Module for contactors with electronic coil -D...-D -DFSV...V AC...V AC -DE... -DE -DFSV Connecting Components Description Reversing: Input Connection Wye-Delta: Main-Delta connection Reversing: Output Connection Wye-Delta: Delta-Wye connection Output For Use With Connection -D -D -D mm X Terminal Connection -D-VLTB mm X Lugs, -DL -D-VL mm X -D-VL mm X Terminal -D-VLTB mm X Blocks, -DTB -D-VLTB mm X -D-VT mm X Lugs, -DL -D-VT mm X -D-VT mm X Terminal Blocks, -DTB -D-VTTB Package Quantity = Delta-Wye connection if - D is used as a Wye contactor Wye-Delta: Neutral bridge Power Wiring Kits (for contactors using -DL lug kits) mm X Terminal Blocks, -DTB -D-VYTB X -D-VYU X -D-VYU X -D-VYU For -D D-D Reversing Two-speed, or changeover Wye-Delta/Star-Delta For -D -D Reversing Two-speed, or changeover Wye-Delta/Star-Delta For -D -D Reversing Two-speed, or changeover -DPW -D-VL -DPY -DPW -D-VL -DPY -DPW -D-VL - Publication A-CAA-EN-P

155 Bulletin -D IEC Contactors Accessories Connecting Components, Continued Description For Use With Terminal Lugs Set of two Protection class IPX per IEC and DIN Terminal Lugs (UL/CSA), Copper Frame Set of three Control Circuit Terminal x. mm -D, -D, -D, -DE DE, - EC_F, -EE_F -D...-D, -EC_G, -EFC, -EE_G -D, -D, -D, -EC_F, -EE_F -D -D, -EC_G, -EE_G -D, -D, -EC_H, -EE_H -D, -D, -EC_H, -EE_H Connects to Cat. Nos. -D...D Connects to Cat. Nos. -D...D -DTB -DTB -DL -DL -DL -DL -DAT -DAT Package Quantity = Interlocks Terminal Shields Set of two Protection class IP per IEC and DIN For direct-on-line, reversing, two-speed, and wyedelta/star-delta assemblies Terminal Covers Protection class IP per IEC and DIN For direct-on-line, reversing, two-speed, and wyedelta/star-delta assemblies Terminal Covers Line-side panel relay and reversing cover Terminal Covers Reversing starter/relay cover Terminal Covers DOL Starter/relay cover Mounting Plate Galvanized steel plate for starter combinations For direct-on-line, reversing, two-speed, wye-delta/ star-delta, and Dahlander assemblies Mounting Plate For two-speed or changeover switches Interlock Mechanical Only No additional space required -D, -D, -D, -D-E -D-E -D...-D -D -D, -EC_F, -EE_F -D...-D, -EC_G, -EE_G -D -D, -EC_H, -EE_H -D -D, -EC_H, -EE_H Direct-on-line -D...-D Reversing, two-speed or changeover Y-Δ or Dahlander Direct-on-line -D...-D Reversing, two-speed or changeover Y-Δ or Dahlander Direct-on-line -D...-D Reversing, two-speed or changeover Y-Δ or Dahlander For interlocking between -C C and -D D contactors -DTS -DTS -DTC -DTC -DTC -DTCE -DTCR -DTCS -DMS -DMU -DMY -DMS -DMU -DMY -DMS -DMU -DMY -DMU Description Circuit Diagram For Use With -D -D -DMA Interlock Dual Electrical/Mechanical No additional space required Two N.C. auxiliary contacts Interlock Mechanical Only No additional space required Interlock Mechanical Only Provides interlocking between Bul. -C and Bul. -D contactors Interlock Dual Electrical/Mechanical Provides interlocking between Bul. -C and Bul. -D contactors Two N.C. auxiliary contacts NC NC NC NC -D -D -D -D -C -C between -D - D -C -C between -D - D -DMD -DMD -DMC -DMC Package Quantity = Publication A-CAA-EN-P -

156 Bulletin -G IEC Contactors Overview/Product Selection Product Selection AC and DC Control Bulletin -G IEC Contactors... kw, V Hp, /V -Pole contactors th add-on neutral switching pole AC and DC control Horizontal and vertical interlocking Mechanical latching Meets IEC, CE, and culus Standards and Certifications Your order must include: cat. no. of the contactor selected, coil voltage code, overload relay suffix code, and, if required, cat. no. of any accessories. The Bulletin -G contactor product family provides reliable switching of motor loads up to A. A complete range of accessories including auxiliary contacts, mechanical latches, horizontal and vertical interlocks, and th add-on neutral switching poles provides maximum flexibility to meet a wide variety of application requirements. AC- Switching of -phase motors AC-, AC- Auxiliary Contacts I e [A] kw ( Hz) Hp ( Hz) Standards Compliance EN/IEC -- IEC Type Coordination CSA C. No. UL Certifications CE Marked culus Listed (File No. E, Guide NLDX, NLDX) Coil Voltage Code The as listed is incomplete. Select a coil voltage code from the table below to complete the Example: V, /Hz: -G becomes -GKD. For Use With: [V] -G...-G / Hz KD KF KN KB DC KD KF KN KB For Use With: [V] V -G...-G / Hz KD KF KA KN KB KU DC ZD ZA Consult your local Rockwell Automation sales office or Allen-Bradley distributor. Price Adder For Type Available Control Voltages No Surcharge Special control voltages -G -G -G -G kw ( Hz) C V V V V V V V V V N.O. N.C. V / Hz, V DC V / Hz, V DC > pieces -G -G -G -G -G N.O. contact used in control circuit. No UL/cUL Preferred value according to IEC -. Table of Contents Product Selection... this page Accessories... - Specifications... - Approximate Dimensions Publication A-CAA-EN-P

157 Bulletin -G IEC Contactors Accessories Control Modules -Pole Auxiliary Contact Block For mounting between T & T or between T & T Adjustable; provides normal, delayed, or overlapping contacts Max. two blocks/contactor Alternate terminal marking tags included N.O. and N.C. contacts Description For Use With Standard Terminal marking for mounting between T & T Alternate terminal marking for mounting between T & T -G -G -EF -Pole Auxiliary Contact Block For side mounting on either side of the contactor Max. four blocks/contactor Alternate terminal marking tags included N.O. and N.C. contact Fourth Add-On Neutral Switching Pole Left- or right-side mountable Note: no UL/cUL Standard terminal marking Alternate terminal markings I th AC- A I th AC- A -G -G -EB -G -NP- -G, -G -NP- -G, -G -NP- -G, -G -NP- Package Quantity = Mechanical Latch Mechanical life:. million operations Direct and Impulse Control Mechanical Interlock Horizontal Mechanical Interlock Vertical Direct and Impulse Contact control -G -FLAM Direct and Impulse Contact control -G, -G -FLAM -G to -G -MC-H -G to -G or -G -MC-H -G or -G to -G or -G -MC-H -G or -G to -G or -G -MC-H -G or -G to -G or - -MC-H G -G to -G -MC-V -G to -G or -G -MC-V -G or -G to -G or -G -MC-V -G or -G to -G or -G -MC-V -G or -G to -G or - -MC-V G Coil Voltage Codes The as listed is incomplete. Select a coil voltage code from the table below to complete the Example: - FLAM becomes -FLAMKD. For use with [V] G... -G - Hz KD KF KN KB For other voltages, consult your local Rockwell Automation sales office or Allen-Bradley distributor. Publication A-CAA-EN-P -

158 Bulletin /-K, /-C, /-D, S/S-C, S-D IEC Contactors Specifications -KR /-K /-C, S/S-C * * Coil Type : Conventional X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X Electronic EI AC- Active Power Load ( Hz); Ambient temperature C V [A] () V [A] () V [A] V [kw] I e V [kw]... V [kw].. V [kw] V [kw].. V [kw] V [kw] Ambient temperature C V [A] V [A] V [A] V [kw]... I e V [kw]... V [kw].. V [kw] V [kw].. V [kw] V [kw] Switching of -phase Motors; ( Hz) Ambient temperature C, AC-, AC- V [A] V [A] V [A]..... V [A]..... V [A]..... V [A]..... V [A] V [kw] V [kw] V [kw] V [kw]..... V [kw] V [kw] V [kw] Load Carrying Capacity per UL/CSA General Purpose Current (enclosed) [A] Rated power (enclosed) V [A] phase V [A]. V [Hp] / /..... V [Hp] /... V [A] V [A] V [A] phase V [A].... V [Hp]... V [Hp]... V [Hp].. V [Hp].. - Publication A-CAA-EN-P

159 Bulletin /-K, /-C, /-D, S/S-C, S-D IEC Contactors Specifications /-C, S/S-C /-D, S-D * * X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X AC- Active Power Load ( Hz); Ambient temperature C Ambient temperature C Switching of -phase Motors; ( Hz) Ambient temperature C, AC-, AC- () () () () () () () () () () () () () () () (). Load Carrying Capacity per UL/CSA General Purpose Current (enclosed) Rated power (enclosed) V: values in ( ) AC- and AC- lifespan - % Publication A-CAA-EN-P -

160 Bulletin /-K, /-C, /-D, S/S-C, S-D IEC Contactors Specifications /-K /-C, S/S-C Conventional X X X X X X X X X X X Coil Type : Electronic EI Switching of -phase Motors, (Hz); Ambient temperature C, AC- V [A].... V [A].... V [A]... V [A]... V [A]... V [A]... V [A] V [kw].... V [kw].... V [kw]..... V [kw].... V [kw].... V [kw]..... V [kw] AC- at approximately, operations V [A] V [A] /V [A] V [A] V [A].... V [A] V [kw] V [kw] V [kw] V [kw] V [kw] V [kw]... V [kw] Max. switching frequency Ops/h Wye-Delta ( Hz) V [Hp]. ½ ½ V [Hp]. ½ V [Hp]. V [Hp]. UL/CSA Elevator Duty V [A] V [A] V [A] V [A] V [Hp] ½ ½ V [Hp] ½ V [Hp] ½ V [Hp] ½ Star-Delta Starting ( Hz) V [A]. V [A]. V [A]... V [A]... V [A]... V [A].... V [A] V [kw].... V [kw]..... V [kw].. V [kw].. V [kw]... V [kw].... V [kw] Power ratings at Hz: Preferred values according to IEC - Approval pending on -D D. - Publication A-CAA-EN-P

161 Bulletin /-K, /-C, /-D, S/S-C, S-D IEC Contactors Specifications /-C, S/S-C /-D, S-D X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X Switching of -phase Motors, ( Hz); Ambient temperature C, AC- () () () () () () () () () () () () () () () () AC- at approximately, operations.... Wye-Delta ( Hz) UL/CSA Elevator Duty.. TBD.. TBD.. TBD.. TBD TBD TBD TBD TBD Star-Delta Starting ( Hz) () () () () () () () () () () () () V: Values in ( ) AC- and AC- lifespan -% Approval pending on -D D. Publication A-CAA-EN-P -

162 Bulletin /-K, /-C, /-D, S/S-C, S-D IEC Contactors Specifications Coil Type : /-K /-C, S/S-C Conventional X X X X X X X X X X X Electronic EI Switching of Power Transformers, AC-a ( Hz) Inrush Current Rated transformer current = n V [A] V [A] V [A] V [A] V [A] V [A]..... n = V [A] V [kva] V [kva] V [kva] V [kva] V [kva] V [kva] V [kva] n = V [A] n = V [A] Hz Peak Inrush/peak rated transformer current n = [A]..... V [kva] V [kva] V [kva] V [kva] V [kva] V [kva] Hz Peak Inrush/peak rated transformer current n = [A] V [kva] V [kva] V [kva] V [kva] V [kva] V [kva] Hz Peak Inrush/peak rated transformer current n= [A] V [kva] V [kva] V [kva] V [kva] V [kva] V [kva] Publication A-CAA-EN-P

163 Bulletin /-K, /-C, /-D, S/S-C, S-D IEC Contactors Specifications /-C, S/S-C /-D, S-D X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X Switching of Power Transformers, AC-a ( Hz) Hz Peak Inrush/peak rated transformer current Hz Peak Inrush/peak rated transformer current Hz Peak Inrush/peak rated transformer current Publication A-CAA-EN-P -

164 Bulletin /-K, /-C, /-D, S/S-C, S-D IEC Contactors Specifications Coil Type : Switching of -phase Capacitors, AC-b ( Hz) /-K /-C, S/S-C * * Conventional X X X X X X X X X X X X X Electronic EI V [kvar]. V [kvar]. V [kvar]. Single capacitor C V [kvar]. V [kvar]. V [kvar]. V [kvar] V [kvar]... V [kvar]... V [kvar].. C V [kvar]. V [kvar]. V [kvar]. V [kvar] V [kvar]. V [kvar]. V [kvar] Group capacitors C V [kvar] V [kvar] V [kvar] V [kvar] V [kvar].. V [kvar].. V [kvar] C V [kvar] V [kvar] V [kvar] V [kvar] Hz Single Capacitor C V [kvar]. V [kvar]. V [kvar] V [kvar] Hz Group Capacitors C V [kvar].. V [kvar].. V [kvar] V [kvar] Switching of Lamps Gas discharge lamps AC-a, C open [A].. enclosed [A].... Individually compensated: Max. capacitance at expected Short-circuit current of ka [μf] ka [μf] ka [μf] Filament AC-b /V [A] Switching of Low Inductive Loads in Home Appliances and Similar Applications per IEC ( Hz) V [A] AC-a V [A] V [A] Switching of Motor Load for Home Appliances ( Hz) AC-b V [A]. V [A] V [A].. Inductance of leads between capacitors in parallel: min. μh (-C C contactors: min μh) - Publication A-CAA-EN-P

165 Bulletin /-K, /-C, /-D, S/S-C, S-D IEC Contactors Specifications /-C, S/S-C /-D, S-D * * X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X Switching of -phase Capacitors, AC-b ( Hz) Hz Single Capacitor C Hz Group Capacitor C Switching of Lamps Individually compensated: Max. capacitance at expected Switching of Low Inductive Loads in Home Appliances and Similar Applications per IEC ( Hz) Switching of Motor Load for Home Appliances ( Hz) Publication A-CAA-EN-P -

166 Bulletin /-K, /-C, /-D, S/S-C, S-D IEC Contactors Specifications /-K /-C, S/S-C * * Conventional X X X X X X X X X X X X X Coil Type : Electronic EI Switching of Hermetically Sealed Cooling Compressor Motors - manual reset of overload release ( Hz) V [A] AC-a V [A] V [A] - automatic reset of overload release V [A].. AC-b V [A].. V [A].. Switching of DC Loads Non-inductive or slightly inductive loads or resistance furnaces DC-, C V [A] /V [A] / /. /. pole V [A]. V [A] V [A] V [A] /V [A] poles in series V [A] V [A]... V [A].... V [A] /V [A] poles in series V [A] V [A] V [A] Shunt-wound Motors Starting, reverse current braking, reversing, stepping DC-, C V [A] /V [A] poles in series V [A] V [A]... V [A] Series-wound Motors Starting, reverse current braking, reversing, stepping DC-, C V [A] /V [A] poles in series V [A]. V [A]... V [A] Short Time Withstand I CW, C s [A] Resistance and Power Dissipation Main current circuit resistance [mω] Power dissipation by all circuits at I e AC-/V [W] Total power dissipation At I e AC-/V AC [W] DC [W] Lifespan Mechanical AC control [Mil. operations] Mechanical DC control [Mil. operations] Electrical AC- ( V) [Mil. operations] Weight AC DC Non- Rev. Rev. Non- Rev. Rev. kg (lbs.) kg (lbs.) kg (lbs.) kg (lbs.). (.). (.). (.). (.). (.). (.). (.). (.). (.). (.). (.). (.). (.). (.). (.). (.). (.). (.). (.). (.). (.). (.). (.). (.). (.). (.). (.). (.). (.). (.). (.). (.). (.). (.). (.). (.). (.). (.). (.). (.). (.). (.) - Publication A-CAA-EN-P

167 Bulletin /-K, /-C, /-D, S/S-C, S-D IEC Contactors Specifications /-C, S/S-C /-D, S-D * * X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X Switching of Hermetically Sealed Cooling Compressor Motors - manual reset of overload release ( Hz) - automatic reset of overload release Switching of DC Loads Non-inductive or slightly inductive loads or resistance furnaces DC-, C Shunt-wound Motors Starting, reverse current braking, reversing, stepping DC-, C Series-wound Motors Starting, reverse current braking, reversing, stepping DC-, C Short Time Withstand I CW, C Resistance and Power Dissipation Total power dissipation.... (.) (.) Lifespan Weight. (.). (.). (.). (.). (.). (.). (.). (.). (.). (.). (.). (.) Values in brackets refer to electronic coil (EI) version.. (.) [. (.)]. (.). (.). (.). (.). (.). (.). (.). (.). (). (). (.) [. (.)]. (.). (.). (.). (.). (.). (.). (.). (.). (). () Publication A-CAA-EN-P -

168 Bulletin /-K, /-C, /-D, S/S-C, S-D IEC Contactors Specifications -KR /-K /-C, S/S-C Coil Type : Conventional X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X Conductor Cross Sections - Main Contacts Terminal type Electr. EI () conductor [mm] () conductors [mm] () conductor [mm] () conductors [mm] b max. [mm] c max. [mm] s max. [mm] Ø min. [mm] Recommended torque [N m] Cross section per UL/CSA [AWG] Recommended torque [lb-in]... With terminal lug kit Cross section per UL/CSA [AWG] Recommended torque [lb-in] With Frame Terminal Block top opening [mm] bottom opening [mm] top opening [mm] bott. opening [mm] b max. s top s bottom [mm] Recommended torque [N m] Cross section per UL/CSA top [AWG] bottom [AWG] Recommended torque [lb-in] Pozidriv No. / Blade No. screw Pozidriv No. / Blade No. screw Hexagonal socket screw Fine- or coarse-stranded only - Publication A-CAA-EN-P

169 Bulletin /-K, /-C, /-D, S/S-C, S-D IEC Contactors Specifications /-D, S-D X X X X X X X X X X X X. x x.. -DL -DL -DL -DL MCM (x) MCM (X) / MCM (X) / MCM -DTB -DTB / AWG AWG MCM AWG MCM AWG MCM Pozidriv No. / Blade No. screw Pozidriv No. / Blade No. screw Hexagonal socket screw Hexagonal screw Publication A-CAA-EN-P -

170 Bulletin /-K, /-C, /-D, S/S-C, S-D IEC Contactors Specifications Short-Circuit Coordination Data Coil Type : /-K /-C, S/S-C * * * * Conventional X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X Electronic El Short Circuit Coordination (Max. Fuse or Circuit Breaker Rating) Per IEC -- (contactor and fuses only) DIN Fuses - gg, gl ka Available Fault Current Type "" (V) [A] Type "" (V) [A] Type "" (V) [A] BS Fuses ka Available Fault Current Type "" (V) [A] TBD Type "" (V) [A] TBD Per UL and CSA. No. (contactor and fuses or circuit breaker only) UL Class K and RK Fuses ka Available Fault Current UL Listed Combination (V) [A] UL Class K and RK Fuses ka Available Fault Current UL Listed Combination (V) [A] UL Class L Fuses ka Available Fault Current UL Listed Combination (V) [A] UL Class L Fuses ka Available Fault Current UL Listed Combination (V) [A] UL Class L Fuses ka Available Fault Current UL Listed Combination (V) [A] UL Class CC and CSA HRCI-MISC Fuses ka Available Fault Current UL Listed Combination (V) [A] UL Class J and CSA HRCI-J Fuses ka Available Fault Current UL Listed Combination (V) [A] UL Class CC and CSA HRCI-MISC Fuses ka Available Fault Current UL verified combination to IEC -- "Type " [A] UL Class J and CSA HRCI-J Fuses ka Available Fault Current UL verified combination to IEC -- "Type " [A] TBD UL Inverse-Time Circuit Breaker ka Available Fault Current UL Listed Combination (V) [A] UL Listed Combination (V) [A] UL Inverse-Time Circuit Breaker ka Available Fault Current UL Listed Combination (V) [A] UL Inverse-Time Circuit Breaker ka Available Fault Current UL Listed Combination (V) [A] UL Inverse-Time Circuit Breaker ka Available Fault Current UL Listed Combination (V) [A] TBD UL Inverse-Time Circuit Breaker ka Available Fault Current UL Listed Combination (V) [A] UL Inverse-Time Circuit Breaker ka Available Fault Current UL Listed Combination (V) [A] UL Inverse-Time Circuit Breaker ka Available Fault Current UL Listed Combination (V) [A] TBD A max. fuse for Type coordination. See for complete short-circuit current ratings. - Publication A-CAA-EN-P

171 Bulletin /-K, /-C, /-D, S/S-C, S-D IEC Contactors Specifications /-D, S-D / X X X X X X X X X X X ka Available Fault Current ka Available Fault Current ka Available Fault Current ka Available Fault Current / ka Available Fault Current ka Available Fault Current ka Available Fault Current ka Available Fault Current ka Available Fault Current ka Available Fault Current ka Available Fault Current / ka Available Fault Current ka Available Fault Current / ka Available Fault Current ka Available Fault Current ka Available Fault Current ka Available Fault Current ka Available Fault Current To be determined. Publication A-CAA-EN-P -

172 Bulletin /-K, /-C, /-D, S/S-C, S-D IEC Contactors Specifications Coil Type - /-K Publication A-CAA-EN-P /-C, S/S-C * * * * Conventional X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X Electronic EI Operating Limits Hz, Hz, pick-up [x Us] / Hz dropout [x Us] DC (conventional) DC (electronic) pick-up [x Us] dropout [x Us] pick-up [x Us].. dropout [x Us]. Coil Consumption Hz, Hz, pick-up [VA/W] / / / / / / / / / Hz hold-in [VA/W] /. /. / / /. /. /. / DC (conventional) DC (electronic) pick-up [W] cold., warm hold-in [W] cold., warm pick-up (avg/peak) [W] / / / hold-in [W]... Operating Times closing delay [ms] AC opening delay [ms] With RC module opening delay [ms] DC closing delay [ms] (conventional) opening delay [ms] With integ. diode With external diode opening delay [ms] V V opening delay [ms] DC (electronic) closing delay [ms] opening delay [ms] Max. Ripple ± % Min. OFF time [ms] For,,, and V DC coils /-D, S-D / / Conventional X X Coil Type Electronic EI X X X X X X X X X Operating Limits Hz, Hz, pick-up [x Us] / Hz dropout [x Us] DC control pick-up [x Us] dropout [x Us] Coil Consumption Hz, Hz, pick-up [VA/W] / / / / / Hz hold-in [VA/W] / / / / DC control pick-up [W] hold-in [W] Operating Times AC closing delay [ms] opening delay [ms] With RC module opening delay [ms] DC closing delay [ms] opening delay [ms] Integrated diode opening delay [ms] External diode opening delay [ms] Electronic coil drives are designed to minimize power requirements, but this control may exhibit a higher inrush ( W, < ms) when energizing. This must be taken into account for the proper sizing of supply devices, all-or-nothing relays and cross-sections of coil supply lines. Please contact your local Rockwell Automation sales office or Allen-Bradley distributor for detailed information.

173 Bulletin /-K, /-C, /-D, S/S-C, S-D IEC Contactors Specifications Auxiliary Contacts, Auxiliary Contact Blocks, and Pneumatic Timers Switching of AC Loads Internal -K -C, S-C -D, S-D Internal Frontmounted Frontmounted Frontmounted (Bifurcated) Sidemounted Convent'l Side-mounted Bifurcated Electronically compatible at C [A]. AC- I th at C [A] at V AC- at rated voltage of V [A]. /V [A]. V [A]. V [A]... ( ma) V [A] at V [A].. V V [A]... V [A] V [A].... Switching of DC Loads DC- L/R< ms resistive loads at V DC [A] V DC [A].. V DC [A] V DC [A] V DC [A] DC- L/R< ms inductive loads with economy resistor in series at V DC [A] V DC [A]... V DC [A]... V DC [A] V DC [A] DC- switching electromagnets at V DC [A]... V DC [A]... ( ma) V DC [A] at V DC [A] V V DC [A] Fuse gg Short-circuit protection with no welding of contacts per IEC -- [A] [A] Protective Separation per IEC -, Annex N Min. switching capacity according to IEC -- V/ ma V/ ma between load and auxiliary circuit V between load and auxiliary circuit V between load and auxiliary circuit V V/ ma V/ ma V/ ma V/ ma V/ ma Failure rate V/ ma ( Mio. ops.) <- (less than failure to Mio. operations) V/ ma Load Carrying Capacity per UL/CSA Rated voltage AC [V] max. max. max. max. General Continuous rating C [A]. purpose Heavy pilot duty Switching capacity AC [A] A B A. (A ) Rated voltage DC [V] max. max. max. max. Switching capacity DC [A] Q P Q Q Standard pilot duty (P ) Standard pilot duty (Q ). Publication A-CAA-EN-P -

174 Bulletin /-K, /-C, /-D, S/S-C, S-D IEC Contactors Specifications General -K -C, S-C -D, S-D Rated Isolation Voltage U i IEC [V] UL, CSA [V] Rated Impulse Voltage Withstand U imp [kv] Rated Voltage U e AC / Hz [V],,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, DC [V],,,,,,,,,,,, Insulation Class of the Coil Class F per IEC Class insulation system per UL Class F per IEC Class B per VDE, Table Rated coil frequency AC / Hz, DC AC / Hz, DC AC Hz, / Hz, DC Ambient Temperature Storage [ C] Operation at rated voltage [ C] at C % current reduction against C values Climatic Withstand IEC -- IEC -- / - / - IEC -- Max. Altitude of Installation Site [m] NN, per IEC - NN, per IEC - NN, per IEC - Protection Class IPX IPX IP IEC / DIN Single contactor cover IP IEC / DIN Contactor with frame terminal block IP IEC / DIN Auxiliary contact IPX IP IEC / DIN Protection against Accidental Contact Finger and back-of-hand proof per VDE, part Finger and back-of-hand proof per VDE, part Resistance to Shock IEC - IEC -- IEC -- Resistance to Vibration IEC - IEC -- IEC -- Mechanically Linked Contacts IEC --, Annex L Mirror Contacts IEC - Annex F Standards Compliance Certifications -K (on main device) -K + -KF IEC/EN -/--/--; UL ; CSA.. No. CE, culus CCC - / S-C C + -FA/- FB/-FC, (except L, L), - / S-C C + -FAB/-FBB/- FCB - / S-C C + -FA/- FB/-FC, (except L, L), - / S-C C + -SA/SB, - / S-C C + -FAB/-FBB/- FCB IEC/EN -/--/--; UL ; CSA.. No. CE, culus, CCC -D + x -DS- S-D + x S-DS- IEC/EN -/--/--; UL ; CSA.. No. CE, culus, CCC - Publication A-CAA-EN-P

175 Bulletin -GD IEC Contactors Specifications Bulletin -G Specifications Electrical Data -G... -G... -G... -G -G AC-, Three-phase Switching - IEC Ambient temperature: C I e V [A] V [kw] V [kw] V [kw] V [kw] V [kw] V [kw] Ambient temperature: C V [A], V [kw] V [kw] I e V [kw] V [kw] V [kw] V [kw] Continuous Current - UL/CSA General Purpose Rating C [A] Switching of -phase Motors - IEC AC-, AC- /V [A] /V [A] V [A] V [A] V [kw] Hz/ C V [kw] V [kw] V [kw] V [kw] V [kw] AC- at operations Hz /V [A] /V [A] V [kw] V [kw] V [kw] V [kw] AC-, Squirrel-cage motors with reversing and jogging at, (,), operations /V [A] () () /V [A] () () V [kw] () () V [kw] () () V [kw] () () V [kw] () () At rated Voltage V and rated current: Life span - %. Publication A-CAA-EN-P -

176 Bulletin /-K, /-C, /-D, S/S-C, S-D IEC Contactors Specifications Electrical Data, Continued -G -G -G -G... -G... Switching of -phase Motors - UL/CSA Hz/ C V [A] V [A] V [A] V [A] V [Hp] V [Hp] V [Hp] V [Hp] Rated making capacity AC- I e V [A] V [A] V [A] Rated Breaking capacity AC- I e V [A] V [A] V [A] V [A] V [A] Star-Delta Staring Hz V [A] V [A] V [A] V [A] V [A] V [A] V [kw] V [kw] V [kw] V [kw] V [kw] V [kw] Wye-Delta Starting Hz V [Hp] V [Hp] V [Hp] Short-circuit Protection of Contactors without Overload Relay Fuse gg (am) Type V [A] () coordination (per IEC --) V [A] () Switching of Three-phase Capacitor Inductivity of dispatching between parallel switched capacitor: min. ph Single capacitors C V [kvar] V [kvar] V [kvar] V [kvar] V [kvar] V [kvar] C V [kvar] V [kvar] V [kvar] V [kvar] V [kvar] V [kvar] - Publication A-CAA-EN-P

177 Bulletin /-K, /-C, /-D, S/S-C, S-D IEC Contactors Specifications Electrical Data, Continued Capacitor Banks -G -G -G -G -G C C V [kvar] V [kvar] V [kvar] V [kvar] V [kvar] V [kvar] V [kvar] V [kvar] V [kvar] V [kvar] V [kvar] V [kvar] DC Switching Switching of non- or slightly inductive loads, resistance furnaces DC- at C Pole /V [A] Poles in series /V [A] Poles in series /V [A] V [A] V [A] Shunt-Wound Motors Starting, plugging, reversing, plugging DC- at C Poles in series /V [A] Series-Wound Motors Starting, plugging, reversing, plugging DC- at C Poles in series /V [A] Lighting Loads Elec. Discharge. Lamps - AC - a, Non-Compensated [A] Compensated [A] Incandescent Lamps - AC - b, Electrical ops [A] Switching Power Transformers AC - a Inrush = n I e [A] I e Rated transformer current [A] n = V AC [kva] V AC [kva] V AC [kva] n = [A] n = [A] Rated Short-Time Withstand ICW, C s [A] s [A] s [A] s [A] s [A] s [A] s [A] Minimum cooling time at zero current [Min.] Resistance and Energy Dissipation Main circuit resistance [mω]..... Total energy dissipation at I e AC- [W] Excess energy dissipation at I e AC- AC Control [W] DC Control [W] Publication A-CAA-EN-P -

178 Bulletin /-K, /-C, /-D, S/S-C, S-D IEC Contactors Specifications Mechanical Data -G -G -G -G -G Life Span in Millions of Operations Mechanical AC Control [Mil.] DC Control [Mil.] Shipping Weights AC Control [kg]..... [lb]..... DC Control [kg]..... [lb]..... Terminals Terminal Dimensions [mm] x x x x x Terminal screw hole size [mm] () x Ø () x Ø () x Ø () x Ø () x Ø Terminations - Power Type Hexagonal Bolt Direct Connection b max. [mm] c max. [mm] s max. [mm] x x x x x Ø min. [mm]. x x Recommended Torque [N m] [ft.-lb] Conductor/Wire Terminations Bus bar (Width) [mm] Hex screw [in] / / / / / Recommended Torque [N m] [lb in] Auxiliary Contact [mm] () x. () x. () x. () x. () x. Coils [mm] () x. () x. () x. () x. () x. Quantity indicated in ( ). Coil Data -G -G -G -G -G Operating Limits AC- Hz Pick-up [x U s ].. Drop-out [x U s ] AC- Hz Pick-up [x U s ].. Drop-out [x U s ] DC Control Pick-up [x U s ].. Drop-out [x U s ] Pickup and Holding Power AC- Hz Pick-up [VA] Hold-in [VA] AC- Hz Pick-up [VA] Hold-in [VA] DC Control Pick-up [W] Hold-in [W] Operating Times: Switching Delay AC Making delay [ms] Breaking delay [ms] / / DC Making delay [ms] Breaking delay [ms] / / Accelerates Delays - Publication A-CAA-EN-P

179 Bulletin /-K, /-C, /-D, S/S-C, S-D IEC Contactors Specifications Auxiliary Contacts AC Switching -G -G -G -G -G at C [A] AC- I th at C [A] V [A] V [A] V [A] AC- at rated voltage V [A] V [A] V [A].. V [A] V DC [A] DC Switching V DC [A] DC- control of electromagnets V DC [A] V DC [A].. Back-up Fuse Short-circuit protection without contact welding per IEC - Fuse gg [A] General Data -G -G -G -G -G Rated Isolation Voltage U i IEC, AS, BS, SEV, VDE, UL/CSA [V],V V V V Impulse Voltage U imp minute per IEC - [KV] kv, kv Rated Voltage - Main Control U e AC / Hz [V],,,,,,, V,,,,,,, V DC [V],,,, V Operating Frequency for AC Loads / Hz [Hz] /hr. for.s start time - /hr. for s start time Insulation Class of the Magnetic Coil Class B per VDE, table Rated frequency of the Coil AC / Hz, DC Ambient Temperature Storage - C + C Operation at rated current - C + C Climatic Withstand Damp alternating conditions cyclical, per DIN and, part, IEC Altitude m above sea level, per IEC - Type of Protection IP IEC /DIN Standards Compliance IEC, UL, CSA C., No. Certifications culus, CE -G is not culus certified. Publication A-CAA-EN-P -

180 Bulletin -K/-K, -C/-C, -D/-D, -G IEC Contactors Specifications Electrical Life in Utilization Category Bulletin -C/-C IEC contactors are designed for superior performance in a wide variety of applications. When selecting IEC products, the user must give consideration to the specific load, utilization category and required electrical life of the application. The life-load curves shown here are based on Rockwell Automation tests according to the requirements defined in IEC --. Since contact life in application is dependent on environmental conditions and duty cycle, actual application contact life may vary from that indicated by the curves shown here. To find the contactor s estimated electrical life, follow these guidelines:. Identify the appropriate utilization category from the table below.. Choose the graph for the utilization category selected.. Locate the intersection of the life-load curve for the appropriate contactor with the application s operational current (I e ) found on the horizontal axis.. Read the estimated contact life along the vertical axis. Contact Life for Mixed Utilization Categories AC- and AC-: In many applications, the utilization category cannot be defined as either purely AC- or AC-. In those applications, the electrical life of the contactor can be estimated from the following equation: Lmixed = Lac/[ + Pac*(Lac/Lac )], where: Lmixed = Approximate contact life in operations for a mixed AC-/AC- utilization category application Lac = Approximate contact life in operations for a pure AC- utilization category (from the AC- life-load curves) Lac = Approximate contact life in operations for a pure AC- utilization category (from the AC- life-load curves) Pac = Percentage of AC- operations AC- AC- AC- AC- AC- Test Conditions Resistance Furnaces: Non inductive or slightly inductive loads Slip-ring motors: Starting and reversing Squirrel-cage motors: Starting and stopping of running motors Squirrel-cage motors: Starting, plugging, inching Soleniods: Contactors, valves and lifting magnets I e < A I e > A I e < A I e > A Making Breaking I/I e U/U e cosφ I c /I e U r /U e cosφ I e Rated operational current I Making Current U e Rated voltage Ic Breaking Current U r Recovery voltage U Off-load voltage Plugging is understood as stopping or reversing the motor rapidly by reversing motor primary connections while the motor is running. Inching (jogging) is understood as energizing a motor once or repeatedly for short periods to obtain small movements of the driven mechanism. - Publication A-CAA-EN-P

181 Bulletin -K/-K IEC Miniature Contactors Specifications Bulletin -K/-K Life-Load Curves Electrical life; U e = V AC AC- Switching of squirrel-cage motors while starting AC- Non- or slightly inductive loads, resistance furnaces Contact Life (millions of operations). -K -K -K. Electrical life; U e = V AC AC- Stepping of squirrel-cage motors -K; -K Rated current Ie AC- [A] (Dashed curves AC- only, open) -K Contact Life (millions of operations)... Rated current Ie AC- [A] Publication A-CAA-EN-P -

182 Bulletin -C/-C IEC Contactors Specifications Life-Load Curves AC- C Non- or slightly inductive loads, resistance furnaces; U e = V E+ C C C C C C C C C C C C / C Operating cycles E+ C E+ AC- Switching of slip-ring motors; U e = V E+ C C C C C C C Rated operating current I e AC- [A] C C C C Operating cycles E+ E+ Rated operating current I e AC- [A] - Publication A-CAA-EN-P

183 Bulletin -C/-C IEC Contactors Specifications Life-Load Curves AC- Switching of squirrel-cage motors while starting; U e = V E+ C C C C C C C C C C C Operating Cycles E+ E+ Rated Operating Current I e AC- [A] Switching of squirrel-cage motors while starting; U e = V E+ C C C C C C C C C C C Operating Cycles E+ E+ Rated Operating Current I e AC- [A] Publication A-CAA-EN-P -

184 Bulletin -C/-C IEC Contactors Specifications Life-Load Curves AC- Switching of squirrel-cage motors while starting; U e = V E+ C C C C C C C C C C C Operating Cycles E+ E+ AC- Switching of squirrel-cage motors; U e = V Operating Cycles E+ E+ E+ C C C C C C C C C C Rated Operational Current I e AC- [A] C E+ Rated Operating Current I e AC- [A] - Publication A-CAA-EN-P

185 Bulletin -C/-C IEC Contactors Specifications Life-Load Curves AC- & AC- % AC- Mixed operation of squirrel-cage motors; U e = V E+ C C C C C C C C C C C Operating Cycles E+ E+ Rated Operating Current I e AC- / AC- [A] Heavy Duty Starting and Regular Short-time Operation Bulletin -C Contactors C/C/C C C/C C C/C/C C Maximum Starting Time/Loading Time [s] Starting Current/Short Time Current [A] Publication A-CAA-EN-P -

186 Bulletin -C/-C IEC Contactors Specifications Maximum Operating Rates AC- C Non- or slilghtly inductive loads, resistance furnaces; U e = V E+ Permissible switching rate [ops/hr] E+ E+ E+ E+ C/C/C/C C/C/C E+ C/C C/ C/C E+ P/Pn [%] AC- Stepping of slip-ring motors; U e = V E+ Permissible switching rate [ops/hr] E+ C/C/C C/C/C/C C/C C/C E+ P/Pn [%] - Publication A-CAA-EN-P

187 Bulletin -C/-C IEC Contactors Specifications Maximum Operating Rates AC- Switching of squirrel-cage motors while starting; U e = V Relative operating time %, Starting time t A =. s E+ Permissible switching rate [ops/hr] E+ C/C/C C/C/C/C C/C/C/C E+ AC- Inching of squirrel-cage motors; U e = V Starting time t A =. s E+ P/Pn [%] Permissible switching rate [ops/hr] E+ C C C C/C C/C/C C C/C E+ P/Pn [%] Publication A-CAA-EN-P -

188 Bulletin -D/-D IEC Contactors Specifications Bulletin -D/-D Life-Load Curves AC-, AC-. Electrical life span AC- Switching of squirrel-cage motors while starting AC- Non- or slightly inductive loads, resistance furnaces, Ue = V AC -D -D -D -D -D -D -D Contact life [Mio. of ops.].. Rated operating current I e AC- [A] (Dashed curves AC- only, open) AC- -D -D -D Electrical life span AC- Stepping of squirrel-cage motors, Ue = V AC -D -D -D -D.. Contact life [millions of ops.].. Rated operating current, I e AC- [A] - Publication A-CAA-EN-P

189 Bulletin -D/-D IEC Contactors Specifications Life-Load Curves AC- % & AC- %. Electrical life span Mixed operation of squirrel-cage motors, Ue = V AC AC- % Switching of squirrel-cage motors while starting AC- % Stepping of squirrel-cage motors -D -D -D -D -D -D -D Contact life [Mil. operations]... Rated operating current I e AC- / AC- [A] Publication A-CAA-EN-P -

190 Bulletin -G IEC Contactors Specifications Life-Load Curves -G -G AC- Switching of Running Three-phase Motors, U e = V AC AC- Non or Slightly Inductive Loads, Resistance Furnaces AC- Jogging of Squirrel-cage Motors, U e = V AC -G -G -G -G -G Contact Life (millions of operations)... Rated Operational Current Ie AC- [A] - Publication A-CAA-EN-P

191 Life-Load Curves -G -G AC- % Switching of Running Motors, U e = V AC AC- % Jogging Bulletin -G IEC Contactors Specifications -G -G -G -G -G Contact Life (millions of operations).. Rated Operational Current Ie AC-/AC- [A] Permissable Switching Rate -G -G Switching of Running Squirrel-cage Motors AC-, U e = V AC Starting Time t s =. s, Relative Running Time % Permissible Switching Rate (operations/hour) Rated Operational Current Ie [A] -G -G -G -G, -G -G (short time) Publication A-CAA-EN-P -

192 Bulletin -G IEC Contactors Specifications Permissable Switching Rate, Continued -G -G Switching of Running Squirrel-cage Motors AC-, U e = V AC Starting Time t s = s, Relative Running Time % -G -G -G -G,-G -G (short-time) Permissible Switching Rate (operations/hour) Rated Operational Current Ie [A] -G -G Switching of Starting Motors (AC-, and AC) U z = V AC Starting Time t ed = s, (<t s ) Permissible Switching Rate (operations/hour) -G -G; -G -G,-G -G -G Starting Current Is [A] - Publication A-CAA-EN-P

193 Bulletin -K/-K IEC Miniature Contactors Approximate Dimensions Dimensions are shown in millimeters (inches). Dimensions are not intended for manufacturing purposes. Bulletin -K Contactors and Accessories, Bulletin -K Overload Relays. (-/). (-/) (-/) (/) (-/). (-/) (-/). (-/). (-/) (-/) (-/). (-/). (-/) Mounting Position With Accessories * ) -Minimum distance to grounded parts or walls * ) Publication A-CAA-EN-P -

194 Bulletin -C/-C IEC Contactors Approximate Dimensions Dimensions are shown in millimeters (inches). Dimensions are not intended for manufacturing purposes. Bulletin -C Contactors and Accessories c Mounting Position c c AC contactors and DC contactors with electronic coils DC contactors AC Contactors and DC Contactors with V or V Electronic Coils a b c c c Ød d d -C -C (-/) (-/). (-/). (-/) (/) -. ( -/) (-/) (-/) -C, -C (-/) (-/). (). (-/). (/) -. ( -/) (-/) (-/) -C (-/) (-/). (-/). (-/). (/) -. ( -/) (-/) (-/) -C (-/) (-/). (-/). (-/). (/) -. ( -/) (-/) (-/) -C -C (-/) (-/) (-/). (-/). (/) -. ( - /) (-/) (-/) -C (-/) (-/) (-/). (-/). (/) -. ( - /) (-/) (-/) DC Contactors with Conventional Coils a b c c c Ød d d -CZ -CZ (-/) (-/). (-/). () (/) -. ( -/) (-/) (-/) -CZ (-/) (-/). (-/) (-/) (/) -. ( -/) (-/) (-/) -CZ -CZ (-/) (-/). (-/). (-/). (/) -. ( -/) (-/) (-/) -CZ (-/) (-/). (-/). (-/). (/) -. ( -/) (-/) (-/) -CZ (-/) (-/). (-/). (-/). (/) -. ( -/) (-/) (-/) -CD -CD (-/) (-/) (-/). (-/). (/) -. ( -/) (-/) (-/) -CD (-/) (-/) (-/). (-/). (/) -. ( - /) (-/) (-/) DC Contactors with V or V DC Electronic Coils a b c c c Ød d d -CE -CE (-/) (-/). (-/). (-/) (/) -. ( -/) (-/) (-/) -CE -CE (-/) (-/). (). (-/). (/) -. ( -/) (-/) (-/) -CEA -CED (-/) (-/). (-/). (-/). (/) -. ( -/) (-/) (-/) -CEA -CED (-/) (-/). (-/). (-/). (/) -. ( -/) (-/) (-/) Accessories Contactors with mm (inches) Auxiliary contact block for front mounting - or -pole c/c + (c/c + -/) Auxiliary contact block for side mounting - or -pole a + (a + /) Pneumatic Timing Module c/c + (c/c + -/) Electronic Timing Module on coil terminal side b + (b + /) Mechanical Interlock on side of contactor a + (a + /) Mechanical Latch c/c + (c/c + -/) Interface Module on coil terminal side b + (b + /) Surge Suppressor on coil terminal side b + (b + /) Labeling with Terminal Lug Kit Paralleling Links - label sheet + (+ ) marking tag sheet with clear cover + (+ ) marking tag adapter for System V / V +. (+ /) marking tag adapter for System Bul. W +. (+ /) -C C b + (b + -/) -C b + (b + -/) -C b + (b+ -/) -C C b + (b + -/) -C C b + (b + -/) c + / (c + /) -C C b + (b + -/) Publication A-CAA-EN-P

195 Bulletin S-C/S-C IEC Safety Contactors Approximate Dimensions Dimensions are shown in millimeters (inches). Dimensions are not intended for manufacturing purposes. Bulletin S-C/S-C Contactors and Accessories c Mounting Position AC Contactors and DC Contactors with V or V Electronic Coils AC contactors and DC contactors with electronic coils DC contactors a b c c c Ød d d S-C S-C S-C, S-C S-C S-C S-C (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) DC Contactors with Conventional Coils (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/). (-/). (-/). (-/) (-/). (-/). (-/). (-/). (-/) (/). (/). (/). (/) -. (-/) -. (-/) -. (-/) -. (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) a b c c c Ød d d S-CZ...S-CZ S-CZ S-CZ...S-CZ S-CZ S-CD...S-CD (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) c c (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) DC Contactors with V or V DC Electronic Coils. (-/). (-/). (-/). (-/) (-/). (-/) (-/). (-/) (-/). (-/) (/) (/). (/). (/). (/) -. (-/) -. ( -/) -. (-/) -. (-/) -. (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) a b c c c Ød d d S-CE S- CE (-/) (-/). (-/). (-/) (/) -. ( -/) (-/) (-/) S-CE S- CE (-/) (-/). (-/). (-/). (/) -. ( -/) (-/) (-/) S-CEA S- CED (-/) (-/). (-/). (-/). (/) -. ( -/) (-/) (-/) Accessories Contactors with mm (inches) Auxiliary contact block for side mounting - or -pole a + (a + /) Electronic Timing Module on coil terminal side b + (b + /) Mechanical Interlock on side of contactor a + (a + /) Interface Module on coil terminal side b + (b + /) Surge Suppressor on coil terminal side b + (b + /) Labeling with label sheet marking tag sheet with clear cover marking tag adapter for System V / V marking tag adapter for System Bul. W (+ ) (+ ) (+ /) (+ /) Publication A-CAA-EN-P -

196 Bulletin Q-C IEC Capacitor-Switching Contactors Approximate Dimensions Bulletin Q-C Contactors Dimensions are in millimeters (inches). Dimensions are not intended to be used for manufacturing purposes. c AC Contactors and DC Contactors with V or V Electronic Coils a b c c c Ød d d Q-C (-/) (-/). (-/). (-/) (/) -. ( -/) (-/) (-/) Q-C (-/) (-/). (-/). (-/). (/) -. ( -/) (-/) (-/) DC Contactors with Conventional Coils a b c c c Ød d d Q-CZ (-/) (-/). (-/). (-/) (/) -. ( -/) (-/) (-/) Q-CZ (-/) (-/). (-/). (-/). (/) -. ( -/) (-/) (-/) DC Contactors with V or V DC Electronic Coils a b c c c Ød d d Q-CEA, Q- CED Q-CEA, Q- CED c c (-/) (-/). (-/). (-/) (/) -. ( -/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/). (-/). (-/). (/) -. ( -/) (-/) (-/) - Publication A-CAA-EN-P

197 Bulletin -D/-D IEC Contactors Approximate Dimensions Dimensions in millimeters. Dimensions are not intended to be used for manufacturing purposes. Bulletin -D Contactors and Accessories e c øe e d b e e Mounting Position d a ød c a b c c Ød d d Øe e e e e -DE -DE, -D, -D, -D -DE -DE DE -DE. M Contactor with mm -DS a Auxiliary contact block -DS a +. each Mechanical Interlock -DM a + a Frame terminal block -DTB -DTB -DTB b + each b + each b +. each Label holder c + Conventional DC coil contactors will have an additional auxiliary contact block that will add. mm to the a dimension on the right-hand side. Applies only to conventional single frequency, conventional DC and electronic coils. Publication A-CAA-EN-P -

198 Bulletin S-D IEC Safety Contactors Approximate Dimensions Bulletin S-D Contactors and Accessories Approximate dimensions are shown in millimeters (inches) and not intended for manufacturing purposes. øe e e d b c e e Mounting Position d a ød c a b c c Ød d d Øe e e e e S-DE S-DE, S-D, S-D, S-D S-DE S-DE S-DE S-DE. M Contactor with mm -DS a Auxiliary contact block -DS a +. each Mechanical Interlock -DM a + a Frame terminal block -DTB -DTB -DTB b + each b + each b +. each Label holder c + Conventional DC coil contactors will have an additional auxiliary contact block that will add. mm to the a dimension on the right-hand side. Applies only to conventional single frequency, conventional DC and electronic coils. - Publication A-CAA-EN-P

199 Bulletin -G IEC Contactors Approximate Dimensions Bulletin -G Contactors and Accessories Dimensions are shown in millimeters (inches). Dimensions are not intended for manufacturing purposes. e e ød øe c ➊ Mounting Position e d b b e d a c a b b c c Ød d d Øe e e e -G. -G -G -G. x -G. x Auxiliary contact block Mechanical Interlock th add-on neutral switching pole Contactor with side by side stacked vertically -G/-G -G, -/-G, - -G, -/-G, - -G/-G, - -G, -/-G, - -G/-G -G, -/-G, - -G, -/-G, - -G/-G, - -G, -/-G, - -G -G, - -G, - mm a a++a a++a a++a a++a a++a b+ + b b/+ +b/ b+ +b b/++b/ b/++b/ a+ a+ a+ Mechanical latch -G -G -G b+ b+ b+ Publication A-CAA-EN-P -

200 Bulletin -C Line IEC Contactors Renewal Parts Bulletin -C Replacement Coils - AC Standard Control Voltages [V] AC Coil -C -C -C -C, L-C -C, -C -C -C C - C Hz Hz / Hz Code Q TA TC TD TE TF R TA TC TD TE TF J TA TC TD TE TF K TA TC TD TE TF KJ TA TC TD TE TF V TA TC TD TE TF W TA TC TD TE TF X TA TC TD TE TF Y TA TC TD TE TF KY TA TC TD TE TF KP TA TC TD TE TF D TA TC TD TE TF KD TA TC TD TE TF P TA TC TD TE TF S TA TC TD TE TF KG TA TC TD TE TF H TA TC TD TE TF L TA TC TD TE TF KL TA TC TD TE A TA TC TD TE TF F TA TC TD TE TF KF TA TC TD TE TF VA TA TC TD TE TF T TA TC TD TE TF KA TA TC TD TE TF I TA TC TD TE TF E TA TC TD TE TF N TA TC TD TE TF KN TA TC TD TE TF G TA TC TD TE TF B TA TC TD TE TF KB TA TC TD TE TF M TA TC TD TE TF C TA TC TD TE TF - Publication A-CAA-EN-P

201 Bulletin -C Line IEC Contactors Renewal Parts Coils, Continued DC Standard Control Voltage [V] DC Coil Code -C -C -C -C, L-C -C, -C -C -C -C -C ZR TA TC TD V Diode DR TEM TFM ZQ TA TC TD V Diode DQ TEM TFM ZJ TA TC TD Diode DJ TAM TCM TDM TEM TFM ZW TA TC TD V Diode DW TEM TFM ZY TA TC TD V Diode DY TEM TFM ZZ TA TC TD V Diode DZ TEM TFM ZB TA TC TD V Diode DB TEM TFM ZG TA TC TD V Diode DG TEM TFM ZE TA TC TD V Diode DE TEM TFM ZD TA TC TD V Diode DD TEM TFM ZP TA TC TD V Diode DP TEM TFM ZS TA TC TD V Diode DS TEM TFM ZA TA TC TD V Diode DA TEM TFM ZF TA TC TD V Diode DF TEF TFF ZT TA TC TD V Diode DT TEF TFF Voltage operating range:.. x Us. Voltage operating range:.. x Us. Publication A-CAA-EN-P -

202 Bulletin -D Line IEC Contactors Renewal Parts Description Coil Type For Use With Conventional -D -DA- -D -DA- -D -DAE- -D -DAE- Arc Chambers for Contactors For -pole -D Contactors -D -DAE- Electronic -D -DAE- -D -DAE- -D -DAE- -D -DAE- -D -DC- Conventional -D -DC- -D -DC- -D -DCE- -D -DCE- Main Contacts for Contactors -D -DCE- complete sets for -pole -D Contactors -D -DCE- Electronic -D -DCE- -D -DCE- -D -DCE- -D -DCE- -D -DCE- Conventional -D D -DHF Terminal Hardware -DE D -DHF Set of Electronic -D D -DHF -D D -DHF - Publication A-CAA-EN-P

203 Bulletin -D Line IEC Contactors Renewal Parts Bulletin -D Replacement coils Conventional AC Conventional DC AC Standard AC DC Control Voltages Coil D D D D D D DC Standard Coil D D D D D D Hz Hz / Hz Code Control Voltages Code V K TG V ZQ TG V J TG V ZJ TG V V V TG V ZW TG V V W TG V ZY TG V Y TG V ZZ TG V V X TG V ZD TG V KP TG V ZS TG V V D TG V ZF TG V KN TG V ZA TG V H TG V ZL TG V KG TG V ZT TG V KL TG V V A TG V V T TG V KT TG V KF TG V KA TG V V N TG V V B TG V G TG V M TG V V C TG Electronic AC Electronic DC AC Standard AC - - DC - - Control Voltages Coil D D -D D D DC Standard Coil D D -D D D Hz Hz / Hz Code Control Voltage Code V EJ TGE V EZJ TGE V EY TGE V EZY TGE V EP TGE THE TJE EZD TGE THE V V ED TGE THE TJE ED TJE V EG TGE THE EZA TGE THE V V EA TGE THE EA TJE V EG TJE V EA TJE V ET TJE V EN TGE THE V EN TJE V EB TJE V EM TJE Applies to -D -D contactors only. Not available with -D -D contactors. Not available on /-D. Publication A-CAA-EN-P -

204 Bulletin -G Line IEC Contactors Renewal Parts Bulletin -G Renewal Parts Description For Use With -G -AC Arcing Chamber For poles -G, -G -AC Main Contact Set Set for pole -G -CP -G -CP -G -CP -G -CP -G -CP Auxiliary Contact Block Special -pole design: N.O. delayed make, N.C. contact N.O. delayed make contact used for operation of the Feeder/Group Coil mechanism One contact block supplied standard with contactor -G, -G -EBDC Coils and Supply Modules AC Standard Control Voltages / Hz DC Standard Control Voltage Coil Code Coil Cat. No. -G -G...-G Supply Module Coil Cat. No. Supply Module V V KD TX TXS TY TYS V V KF TX TXS TY TYS V V KN TX TXS TY TYS V V KB TX TXS TY TYS Coils sold in pairs. AC Standard Control Voltages / Hz Coil Code -G...-G Coil Cat. No. Supply Module Cat. No. V KD TZ TZS V KF TZ TZS V KN TZ TZS V KB TZ TZS - Publication A-CAA-EN-P

205 Bulletin IEC Enclosed Starters Electronic Overload Relay Code Selection Bulletin E Plus electronic overload relay for -phase applications: Selectable Trip Class,,,, selectable manual/auto reset For use with: Bulletin,,,,, E,, and C C C C C C C C Full Load Current Range [A] Phase Overload Relay Code EA EB EC ED EE EE EF C C C EG Bulletin E Plus electronic overload relay for -phase applications: Trip Class only, manual reset C For use with: Bulletin,,,,, E,, and Full Load Current Range [A] -Phase Overload Relay Code.. DA.. DB C C C C.. DC. DD. DE Bulletin E Plus electronic overload relay for -phase applications: Selectable Trip Class,,, ; selectable manual/auto reset For use with: Bulletin C C C C C Full Load Current Range [A] Phase Overload Relay Code EP ER ES ET C C C C C C EU For Bulletin combination starters and Bulletin circuit breaker-type pump control panels only. Consult your local Rockwell Automation sales office or Allen-Bradley distributor for availability and dimensions. Publication A-CAA-EN-P -

206 Bulletin IEC Enclosed Starters Electronic Overload Relay Code Selection Bulletin -T Bimetallic Overload Relays: Auto/Manual Reset, Class For use with: Bulletin,,,, E,, and Starter Size Full Load Current Range [A] C C C C C C C C C C Min. Max. All sizes - No overload relay Overload Relay Code.. AA.. AA.. AA.. AA.. AA.. AA.. AB.. AB.. AB.. AB.. AB.. AB.. AB.. AB.. AB.. AB.. AC.. AC.. AC.. AC.. AC.. AC.. BC.. BC.. BC.. BC.. BC.. BC.. CC.. CC.. CC.. DC.. DC.. DC.. DC For motors with a service factor of. or greater, use the motor nameplate full load current. For motors with a service factor of., use % of the motor nameplate full load current. For Bulletin combination starters and circuit breaker-type pump control panels only; Bulletin -T bimetallic overload relays will be mounted separately. Not available for Bulletin combination starters. XXX - Publication A-CAA-EN-P

207 Bulletin, -P IEC Overload Relays & Modular Protection System Product Overview Overload Relays Type Bulletin -ED -EE -EC -EC/EC -EC -EC E Plus Electronic Overload Relay E Plus Electronic Overload Relay E Electronic Overload Relay E Plus Electronic Overload Relay Rated Current (Range). A. A. A NEMA Operating Voltage, Nominal V V IEC Operating Voltage, Nominal V /V /V Overload Type Electronic Overload Electronic Overload Microprocessor-Based E Plus Current Monitoring Relay Trip Class (Fixed) Trip Class (Adjustable),,, Ambient Temperature Compensated Reset Type Manual Only Automatic and Manual Automatic and Manual Adjustment Range : : : Phase Loss s s Adjustable Delay Ground (Earth) Fault Optional Sensitive Sensitive Sensitive Overcurrent (Jam) Detection Optional Stall Detection Underload Detection Current Imbalance PTC Thermistor Monitoring Optional Warning Settings N.C. Trip Contact N.O. Alarm Contact No. of Outputs No. of Inputs ODVA (DeviceNet) Conformance Optional Variable Frequency Drive (VFD) Compatible Product Selection Page - Page - Page - Page - Page - Page - Overload Relays & Modular Protection System Bulletin -K -T -P Type Bimetallic Overload Relay Modular Protection System Rated Current (Range).. A. A. A Operating Voltage, Nominal V V AC/DC, V DC Overload Type Bimetallic Microprocessor based Trip Class (Fixed) Ambient Temperature Compensated Reset Type Automatic and Manual Automatic and Manual Automatic and Manual Adjustment Range.:.: Phase Loss Normal Sensing Normal Sensing Adjustable delay N.C. Trip Contact N.O. Alarm Contact Variable Frequency Drive (VFD) Compatible Product Selection Page - Page - Page - Publication A-CAA-EN-P -

208 Bulletin -ED/-EE E Plus Electronic Overload Relays Product Overview E Plus Solid-State Overload Relays -ED/EE versions offer: Self-powered Phase loss protection Wide adjustment range (:) Over-molded power connections N.O. and N.C. isolated auxiliary contacts (B Rated) Low energy consumption ( mw) Ambient temperature compensation Visible trip indication -ED version offers:. A current range Fixed Trip Class Manual reset -EE version offers:. A current range Selectable Trip Class (,,, or ) Selectable manual/auto-manual reset Single- and three-phase devices Your order must include ) the of overload relay selected, and ) if required, of any accessories. Table of Contents Product Selection... - Accessories... - Specifications... - Approximate Dimensions... - Standards Compliance IEC/EN -- IEC/EN -- CSA. No. UL Certifications CE culus Listed C-Tick CCC Product Overview Accurate, Reliable Performance Current measurement-based protection While electromechanical overload relays pass motor current through heating elements to provide an indirect simulation of motor heating, the E Plus Overload Relay directly measures motor current. Current measurement-based overload protection more accurately models a motor s thermal condition. Furthermore, ambient temperature does not impact the performance of current measurement-based designs over the specified temperature operating range. Electronic design Thermal modeling is performed electronically with precision solidstate components, where at the heart of the E Plus Overload Relay is an application-specific integrated circuit (ASIC). The ASIC continually processes motor current data to accurately maintain the time-current status of the motor thermal capacity utilization value. Thermal memory A thermal memory circuit allows the E Plus Overload Relay to model the heating and cooling effects of motor on and off periods. This ensures accurate protection for both hot and cold motors. Enhanced phase loss protection A separate phase loss detection circuit incorporated into the E Plus Overload Relay allows it to respond quickly to phase loss conditions; typical reaction time is seconds. Easy to Select and Apply Straightforward installation The self-powered design means that the E Plus Overload Relay installs in the same manner as traditional overload relays. Device setup is accomplished by simply dialing the setting potentiometer to the motor FLA rating. The low energy consumption of the electronic design minimizes temperature rise issues inside control cabinets. Wide adjustment range A wide : adjustment range results in the need for half as many catalog numbers as the bimetallic alternative in order to cover the same current range. This helps to reduce inventory carrying costs and affords greater installation flexibility for dual voltage machines. Evenly spaced setting tick marks enhance the ease of installation setup. Rugged Construction Over-molded power connections The unique line-side over-molded power connections make for a sturdy two-component starter assembly that is unmatched in the industry. The pre-formed power connections allow easy starter assembly every time. Current transformers The current transformers are secured separately in the overload housing to ensure the greatest degree of resistance to shock and vibration conditions. Varnished laminations ensure consistent performance and provide additional protection against corrosion. Latching relay The robust design of the bi-polar latching relay provides reliable trip and reset performance for the most demanding of applications. The self-enclosed relay offers additional environmental protection for use in industrial applications. Application Flexibility Isolated Contacts The isolated contact configuration allows the N.C. and N.O. contacts to be applied in circuits operating at different voltage levels and without polarity restrictions. The B contact rating affords application in circuits rated to V. DIP switch settings Bul. -EE devices offer DIP switch settings to select the trip class (,, or ) and the reset mode (manual or automatic), making these devices extremely versatile. Pass-Thru Option The E Plus Pass-Thru consumes % less panel space compared to a standard E Plus mounted in a panel mount adapter. The design provides an integrated DIN Rail mount and panel mounting holes and is intended for the following aplications: DIN Rail and Panel Mount Applications, Bulletin -K mini contactor, external current transformers, and for use with non Allen-Bradley Contactors. The E Plus Pass-Thru Electronic Overload Relay provides all of the same expandable protection & communication capabilities as a standard E Plus, and eliminates the need for a separate panel mount adapter, which saves money and valuable panel space. - Publication A-CAA-EN-P

209 Bulletin -ED/-EE E Plus Electronic Overload Relays Product Overview Side-Mount Expansion Modules Through the use of optional side-mount expansion modules, functionality of the E Plus overload relays can be cost effectively expanded and machine operation and protection enhanced. Direct mounting to the left side of the -EE and -EE E Plus overload relays means that only mm is added to the overall product width. The side-mounted accessory modules electronically interface with the E Plus overload relay so that all control circuit connections are made at the E Plus overload relay terminals. E Plus DeviceNet Communication Module The Bul. -EDN DeviceNet Communication Side-Mount Module provides a cost-effective, seamless deployment of motor starters onto the Integrated Architecture as an accessory for the E Plus electronic overload relay. The DeviceNet module provides Integrated I/O ( inputs and output) providing local connection of motor starter-related I/O. The DeviceNet module offers expanded protective functions including overload warning, jam protection, and underload warning. The DeviceNet module also allows access to average motor current (percentage of FLA setting), percentage of thermal capacity usage, device status, trip & warning identification, and trip history which allows continual monitoring of motor performance. E Plus Remote Reset Module The Bul. -ERR Remote Reset Module is available for applications that require remote reset of the E Plus overload relays after a trip occurs. E Plus Jam Protection Module with Remote Reset The Bul. -EJM Jam Protection Module provides front-accessible DIP switches which offers flexibility to provide jam protection to match application requirements. Selections are available for enabling or disabling the jam protection function and remote reset operation. Jam trip level settings are available at %, %, %, and % of full load current setting. Trip delay settings of /,,, and seconds are available to minimize nuisance tripping in applications where intermittent short-duration overloading is permissible. E Plus Ground Fault Module with Remote Reset The Bul. -EGF Ground Fault Protection Module offers frontaccessible DIP switches providing flexibility to configure ground fault protection to match application requirements. Selections are available for enabling or disabling the ground fault protection function and remote reset operation. Ground fault trip level settings are available in four ranges: ma (resistive loads only, for motor loads consult your local Rockwell Automation sales office or Allen-Bradley distributor), ma,. A, and A. Within each range, the specific ground fault trip level can be set (%, %, %, %, %, %, or % of the maximum ground fault setting). Trip delay is fixed at ms ± ms. E Plus Ground Fault/Jam Module with Remote Reset The Bul. -EGJ Ground Fault/Jam Protection Module offers frontaccessible DIP switches to provide flexibility to configure ground fault and jam protection to match application requirements. The ground fault selections are the same as the Bul. -EGF Ground Fault Protection Module. In addition to ground fault, this module offers selectable fixed jam protection. The user can enable or disable jam protection from the DIP switches. The jam protection is fixed at % of the full load current setting with a. second trip delay. E Plus PTC Module with Remote Reset The Bul. -EPT PTC Side-Mount Module provides two terminals for the connection of positive temperature coefficient (PTC) thermistor sensors. PTC sensors are commonly embedded in the motor stator windings to monitor winding temperature. PTC sensors react to actual temperature, so enhanced motor protection can be provided to address conditions like obstructed cooling and high ambient temperature. E Plus EtherNet/IP Module The Bul. -ETN EtherNet/IP network communication module delivers seamless control and direct access to motor performance and diagnostic data on an Ethernet-based network. It supports I/O and explicit messaging for data access by a programmable automation controller, and contains predefined ControlLogix style tags for direct software access. The integrated web and server contains a web server to allow users to read information and configure parameters via a web browser. The device also uses a simple mail transfer protocol (SMTP) server to send or text messages in the event of a warning or trip condition. E Plus Profibus Module The Bul. -EPRB PROFIBUS network communication module delivers direct access to motor performance and diagnostic data on a field bus based network in addition to seamless control. The PROFIBUS communication module supports both PROFIBUS DP- V and DP-V. Protective functions include overload warning, jam protection, and underload warning. The PROFIBUS network communication module monitors the motor current by electronically interfacing to the E Plus overload relay s current-sensing circuit. As a result, the side-mount module is able to identify the cause of the trip and provides warnings for overload, underload, phase loss, and jam. The module continuously monitors the motor s performance for average motor current, thermal capacity usage, and device status, and also provides a trip history for the five previous trips. Integrated I/O provides convenient local termination of motor-related inputs and outputs, simplifying the control architecture. Publication A-CAA-EN-P -

210 Bulletin -ED/-EE E Plus Electronic Overload Relays Catalog Number Explanation/Product Selection Code a Bulletin Number Description IEC Three-Phase S IEC Single-Phase NEMA Three-Phase S Code NEMA Single-Phase b Type Description ED Fixed Trip Class EE Bulletin overload relays only Selectable Trip Class Product Selection Bulletin -ED Three-Phase Devices Fixed Trip Class Manual reset Screw-type control terminals EE C B a b c d Three-Phase Mounts to Contactor Adjustment Range [A].. -EDAB.. -EDBB -C -C.. -EDCB. -EDDB. -EDEB -C -C. -EDED -EDFD Integrated panel/din.. -EDCP Rail mount and passthru. -EDDP wiring. -EDEP c Adjustment Range [A] Single-Phase Code Description Code Description A.. P.. B.. R. C.. S. D. T E. U F V G H J K L M N Code B D E F G H Code d Bulletin Contactor Size Description C C C C C C, C C D D, D D D D D D Bulletin NEMA Contactor Size Description T Size C Size D Size Code Bulletin -EE Three-Phase Devices Selectable Trip Class (,,, ) Selectable manual/auto-manual reset Screw-type control terminals P Z Panel/DIN Rail Mount Description Integrated panel mount and pass-through wiring Panel mount with external current transformers Mounts to Contactor Adjustment Range [A].. -EEAB.. -EEBB -C -C.. -EECB. -EEDB. -EEEB -C -C. -EEED -EEFD -C -C -EEGE -EEVE -EEGF -D -D -EEHF -EEJF -EEVF -EEJG -D -D -EEKG -EELG -D -D -EEMH -EENH Integrated panel/din.. -EECP Rail mount and passthru. -EEDP wiring. -EEEP Package Quantity = Does not include terminal lugs. See page -. - Publication A-CAA-EN-P

211 Bulletin S-EE Single-Phase Devices Selectable Trip Class (,,, ) Selectable manual/auto-manual reset Screw-type control terminals Bulletin -ED/-EE E Plus Electronic Overload Relays Product Selection/Accessories Bulletin Panel Mount Devices for use with External Current Transformers Selectable Trip Class (,,, ) Selectable manual/auto-manual reset Mounts to Contactor Adjustment Range [A] -C -C.... S-EEPB S-EERB S-EESB -C -C S-EETD -C -C S-EEUE Integrated panel/din Rail mount and passthru wiring.... Side-Mount Expansion Modules S-EEPP S-EERP S-EESP CT Ratio Adjustment Range [A] : -EEHZ : -EEJZ : -EEKZ : -EEWZ : -EELZ : -EEMZ : -EENZ Current Transformers supplied by customer, refer to page - for proper current transformer selection. Order panel adapter, -EPB, separately. Function E Plus ( /- EE_) E Plus w/ Jam Module ( -EJM) E Plus w/ Ground Fault Module ( -EGF) E Plus w/ Ground Fault/Jam Module ( -EGJ) E Plus w/ PTC Module ( -EPT) E Plus w/ Remote Reset Module ( -ERR) E Plus w/ DeviceNet Module ( -EDN) E Plus w/ EtherNet/IP Module ( -ETN) E Plus w/ Profibus Module ( -EPRB) Manual/Automatic Reset X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X Selectable Trip Class X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X On or Off X X X X X Jam Protection Ground Fault Protection PTC Protection Trip Level Trip Delay Inhibit Adjustable /// % Adjustable./././. s Dynamic Inhibit Type % s Core- Balanced Ground Fault Protection Dynamic Inhibit Core- Balanced Ground Fault Protection Adjustable % FLA Adjustable. s Dynamic Inhibit Adjustable % FLA Adjustable. s Dynamic Inhibit Adjustable % FLA Adjustable. s Dynamic Inhibit On or Off X X Trip Level Trip Delay Inhibit PTC Overtempera ture Trip PTC Open Circuit PTC Short Circuit Adjustable ma A ms ± ms Dynamic Inhibit Adjustable ma A ms ± ms Dynamic Inhibit X X X Remote Reset Capability X X X X X X X X Fault Indication X X X X X X Dynamic Inhibit: Protective function is enabled after the motor current goes above % and then falls to below %. Requires use of an external ground fault sensor, -CBCT_. From ma for resistive loads only. Publication A-CAA-EN-P -

212 Bulletin -ED/-EE E Plus Electronic Overload Relays Accessories Description For Use With Pkg. Quantity -ED_B, -EE_B, S-EE_B, -EE_Z, -EE_T -EPB DIN Rail/Panel Adapter -ED_D, -EE_D, S-EE_D -EPD For separate mounting can be mounted to top-hat rail EN - -EE_E, S-EE_E -EPE Current Adjustment Shield Prevents inadvertent adjustment of the current setting. Must be ordered in multiples of package quantities. -ED (all) -EE (all) -EE (all) -BC External Reset Adapter For enclosed, through-the-door reset applications. Use with external reset button. -ED (all) -EE_B, -EE_D, -EE_E -EE_Z -ERA FM-R (Button) External Reset Button for Enclosed Devices -E all F-ATR (Rod) Terminal Lugs Set of two Protection class IPX per IEC and DIN Terminal Lugs, Copper Frame Set of three Terminal Covers Protection class IP per IEC and DIN For direct-on-line, reversing, twospeed, and wye-delta/star-delta assemblies DeviceNet Configuration Terminal Used to interface with objects on a DeviceNet network. Includes m communications cable (-CB). meter communication cable, color-coded bare leads meter communication cable, microconnector (male) Panel Mount Adapter/Door Mount Bezel Kit -D, -D, -D, - DE DE, -EC_F, -EE_F -D...-D, -EC_G, -EFC, -EE_G -DE, -EC_F, -EE_F -D -D, -EC_G, -EE_G -D, -D, -EC_H, -EE_H -D -D, -EC_F, -EE_F -D...-D, -EC_G, -EE_G -D -D, -EC_H, -EE_H -EDN, -EC (all), -EC (all); /// ArmorStart, -P -DTB -DTB -DLE -DL -DL -DL -DL -DTC -DTC -DTC -DNCT -DNCT -CB -DNCT -CM -DNCT -DNCT-BZ - Publication A-CAA-EN-P

213 Bulletin -ED/-EE E Plus Electronic Overload Relays Accessories Description For Use With Pkg. Quantity E Plus DeviceNet and Protection Module Communicates motor diagnostic data via DeviceNet, includes additional I/O, and provides enhanced motor protection options. E Plus EtherNet/IP and Protection Module Communicates motor diagnostic data via EtherNet/IP, includes additional I/O, and provides enhanced motor protection options. -EE (all), -EE (all), S-EE (all), S-EE (all) -EE (all), -EE (all), S-EE (all), S-EE (all) -EDN -ETN E Plus PROFIBUS & Protection Module Communicates motor diagnostic data via PROFIBUS, includes additional I/O, and provides enhanced motor protection options. E Plus Jam Protection Module Provides Jam protection with adjustable trip level and trip delay setting. The module also provides an input to allow remote reset of a trip. -EE (all), -EE (all), S-EE (all), S-EE (all) -EE (all), -EE (all), S-EE (all), S-EE (all) -EPRB -EJM E Plus Ground Fault Module Provides adjustable ma A ground fault protection. The module also provides an input to allow remote reset of a trip. -EE (all), -EE (all), S-EE (all), S-EE (all) -EGF E Plus Ground Fault/Jam Module Provides adjustable ma A ground fault and fixed jam protection. The module also provides an input to allow remote reset of a trip. E Plus PTC Module Provides terminals for connection up to six PTC thermistor sensors. Sensors react to actual temperature and therefore provide enhanced motor protection. Module also provides an input to allow remote reset of a trip. -EE (all), -EE (all), S-EE (all), S-EE (all) -EE (all), -EE (all), S-EE (all), S-EE (all) -EGJ -EPT E Plus Remote Reset Module Provides an input to allow remote reset of a trip. -EE (all), -EE (all), S-EE (all), S-EE (all) -ERR E Plus Remote Indicator Display Displays the status of an E Plus from the front of a panel and features a reset button. Mounts in a standard mm push button cutout. Module Adjustment Cover Prevents inadvertent adjustment of setting. Must be ordered in multiples of package quantity. -EGF, -EJM, -EGJ, -PTC, -ERR (Ser. B or later) -ERID -EJM -EMC Only one module may be added. Requires use of an external ground fault sensor ( -CBCT_). Publication A-CAA-EN-P -

214 Bulletin -ED/-EE E Plus Electronic Overload Relays Accessories Description Size For Use With Pkg. Quantity mm (. in.) -C -C NEMA size -CBCT Core Balanced Ground Fault Sensor Required when using either an E Plus Ground Fault Protection or Ground Fault/Jam Module Required for ground fault protection with the Cat. No. -EC overload relay mm (. in.) mm (. in.) -C -C NEMA size -C -C, - D -D NEMA size -CBCT -CBCT mm (. in.) -C -C, - D -D NEMA size -CBCT Description For Use With V AC, / Hz -EMRJ /V AC, / Hz -EMRD Remote Reset Solenoid /V AC, / Hz -EMRA E Plus (Series C and later) V DC -EMRZ V DC -EMRZ V DC -EMRZ Marking Systems Uniform labeling materials for contactors, motor starting equipment, timing relays and circuit breakers Label Sheet self-adhesive paper labels each, x mm Description Pkg. Qty. -FMS Marking Tag Sheet perforated paper labels each, x mm, to be used with a transparent cover Transparent Cover To be used with marking tag sheets Marking Tag Adapters To be used with marking tag: System W -FMP -FMC -FMA Must be ordered in multiples of package quantities. - Publication A-CAA-EN-P

215 Bulletin -ED/-EE E Plus Electronic Overload Relays Specifications - ED_B, -EE_B, and -EE_T - EE_D, and - EE_C Main Circuits - EE_E, and - EE_D - EE_F -EE_G Rated Insulation Voltage (U i ) V AC V AC Rated Impulse Strength (U imp ) kv AC kv AC Rated Operating Voltage (U e ) IEC/UL V AC/V AC V AC/V AC Rated Operating Frequency / Hz (sinusoidal) / Hz (sinusoidal) - EE_H Terminal Cross- Sections Flexible-Stranded with Ferrule Coarse- Stranded/Solid Stranded/Solid Terminal Type Terminal Screws M M Lug Single Conductor Torque Two Conductor Torque Single Conductor Torque Two Conductor Torque Four Conductor Torque Single Conductor Torque Two Conductor Torque Four Conductor Torque. mm. N m. mm. N m. mm. N m mm. N m mm. N m AWG lb in AWG lb in AWG lb in. mm. N m. mm. N m. mm. N m mm. N m mm. N m AWG lb in AWG lb in AWG lb in mm N m mm N m mm N m mm N m mm N m AWG lb in AWG lb in AWG lb in mm N m mm N m MCM lb in mm N m mm N m MCM lb in / MCM lb in / MCM lb in Pozidriv Screwdriver Size Slotted Screwdriver (mm) x x Hexagon Socket Size (mm) Control Circuits Rated Insulation Voltage (U i ) V AC Rated Impulse Strength (U imp ) kv AC Rated Operating Voltage (U e ) IEC/UL V AC / V AC Rating Designation B Rated Operating Current I e N.O./N.C. V / AC- V./. V./. V./. Thermal Current I the A Contact Reliability V, ma Screw Terminal Terminal Screw M Cross Sections Flexible-Stranded Single Conductor Torque.. mm. N m with Ferrule Two Conductor.. mm.. mm Torque. N m. N m Single Conductor. mm Coarse- Torque. N m Stranded/Solid Two Conductor Torque.. mm. N m.. mm. N m Single Conductor AWG Torque lb in Stranded/Solid Two Conductor AWG AWG Torque lb in lb in Screwdriver Size (mm) # Pozidriv/. x. slotted Cage Clamp Cross-Sections Flexible-Stranded with Ferrule. mm Coarse-Stranded/Solid.. mm Stranded/Solid AWG For multiple conductor applications, the same style and size of wire must be used. Cat. Nos. -EEGF and -EEVF follow -EE_E specifications. Publication A-CAA-EN-P -

216 Bulletin -ED/-EE E Plus Electronic Overload Relays Specifications -Pole Terminal Blocks -DTB (A) / AWG, mm (B) AWG MCM, mm lb in, N m -DTB () AWG MCM, mm lb in, N m Terminal Lug Kits -DLE -DL -DL -DL -DL Lug: / AWG, mm lb in, N m Terminal: / in., mm lb in, N m Lug: AWG MCM, mm lb in, N m Terminal: / in., mm lb in, N m Lug: AWG MCM, lb in, N m Terminal: / in., mm lb in, N m Lug: / AWG MCM, mm lb in, N m Terminal: / in., mm lb in, N m Lug: / AWG MCM, mm lb in, N m Terminal: / in., mm lb in, N m Environmental Ratings Ambient Temperature Humidity Vibration (per IEC --) Shock (per IEC --) Max. Altitude Storage Operating Operating Damp Heat - + C (- + F) - + C (- + F) % Non-condensing per IEC -- and IEC -- G G m Pollution Environment Pollution Degree Degree of Protection Type of Relay Nature of Relay Trip Rating Trip Class Reset Mode Electromagnetic Compatibility Electrostatic Discharge Immunity RF Immunity Electrical Fast Transient/Burst Immunity Surge Immunity Protection IP Ambient Compensated, Time Delay, Phase Loss Sensitive Solid-State % FLA Type ED Type EE,,, Type ED Type EE Manual Automatic or Manual Test Level kv Air Discharge, kv Contact Discharge Performance Level Test Level V/m Performance Level Test Level kv Performance Level Test Level kv (L-E), kv (L-L) Performance Level Performance Criteria requires the device under test (DUT) to experience no degradation or loss of performance. Environment. General -ED_B, -EE_B -EE_D -EE_E Standards UL, CSA C. No., NEMA ICS - Part, EN --, EN -- Certifications CE, culus, C-Tick, CCC Approximate Weights (unpackaged). kg (. lb). kg (. lb). kg (. lb) External Current Transformers (for use with cat. nos. -EE_Z) The user shall provide one current transformer (CT) for each motor phase, and shall connect the CT s secondary leads to the appropriate E Plus overload relay power terminals, as shown in current transformer s wiring diagrams. The CT shall have the appropriate ratio (refer to the product nameplate or product description). Additionally, the CT shall be selected to be capable of providing the required VA to the secondary load, which includes the E Plus overload relay burden at the rated secondary current and the wiring burden. Finally, the CT shall be rated for protective relaying to accomodate the high inrush currents associated with motor startup, and shall have an accuracy of <±% over its normal operating range. Typical CT ratings include (Instrument Transformers, Inc. Model # or equivalent): ANSI (USA) CSA (Canada) IEC (Europe) Class CB. Class L VA Class P - Publication A-CAA-EN-P

217 Bulletin -ED/-EE E Plus Electronic Overload Relays Wiring Schematic/Trip Curves S.C.P.D. L A A Connection must be fitted by user L L S.C.P.D. L A A L L L L L O.L. T T T T T T T T Motor T Connection must be fitted by user T T Trip Curves Typical reset time for -EE devices set to automatic reset mode is seconds. Trip Class Trip Class Trip Class Connection must be fitted by user Typical Wiring for -Phase IEC Applications Typical Wiring for -Phase IEC Applications Typical Wiring for NEMA Applications T T T Trip Class Connection must be fitted by user Time (seconds) Time (seconds). FLA Multiple. FLA Multiple Trip Class Trip Class Trip Class Trip Class Time (seconds) Time (seconds). FLA Multiple Trip Curve Legend: Cold Trip Hot Trip Publication A-CAA-EN-P. FLA Multiple -

218 Bulletin -ED/-EE E Plus Electronic Overload Relays Approximate Dimensions Approximate dimensions are shown in millimeters (inches). Dimensions are not to be used for manufacturing purposes. E Plus Pass-thru Style. (.). (). (.). (). (.). (.). (). (.). ø (ø.) - Publication A-CAA-EN-P

219 Bulletin -ED/-EE E Plus Electronic Overload Relays Approximate Dimensions Approximate dimensions are shown in millimeters (inches). Dimensions are not to be used for manufacturing purposes. Bulletin -C Contactor Mounted A F H D H B E TO RESET FROM CONTACTOR MOUNTING HOLE E TO RESET FROM CONTACTOR MOUNTING HOLE T T T C Overload -ED B -EE B R-EE B S-EE B -EE D R-EE D S-EE D -EE D R-EE D S-EE D -EE E R-EE E S-EE E Contactor Width A Height B Depth C D E E F H H -C, -C, -C, -C -C, -C -C -C, -C, -C (-/) (-/ (-/) (-/). (-/). (-/). (-/). (-/). (-/). (-/). (-/). (-/). (/). (/). (/). (/). (/). (/). (/). (/). (/). (/). (/) (-/). (-/) (-/) (-/). (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) Publication A-CAA-EN-P -

220 Bulletin -ED/-EE E Plus Electronic Overload Relays Approximate Dimensions Approximate dimensions are shown in millimeters (inches). Dimensions are not to be used for manufacturing purposes. Bulletin -D Contactor Mounted A E G F D C L H E B B K J øm C Overload Contactor -EE F -D, -D -EE F -D, -D -EE G -D, -D, -D, -D -EE H -D, -D Overload -EE F -D, -D -EE F -D, -D -EE G -D, -D, -D, -D -EE H -D, -D Width A (.) (.) (.) (.) Without Terminal Covers. (.). (.). (.) (.) Height B With Terminal Covers (.) (.). (.) (.) Height B. (.). (.). (.) () Depth C (Reset). (.). (.). (.). (.) D E E (.) (.) (.). (.). (.). (.). (.). (.) Contactor F G H J K øm (-/) (-/ (-/). (.) (.) (.) (.) (.) (.) (.) (.) (.) (.) (.) (.) (.). (.). (.). (.) (.). (.). (.). (.). (.) -. ( -.) -. ( -.) -. ( -.) - ( -.) - Publication A-CAA-EN-P

221 Bulletin -ED/-EE E Plus Electronic Overload Relays Approximate Dimensions Approximate dimensions are shown in millimeters (inches). Dimensions are not to be used for manufacturing purposes. Panel Adapter Mounted Panel Adapter -EPB -EPD -EPE Overload Width A Height B Depth C D E E F H H H J -ED B -EE B R-EE B S-EE B -EE D R-EE D S-EE D -EE E R-EE E S-EE E (-/ (-/ (-/). (-/). (-/). (-/). (-/). (-/) (/) DIN Rail / Panel Adapter - Terminal Cross Sections Flexible-Stranded with Ferrule Coarse-Stranded/Solid Stranded/Solid. (/). (/). (/). (.). (.). (-/). (-/). (-/). (-/). (-/). (-/). (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) -EPB -EPD -EPE Single Conductor.. mm. mm. mm Torque. N m. N m. N m Two Conductor.. mm. mm. mm Torque. N m. N m. N m Single Conductor.. mm. mm. mm Torque. N m. N m. N m Two Conductor.. mm. mm. mm Torque. N m. N m. N m Single Conductor AWG AWG AWG Torque lb in lb in lb in Two Conductor AWG AWG AWG For multiple conductor applications, the same size and style wire must be used. Torque lb in lb in lb in. (-/). (-/). (-/) Publication A-CAA-EN-P -

222 Bulletin -EC E and E Plus Electronic Overload Relays Overview/Product Selection Product Overview The E Overload Relay is available in two configurations: the E and E Plus. The following table illustrates the functional differences between the two configurations. E EC Plus /- /- /- /- Feature EC EC EC -EC EC Inputs Outputs PTC Thermistor Input Ground Fault Protection Bul. /-EC Overload Relays:. A current range DeviceNet ready (ODVA Conformance Tested) LED indicators Test/Reset button Adjustable trip class Ambient temperature compensation True RMS current sensing ( Hz) Protection for single- and threephase motors Integrated I/O ( In/ Out) Programmable trip and warning settings Diagnostic functions (history of last five trips and warnings) Node address switches (series B) Bul. /-EC/EC Overload Relays: Features of Bul. /-EC Integrated I/O ( In/ Out) EC: Low-level ( A) internal ground fault protection EC: High-level ( ma A) external ground fault protection PTC thermistor monitoring DeviceLogix component technology (series B) Two-speed motor protection (series B) Internal A External ma A External ma A External ma A DeviceLogix Heat Trace Voltage Monitoring Inputs are rated V DC. Requires the use of an external ground fault sensor, -CBCT_. Bul. -EC Current Monitor Relay: Current monitoring for three independent channels Bul. /-EC Overload Relays with Voltage Monitoring: Features of Bul. /-EC Integrated I/O ( In/ Out) High-level ( ma A) external ground fault protection DeviceLogix component technology Two-speed motor protection Voltage protection, including: Undervoltage Overvoltage Phase failure Voltage unbalance Phase rotation mismatch Frequency Power protection and energy metering, including: Real power (kw) Reactive power (kvar) Apparent power (kva) Power factor (PF) Real energy (kwh) Reactive energy (kvarh) Apparent energy (kvah) kw demand Table of Contents NOTE: Your order must include ) the of overload relay selected, and ) if required, of any accessories. Product Selection... - Accessories... - Specifications... - Approximate Dimensions... - Standards Compliance EN -- CSA C. No. UL, UL (class ) Certifications ABS CE culus Listed (File No. E, Guide NKCR, NKCR; File No. E, Guide KDAX) C-tick CCC Thermal Overload Thermal Utilization The E Overload Relay provides overload protection through true RMS current measurement of the individual phase currents of the connected motor. Based on this information, a thermal model that simulates the actual heating of the motor is calculated. Percent of thermal capacity utilization (%TCU) reports this calculated value and can be read via the DeviceNet network. An overload trip occurs when the value reaches %. Adjustable Settings Thermal overload protection setup is accomplished simply by programming the motor s full load current (FLC) rating and the desired trip class ( ). Programming of the actual values through software programming ensures the accuracy of the protection. Thermal Memory The E Overload Relay includes a thermal memory circuit designed to approximate the thermal decay for a trip class setting. This means that the thermal model of the connected motor is maintained at all times, even if the supply power is removed. Time to Trip During an overload condition, the E Overload Relay provides an estimated time to trip that is accessible via the DeviceNet network. This allows corrective action to be taken so that production may continue uninterrupted. Time to Reset Following an overload trip, the E Overload Relay will not reset until the calculated percentage of thermal capacity utilization falls below the reset level. As this value decays, the time to reset, which is accessible via the DeviceNet network, is reported. - Publication A-CAA-EN-P

223 Bulletin -EC E and E Plus Electronic Overload Relays Product Overview Thermal Warning The E Overload Relay provides the capability to alert in the event of an impending overload trip. A thermal warning bit is set in the Warning Status when the calculated percentage of thermal capacity utilization exceeds the programmed thermal warning level, which has a setting range of % TCU. Two-Speed Protection The E Plus Overload Relay offers a second FLA setting for -speed motor protection. What used to require two separate overload relays - one for each set of motor windings - can now be accomplished with one device. Improved protection is delivered as thermal utilization is maintained in one device during operation in both speeds. Phase Loss The E Overload Relay offers configurable phase loss protection in allowing the installer to enable or disable the function plus set a time delay setting, adjustable from.. seconds. The trip level is factory-set at a current imbalance measurement of %. Ground (Earth) Fault The E Plus Overload Relay incorporates zero sequence (core balance) sensing into its design through the A rating for low level (arcing) ground fault detection. Trip and warning settings are adjustable from ma. A. For devices rated greater than A and for ground fault detection less than. A, the external core balance current transformer accessory is required. Class I protection is provided as defined by UL. Series B or later devices provide a trip-inhibit setting, offering flexibility to prevent tripping when the ground fault current magnitude exceeds A. This can be useful to guard against the opening of the controller when the fault current could potentially exceed the controller's interrupting capacity rating. Note: The E Plus Overload Relay is not a Ground Fault Circuit Interrupter for personnel protection as defined in article of the U.S. National Electric Code. Stall Stall is defined as a condition where the motor is not able to reach full-speed operation in the appropriate amount of time required by the application. This can result in motor overheating as current draw is in excess of the motor s full load current rating. The E Overload Relay provides user-adjustable stall protection. The trip setting has a range of % FLA, and the enable time is adjustable up to seconds. Jam (Overcurrent) The E Overload Relay can respond quickly to take a motor off-line in the event of a mechanical jam, thereby reducing the potential for damage to the motor and the power transmission components. Trip adjustments include a trip setting adjustable from % FLA and a trip delay time with a range of.. seconds. A separate warning setting is adjustable from % FLA. Underload (Undercurrent) A sudden drop in motor current can signal conditions such as Pump cavitation Tool breakage Belt breakage For these instances, rapid fault detection can help minimize damage and aid in reducing production downtime. Additionally, monitoring for an underload event can provide enhanced protection for motors that are coded by the medium handled (e.g., submersible pumps that pump water). Such motors can become overheated despite being underloaded. This can result from an absence or an insufficient amount of the medium (due to clogged filters, closed valves, etc.). The E Overload Relay offers underload trip and warning settings adjustable from % FLA. The trip function also includes a trip delay time with a range of.. seconds. Over-temperature Protection The E Plus Overload Relay provides motor over-temperature protection with the added provisions for terminating and monitoring of stator windingembedded positive temperature coefficient (PTC) thermistors. PTC thermistors are semiconductors that exhibit a large increase in resistance when the rated response temperature is exceeded. When the monitored PTC thermistor resistance exceeds the response level of the E Plus Overload Relay ( Ω), it can be set to trip immediately or programmed to set the PTC bit of the Warning Status word. Current Imbalance (Asymmetry) The E Plus Overload Relay offers current imbalance trip and warning settings adjustable from %. The trip function also includes a trip delay time with a range of.. seconds. Remote Trip The remote trip function allows an external device such as a vibration sensor to induce the E Overload Relay to trip. External device relay contacts are wired to the E Overload Relay discrete iputs. The discrete inputs are configurable with an option for assigning the remote trip function. Current Monitoring Functions The E Overload Relay allows the user to monitor the following operational data over the DeviceNet network: Individual phase currents (in amperes) Individual phase currents (as a percentage of motor full load current) Average current (in amperes) Average current (as a percentage of motor full load current) Percentage of thermal capacity utilized Current imbalance percentage Ground fault current (E Plus) Diagnostic Functions The E Overload Relay allows the user to monitor the following diagnostic information over the DeviceNet network: Device status History of past five trips Trip status History of positive warnings Warning status Hours of operation Time to an overload trip Number of starts Time to reset after an overload Trip snapshot trip Status Indicators The E Overload Relay provides the following LED indicators: Network Status This green/red LED indicates the status of the network connection. TRIP/WARN This LED flashes an amber code under a warning condition and a red code when tripped. OUT A & B These amber LEDs illuminate when the output contacts are commanded closed. IN - These amber LEDs illuminate when the user-connected device contact is closed.: Note: IN and and OUT B are available only on the E Plus Overload Relay. Inputs/Outputs Inputs allow the connection of such devices as contactor and disconnect auxiliary contacts, pilot devices, limit switches, and float switches. Input status can be monitored via the network and mapped to a controller s input image table. Inputs are rated V DC and are current sinking. Power for the inputs is sourced from the DeviceNet network connection with convenient customer terminations at control terminals and. Relay contact outputs can be controlled via the network or DeviceLogix function blocks for performing such tasks as contactor operation. Publication A-CAA-EN-P -

224 Bulletin -EC E and E Plus Electronic Overload Relays Product Overview Test/Reset Button The Test/Reset button, located on the front of the E Overload Relay, allows the user to perform the following: Test The trip relay contact will open if the E Overload Relay is in an untripped condition and the Test/Reset button is pressed for seconds or longer. Reset The trip relay contact will close if the E Overload Relay is in a tripped condition, supply voltage is present, and the Test/Reset button is pressed. Single/Three-Phase Operation The E Overload Relay can be applied to three-phase as well as single-phase applications. A programming parameter is provided for selection between single- and three-phase operation. Straightthrough wiring is afforded in both cases. DeviceNet Communications The E Overload Relay is a Group slave only device and supports the following: Unconnected Message Manager (UCMM) messages Polled I/O messaging Change-of-state/cyclic messaging Explicit messaging Group Off-line node recovery messaging Full parameter object support Auto-baud network rate identification Configuration consistency value For more information on operation and maintenance of this product, please reference the user manual, publication -UM*. DeviceLogix The E Plus offers increased control flexibility with DeviceLogix capabilities. Using RSNetWorx for DeviceNet (version. or later), function block programs can be configured and saved to an E Plus Overload Relay to operate single logic routines. The function blocks are programmed using standard Boolean operators (e.g., AND, OR, XOR, and NOT) and plus timers, counters, and latches. In addition to allowing the use of the integral discrete inputs, protection functions can also be used as inputs to trigger outputs. For example, the Ground Fault Protection function could be used to control Output A of the E Plus Overload Relay for operation of a circuit breaker short-trip mechanism. AC Input Interface Module Accessory The AC Input Interface Module conveniently allows the E Overload Relay to be retrofitted or applied in new applications that require /V AC control circuitry. This new accessory simply plugs into the E Overload Relay s existing input terminals, optimizing panel space utilization. The module accepts termination of up to four external devices, making it compatible with the E and E Plus versions of the E overload relay. Optical isolation is provided between the AC input wiring and the internal V circuitry of the E. Voltage Protection (model EC only) The E Plus model EC will provide the user with enhanced currentbased motor protection just like the E Plus model, EC, with the addition of voltage protection. With this product, users can protect against voltage issues e.g., undervoltage, voltage unbalance, phase loss, frequency, and phase rotation) before the contactor coil is energized. Power Protection (model EC only) While the motor is powering a load, the E Plus model, EC, will also protect the motor based on power. This product will monitor and protect for excessive real power (kw), reactive power (kvar), apparent power (kva), and power factor for a specific application (e.g., pump applications). Motor Energy Consumption (model EC only) The E Plus model, EC, can be included in a company s energy management system. This product will provide voltage, current, power (kw, kvar, and kva), energy (kwh, kvarh, kvah, kw Demand, kvar Demand, and kva Demand), and power quality (power factor, frequency, and phase rotation) information down at the motor level. - Publication A-CAA-EN-P

225 Bulletin -EC E and E Plus Electronic Overload Relays Product Overview DeviceNet Configuration Terminal (for use with E Plus overload relays, E and E Plus overload relays, ArmorStart distributed motor controllers, and Bulletin -P modular protection systems) The DeviceNet Configuration Terminal ( -DNCT) is a handheld device that can be used to commission, configure, program, and monitor devices on your DeviceNet network. The -DNCT allows you to increase productivity and ease troubleshooting with easy access to information and diagnostics of your system. The -DNCT can be used with any DeviceNet devices and has DeviceLogix, metering, graphing, and auto-display capabilities. These capabilities can help ease troubleshooting by commissioning devices online through your network. Network Who Terminal searches for all devices on the network and provides device address, device name, and status of a device. CopyCat Used to upload, store, and download device configurations and DeviceLogix programs for DeviceNet devices via your network User can easily replace and reconfigure scan lists of DeviceNet scanners (minus the Automatic Device Replacement configuration) Parameters can be accessed as either groups or as a numbered list of all parameters, and can be monitored and edited Diagnostics Simplifies troubleshooting Can present DeviceNet diagnostics, network utilization, and make network statistics available to include baud rate, bus voltage, percentage of bus loading, and CAN errors DeviceLogix Terminal allows the user to enable, monitor, edit, or delete DeviceLogix programs. Parameter Monitoring and Editing If the selected device supports the full parameter object, parameters can be accessed as either groups or as a numbered list of all parameters Parameter screen displays all information for a single parameter Values can be monitored, edited, or copied from the parameter screen EtherNet/IP Communication Auxiliary (for use with E and E Plus overload relays and Bulletin -P modular protection systems) The EtherNet/IP Communications Auxiliary (Cat. Nos. -DNENCAT and -DNCATR) allows users of DeviceNet-based intelligent electronic overload relays to seamlessly communicate on an EtherNet/IP network without the need for using RSNetWorx for DeviceNet for network configuration. The communication auxiliary acts as a linking device to pass through EtherNet-based CIP explicit and I/O messages to the DeviceNet-based devices. Upon a configuration request, the communication auxiliary polls the DeviceNet network for the first devices. For devices that support the full parameter object, parameters will be made available through an internal Web page for the user to view real-time information and configure each device when the user has the appropriate security privileges. Users will be able to view and configure parameters using a text file via the internal web page Allows users to read information into the programmable logic or automation controller Allows users to use RSLinx Classic or RSLinx Enterprise to serve device Parameters via Microsoft OPC (OLE, Object Linked Element, for Process Control) to SCADA systems and/or historical data collection systems such as FactoryTalk View, FactoryTalk Historian, and RSEnergyMetrix Option to allow users to connect to a DLR (Device Level Ring) network topology allows the network to choose another physical communication path in the event that the physical link between two EtherNet devices is broken. ADR (Automatic Device Replacement) capabilities the ADR recognizes when one of the six DeviceNet-based devices has been replaced with a new device, and it will automatically download the previous configuration parameters and node address to the new replacement device Publication A-CAA-EN-P -

226 Bulletin -EC E and E Plus Electronic Overload Relays Catalog Number Explanation/Product Selection Catalog Number Explanation EC B B a b c a b c Type Adjustment Rating [A] Bulletin Contactor Size Code Description Code Description Code Description EC E P.. B C C EC E Plus with internal ground fault sensor A D C C EC E Plus with external ground fault sensor B E C C EC E Plus current monitor relay with C F D D external ground fault sensor D G D D EC E Plus with voltage monitoring E H D D F Z Panel mount G Only available for Cat. Nos. -ECZZ, H -ECZZ, and -ECZZ. For all other cat. J nos., order -ECPM_ separately. K Voltage input module and ribbon cable are included with -EC. L Z Product Selection Direct Contactor Mount Bulletin -EC Electronic Motor Protection Relays Bulletin -EC Electronic Motor Protection Relay inputs output inputs outputs Mounts to Contactor Adjustment Range [A] PTC thermistor input DeviceLogix (series B). -ECPB External ground fault sensor input -C -C -ECAB Mounts to Contactor Adjustment Range [A] -ECBB.. -ECPB -ECCB -ECAB -C -C -ECAD -ECBB -C -C -C -C -D -D -ECDE -C -C -ECCD -ECEE -ECDD -ECFF -ECDE -ECGF -C -C -ECEE -ECBD -ECCB -ECCD -ECAD -ECDD -ECBD -ECGG -ECFF -D -D -ECHG -D -D -ECGF -ECJG -ECGG -D -D -ECKH -D -D -ECHG -ECLH -ECJG Does not include terminal lugs. See Accessories, page -. -ECKH -D -D -ECLH Bulletin -EC Electronic Motor Protection Relay Inputs Outputs Does not include terminal lugs. See Accessories, page -. PTC thermistor input DeviceLogix (series B and Internal ground fault sensor higher) Mounts to Contactor Adjustment Range [A]. -ECPB -C -C -ECAB -ECBB -ECCB -ECAD -C -C -ECBD -ECCD -ECDD -C -C -ECDE -ECEE - Publication A-CAA-EN-P

227 Bulletin -EC E and E Plus Electronic Overload Relays Product Selection Bulletin -EC Voltage Monitor Relay inputs outputs Voltage monitoring capabilities DeviceLogix External ground fault sensor input Mounts to Contactor Adjustment Range [A].. -ECPB -C -C -ECAB -ECBB -ECCB -C -C -ECCD -ECDD -C -C -ECDE -ECEE -D -D -ECFF -ECGF -ECGG -D -D -ECHG -ECJG -D -D -ECKH -ECLH Does not include terminal lugs. See Accessories, page -. Panel Mount Devices Panel Mount Devices for use with External Current Transformers Description Adjustment Range [A] Inputs Output -ECZZ Inputs Outputs Ground Fault Sensor Input PTC Thermistor Input -ECZZ DeviceLogix Inputs Outputs Ground Fault Sensor Input -ECZZ DeviceLogix Inputs Outputs Ground Fault Sensor Input Voltage Monitor Input DeviceLogix -ECZZ Current transformers supplied by customer. Refer to Bulletin Current Transformers and the CT Ratio to FLA chart below for proper current transformer selection. Bulletin -EC Current Monitor Relay inputs External ground fault sensor input outputs DeviceLogix Mounts to Contactor Adjustment Range [A].. -ECPB -C -C -ECAB -ECBB -ECCB -C -C -ECDD -C -C -ECEE Does not include terminal lugs. See Accessories, page -. CT Ratio to FLA Setting Range Correlation CT Ratio FLA Setting Range (A) CT Ratio FLA Setting Range (A) CT Ratio FLA Setting Range (A) : : : : : : : : : : : Publication A-CAA-EN-P -

228 Bulletin -EC E and E Plus Electronic Overload Relays Accessories Add-on Accessories DIN Rail/Panel Adapter AC Input Interface Module rated /V AC, / Hz Description For Use With Pkg. Qty. -EC B -EC_D, -EC_ZZ -EC E -EC all -EC all -ECPM -ECPM -ECPM -EIMD -C -C NEMA size -CBCT Core Balanced Ground Fault Sensor Required when using either an E Plus Ground Fault Protection or Ground Fault/Jam Module Required for ground fault protection with the -EC overload relay -C -C NEMA size -C -C, - D -D NEMA size -CBCT -CBCT -C -C, - D -D NEMA size -CBCT DeviceNet Configuration Terminal Used to interface with objects on a DeviceNet network. Includes m communications cable (-CB). -EDN, -EC (all), -EC (all); /// ArmorStart, -P -DNCT meter communication cable, color-coded bare leads -DNCT -CB meter communication cable, microconnector (male) -DNCT -CM Panel Mount Adapter/Door Mount Bezel Kit -DNCT -DNCT-BZ Single port -DNENCAT EtherNet/IP Communications Auxiliary DeviceNet to EtherNet/IP linking device -EC_C (all), -EC_C Dual port (all) -DNENCATR E Replacement Relay E Plus Model EC Replacement Relay -EC_F, -EC_G, -EC_H, -EC_E, -EC_F, -EC_G -EC_F, -EC_G, -EC_H, -EC_E, -EC_F, -EC_G -NRECZZ -NRECZZ E Plus Model EC Replacement Relay -EC_F, -EC_G, -EC_H, -EC_E, -EC_F, -EC_G -NRECZZ E Plus Replacement Voltage Input Module -EC_, -EC_ -NVECVIM E Plus Replacement Cable and Connectors -EC_ all, -EC_ all -NCECCNT The electronic motor protection relay can be mounted separately to top-hat rail EN -. - Publication A-CAA-EN-P

229 Bulletin -EC E and E Plus Electronic Overload Relays Accessories Description For Use With Pkg. Qty. Terminal Lugs Set of two Protection class IPX per IEC and DIN Terminal Lugs (UL/CSA), Copper Frame Set of three Terminal Covers Protection class IP per IEC and DIN For direct-on-line, reversing, two-speed, and wyedelta/star-delta assemblies Phase Barriers Set of -D, -D, -DE DE, -EC_F, - EE_F -D...-D, -EC_G, -EFC, -EE_G -D, -D -D, -D, -EC_F, -EE_F -D -D, -EC_G, -EE_G -D, -D, -EC_H, -EE_H -D, -D, -EC_H, -EE_H -D -D, -EC_F, -EE_F -D...-D, -EC_G, -EE_G -D -D, -EC_H, -EE_H -DTB -DTB -DL -DL -DL -DL -DL -DTC -DTC -DTC -D D, -EC_H, -EE_H -DPB Marking Systems Uniform labeling materials for contactors, motor starting equipment, timing relays and circuit breakers Description Pkg. Qty. Label Sheet self-adhesive paper labels each, x mm Marking Tag Sheet perforated paper labels each, x mm, to be used with a transparent cover Transparent Cover To be used with marking tag sheets -FMS -FMP -FMC Marking Tag Adapters To be used with marking tag: System W Must be ordered in multiples of package quantities. -FMA Publication A-CAA-EN-P -

230 Bulletin -EC E and E Plus Electronic Overload Relays Specifications Main Circuits -EC_B, -EC_D, -EC_Z, -EC_T, -EC_C -EC_E, -EC_D -EC_F -EC_G -EC_H Rated Insulation Voltage (U i ) V AC V AC Rated Impulse Strength (U imp ) kv AC kv AC Rated Operating Voltage (U e ) IEC/UL V AC/V AC V AC/V AC Rated Frequency Hz / Hz Terminal Cross-Sections Terminal Type Terminal Screws Flexible-Stranded with Ferrule Single Conductor Torque Flexible-Stranded with Ferrule Multiple Conductor Torque Coarse-Stranded/Solid Single Conductor Torque Coarse-Stranded/Solid Multiple Conductor Torque Stranded/Solid Single Conductor Torque Stranded/Solid Multiple Conductor Torque M. mm. N m mm. N m. mm. N m mm. N m # AWG lb in # AWG lb in M mm N m mm N m mm N m mm N m # AWG lb in # AWG lb in Pozidriv Screwdriver Size Slotted Screwdriver (mm) x Hexagon Socket Size SW (mm) -Pole Terminal Blocks -DTB (A) / AWG, mm B) AWG MCM, mm lb in, N m Terminal Lug Kits UL Short-Circuit Ratings Maximum Available Fault Current [A] -DTB () AWG MCM, mm lb in, N m -DL -DL -DL -DL -DL Lug: / AWG, mm lb in, N m Terminal: / in, mm lb in, N m Maximum Heat Dissipation (Watts) Lug: AWG MCM, mm lb in, N m Terminal: / in, mm lb in, N m Maximum Voltage [V] -EC_B, -EC_T -EC_D, -EC_C -EC_E, -EC_D -EC_F -EC_G -EC_H -EC_Z Lug: AWG MCM, lb in, N m Terminal: / in, mm lb in, N m IEC Short-Circuit Ratings Lug: / AWG MCM, mm lb in, N m Terminal: / in, mm lb in, N m Maximum Available High Fault Current [A] Lug: / AWG MCM, mm lb in, N m Terminal: / in, mm lb in, N m -EC_B, -EC_D -EC_E -EC_F -EC_G -EC_H E..... E Plus..... Maximum Voltage [V] -EC_B, -EC_T, -EC_D, -EC_C, -EC_E, -EC_D, -EC_F, -EC_G, -EC_H, -EC_Z, - Publication A-CAA-EN-P

231 Bulletin -EC E and E Plus Electronic Overload Relays Specifications Control Circuits Power Supply Ratings Rated Supply Voltage (U s ) V DC (supply via DeviceNet connection) Operating Range V DC Power Consumption E. W E Plus. W Output Relay Ratings Type of Contacts Form A SPDT NO Rated Insulation Voltage (U i ) V AC Rated Operating Voltage (U e ) V AC Rated Operating Current (I e ) A Minimum Operating Current V DC Switching Capacity B AC- Resistive Load Rating (p.f. =.) A, V AC/ A, V DC Inductive Load Rating (p.f. =.) A, V AC/ A, V DC (L/R = ms) Input Ratings Supply Voltage V DC ± % (provided by E) Input Type Current Sinking Thermistor/PTC Input Ratings Type of Control Unit Mark A Max. No. of Sensors in Series Max. Cold Resistance of PTC Sensor Chain Ω Trip Resistance Ω ± Ω Reset Resistance Ω ± Ω Short-Circuit Trip Resistance Ω ± Ω Thermistor/PTC Input Ratings, Continued Max. PTC Terminals.V DC (R PTC = kω) Max. PTC Terminals V DC (R PTC = open) Response Time ms Terminal Screws Flexible-Stranded with Ferrule Single Conductor Torque Flexible-Stranded with Ferrule Multiple Conductor Torque Coarse-Stranded/Solid Single Conductor Torque Coarse-Stranded/Solid Multiple Conductor Torque Stranded/Solid Single Conductor Torque Stranded/Solid Multiple Conductor Torque Control and DeviceNet Terminal Cross-Sections M.. mm. N m.. mm. N m.. mm. N m.. mm. N m AWG lb in AWG lb in Slotted Screwdriver (mm). x. Electromagnetic Compatibility Ratings Electrostatic Discharge Immunity Test Level Performance Criteria RF Immunity Test Level Performance Criteria Electrical Fast Transient/Burst Immunity Test Level Performance Criteria Surge Immunity Test Level Performance Criteria Radiated Emissions Conducted Emissions kv Air Discharge, kv Contact Discharge A V/m A kv (Power), kv (Control & Comm) A kv (L-E), kv (L-L) A Class A Class A Performance Criteria A requires the device under test (DUT) to experience no degradation or loss of performance. Sensor Characteristic - C TNF-K C TNF- K TNF TNF+K TNF+ K Per IEC -- Publication A-CAA-EN-P -

232 Bulletin -EC E and E Plus Electronic Overload Relays Specifications Environmental Ratings Ambient Temperature Storage Operating Humidity Operating Damp Heat Steady- State (per IEC --) Damp Heat Cyclic (per IEC --) Vibration (per IEC --) Shock (per IEC --) - + C (- + F) - + C (- + F) % Non-condensing % r.h., C( F), days % r.h., C/ C( F/ F), cycles G G Pollution Environment Degree Degree of Protection -ECxxx -ECxxx Current Reporting Accuracy PX P Phase Currents: % min. FLA Setting Value % max. FLA Setting Value % % min FLA Setting Value +/- % +/- % Ground Current (.. A) +/- % General Approximate Weights External Current Transformers (for use with Cat. Nos. -ECZZ, -ECZZ, -ECZZ, and -ECZZ) The user shall provide one current transformer (CT) for each motor phase,and shall connect the CT s secondary leads to the appropriate E overload relay power terminals, as shown in current transformer s wiring diagrams. The CT shall have the appropriate ratio (refer to the product nameplate or product description). Additionally, the CT shall be selected to be capable of providing the required VA to the secondary load, which includes the E overload relay burden of. VA at the rated secondary current and the wiring burden. Finally, the CT shall be rated for protective relaying to accomodate the high inrush currents associated with motor startup, and shall have an accuracy of <±% over its normal operating range. Typical CT ratings include (Instrument Transformers, Inc. Model # or equivalent): ANSI (USA) CSA (Canada) IEC (Europe) Class CB. Class L VA Class P -EC_B, -EC_D, -EC_Z -EC_E -EC_F -EC_G -EC_H. kg (. lb). kg (. lb). kg (. lb) Standards CSA C. No., DIN VDE, EN, UL, UL Certifications CE, C-tick, cul, CCC (pending) Protection and Warning Summary Protective Function Thermal Overload Trip Enable Factory Default. kg (. lb) Warning Enable Trip Level Settings Trip Delay Settings Warning Level Settings Factory Default Range Default Enabled Disabled. A Range [s] Trip Class Default [s] Range Default Trip Class %TCU Range [s]. kg (. lb) Inhibit Time Settings Default [s] % Phase Loss Enabled... Ground (Earth) Fault Disabled Disabled.. A. A..... A. A Stall (High Overload During Start) Jam (High Overload During Run) Disabled Disabled Disabled Underload Disabled Disabled % FLA % FLA % FLA % FLA % FLA... % FLA... % FLA % FLA % FLA % FLA PTC Disabled Disabled Current Imbalance Disabled Disabled % %... % % (Asymmetry) Comm Fault Enabled Disabled Comm Idle Disabled Disabled Inhibit time settings are used for both trip and warning functions. Phase loss trip level is set at a current imbalance greater than or equal to % and is not user adjustable. Stall protection is only applicable to the motor starting sequence. - Publication A-CAA-EN-P

233 Bulletin -EC E and E Plus Electronic Overload Relays Specifications Programming and Control Terminal Display type Viewing area Keypad type Operation force Operational life Communication protocol Input voltage range Input power, typical Input current Operating temperature Storage temperature Humidity Operating shock Non-operating shock Operating vibration Non-operating vibration Height Width Depth Weight Display x LCD with yellow-green backlighting Keypad x mm (. x. in.) Tactile embossed, domed keys, sealed membrane Communications g ( oz.) million operations DeviceNet (,, Kbaud selectable) Electrical Environmental Dimensions Certifications V DC. W V DC C ( F) - + C (- + F) %, non-condensing g g. Hz khz Hz khz mm (.in.) mm (. in.). mm (. in.) g ( oz.) culus UL, C., No. CE RoHS EN--: EN--: This product meets the material restrictions of the European Union RoHS Directive AC Input Interface Module Electrical Number of inputs Voltage category /V AC Operating voltage range V AC Frequency range Hz Off-state voltage (max.) V AC On-state voltage (min.) V AC On-state current. V AC (min.),. V A (max.) Inrush current (max.) ma Off-state current (max.). ma Heat dissipation (max.). W/input IEC input compatibility Type Environmental Operating temperature - + C (- + F) Storage temperature - + C (- + F) Humidity %, non-condensing Vibration (IEC --) G Shock (IEC --) G Environmental Maximum altitude, m Pollution environment Pollution degree Terminal marking EN Degree of protection IPLX Electromagnetic Compatibility ESD Immunity (IEC --) kv contact, kv air Radiated Immunity (IEC --) V/m Fast transient burst (IEC --) kv (Power), kv (Control) Surge immunity (IEC --) kv common mode, kv differential mode Radiated and conducted emissions Class A Physical Weight g (. oz.) Certifications UR, cur, CE Publication A-CAA-EN-P -

234 Bulletin -EC E and E Plus Electronic Overload Relays Trip Curves E & E Plus Overload Relay Trip Class Trip Class Cold Trip Hot Trip Cold Trip Hot Trip Time [seconds] Time [seconds] Current [%FLA] Trip Class Trip Class Cold Trip Hot Trip Current [%FLA] Cold Trip Hot Trip Time [seconds] Time [seconds] Current [%FLA] Current [%FLA] - Publication A-CAA-EN-P

235 Bulletin -EC E and E Plus Electronic Overload Relays Specifications Typical Wiring Schematics NEMA Single-Phase Three-Phase S.C.P.D. S.C.P.D. E Out A E Trip Relay () Typical Wiring Schematics IEC Single-Phase Three-Phase E Out A E Trip Relay () Publication A-CAA-EN-P -

236 Bulletin -EC E and E Plus Electronic Overload Relays Specifications Typical Wiring Schematics IEC Reversing Starter Application DeviceNet red white shield blue black OUT B OUT A V AC N IN - Publication A-CAA-EN-P

237 Bulletin -EC E and E Plus Electronic Overload Relays Approximate Dimensions Approximate dimensions are shown in millimeters (inches). Dimensions are not to be used for manufacturing purposes. Bulletin Starter Approximate Dimensions A H J D ød D E B B Overload -EC B Contactor -C, -C -C, -C -EC D -C, -C -EC D -C -EC E -C, -C, -C Width A (-/) (-/ (-/) (-/) E without -EIMD. (-/). (-/). (-/). (-/) Height B with - EIMD. (-/). (-/). (-/). (-/) without -EIMD. (-/). (-/). (-/). (-/) B C with - EIMD. (-/). (-/). (-/). (-/) Depth C E E (-/) (-/) (-/). (-/). (/). (/). (/). (/). (-/). (-/). (-/). (-/) Overload -EC B Contactor D D H J ØD -C, -C -C, -C -EC D -C, -C -EC D -C -EC E -C, -C, -C (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/). (-/) (-/) (-/). (-/) (/) (/) (/) (/) Ø. (/Ø) Ø. (/Ø) Ø. (/Ø) Ø. (/Ø) Publication A-CAA-EN-P -

238 Bulletin -EC E and E Plus Electronic Overload Relays Approximate Dimensions Approximate dimensions are shown in millimeters (inches). Dimensions are not to be used for manufacturing purposes. Bulletin Starter Approximate Dimensions, Continued Overload -EC F -EC G -EC H Overload -EC F -EC G -EC H Contactor -D -D -D -D -D -D -D -D -D -D A (.) (.) (.) (.) without Terminal Covers. (.). (.). (.) (.) Height B with Terminal Covers (.) (.). (.) (.) B Depth C D E E. (.). (.). (.) (). (.). (.). (.). (.) (.) (.) (.). (.). (.). (.). (.). (.) Contactor F G H J K L M -D -D -D -D -D -D -D -D -D -D. (.) (.) (.). (.) (.) (.) (.) (.) (.) (.) (.) (.) (.) (.) (.) (.). (.). (.). (.) (.). (.). (.). (.). (.). (.). (.) (.). (.) -. ( -.) -. ( -.) -. ( -.) - ( -.) - Publication A-CAA-EN-P

239 Bulletin -EC E and E Plus Electronic Overload Relays Approximate Dimensions Approximate dimensions are shown in millimeters (inches). Dimensions are not to be used for manufacturing purposes. Bulletin -EC Voltage Module. dia. (.) HOLES. (.). (.). (.) Panel Mount Adapters (For Use With -EC B). (.) (-/). (-/). (/) (-/). (-/) ø. (/ ø). (/). (/) (-/) (-/) Publication A-CAA-EN-P -

240 Bulletin -EC E and E Plus Electronic Overload Relays Approximate Dimensions Approximate dimensions are shown in millimeters (inches). Dimensions are not to be used for manufacturing purposes. (For Use With -EC D, -EC_ZZ). (). (.). (). (). () ø. (.). (). () (.). () (For Use With -EC E). (). () w/-eimd. (). (). (). (). (). (). (). () ø. (.). () - Publication A-CAA-EN-P

241 Bulletin -EF Solid-State Overload Relays Overview/Catalog Number Explanation -EFA -EFB -EFC Bulletin -EF -EF. A current range Phase loss/current imbalance protection LED indicators Digital (DIP switch) adjustments Adjustable Trip Class ( ) -EF also includes:. A current range Overcurrent indication PTC thermistor monitoring Bulletin -EF overload relays offer precise and reliable ambient compensated overload protection for the protection of three-phase squirrel cage motors. DIP switch settings allow the Bulletin -EF overload relays to be closely matched to the motor characteristics to safely obtain full utilization of the motor. The wide adjustment range of the trip class setting allows the Bulletin -EF overload relays to be applied in a wide variety of applications. The -EF version offers enhanced motor protection with additional circuitry for monitoring motor winding embedded thermistors. Table of Contents Product Selection... - Accessories... - Specifications... - Approximate Dimensions... - Standards Compliance IEC - CSA C. No. UL Certifications CE CSA Certified (File No. LR) UL Listed (File No. E, Guide NKCR) Features Catalog Number Explanation EF A KP R F L a b c d e Code EF a Model Description Bulletin -EF solid-state overload relay b Version Code Description Basic Advanced Adjustment Range [A] Code Description A B C Pass-thru mounting style Direct (to contactor) mount style c Code KJ KV KY KD KP KF KA KN KG KB ZJ ZY d Voltage Description V AC V AC V AC V AC V AC V AC V AC V AC V AC V AC V DC V DC e Factory Modifications Code Description Automatic R reset F Remote reset External L indication Publication A-CAA-EN-P -

242 Bulletin -EF Solid-State Overload Relays Product Selection/Accessories Electronic Motor Protection Relays Mounts to Contactor Adjustment Range [A] -D -D -EFA -EFA -D -D -EFB -EFB -D -D -EFC Contactor mounting requires the use of a bus bar mounting kit (Cat. Nos. -MVS or -MVS).. A can be achieved by looping the motor supply cables. (Refer to the Specifications on page -.) Use cable support -HD. Device ships with the External Indication Module accessory ( -LB) included. Coil Voltage Code The catalog number as listed is incomplete. Select a coil voltage code from the table below for completion. Example: -EFA becomes -EFAKP. Voltage [V] / Hz KJ KV KY KD KP KF KA KN KG KB DC ZJ ZY Factory Modification Options Description Suffix Code Automatic Reset of overload and thermistor overtemperature protection -R Remote Reset -F External Indication -L Refer to the Catalog Number explanation on page - for the proper suffix code sequence. Device ships with the Remote Reset Module accessory ( -RB) included. Device ships with the External Indication Module accessory ( -LB) included. Accessories Add-On Modules External Indication Module For front mounting on a control panel or MCC m connection cable with plug Function status indication Trips and alarms can be reset IP protection Description Pkg. Qty. -LB Remote Reset Module Trip reset from any location Operating voltage: V AC/DC with external burden resistor: -. kω, W V AC/DC - kω, W V AC/DC SR (-) (+) A A U s R v (+) (-) rt bl r r r r r r -RB Mounting Materials Description For Use With Pkg. Qty. Transparent Front Cover -EF, -EF -PA -D -DTS Terminal Shields -D, -D, Set of two -D-E - Protection class IP per IEC and DIN D-E For direct-on-line, reversing, two-speed, and wye-delta/star-delta -DTS assemblies -D...-D -DTS Cable Support Set of Includes terminal and fixing screws Provides support of cable end when looping through current evaluation ports Terminal Lugs Set of two Protection class IPX per IEC and DIN -EFA, -EFA -HD -D -D, -D, -DE DE, -EC_F, -EE_F -D...-D, -EC_G, -EFC, -EE_G -DTB -DTB -DTB - Publication A-CAA-EN-P

243 Bulletin -EF Solid-State Overload Relays Accessories Connecting Components Description For Use With Pkg. Quantity -D, -D -DL Terminal Lugs (UL/CSA), Copper Frame -D, -D, -EC_F, -EE_F -DL Set of three -D -D, -EC_G, -EE_G -DL Mounting Materials Bus Bars Set of busbars, includes terminal and fixing screws. Suitable for use with -EFA and -EFA overload relays. Description Pkg. Qty. M connections Set of three x x mm (/ x / x -/ in.) ( A max.) -MVM Universally applicable Weight: g M connections Set of three x x mm (/ x / x -/ in.) ( A max.) Universally applicable -MVM M lower connections Set of three For mounting on Bul. -D and -D contactors with conventional coil -MVS M lower connections Set of three For mounting on Bul. -D, -D conventional and Bul. - DE -DE contactors with electronic coil Labeling Materials Uniform labeling materials for contactors, motor starting equipment, timing relays, and circuit breakers -MVS Description Pkg. Qty. Label Sheet self-adhesive paper labels each, x mm Marking Tag Sheet perforated paper labels each, x mm, to be used with a transparent cover Transparent Cover To be used with marking tag sheets Marking Tag Adapters To be used with marking tag: System W Must be ordered in multiples of package quantities. -FMS -FMP -FMC -FMA Publication A-CAA-EN-P -

244 Bulletin -EF Solid-State Overload Relays Specifications Supply Voltage Failure In the event of a supply voltage failure, the output relay resets and the stand-by indicator goes out. The actual status is stored for minutes. When the supply voltage is restored, the output relay reverts to its original state. Reset Manual The reset button resets all protection functions. Resetting from any location is possible with the -RB remote reset module. Reset Automatic Automatic resetting of thermal overload and thermistor overtemperature functions is an optional feature. All other protection functions must be reset manually. Test Button for Thermal Overload Protection Pressing the test button will verify thermal tripping operation time at x/ e without the motor being connected. The test button must be held for longer than the set trip time t x/e. Device Installation and Commissioning The operating instructions enclosed with the device provide all of the information necessary to set and commission it. Surface Mounting -EF_A Snap-on fixing to standard DIN Rail or screw fixing -EF_B Screw fixing -EF_C Screw fixing Mounting position: optional Setting the Rated Current (. A) (-EFA and -EFA Requires -HD) The motor supply cables are looped through the current transformer twice, thereby doubling the rated motor current. The setting on the Bulletin -EF overload relay is the product of: I e [A] x number of loops -EF -EF Cable Cross Section (Flexible Strand) Recommended for I e [A] Motor Supply Cables IEC [mm] CSA, UL (AWG No.) fed straight through looped twice. looped times. looped times.. Motor supply wire looped twice Motor supply wire looped times.. looped times.. Rated Voltage Motor Circuit (primary circuit of current measuring device) IEC, EN [V] CSA, UL [V] Control Circuit IEC, EN [V] CSA, UL [V] Rated Control Voltage U S AC / Hz [V],,,,,,,,,, (..U S ) DC [V], (.. U S ) Terminal Cross-section Control circuit [mm] x. Device Protection Fuse A Type gg or A Type gg Output Relay Contact Information Contact assembly N.O. and N.C., galvanically separated Rated operating voltage per UL/CSA: pilot duty V Continuous Thermal current [V] [A] Rated AC operating current AC- [A]. Max. permissible switching current (cos =.) AC- [A] Rated DC operating current (L/R = ms), no protective circuit needed DC- [A].. Max. rated back-up fuse current A, V AC Type gg Ambient temperature Operation Storage Transport - + C - + C - + C Sensor Measurement Circuit Measurement circuit Cross section [mm].. Max. lead length [m] Max. cold resistance of PTC sensor chain kω. Max. number of PTC sensors per IEC -- Weights Overload Relay -EFA [g] -EFA [g] -EFB [g] -EFB [g] -EFC [g] -LB indication module [g] -RB Remote reset module [g] -MTM Adapter [g] -PA Front cover [g] -HD Terminal lug [g] Bus bars -MVM [g] -MVM [g] -MVS [g] -MVS [g] Approvals CE, UL Listed, CSA, Bureau Veritas, Lloyd s Register of Shipping, Maritime Register of Shipping, RINA Type of wiring: insulated control leads, screened > m (shield connected with T) - Publication A-CAA-EN-P

245 Bulletin -EF Solid-State Overload Relays Approximate Dimensions Dimensions in millimeters. Dimensions are not intended to be used for manufacturing purposes. Cat. Nos. -EFA, -EFA (shown with cat. no. -MVM bus bar kit) Cat. Nos. -EFB, -EFB Dimensions -EFA -EFA -EFB -EFB -EFC A a b b b b φd... d d φe M x M x M x φe M x M x e. e e e e e c c c. c. Terminal cover Universally applicable busbars ( -MVM) Feed-through openings x mm With -LB indication module: c = c + mm Can be mounted to DIN Rail EN - Universally applicable busbars ( -MVM) -EFC -LB R. Publication A-CAA-EN-P -

246 Bulletin -K Bimetallic Overload Relays Product Overview/Product Selection Miniature Bimetallic Overload Relays Bulletin -K Miniature Bimetallic Overload Relays Standard motor protection for AC and DC motors Overload protection Trip Class A Auxiliary switch ( N.O. and N.C.) Phase loss sensitivity Manual/Auto reset button Test release Stop button Trip indicator Bulletin -K bimetallic overload relays are designed for use with Bulletin -K contactors and Bulletin -K reversing contactors. These class A ambient temperature-compensated thermal overload relays include a differential mechanism for sensitivity to phase-loss conditions. Table of Contents Product Selection... this page Accessories... this page Specifications... - Approximate Dimensions... - Standards Compliance IEC/EN -,--,-- UL CSA.. No. Certifications CE Marked culus Listed (File No. E, Guide NKCR, NKCR) Max. Current Rating of Backup Fuse [A] IEC Coordination UL Mounts to Contactor Setting Range [A] Type Type UL Class K/RK, V, ka UL Class CC, J, V, ka.. -KA.. -KA.. -KA.. -KA.. -KA.. -KA.. -KB -K -K.. -KB.. -KB.. -KB.. -KB.. -KB.. -KB.. -KB.. -KB -K -K.. -KB.. -KC -K.. -KC To select the setting range for use in Y-Δ Starters, multiply the rated operating current of the motor by a factor of.. For motors with Service Factor of. or greater, use motor nameplate full load current. For motors with service factor of., use % of the motor nameplate full load current. Accessories Description Remote Reset Solenoid For remote reset of -K and -T overload relays -TR Reset Adapter Expands the reset target area when using an external reset External Reset Button For enclosed, through-the-door reset applications. Metal construction IP, non-illuminated with rod (length: mm, adjustable range mm). Refer to the F catalog pages for additional types. Coil Voltage Codes for Remote Reset Solenoid Reset Button Rod -RA FM-R F-ATR [V] Hz D Hz D / Hz KJ KY KF DC ZJ ZY ZD ZS - Publication A-CAA-EN-P

247 Main Circuits Rated Isolation Voltage U i Rated Impulse Strength U imp -K V kv Rated Operating Voltage U e IEC/UL V AC / V AC Wiring cross section Terminal type Terminal screws M. Fine stranded with ferrule [mm] x (. ) Solid or coarse stranded Recommended torque [mm] [AWG] [N m] [lb in] x (. ) x ( ).. Pozidriv screwdriver Size Slotted screwdriver [mm] x General Data Standards Certifications Approximate Weights (unpackaged) Control Circuits -K IEC/EN -, --, --, UL, CSA.. No. CE, culus. kg (. lb) -K Rated Isolation Voltage U i V AC Rated Impulse Strength U imp kv AC Rated Operating Voltage U e IEC/UL V AC/V AC Rating Designation A/Q Rated Operating Current I e N.O./N.C. V [A] AC- V [A] V [A]. V [A]. V [A] DC- V [A]. V [A]. V [A]. Thermal Current I the [A] Short-circuit withstand, fuse gg [A] Contact Reliability V, ma Wiring cross section Terminal type Terminal screw M. Fine stranded with ferrule [mm] x ( ) Solid or coarse stranded Recommended torque [mm] [AWG] [N m] [lb in] x ( ) x ( ).. Pozidriv screwdriver Size Slotted screwdriver [mm] x Environmental Ratings Ambient Temperature Humidity Bulletin -K Bimetallic Overload Relays Storage Operating Operating Damp Heat Specifications -K - + C (- + F) - + C (- + F) % Non-condensing per IEC/EN -- and IEC/EN -- G G m Vibration (per IEC/EN --) Shock (per IEC/EN --) Max. Altitude Pollution Environment Pollution Degree Degree of Protection IPX Protection Type of Relay Ambient compensated, time delay, phase loss sensitive Nature of Relay Bimetallic overload relay Trip Rating % FLA Trip Class IEC: A, UL Reset Mode Automatic or manual Power dissipation up to. A W.. A W General Data Standards Certifications Approximate Weights (unpackaged) -K IEC/EN -, --, --, UL, CSA.. No. CE, culus. kg (. lb) Publication A-CAA-EN-P -

248 Bulletin -K Bimetallic Overload Relays Specifications/ApproximateDimensions Thermal Overload Relays Circuit Diagrams Trip Characteristics These trip characteristics refer to IEC and are average values from cold start at an ambient temperature of C. Trip time is pictured as a function of operating current. With the device at normal operating temperature, the trip time decreases to approximately % of the shown value. Trip Class A Seconds Minutes -phase -phase FLA Multiple Bulletin -K, -K Approximate Dimensions Dimensions are shown in millimeters (inches). Dimensions are not intended for manufacturing purposes.. (-/). (-/) (-/) (-/) (/). (-/) (-/). (-/). (-/) (-/) (-/). (-/). (-/) - Publication A-CAA-EN-P

249 Bulletin -T Bimetallic Overload Relays Overview/Accessories Bulletin -T Bimetallic Overload Relays Overload protection trip class / A Phase loss protection Ambient temperature compensation Auxiliary contacts ( N.O. and N.C.) Manual/automatic reset mode selectable Test function for auxiliary contacts Stop button Trip indicator Optional remote reset solenoid and external reset accessories The -T bimetallic overload relays are ambient temperature compensated, ensuring that the tripping characteristic of the relay remains constant over an ambient temperature range of - + C. These class / A overload relays include a differential mechanism for high sensitivity to phase loss conditions and provide reliable motor protection in normal duty applications. In addition, they can be used to protect against overloads in DC-motor and variable frequency drive applications. Table of Contents Product Selection... Accessories... Specifications... Approximate Dimensions... Standards Compliance IEC/EN -, --, -- UL CSA C. No. Certifications culus (File No. E, Guide NKCR, NKCR), CE marked Add-On Modules Description For Use With Pkg. Quantity DIN Rail/Panel Mounting Adapter For separate mounting of overload relays Snaps on to mm top hat rail -TAA, -TAB, -TAC, -TBC -TAPM Screw Adapter For screw fixing of the -TAPM panel adapter ( required per adapter) -TAPM M-C-N Remote Reset Solenoid For remote reset of -K and -T overload relays -K, -T (not for -TDC_P) -TR Must be ordered in multiples of package quantity. External Reset Button For enclosed, through-the-door reset applications. Metal construction, IP, non-illuminated. Refer to the F selection information for additional types. Reset Rod Length mm, adjustable range mm Reset Adapter Expands the reset target area when using an external reset All FM-R All F-ATR -K, -T (not for -TDC_P) -RA Coil Voltage Codes for Remote Reset Solenoid [V] Hz D Hz D / Hz KJ KY KF DC ZJ ZY ZD ZS Publication A-CAA-EN-P -

250 Bulletin -T Bimetallic Overload Relays Product Selection Thermal Overload Relays For Use With -C -C Setting Range [A] gl/gg Max. Back-up fuse [A] UL Class K ka, V AC ka, V AC IEC/EN -- Coordination Type Type UL.. -TAA.. -TAA.. -TAA.. -TAA.. -TAA.. -TAA.. -TAB.. -TAB.. -TAB.. -TAB.. -TAB.. -TAB.. -TAB.. -TAB.. -TAB.. -TAB. -TAC.. -TAC -C -C. -TAC -C -C -TAC.. -TAC -C -TAC -C -C -TBC.. -TBC -TBC. -TBC -TBC -C -TBC -C -C -C -TCC. -TCC -TCC -TDC -TDC -C -C -TDC -C -C -TDC Separate mounting required (Panelmounted device) -TDCP -TDCP -TDCP -TDCP Bulletin -T overload relays shall not be used with -C -C conventional DC coil-controlled contactors. Use electronic controlled DC coil versions. To select the setting range for use in Y-Δ Starters, multiply the rated operating current of the motor by a factor of.. For motors with service factor of. or greater, use motor nameplate full load current. For motors with service factor of., use % of the motor nameplate full load current. Max. Back-up fuse [A], UL Class K, ka, V AC - Publication A-CAA-EN-P

251 Bulletin -T Bimetallic Overload Relays Accessories/Specifications Marking System Uniform labeling materials for contactors, motor starting equipment, timing relays, and circuit breakers Description Pkg. Quantity Must be ordered in multiples of package quantities. Label Sheet self-adhesive paper labels each, x mm Marking Tag Sheet perforated paper labels each, x mm, to be used with a transparent cover Transparent Cover To be used with marking tag sheets -FMS -FMP -FMC Thermal Overload Relays Main Circuits Rated isolation voltage U i Rated impulse withstand voltage U imp (between main poles and between main poles and auxiliary circuits) Rated impulse withstand voltage U imp (between auxiliary circuits) Rated operating voltage U e Rated frequencies IEC UL, CSA -T V AC kv AC kv AC V AC V DC V AC [Hz] / Operational frequencies DC Hz up to. A W -TA, - TB. A W Power dissipation A W -TC A W -TD A W Terminations Control Circuits -T Rated operating current I e V [A] AC- V [A] V [A]. V [A]. V [A] DC- V [A]. V [A]. V [A]. Thermal Current I th Short-circuit withstand, Fuse IEC, gl/gg [A] Short-circuit withstand, circuit breaker ka prospective short-circuit-current [A] Min. contact load for reliable operation V, ma UL Rating A/Q Cat. Nos. -TA - TBC TBC Main Circuits Control Circuits Remote Reset - TBC TBC -TC -TD -TAPM -T all -TR Wiring cross section Terminal type Terminal screws M M M M M M M. M. Fine stranded with ferrule Solid or coarse stranded conductor [mm] conductors [mm] conductor [mm] conductors [mm] conductor [AWG] conductors [AWG].... No. No..... No. No No No No No. - No. No No. - Recommended torque [N m] [lb in].. Pozidrive screwdriver No. Size - Slotted screwdriver [mm]. x.. x.. x.. x. -. x.. x.. x. Hexagon socket screw Size Publication A-CAA-EN-P -

252 Bulletin -T Bimetallic Overload Relays Specifications -TR Remote Reset Maximum Command Impulse AC / Hz DC Coil Consumtion AC / Hz DC General Operating Limits Pick-up [x U s ] Drop-out [x U s ] Pick-up [x U s ] Drop-out [x U s ] Pick-up [VA/W] Hold-in [VA/W] Pick-up [W] Hold-in [W] s (,, V) (V) (,, V) (V) -T Type of Overload Relay Bimetallic, Ambient Compensated, Phase Loss Sensitive Trip Rating (ultimate tripping current) % FLA Phase loss sensitivity: Trip rating at phase loss % FLA Trip Class -TA/-TB -TC/-TD IEC/EN -- A UL Reset Mode Automatic or Manual Test release Manual release of auxiliary contacts Trip indication By means of a flag visible through an opening in the relay front Compensation temperature range - + C (- + F) Release Tolerance at - C.. x I n Climatic Conditions Storage Temperature Range - + C (- + F) Operating Temperature Range - + C (- + F) Air moisture (Storage/Operating) % rel.humidity, non-condensing (per IEC/EN --), service g Vibration IEC/EN (vibration railways) category, class B IEC/EN - (vibration ships), service. g, all axes, Hz (per IEC/EN --), transport g Shock IEC/EN -- (Shock half-sinus), service ms > g all axes IEC/EN (shock railways) category, class B, g ms Max. Altitude m Pollution Degree Degree of Protection, with wires connected IPX -TA, -TB. A. kg -TB A. kg Approximate Weight (unpackaged) -TC A. kg -TD A. kg -T.P A. kg Standards IEC/EN -, --, --, UL, CSA C. No. Certifications CE, culus - Publication A-CAA-EN-P

253 Bulletin -T Bimetallic Overload Relays Specifications Circuit Diagrams + - Wiring Schematic + - DC Typical IEC Wiring Schematic Trip Characteristics These trip characteristics refer to IEC/EN -- and are average values from cold start at an ambient temperature of C. Trip time is pictured as a function of operating current. With the device at max. operating temperature, the trip time decreases to approximately % of the shown value. (a) Tripping characteristics -poles from the cold state (b) Tripping characteristics -poles from the cold state Cat. Nos. -TAA AA Overload Relays Cat. Nos. -TAA AB Overload Relays (a) (a) (b) (b) Publication A-CAA-EN-P -

254 Bulletin -T Bimetallic Overload Relays Specifications Cat. Nos. -TAB AC Overload Relays Cat. Nos. -TBC BC Overload Relays (b) (a) (a) (b) Tripping Time [s] Multiple of the set current [I e ] Cat. Nos. -TBC BC Overload Relays Cat. Nos. -TCC CC Overload Relays (a) (a) (b) (b) - Publication A-CAA-EN-P

255 Bulletin -T Bimetallic Overload Relays Specifications/Approximate Dimensions Cat. Nos. -TDC DC Overload Relays (b) (a) Approximate Dimensions Dimensions are shown in millimeters (inches). Dimensions are not intended for manufacturing purposes. Cat. Nos. -TAA AC Overload Relays Publication A-CAA-EN-P -

256 Bulletin -T Bimetallic Overload Relays Approximate Dimensions Dimensions are shown in millimeters (inches). Dimensions are not intended for manufacturing purposes. Cat. Nos. -TBC Overload Relays Cat. Nos. -TBC Overload Relays - Publication A-CAA-EN-P

257 Bulletin -T Bimetallic Overload Relays Approximate Dimensions Dimensions are shown in millimeters (inches). Dimensions are not intended for manufacturing purposes. Cat. Nos. -TCC Overload Relays Cat. Nos. -TDC Overload Relays Publication A-CAA-EN-P -

258 Bulletin -T Bimetallic Overload Relays Approximate Dimensions Dimensions are shown in millimeters (inches). Dimensions are not intended for manufacturing purposes. Cat. Nos. -TDCP P Overload Relays -TAPM DIN Rail/Panel Mounting Adapter (for use with Cat. Nos. -TAA AC and -TBC Overload Relays) M-C-N - Publication A-CAA-EN-P

259 Bulletin -T Bimetallic Overload Relays Approximate Dimensions Dimensions are shown in millimeters (inches). Dimensions are not intended for manufacturing purposes. -TAPM DIN Rail/Panel Mounting Adapter (for use with -TBC Overload Relays ) M-C-N -RA Reset Adapter -TR Remote Reset Solenoid Publication A-CAA-EN-P -

260 Bulletin -P Modular Protection System Product Overview Bulletin -P. A current range /V AC and /V DC Control Power Suitable for low- and medium-voltage applications Modular design with pluggable options Voltage input card Expansion I/O cards Communications cards, including DeviceNet RTD scanner module Conformal Coating options Energy Metering MWh MVARh Comprehensive protection functions Built-in keypad and backlit -line LCD Test/Reset button Status LEDs Front accessible RS port Three output relays Two configurable inputs NEMA (IP) compatible Table of Contents Product Selection... - Specifications... - Approximate Dimensions... - Standards Compliance IEC - IEC - Type Coordination CSA C., No. UL Certifications UL Listed (File No. E, Guide NKCR) CSA Certified (File No. LR) CE C-tick Description The Bulletin -P Modular Protection System for motors offers a compact, modular design that uniquely allows an installer to configure a device s functional capabilities to match the application requirements. Flexibility is also afforded by accommodating future expansion of the system as the application requirements grow. Finally, ease of installation is provided through pluggable options and accessories. Comprehensive Protection The Bulletin -P Modular Protection System offers in-depth motor protection coverage by monitoring the critical elements of motor current, line voltage and temperature. High resolution settings allow the installer to configure a precise envelope of protection to achieve maximum motor utilization while avoiding damage and downtime. ANSII No. Function ANSII No. Function Current Elements Temperature Elements Thermal Overload PTC Thermistor Current Imbalance/Phase Loss Stator RTD G/G Ground Fault Bearing RTD Undercurrent (Load Loss) Ambient and Other RTD Overcurrent (Load Jam) Power Elements Short Circuit Underpower Phase Reversal / Power Factor Frequency Reactive Power Overload Lockout Voltage Elements Motor Starting Elements Undervoltage Starts/Hour Overvoltage Stall - Acceleration Time Monitoring Phase Reversal Speed Switch Monitoring Frequency Reduced Voltage Starting Incomplete Start NOTE: Voltage, power, and energy elements are only available with the installation of the voltage input option card. Full Function Metering Current Elements Voltage Elements Power Elements Energy Elements Thermal Elements Phase Currents Line-Line Voltages Real Power (kw) Real Energy (MWh) % Thermal Capacity Utilization Average Current Avg. Line-Line Voltage Reactive Power (kvar) Reactive Energy Forward (MVARh) RTD Values % Motor Load Line-Neutral Voltages Apparent Power (kva) Reactive Energy Reverse (MVARh) Current Imbalance Avg. Line-Neutral Voltage Power Factor Apparent Energy (MVAh) Ground Fault Current Voltage Imbalance System Frequency System Frequency NOTE: Voltage and power elements are only available with the installation of the voltage input option card. - Publication A-CAA-EN-P

261 Bulletin -P Modular Protection System Product Overview Statistical Values The -P Modular Protection System provides the following valuable statistical values of motor operation: Elapsed time of operation Stopped time Percent of time running Number of starts Number of emergency starts Date and time of last trip reset Historical Data The -P Modular Protection System saves records for the five most recent trip events. Each trip event is summarized with record of the following prior to trip data capture: Event day and time Trip identification Phase and ground current values Voltage values Function Overview Description Trip Level Setting Range Trip Delay Setting Time Warning Level Setting Range Motor FLA I e. A Locked Rotor Current. x I e % TCU Locked Rotor Time s Short Circuit x I e. s x I e Ground Fault (Residual).. x I e. s.. x I e Ground Fault (Core balance). A. s. A Jam.. x I e. s.. x I e Undercurrent.. x I e s.. x I e Current Imbalance % s % Start Monitoring s RTD Temp C C Phase Reversal Disable, Enable Undervoltage.. x V nom s.. x V nom Overvoltage.. x V nom s.. x V nom Underpower kw s kw Power Factor.. s.. VAR kvar s kvar Frequency / Hz s / Hz Start Inhibit (Starts/hour) Speed Switch s Publication A-CAA-EN-P -

262 Bulletin -P Modular Protection System Product Selection Basic Unit Note: The minimum requirements for a complete basic system are one basic unit and one converter module. Description V AC/DC V DC -PD -PZ Converter Module.. A -MCM.. -MCM. A -MCM A -MCM -MCM A -MCMN Core Balance Ground Fault Sensor : -CBCT RTD Scanner Module RTD input channels with individual programming for Ω copper, Ω nickel, Ω nickel, or Ω platinum. Fiber optic connection to Basic Unit. Class I, Division, Group T. / V AC -PRD Voltage Input Card Monitoring of V A, V B, V C, and V N V AC Line to Neutral Max. -PVS Expansion I/O Card () Inputs () Output relays () ma analog output DeviceNet Communication Card DeviceLogix technology, Node address selection switches, ODVA conformance tested. V AC Rated Inputs V DC Rated Inputs -PIOD -PIOR -PDN Modbus RTU Communication Card -PMB MPS Explorer Software Operation Instructions Windows-based Configuration Tool Quick Start Guide Basic Unit User Manual DeviceNet Card -QS* -UM* -UM* Factory modification available. For conformal coating add CC to the cat. no. Example: -PZ becomes -PZ-CC. Please contact your local Rockwell Automation sales office or Allen-Bradley distributor. Detailed operation instructions ship separately from the product. Please contact your local Rockwell Automation sales office or Allen-Bradley distributor to obtain printed copies. NOTE: A no-charge download can be found at - Publication A-CAA-EN-P

263 Bulletin -P Modular Protection System Accessories Description Bus Bars for -MCM Three-piece set includes terminals and screws Terminal Shields Set of two Protection class IP per IEC and DIN For direct-on-line, reversing, two-speed, and wye-delta/star-delta assemblies M connections Set of three x x mm (/ x / x - / in.) ( A max.) Universally applicable Weight: g M connections Set of three x x mm (/ x / x - / in.) ( A max.) Universally applicable M lower connections Set of three For mounting on Bul. -D and -D contactors with conventional coil M lower connections Set of three For mounting on Bul. -D, -D conventional and Bul. -DE -DE contactors with electronic coil -MVM -MVM -MVS -MVS -D -DTS -D, -D, -D- E -D-E -D...-D -DTS -DTS Terminal Lugs Set of two Protection class IPX per IEC and DIN -D -DTB -D, -D, - DE DE, -EC_F, - EE_F -D...-D, -EC_G, -EFC, -EE_G -DTB -DTB Thermal Utilization Meter For display of percent thermal capacity utilized Requires the use of an Expansion I/O Card -MTUM DeviceNet Configuration Terminal Used to interface with objects on a DeviceNet network. Includes m communications cable (-CB). -EDN, -EC (all), -EC (all); /// ArmorStart, -P -DNCT meter communication cable, color-coded bare leads -DNCT -CB meter communication cable, microconnector (male) -DNCT -CM Panel Mount Adapter/Door Mount Bezel Kit -DNCT -DNCT-BZ EtherNet/IP Communications Auxiliary Single port -EC_C (all), -EC_C (all) -DNENCAT DeviceNet to EtherNet/IP linking device Dual port -EC_C (all), -EC_C (all) -DNENCATR Connection Cable (Replacement) Bul. -P to Bul. -MCM connection -MCA Publication A-CAA-EN-P -

264 Bulletin -P Modular Protection System Specifications Electrical Ratings Rated Operating Voltage U e IEC CSA/UL -MCM -MCM V AC V AC Main Circuits -MCM V AC V AC -MCM -MCM -MCMN V AC V AC Rated Impulse Strength U imp. kv kv kv Operating Current Range (A) -MCM -MCM -MCM -MCM -MCM -MCMN... Rated Continuous Thermal Current (A) Rated Saturation Current (A) Rated Frequency / Hz ± Hz Voltage Input Option Card Rated Operating Voltage U e V AC Max Operating Range.. U e Rated Continuous Voltage V AC Rated Insulation Voltage U i V AC Rated Impulse Strength U imp kv Rated Frequency / Hz ± Hz Control Circuits Supply Rated Supply Voltage U s V AC, V DC V DC Operating Range.. U e.. U e Rated Frequency (V AC) / Hz ± Hz Max. Power Consumption VA (AC) / W (DC) W Output Relays Type of Contacts Trip Form C SPDT Aux Aux Form A SPST N.O. Rated Insulation Voltage U i V AC Rated Operating Voltage U e V AC Rated Impulse Strength U imp kv Rated Thermal Current I the A Rated Operating V AC A Current I e V AC. A Contact Rating Designation B Utilization Category AC Contact Reliability V Inputs IN and IN IN, IN, and IN Rated Operating Voltage U e V AC/DC V AC/DC (-PIOD), V AC/DC (-PIOR) Operating Range.. U e Rated Insulation Voltage U i V AC Rated Impulse Strength U imp kv Rated Frequency (V AC) / Hz ± Hz On-State Voltage V V On-State Current (turn-on) ma ma Steady-State Current ma ma Off-State Voltage V V Off-State Current. ma ma Transition Voltage V V PTC Thermistor Input Type of Control Unit Mark A Max. No. of Sensors in Series Max. Cold Resistance of PTC Sensor Chain Ω Trip Resistance Ω ± Ω Reset Resistance Ω Short-Circuit Trip Resistance Ω ± Ω - Publication A-CAA-EN-P

265 Bulletin -P Modular Protection System Specifications Mechanical Ratings Ambient Temperature Humidity (Operating) Max. Altitude Vibration (Per IEC --) Shock (per IEC --) Terminal Screw Cross Section ( wire, stranded/solid) Terminal Screw Torque Environmental Storage Operation (open) Control Terminals - + C (- + F) - + C (- + F) %, non-condensing m G G M.. mm (# AWG). N m ( lb-in) Electromagnetic Compatibility Electrostatic Discharge Immunity RF Immunity Electrical Fast Transient/Burst immunity Surge Immunity Radiated Emissions Conducted Emissions Test Level kv Air Discharge, kv Contact Discharge Performance Criteria Test Level V/m Performance Criteria Test Level kv (Power), kv (Control and Comms) Performance Criteria Test Level Performance Criteria requires the DUT to experience no degradation or loss of performance. Environment. RTD Scanner Module Rated Supply Voltage U s Operating Range Rated Frequency Max. Power Consumption Rated Insulation Voltage U i Rated Impulse Strength U imp kv L-E, kv L-L Performance Criteria Supply Class A Class A /V AC.. U s / Hz ± Hz Pollution Degree Ambient Temperature Humidity (Operating) Max. Altitude Vibration (per IEC --) Shock (per IEC --) Environmental Storage Operation (open) VA V AC kv - + C (- + F) - + C (- + F) %, Non-condensing No. of Input Channels Type Inputs Compatibility CU, NI, NI, PT (per IEC : ) m Range - + C Accuracy ± C Open Circuit Detection > C Short-Circuit Detection < - C Terminal Screw Cross Section ( wire, stranded/solid) Torque Degree of Protection Control Terminals G G -wire M.. mm (# AWG).. N m (.. lb in.) IP Publication A-CAA-EN-P -

266 Bulletin -P Modular Protection System Specifications Trip Curves Trip time [s] Locked Rotor Time in Seconds Trip times are for cold (ambient) motor, without preload Relay Settings Service Factor, SF =. Acceleration Factor, TD =. Run State Time Constant, RTC = Auto Motor Locked Rotor Current, LRC =.I e Multiples of Full Load Amps - Publication A-CAA-EN-P

267 Bulletin -P Modular Protection System Wiring Diagrams L L L Ground Ct M ~ MCM RTD Scanner L L L N Voltage Input Option MCM T T S S Analog Output I+ I- AUX AUX AUX AUX COM Expansion I/O Option IN IN IN DNET Option Mod- Bus Option BK V- BU CAN_L SH WH RD COM Y- Y Y Y Y Y- Y Rx DRAIN -P CAN_H V+ +TX -TX +RX -RX SH Modular Protection System Relay IN IN TRIP AUX/ ALARM AUX A A + /V AC/DC - m Max. Fiber Option RTD RTD RTD -P RTD Scanner RTD RTD RTD V AC V AC RTD RTD RTD RTD RTD RTD Open Delta Voltage Connection Publication A-CAA-EN-P -

268 Bulletin -P Modular Protection System Approximate Dimensions Dimensions are in millimeters (inches). Dimensions are not intended to be used for manufacturing purposes. Max. (.). (.) Four #-/ Mounting Screws with Washers Gasket. (.) Rear View -P. (.). (.). (.) (.) Core Balance Current Transformer Optional Test Winding Secondary Winding dia. dia. -CBCT - Publication A-CAA-EN-P

269 Bulletin -P Modular Protection System Approximate Dimensions Dimensions are in millimeters. Dimensions are not intended to be used for manufacturing purposes. Bulletin -MCM Converter Module -MCM...-MCM -MCM -MCMN Dimensions a b c c ø d d d d ø e ø e e b b -MCM, -MCM, -MCM.. x. mm. -MCM... -MCM.. M -MCMN.. M For snapping on to DIN Rail (EN - x or x.). -MCM; with bus bar or max. ø mm aperture for looping the conductors. With -MVM. -MVM See below for bus bars for -MCM. Bus Bars Terminal Dimensions Bottom Top -MVM M M / / Publication A-CAA-EN-P -

270 Bulletin -P Modular Protection System Approximate Dimensions Dimensions are in millimeters (inches). Dimensions are not intended to be used for manufacturing purposes. RTD Scanner. (.). (.) FRONT. (.) SIDE. (.) dia.. (dia..). (.) BOTTOM - Publication A-CAA-EN-P

271 Bulletin A MCS Mounting System Catalog Number Explanation Bulletin A MCS Mounting System Modularity makes planning easy Factory-assembled starters Easy starter exchange Flexible field assembly of starters DOL starters Reversing starters Star-Delta starters Soft starters Inverter Complete range of accessories mounting methods On busbars On mm and mm top hat rails Screw fixing Table of Contents Product Selection... ISO Busbar Modules... - Standard Busbar Modules... - Panel Mounting Modules... - Accessories... - Specifications... - Standards Compliance UL CSA. No. EN Certifications CE culus Examples given in this section are for reference purposes. This basic explanation should not be used for product selection; not all combinations will produce a valid catalog number. A G S R R a b c d e f g Code C G Code C S M Code F Code S M L a Type Description Compact standard busbar module with wires Standard busbar module with wires b Length Description Compact ( mm) Short ( mm) Medium ( mm) a Type Description Standard busbar module with terminals b Length Description Short ( mm) Medium ( mm) Long ( mm) c Width Code Description mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm c Width Code Description mm mm mm mm mm mm mm Code R S M Code R S H Blank Code R S V d Top Hat Rail Description RA-specific plastic rail Standard plastic rail Metal rail e Bottom Hat Rail Description RA-specific rail Standard rail Rail carrier No bottom rail A F S R S d Top Hat Rail Description RA-specific plastic rail Standard plastic rail Screw mounting variable positions Current Rating Code Description A A A A f Current Rating Code Description Blank A (no wires) A A A A Code H a b c d e f g Code S Blank Code Blank T B f g Frame Size Description For U-H or M-H e Bottom Hat Rail Description Standard rail No bottom rail g Terminal Location Description Terminals on top Terminals on top Terminals on bottom Publication A-CAA-EN-P -

272 Bulletin A MCS Mounting System Catalog Number Explanation Examples given in this section are for reference purposes. This basic explanation should not be used for product selection; not all combinations will produce a valid catalog number. Code S Code S M a Type Description ISO (isolation) busbar module with wires b Length Description Short ( mm) Medium ( mm) A S S R R a b c d e f c Width Code Description mm mm mm Code R S Code R S d Top Hat Rail Description RA-specific plastic rail Standard plastic rail e Bottom Hat Rail Description RA-specific rail Standard plastic rail Current Rating Code Description Blank A (no wires) A A f Code W Code S M L a Type Description Panel mounting modules b Length Description Short ( mm) Medium ( mm) Long ( mm) A W S R R P Width Code Description mm mm a b c d e f c d Top (Middle) Hat Rail Code Description Code R RA-specific plastic rail P e Bottom Hat Rail Code Description R RA-specific plastic rail f Terminal Location Description With PE terminal A C U H B a b c d e Code C Code U a Type Description Busbar module for specific devices b Length Description Universal U or M Code H J L c Width Description Frame size H Frame size J Frame sizes K and L d Current Rating Code Description A A A Code Blank T B e Terminal Location Description Rear connecting studs (suitable for top or bottom) Wires on top Wires on bottom - Publication A-CAA-EN-P

273 Bulletin A MCS Mounting System Product Selection ISO Busbar Modules -part construction Device Adapter Plate (or DAP) (carrying the starter) snaps onto the base of the module Base module remains on busbar when exchanging starters, providing isolation from live parts Test position with load circuit isolated Designed for use with control plug (order separately) Modules with current ratings supply the load current by means of wire connections matched to Bulletin -M motor protection circuit breakers Modules can form bigger platforms using the connection clips (see accessories) For plugging on mm or mm thick busbars Meets feeder circuit spacings per UL A Description ISO Busbar Modules with Wires Short Length Wires on DAP for electrical connection mm tall Top Hat Rails: R = MCS-Specific top hat rail Rated Thermal Current I th [A] Without electrical connections Width [mm] Pkg. Qty. Rails A-SSRR A-SSRR R A-SSRR A-SSRR A-SSR R A-SSR ISO Busbar Modules with Wires Medium Length Wires on DAP for electrical connection mm tall Top Hat Rails: R = MCS-Specific top hat rail; S = Standard top hat rail Without electrical connections A-SMRS A-SMRS R+S A-SMRS A-SMRS A-SMS A-SMS S A-SMS Publication A-CAA-EN-P -

274 Bulletin A MCS Mounting System Product Selection Standard Busbar Modules Modules plug directly onto the busbar Suitable for use with control plug Modules with current ratings supply the load current by means of wire or terminal connections Modules can form bigger platforms using the connection clips (see accessories) For plugging on mm or mm thick busbars Meets feeder circuit spacings per UL A Description Standard Busbar Modules with Wires Compact Length With wires for electrical connection, mm tall For use with A-CTU Compact Busbar Supports Top Hat Rails: R = MCS-Specific top hat rail Standard Busbar Modules with Wires Short Length With wires for electrical connection, mm tall Top Hat Rails: R = MCS-Specific top hat rail S = Standard top hat rail Standard Busbar Modules with Wires Medium Length With wires for electrical connection mm tall Top Hat Rails: R = MCS-Specific top hat rail S = Standard top hat rail Standard Busbar Modules with Terminals Short Length mm tall With terminals for electrical connection S = Standard top hat rail Standard Busbar Modules with Terminals Medium Length mm tall With terminals for electrical connection S = Standard top hat rail Standard Busbar Module with Terminals on Top mm tall With box terminals on top for electrical connection Wire size mm (/ AWG) Universal mounting capability with sliding pocket nuts (M) Standard Busbar Module with Terminals on Top mm tall With box terminals on top for electrical connection Wire size mm ( MCM) Universal mounting capability with sliding pocket nuts (M) Standard Busbar Module with Terminals on Bottom mm tall With box terminals on bottom for electrical connection Wire size mm (/ AWG) Universal mounting capability with sliding pocket nuts (M) Also requires a U-H-DRA DIN Rail adaptor. Also requires a A-FTS spacing adapter for ULA applications. Rated Thermal Current I th [A] Width [mm] Rails Pkg. Qty. A-CCR R A-CCR (For -CMN) (For M-H, U-H, and UE-H) Without electrical connections (e.g., for reversing starters) Without electrical connections (e.g., for reversing starters) A-GSRR A-GSRR A-GSRR R A-GSRR A-GSRR A-GSRR A-GSM M A-GSM A-GSM A-GSMH M A-GSMH A-GSR R A-GSR A-GSS S A-GSS A-GMRS A-GMRS R+S A-GMRS A-GMRS A-GMS A-GMS S A-GMS A-FSS A-FSS S A-FSS A-FSS A-FSS A-FMSS A-FMSS S A-FMSS A-FMSS A-FMSS A-FSVT A-FLVT A-FSVB - Publication A-CAA-EN-P

275 Bulletin A MCS Mounting System Product Selection Circuit Breaker Mounting Modules for Bulletin U and M Circuit Breakers Modules plug or clamp directly onto the busbar For plugging on mm or mm thick busbars Description Standard Busbar Module with Flexible Connecting Wires for electrical connection For use with Bulletin U circuit breaker (H-Frame) For use with Bulletin M circuit breaker (H-Frame) Meets feeder circuit spacings per UL A Standard Busbar Module with Rear Connecting Studs for electrical connection For use with Bulletin U circuit breakers (J-, K- or L-Frame) For use with Bulletin M circuit breakers (J-, K- or L-Frame) Meets feeder circuit spacings per UL A For Use With U H-Frame M H-Frame (Top feed) U H-Frame M H-Frame (Bottom feed) U J-Frame M J-Frame (Top or bottom feed) U K-Frame U L-Frame M L-Frame (Top or bottom feed) Rated Thermal Current I th [A] Width [mm] Pkg. Qty. A-CUHT A-CUHB A-CUJ A-CUL Panel Mounting Modules Mounts on () mm Top Hat Rails, () mm Top Hat Rail, or screw mounts Suitable for use with control plug Description Mounting Module Short Length mm tall Top hat rails: R = MCS-specific top hat rail For -component starters Mounting Module Medium Length mm tall Top hat rails: R = MCS-specific top hat rail For -component starters using -ED or -EE overload relays Mounting Module Long Length mm tall Top hat rails: R = MCS-specific top hat rail For -component starters using -EC, -ED or -EE overload relays Width [mm] Rails Pkg. Qty. R A-WSRR A-WSRR R A-WMRR A-WMRR R A-WLRR A-WLRR Publication A-CAA-EN-P -

276 Bulletin A MCS Mounting System Product Selection Busbar Components Description Ampere Rating Height x Width (mm) Pkg. Qty. x A-BA x A-BA x A-BA Busbar x A-BA mm length Tinned copper busbar x A-BA x A-BA x A-BA x A-BA x A-BC x A-BC x A-BC Busbar x A-BC mm length Tinned copper busbar x A-BC x A-BC x A-BC x A-BC x A-BN x A-BN x A-BN Busbar x A-BN mm length Tinned copper busbar x A-BN x A-BN x A-BN x A-BN Double-T Busbar TT A-BTNZ mm length Tin-plated copper busbar TT A-BTNZ Ratings shown are based upon tested conditions at an ambient temperature of C and a busbar temperature of C. Only available in North America. IEC applications only - Publication A-CAA-EN-P

277 Bulletin A MCS Mounting System Product Selection Busbar Components, Continued Description Busbar Support Compact mm pole center spacing -pole with inside mounting holes (meets feeder circuit spacings per ULA) includes end cover Busbar Support mm pole center spacing -pole with inside mounting holes (meets feeder circuit spacings per ULA) Busbar [mm] x or x,, x or,, x Busbar Support mm pole center spacing -pole with inside mounting holes (approved for branch circuit applications per UL) x Busbar Support mm pole center spacing -pole with inside mounting holes Busbar Support -pole (meets feeder circuit spacings per ULA) includes PE and N labels or x,, x or,, x Pkg. Qty. A-CTU A-TU A-TR A-TR A-TR Busbar Support with terminals mm pole center spacing Terminals for electrical connections. mm (# AWG) -pole Double-T Busbar Support For double-t busbars mm spacing (meets feeder circuit spacings per UL A) Description Busbar End Cover Prevents contact with the busbar ends and prevents busbars from sliding. The end cover can easily be clipped on the busbar support. x or x A-TRF Pkg. No. of Poles Qty. -pole A-T -pole A-T -pole (for use with Cat. Nos. A-TU or A-TRE A-TR) -pole (for use with A-TRE A-TR) -Pole (for use with Cat. No. A-T double T busbar supports) A-TE Publication A-CAA-EN-P -

278 Bulletin A MCS Mounting System Product Selection Busbar Components, Continued Description Busbar [mm] Pkg. Qty. Supply Module -pole For use with Compact Busbar Supports, A-CTU mm ( / AWG) round conductors and flat conductors up to x x. mm wide (meets feeder circuit spacings per UL A) x or x A-CVN Supply Module -pole For use with Compact Busbar Supports, A-CTU mm ( AWG MCM) round conductors and flat conductors up to x x mm wide (meets feeder circuit spacings per UL A) x or x A-CVN Supply Module -pole mm ( / AWG) mm wide (meets feeder circuit spacings per UL A) x or x Supply Module -pole mm ( AWG MCM) mm wide (meets feeder circuit spacings per UL A) Supply Module -pole mm (/ AWG MCM) mm wide Supply Module -pole for round conductors mm ( MCM) mm wide Supply Module -pole for flat conductors up to x mm equivalent to mm ( MCM) round conductor ampacity mm wide Supply Module -Pole (set of terminals) for round conductors mm ( MCM) mm wide ( single poles of mm each) (meets feeder circuit spacings per UL A) Requires A-BK, A-BK or A-BK terminal cover Supply Module -Pole (set of terminals) for flat conductors up to x mm equivalent to mm ( MCM) mm wide ( single poles of mm each) (meets feeder circuit spacings per UL A) Requires A-BK, A-BK or A-BK terminal cover Single Terminals Single terminals for supplying busbars. mm (# AWG) Single Terminals Single terminals for supplying busbars mm (# AWG) Single Terminals Single terminals for supplying busbars mm (# / AWG) Single Terminals Single terminals for supplying busbars mm ( # MCM) Description Brace Terminals -pole For the connection of flat or flexible copper busbars (meets feeder circuit spacings per ULA) or TT x or x or TT x or x or TT x Max. Terminal Space (W x H) [mm] Busbar [mm] x x or TT A-VN A-VN A-VN A-VNR A-VNF A-VUR A-VUF A-VS x A-VS x A-VS x A-VS x A-VS x A-VS x A-VS Pkg. Qty. A-VBF x A-VBF x A-VBF - Publication A-CAA-EN-P

279 Bulletin A MCS Mounting System Product Selection Busbar Components, Continued Description Busbar [mm] Pkg. Qty. Terminal Cover Finger protection when busbars supplied with single terminals. Attaches directly to busbars. Height: mm, Width: mm x or x A-BK Terminal Cover Finger protection when bus bars are supplied by A-VU_ supply module Attaches directly to bus bars Height: mm Depth: mm Terminal Cover Kit Customized terminal cover width using end supports, front shroud and top/bottom shroud Shrouds can be cut to desired width Attaches directly to bus bars Busbar Connector System distance: mm Busbar Connector System distance: mm Busbar Connector System distance: mm Busbar Connector System distance: mm Double-T Busbar Connectors For connection of double-t busbar racks with same dimensions, Width: mm Double-T Busbar Connectors For connection of double-t busbar racks with same dimensions, Width: mm Double-T Busbar Connectors For connection of double-t busbar racks with same dimensions, Width: mm Phase Separator For UL installation of end-to-end busbar connections -pole, including two mounts For use with Busbar Connectors For use with A- VCA, -VCB, -VCE, - VCC, -VCF, -VCD, - VCG Width: mm A-BK Width: mm A-BK Width: mm A-BK Left and right support Front shroud, mm Top/bottom shroud, mm x or x x or x Double-T Width: mm Width: mm Width: mm A-BKH A-BKC A-BKS A-VCA A-VCB A-VCC A-VCD A-VCE A-VCF A-VCG A-PS A-PS A-PS Busbar Shroud Cover Compact x mm Covers all three busbars For use with Compact Busbar Supports, A-CTU Busbar Shroud Holder Compact Two required per section of Busbar Shroud Cover For use with Busbar Shroud Cover Compact, A-CBCF Busbar Shroud Cover x mm Covers all three busbars Busbar Shroud Holder Two required per section of Busbar Shroud Cover Single Pole Busbar Covers Snap-on profile for single busbars for protection against electric shock. Length: m, can be cut to length. Busbar Cover For double-t busbars Length: m; can be cut to length Compartment Section Fits to A-T double-t busbar supports Adjusts the installation depth mm x or x x or x A-CBCF A-CBCFH A-BCF A-BCFH x A-BS x A-BS A-BCT A-BST Double-T mm A-BST Panel Busbar Shroud Provides isolation between busbar and panel (required for feeder-circuit applications per UL A) x mm All A-BCR Publication A-CAA-EN-P -

280 Bulletin A MCS Mounting System Product Selection Busbar Components, Continued Description Busbar Support Spacer Compact Fits under Compact Busbar Supports, A-CTU Adds mm to the depth of the Busbar Support Fulfills phase-to-ground spacing requirements for ULA applications Panel Busbar Shroud, A-BCR, not required Busbar Support Spacer Compact Fits under Compact Busbar Supports, A-TU Adds mm to the depth of the Busbar Support Fulfills phase-to-ground spacing requirements for ULA applications Panel Busbar Shroud, A-BCR, not required Busbar [mm] x or x,, x or,, x Pkg. Qty. A-CTS A-TS Busbar Fuse Switch -pole switch disconnector with fuses Fuse base, -pole, Class CC For UL Class CC fuses mm wide Withstand rating ka (V) With spring terminals (meets feeder circuit spacings per ULA) Fuse base, -pole, Class CC with LED For UL Class CC fuses mm wide Withstand rating ka (V) With spring terminals (meets feeder circuit spacings per ULA) Spacer Module Connectable on both sides mm wide Description For fuse links D, for D fuses use reducer For x NFC cylindrical fuses Pkg. Qty. V AC A A-NF V AC A A-NF V A A-NFHCC V A A-NFHCCL A-NFAD Reducer D reducer for D fuses For A-NF Class J Busbar Fuse Base For mounting on mm wide and double-t busbars Top or bottom connection For UL Class J fuses The use of spacer module A-NFAD is recommended for a continuous load above A. A-NFAR A A-NFJ A A-NFJ A A-NFJ - Publication A-CAA-EN-P

281 Busbar Components, Continued Description NH Fuse Switch Disconnector Connection bottom or top Size for plugging on, mm thick and double-t busbars. Sizes and conversion kit A-NFAFR is required for plugging on mm thick busbars. Size only for plugging on mm and double-t busbars. NH Fuse Switch Disconnector -pole, bottom connections Multi-function handle Lockable in OFF position with padlocks FLAG indicator shows the switch status Fuse can be changed without tools Applicable as main isolator according to IEC/EN - (main switch) Non-Fused Switch Disconnector w/ External Operator -pole, bottom connections Multi-function handle Lockable in OFF position with padlocks FLAG indicator shows the switch status Fuse can be changed without tools Applicable as main isolator according to IEC/EN - (main switch) (additional extension shaft and door handle required) Pilot Switch For NH-fuse switch disconnectors Signaling ON/OFF position of lid V AC/ A; V DC/ A Wedge Clamp Terminal For NH-fuse switch disconnectors Connection accessories Size x mm Size x mm Size x mm Size x mm Size x mm Size x mm Size x mm Size x mm Size x mm Size x mm Size x mm Bulletin A MCS Mounting System Box terminals mm Product Selection Pkg. Qty. A A-NFD M mm A A-NFD M mm A A-NFD M mm A A-NFD Box terminals mm A M mm A Box terminals mm A- NFDSB A- NFDSB A A-NSB M mm A A-NSB Size (Series B) A-NFASNC Size (Series B) A-NFASNC Size A-NFASNFD mm A-NFVF mm A-NFVF mm A-NFVF Conversion Kit For NH-fuse switch disconnector to reduce size and on to mm busbars Cover for Cable Lugs For NH fuse switch disconnecor Can be clipped on bottom or top Rotary Operating Handle For use with A-NSB or A-NSB non-fused switch disconnector Operating Shaft For use with A-NDN or A-NDRY rotary operating handle Size and A-NFAFR Size A-NFACA Size A-NFACA Size A-NFACA Size A-NFACA Black IP A-NDN Red/Yellow IP A-NDRY mm A-ND mm A-ND Publication A-CAA-EN-P -

282 Bulletin A MCS Mounting System Accessories Description Hat (DIN) Rails MCS Top Hat Rail (Plastic) Slides onto mounting modules and is then fixed with screws. Has notches for MCS components (prevents movement of components when used with vertical busbar). Hat (DIN) Rails Standard Top Hat Rail (Plastic) Slides onto mounting modules and is then fixed with screws. Control Plug Pull-apart terminal block allows fast and simple disconnection of control wiring. Snaps on the support of the mobile device rail. Composed of plug holder, male and female parts. Control Plug Holder Suitable for use with -, -, or -pole control plugs. Width [mm] Pkg. Qty. A-AHR A-AHR A-AHR A-AHS A-AHS Pole A-APC Pole A-APC Pole A-APC A-APH Spacer module for compact busbar modules For mm spacing of mounting modules. Connection clips ( A-AK) are included for attaching the spacer module to the mounting modules. mm long A-CASB A-ASB Spacer module for Standard or ISO busbar modules For mm spacing of mounting modules. Connection clips ( A-AK) are included for attaching the spacer module to the mounting modules. mm long Spacer Module for Panel Mounting modules For spacing of load feeders by mm e.g. for improved cooling. Connection clips ( A-AK) are included for attaching the spacer module to the mounting modules mm long A-ASB A-ASW Connection Clip For joining base of mounting modules. Micro Switch N.C. Contact Only for ISO Modules. Automatically drops out the contactor when the DAP (Device Adapter Plate) (carrying the starter) is unplugged from the base of the ISO busbar module. Spacing Adapter For use with A standard busbar mounting modules with terminals A-FS or A-FM Required for ULA applications A-AK A-AS A-FTS - Publication A-CAA-EN-P

283 Bulletin A MCS Mounting System Specifications Module Data Iso Modules Standard Modules with Wire Connections Standard Modules with Box Terminals A-S A-G, A-CC A-F Rated current at C I th [A] stranded solid [mm] [AWG] [mm] [AWG] [mm] [AWG] / / / MCM MCM Insulation rating of conductors [ C] The admissible load of a complete system depends on the system topography and the application parameters. Factors of influence are ambient temperature, air circulation, busbar load, distribution of busbar load, mix of modules and switchgear components. Supply Modules stranded solid Laminated copper [mm] [AWG] [mm] [AWG] A- TRF.. Tightening Torque [N m/lb in] Class J Bus Bar Fuse Bases A- VN, A- CVN / / A- CVN MCM MCM A- VN MCM MCM Supply Modules A-VN No. / MCM No. / MCM A- VNR MCM MCM [mm] / / / A- VNF x x x x A- VUR MCM MCM A- VUF x x x x / / / / / Class J Bus Bar Fuse Bases stranded solid [mm] [AWG] [mm] [AWG] A-NFJ A-NFJ A-NFJ / / MCM MCM MCM MCM Tightening Torque [N m/lb in] / / / Single Terminals stranded solid [mm] [AWG] [mm] [AWG] Single Terminals A-VS, A-VS A-VS, A-VS A-VS, A-VS.. / / Laminated copper. Conductor [mm] x x. x x.. Conductor [mm] x x. Clamping area Width x Height [mm]. x.. x x Tightening Torque [N m/lb in] / / / Publication A-CAA-EN-P -

284 Bulletin A MCS Mounting System Specifications Short-Circuit Current Ratings (support spacing at mm) Description Max. Circuit Bkr. C. B. Rating SCCR Max. Class CC, J or T SCCR Max. Class CC, J or T SCCR V V Fuse V Fuse V A-B* x Copper Bus Bar U-JD-D A ka ka A ka A ka A-B* x Copper Bus Bar U-JD-D A ka ka A ka A ka A-B* x Copper Bus Bar U-KD-D A ka ka A ka A ka A-B* x Copper Bus Bar U-KD-D A ka ka A ka A ka A-B* A-B* x Copper Bus Bar x Copper Bus Bar U-KD-D A ka ka A ka A ka U-LD-D A ka A ka A ka U-KD-D A ka ka A ka A ka U-LD-D A ka ka A ka A ka A-BT*NZ TT Copper Bus Bar U-MD-D A ka ka A Class T ka A ka A-TU Bus Bar Support U-KD-D A ka ka A ka A ka U-LD-D A ka ka A ka A ka A-T Bus Bar Support U-MD-D A ka ka A Class T ka A ka A-TRE BB Support End Cover U-KD-D A ka ka A ka A ka U-LD-D A ka ka A ka A ka A-TE BB Support End Cover U-MD-D A ka ka A Class T ka A ka A-VN Supply Module U-JD-D A ka ka A ka A ka A-VN Supply Module U-KD-D A ka ka A ka A ka U-LD-D A ka ka A ka A ka A-VN Supply Module U-KD-D A ka ka A ka A ka A-VNR Supply Module U-KD-D A ka ka A ka A ka A-VUR Supply Module U-KD-D A ka ka A ka A ka A-VSF Profile Terminals U-MD-D A ka ka A Class T ka A ka A-CUHB Circuit Breaker Module U-HC-D A ka ka N/A N/A N/A N/A A-CUHT Circuit Breaker Module U-HC-D A ka ka N/A N/A N/A N/A A-CUJ Circuit Breaker Module U-JD-D A ka ka N/A N/A N/A N/A A-CUL A-SS* A-SM* A-GS* A-GM* A-FS* A-FM* A-SS* A-SM* A-GS* A-GM* Circuit Breaker Module Bus Bar Module Bus Bar Module U-KD-D A ka ka N/A N/A N/A N/A U-LD-D A ka ka N/A N/A N/A N/A M-CE-B. A ka ka A ka A ka M-CE-C A ka ka A ka A ka M-CE-C A ka ka A ka A ka M-DE-C A ka ka A ka A ka M-FE-C A ka ka M-FE-C A ka ka Busbars (required quality) Material E-CU blank or tinned Busbar widths or mm thick [mm],,,, Tolerance of thickness [mm] +./-. Corner radius [mm]. Tolerance of center spacing [mm] +./-. Standard DIN General Data Main Circuits Rated insulation voltage U i Acc. to IEC, EN [V] Acc. to UL, NEMA, CSA, EEMAC [V] Rated impulse withstand voltage U imp [kv] Rated frequency [Hz] Pollution degree Ambient temperature Operation [ C] - + Transport and storage [ C] - + Protection class - Modules and busbars IP - Modules and busbars mounted on plate, connected conductors and IP usage of busbar covers - Iso-Modules with device adapter plate removed, from front IP B (finger proof) Standards and Norms IEC/EN - Certifications CE, culus Recognized - Publication A-CAA-EN-P

285 Bulletin A MCS Mounting System Specifications Control Circuits Control plugs Rated insulation voltage U i Acc. to IEC, EN [V] Acc. to UL, NEMA, CSA, EEMAC [V] Rated impulse withstand voltage U imp [kv] Rated current at C ambient temperature I th [A] Weight [g] MCS Iso Busbar Module [g] A-SMRS A-SMS A-SMRS A-SMRS A-SMS A-SMRS A-SMS A-SSR A-SSRR A-SSR A-SSRR A-SSRR A-SSRR MCS Standard Busbar Module [g] A-CCR A-CCR A-FMSS A-FMSS A-FMSS A-FMSS A-FMSS A-FSS A-FSS A-FSS A-FSS A-FSS A-GMRS A-GMRS A-GMRS A-GMRS A-GMS A-GMS A-GMS A-GSR A-GSRR A-GSR A-GSRR A-GSRR A-GSRR A-GSS A-GSS A-GSM A-GSM A-GSM MCS Standard Busbar Module > A [g] A- FLVT A- FSVB A- FSVT MCS Mounting Module [g] A-WLRR A-WLRRP A-WLRR A-WLRRP A-WMRR A-WMRRP A-WMRR A-WMRRP A-WSRR A-WSRRP A-WSRR A-WSRRP Micro switch Rated insulation voltage U i Acc. to IEC, EN [V] Acc. to UL, NEMA, CSA, EEMAC [V] Rated current Suitable for switching contactors -C AC-coil-voltage V DC-coil-voltage V Busbar Components [g] Busbar Components [g] A-BCF A-NFHCC A-BCFH A-NFHCCL A-BCR A-NFJ A-BCT A-NFJ A-BK A-NFJ A-BK A-NFVF A-BK A-NFVF A-BK A-NFVF A-BKC A-PS A-BKH A-PS A-BKS A-PS A-BS A-T A-BS A-T A-BST A-TE A-BST A-TR A-CBCF A-TR A-CBCFH A-TRE A-CTS A-TRF A-CTU A-TR A-CVN A-TRE A-CVN A-TS A-NSB A-TU A-NSB A-VBF A-ND A-VBF A-ND A-VBF A-NDN A-VCA A-NDRY A-VCB A-NF A-VCC A-NF A-VCD A-NFACA A-VCE A-NFACA A-VCF A-NFACA A-VCG A-NFACA A-VN A-NFAD A-VN A-NFAFR A-VNF A-NFAR A-VNR A-NFASNC A-VN A-NFASNC A-VS A-NFASNF A-VS A-NFASNFD A-VS A-NFDSB A-VS A-NFD A-VS A-NFD A-VS A-NFDSB A-VS A-NFD A-VUF A-NFD A-VUR Accessories [g] A-AHR A-AHR A-AHR A-AHS A-AHS A-AK A-APC A-APC A-APC A-APH A-AS A-ASB A-ASS A-ASW A-CASB A-FTS Publication A-CAA-EN-P -

286 Bulletin A MCS Mounting System Approximate Dimensions Dimensions are in millimeters. Dimensions are not intended for manufacturing purposes. A-S ISO Busbar Modules A B C D E A-SSRR. A-SSRR. A-SSRR A-SSRR A-SSR. A-SSR A-SMRS A-SMRS A-SMRS A-SMRS A-SMS A-SMS A-SMS NOTE: FREE SPACE REQUIRED TO GET THE DEVICE ADAPTER PLATE IN PARKING POSITION. - Publication A-CAA-EN-P

287 Bulletin A MCS Mounting System Approximate Dimensions Dimensions are in millimeters. Dimensions are not intended for manufacturing purposes. A-GS, Standard Busbar Modules with Wires a d c... e A B C D E A-CCR A-CCR A-GMRS A-GMRS A-GMRS A-GMRS A-GMS A-GMS A-GMS A-GSRR. A-GSRR. A-GSRR. A-GSRR. A-GSRR A-GSRR A-GSR. A-GSR A-GSS A-GSS NOTE: FREE SPACE REQUIRED TO PLUG/UNPLUG MODULE INTO THE BUSBARS. b A-GSM..... A-GSM A-GSM. A-GSM = A-GSM = Publication A-CAA-EN-P -

288 Bulletin A MCS Mounting System Approximate Dimensions Dimensions are in millimeters. Dimensions are not intended for manufacturing purposes. A-F Standard Busbar Modules with Terminals c d a b WIRE SIZES a b c d mm AWG A-FSS # A-FSS # A-FSS # A-FSS # A-FSS # A-FMSS # A-FMSS # A-FMSS # A-FMSS # A-FMSS # NOTE:. FREE SPACE REQUIRED TO PLUG/UNPLUG MODULE INTO THE BUSBARS. - Publication A-CAA-EN-P

289 Bulletin A MCS Mounting System Approximate Dimensions Dimensions are in millimeters. Dimensions are not intended for manufacturing purposes. A-W Panel Mount Modules f... c oben/top d. a e. b a b c d e f A-WSRR(P). A-WSRR(P) A-WMRR(P). A-WMRR(P) A-WLRR(P). A-WLRR(P) Publication A-CAA-EN-P -

290 Bulletin A MCS Mounting System Approximate Dimensions Dimensions are in millimeters. Dimensions are not intended for manufacturing purposes. Supply Modules Cat. Nos. A-VN and A-VN ( A-VN) ( A-VN) - Publication A-CAA-EN-P

291 Bulletin A MCS Mounting System Approximate Dimensions Dimensions are in millimeters. Dimensions are not intended for manufacturing purposes. Supply Modules, Continued Cat. Nos. A-VN, -VNR, and -VNF Publication A-CAA-EN-P -

292 Bulletin A MCS Mounting System Approximate Dimensions Dimensions are in millimeters. Dimensions are not intended for manufacturing purposes. Supply Modules, Continued Cat. Nos. A-VUR and -VUF - Publication A-CAA-EN-P

293 Bulletin A MCS Mounting System Approximate Dimensions Dimensions are in millimeters. Dimensions are not intended for manufacturing purposes. Standard Busbar Modules Universal Adapters. L - L Nm L L - L- L- Nm oben oben L L L- Nm L oben oben L L- Nm L- L- max. max.. A-FSVB A-FSVT L - L Nm L L Nm L L max.. A-FLVT Publication A-CAA-EN-P -

294 Bulletin A MCS Mounting System Approximate Dimensions Dimensions are in millimeters. Dimensions are not intended for manufacturing purposes. Busbars A B C A B C A-BA A-BB A-BA A-BB A-BA A-BB A-BA A-BB A-BA A-BN A-BA A-BN A-BA A-BN A-BA A-BN A-BB A-BN A-BB A-BN A-BB A-BN A-BB A-BN A-BTNZ A-BTNZ Cat. Nos. A-BCF, A-BCFH Busbar Cover and Cover Holder A-BCF A-BCFH - Publication A-CAA-EN-P

295 Bulletin A MCS Mounting System Approximate Dimensions Dimensions are in millimeters. Dimensions are not intended for manufacturing purposes. A-TR Busbar Supports and End Covers A-TR A-TRF A-TRE A-TU.. A-TR A-TRE A-TR A-T M A-T A-TE Publication A-CAA-EN-P -

296 Bulletin A MCS Mounting System Approximate Dimensions Dimensions are in millimeters. Dimensions are not intended for manufacturing purposes. A-CUJ A-CUL - Publication A-CAA-EN-P

297 Dimensions are in millimeters. Dimensions are not intended for manufacturing purposes. A-NFJ Bulletin A MCS Mounting System Approximate Dimensions c L L L FIRM TOP/OBEN OPEN l OPEN LOOSE e b p L L L x x d f a q a b c d e f l p q x A-NFJ... A-NFJ. A-NFJ.... Publication A-CAA-EN-P -

298 Bulletin S/S and T/T Open Type Starters Product Overview Bulletin S/S and T/T Combination Starters Bulletin S/S Combination Starters are -Component Starters Bulletin M Motor Protection Circuit Breakers (MPCBs) Bulletin -C/-C Contactors Bulletin T/T Combination Starters are -Component Starters Bulletin M Motor Circuit Protectors (MCPs) Bulletin -C/-C Contactors Bulletin -E Electronic Overload Relays Current range. A culus Listed for control and protection of motor loads Factory-installed options include: Lockable handles Control plugs (pull-apart terminal blocks) Auxiliary and trip indication contacts Surge suppressors Standards Compliance UL CSA., No. IEC -, - Certifications culus Listed (File No. E, Guide NKJH, NKJH) CE Marked Standard Busbar Mount ISO Busbar Mount Panel Mount S/S T/T S/S T/T S/S T/T AC Coils DC Coils culus IEC/CE Components M (MPCB) M (MCP) -C Contactor Overload Relay Max Current A A A A A A Control Plug Optional Optional Standard Standard Optional Optional Overload Protection M (MPCB) -E Plus/E Busbar mount / mm busbars Panel Mount () Hat (DIN) Rail mount () Screw mount - Publication A-CAA-EN-P

299 Bulletin S/S and T/T Open Type Starters Product Overview Coordination Ratings for Bulletin S and T Starters Bulletin S starters consist of a Bulletin M Motor Protection Circuit Breaker (MPCB) and a Bulletin C Contactor. These starters are referred to as -Component Starters. Bulletin T starters consist of a Bulletin M Motor Circuit Protector (MCP), a Bulletin C Contactor and a Bulletin Overload Relay. These staters are referred to as -Component Starters. All of these combination starters may provide the branch-circuit, short-circuit protection, overload protection and magnetic control for each individual motor circuit. Additional short-circuit protection is not required for the protection of the individual motor circuits. Additionally, these starters are available with Type or Type coordination, as Type F Combination Motor Controllers (CMCs), or as Type E Self-Protected Combination Motor Controllers.These different coordination levels between the Bulletin M circuit breakers and the Bulletin C contactors are illustrated below, along with the IEC and UL/CSA approvals for each type of starter. IEC Type coordination * The contactor or starter may be inoperative and require replacement in the event of a short-circuit. IEC Type coordination * No damage to the overload relay or other parts may occur in the event of a short-circuit, except welding of the contactor is permitted, as long as the contacts can be easily separated without significant deformation (such as with a screwdriver). UL Type F Combination Motor Controller * No damage to the motor protection circuit breaker is allowed in the event of a short-circuit. The contactor may be inoperative and require replacement. UL Type E Self-Protected Combination Motor Controller * No damage to the contactor, overload relay, or other parts may occur in the event of a short-circuit. M MPCB -C Contactor M MCP S Starter UL/CSA Approvals * Type F CMC * Type E Self-Protected CMC IEC Approvals * Type * Type -C Contactor T Starter UL/CSA Approvals * Type E Self-Protected CMC IEC Approvals * Type * Type Bulletin S Overload The M MPCBs (C..F frames) are UL/CSA listed as Type E Manual, Self-Protected Combination Motor Controllers. This allows for the Bulletin S starters to be UL/CSA listed as Combination Motor Controllers (Type F). Some of the Bulletin S starters are also available with Type coordination between the M and the C. Additionally, some of the Bulletin S starters have also been UL/CSA listed as Type E Self-Protected Combination Motor Controllers, providing an additional level of coordination between the M and the -C. Bulletin T The M MCPs (C..F frames) are UL/CSA listed as Manual Motor Controllers. This allows for the Bulletin T starters to be UL/CSA listed only as Type E Self-Protected Combination Motor Controllers. This listing then allows for the Bulletin T starters to provide the short-circuit protection, overload protection and magnetic control for individual motor circuits and insures a high level of coordination between the M and the C. Publication A-CAA-EN-P -

300 Bulletin S/S Open Type Starters Product Overview Bulletin S/S IEC Starters Non-reversing (Bul. S) and reversing (Bul. S) starters Current range. A culus Listed Type F Combination Motor Controllers Type Coordination Type Coordination culus Listed Type E Self-Protected Combination Motor Controllers Assemblies consist of Bulletin M MPCBs and Bulletin -C contactors mounted on Bulletin A busbar or panel mounting modules Installation and wiring of Control Plug for auxiliary contacts is standard on ISO Busbar Mount starters. Factory installed options include: Installation of Lockable Twist Knob. Installation of Spacing Adapter for Type E or Type F Starters. Electronic Interface and Surge Suppressors for coil on -C. Additional auxiliary contacts for -C. Additional auxiliary or trip contacts on M. Table of Contents Product Selection... - Modifications... - Aproximate Dimensions... - Standards Compliance UL CSA., No. IEC -, - Certifications culus Listed (File No. E, Guide NKJH, NKJH) CE Marked Bulletin S Panel Mount starter with front-mount auxiliary contacts and red/yellow lockable knob, as factory-installed options. Bulletin S Standard Busbar Mount starter with front-mount auxiliary contacts and control plug, as factory-installed options. Group Motor, Type E, and Type F Combination Motor Controllers (UL/CSA) The Bulletin S/S motor controllers can be used in a variety of applications. These starters can be used in group motor applications or as a stand-alone product without any additional short-circuit protection in the motor branch circuits. Most of the Bul. M-C/D motor protection circuit breakers, used in the Bul. S/S starters, are culus Listed as a Type E manual selfprotected combination motor controller. Although there are many tests involved, one of the critical tests provide a self-protected combination motor controller that must pass to perform electrical operations and an additional mechanical operations after a short circuit. By definition, a Type F combination motor controller consists of a Type E manual self-protected combination motor controller and a magnetic or solid-state motor controller (such as a Bul. -C contactor or an SMC). As with a manual Type E self-protected combination motor controller, additional short-circuit protection for the individual motor circuits is not required. A combination of a Bul. M manual self-protected combination motor controller and a -C contactor can be listed as a Type E selfprotected combination motor controller. In this case, the M and -C must pass the additional electrical and mechanical operations test. In some cases, this may require oversizing either component to achieve weld-free performance and meet the additional life requirements. - Publication A-CAA-EN-P

301 Bulletin S/S Open Type Starters Product Overview Multiple Motor Installation with Bul. S Combination Starters Bulletin S Combination Starters provide Individual Branch Circuit Protection for each motor. They consist of a Bulletin M Motor Protection Circuit Breaker and a -C Contactor. These combination starters may provide the branch circuit, short-circuit protection, overload protection, and magnetic control for each individual motor circuit. Additional short-circuit protection is not required for the protection of the individual motor circuits, leaving only the requirement for protection of the feeder circuit conductors by an upstream protective device. Below is an example that illustrates installations involving multiple motors using Bulletin S Combination Starters. Bulletin S Combination Starters are UL/CSA listed as Type F Combination Motor Controllers or as Type E Self-Protected Combination Motor Controllers. These starters may provide the branch-circuit protection for each individual motor circuit. Feeder Circuit conductors Conductors to each motor sized normally at % of motor FLA Publication A-CAA-EN-P -

302 Bulletin S/S Open Type Starters Catalog Number Explanation Examples given in this section are for reference purposes. This basic explanation should not be used for product selection; not all combinations will produce a valid catalog number. S A T D C A C KN a b c d e f g h i a Bulletin Number Code Description S DOL Starter with MPCB S Rev. Starter with MPCB b Contactor Size Code Description A -C B -C C -C D -C E -C F -C G -C H -C J -C K -C c Style Code Description On A ISO Busbar S Module(s) On A Standard Busbar T Module(s) On A Panel Mounting W Module(s) d AC Coil Voltage Code Description Q V AC, Hz R V AC, Hz J V AC, Hz K V AC, Hz KJ V AC, / Hz V AC, Hz /V AC, V Hz W V AC, Hz V AC, Hz /V AC, X Hz Y V AC, Hz KY V AC, / Hz V AC, Hz /...V KP AC, Hz V AC, Hz /V AC, D Hz KD V AC, / Hz P V AC, Hz KL...V AC, / Hz H V AC, Hz L...V AC, Hz V AC, Hz /V AC, A Hz F...V AC, Hz KF V AC, / Hz VA...V AC, Hz V AC, Hz /V AC, T Hz E V AC, Hz...V AC, Hz /V N AC, Hz KN V AC, / Hz G...V AC, Hz V AC, Hz /V AC, B Hz M V AC, Hz V AC, Hz /V AC, C Hz d, Continued DC Coil Voltage Contactor Size A-G Contactor Size H-J Code Code Description ZR DR...V DC ZQ DQ V DC ZJ DJ V DC DJ DJ V DC with Diode EJ V DC Electronic ZW DW V DC ZY DY V DC ZZ DZ V DC ZB DB V DC ZG DG V DC ZE DE V DC ZD DD V DC ZP DP V DC ZS DS V DC ZA DA V DC ZF DF V DC ZT DT V DC e Contactor Aux. Contacts Code Description N.O. N.O. + N.C. Circuit Breaker Frame Size Code Description C C Frame D D Frame F F Frame G CMN Frame f g Circuit Breaker Current Range Code Description A... A A... A A... A A... A B... A B... A B... A B... A B... A C... A C... A C... A C... A C... A C... A C... A C... A h Circuit Breaker Aux. and Trip Contacts for M Select only one from each group Bottom Front Code Description X Without Aux. Trip Contacts A N.C. Aux. Contact B N.O. Aux. Contact N.O. + N.C. Aux. C Contact D N.O. Aux. Contacts E N.C. Aux. Contacts N.O. (SC+OL) + N.C. R Aux. Contact N.O. (SC+OL) + N.O. S Aux. Contact Right Side Code Description N.C. (SC+OL) + N.C. K (SC) N.O. (SC+OL) + N.O. L (SC) N.C. (SC+OL) + N.O. M (SC) N.O. (SC+OL) + N.C. N (SC) Q N.O. (SC) + N.C. (SC) Circuit Breaker Aux. and Trip Contacts for -CMN Select only one from each group Bottom Front Code Description Without Aux. and Trip X Contacts N.O. + N.C. Aux. C Contact D N.O. Aux. Contact E N.C. Aux. Contact Top Front Code Description K N.C. (OL) + N.C. (SC) L N.O. (OL) + N.O. (SC) M N.C. (OL) + N.O. (SC) N N.O. (OL) + N.C. (SC) i Modifications, Accessories Circuit Breaker Accessories Code Description TE Type E Adder Module KN Lockable Twist Knob, Black Lockable Twist Knob, KY Red/Yellow Code JE D R V Coil Accessories Description Electronic Interface(s) Surge Suppressor Diode Surge Suppressor RC Surge Suppressor Varistor Additional Contactor Auxiliaries (Side Mount) Code Description S N.C. S N.O. S N.O. + N.C. S N.O. Additional Contactor Auxiliaries (Front Mount) Code Description F N.O. + N.C. F N.O. F N.O. + N.C. Mounting System Accessories Code Description Micro Switch (ISO Modules MS only) Top Mount Control Plug (pull-apart terminal block with spring clamp SP terminals) for control circuit (Standard Busbar and Panel Mounting Modules only) Standard for starters on ISO Modules; no code required. - Publication A-CAA-EN-P

303 Bulletin S/S Open Type Starters Product Selection & Coordination Ratings Bulletin S/S Combination Starters UL/CSA in Group Motor Installation Motor Current Adjustment Range [A] Hp Ratings as a UL Motor Controller in Group Motor Installations UL/CSA Hp and Coordination Ratings ( Hz) Max. Fuse or Circuit Breaker per NEC [A] Max. Short-Circuit Current [ka] Type Coordination Type Coordination V AC V AC V AC V AC V AC V AC V AC V AC C-Frame with -C/-C Contactors on Standard Bus Bar Modules DOL Starters Reversing Starters.. S-AT -CAC S-AT -CAC.. S-AT -CAC S-AT -CAC.. S-AT -CAC S-AT -CAC.. S-AT -CAC S-AT -CAC.. / / S-AT -CBC S-AT -CBC.. / /... S-AT -CBC S-AT -CBC.. / /.../ / -/ S-AT -CBC S-AT -CBC.. / /... -/ S-AT -CBC S-AT -CBC.....-/... S-AT -CBC S-AT -CBC.. -/ -/ S-AT -CCC S-AT -CCC.. -/ / -/... S-BT -CCC S-BT -CCC.. -/ S-BT -CCC S-BT -CCC / S-CT -CCC S-CT -CCC /... S-DT -CCC S-DT -CCC.....-/ S-DT -CCC S-DT -CCC.. -/ S-DT -CCC S-DT -CCC D-Frame with -C/-C Contactors on Standard Bus Bar Modules.. / /.../ / -/ S-AT -DBC S-AT -DBC.. / /.../ / -/ S-DT -DBC S-DT -DBC.. / /... -/ S-AT -DBC S-AT -DBC.. / /... -/ S-DT -DBC S-DT -DBC.. -/ S-AT -DBC S-AT -DBC.. -/ S-ET -DBC S-ET -DBC.. -/ -/ S-AT -DCC S-AT -DCC.. -/... -/ -/ S-BT -DCC S-BT -DCC.. -/... -/ -/ S-CT -DCC S-CT -DCC.. -/... -/ -/ S-ET -DCC S-ET -DCC.. -/ S-BT -DCC S-BT -DCC.. -/ S-CT -DCC S-CT -DCC.. -/ S-DT -DCC S-DT -DCC.. -/ S-ET -DCC S-ET -DCC.. -/ S-DT -DCC S-DT -DCC.. -/ S-ET -DCC S-ET -DCC.. -/ S-DT -DCC S-DT -DCC.. -/ -/ S-ET -DCC S-ET -DCC F-Frame with -C/-C Contactors on Standard Bus Bar Modules.. -/... -/ -/ S-ET -FCC S-ET -FCC.. -/ S-ET -FCC S-ET -FCC.. -/ S-ET -FCC S-ET -FCC.. -/ -/ S-ET -FCC S-ET -FCC.. -/ -/ S-GT -FCC S-GT -FCC.. -/ S-ET -FCC S-ET -FCC.. -/ S-FT -FCC S-FT -FCC.. -/ S-GT -FCC S-GT -FCC.. -/ S-HT -FCC S-HT -FCC.. S-FT -FCC S-FT -FCC.. S-GT -FCC S-GT -FCC..... S-HT -FCC S-HT -FCC..... S-JT -FCC S-JT -FCC CMN-Frame with -C/-C Contactors on Standard Bus Bar Modules.. S-HT -GCC S-HT -GCC.. S-JT -GCC S-JT -GCC.. S-KT -GCC S-KT -GCC.. S-JT -GCC S-JT -GCC.. S-KT -GCC S-KT -GCC Horsepower ratings shown in the table are for reference. Final selection of the starter depends upon the actual motor full-load current. Coil voltage code see page - Publication A-CAA-EN-P -

304 Bulletin S/S Open Type Starters Product Selection & Coordination Ratings UL/CSA in Group Motor Installation, Continued Motor Current Adjustment Range [A] Hp Ratings as a UL Motor Controller in Group Motor Installations Coil voltage code see page - UL/CSA Hp and Coordination Ratings ( Hz) Max. Fuse or Circuit Breaker per NEC [A] Max. Short-Circuit Current [ka] Type Coordination Type Coordination V AC V AC V AC V AC V AC V AC V AC V AC C-Frame with -C/-C Contactors on ISO Bus Bar Modules DOL Starters Reversing Starters.. S-AS -CAC S-AS -CAC.. S-AS -CAC S-AS -CAC.. S-AS -CAC S-AS -CAC.. S-AS -CAC S-AS -CAC.. / / S-AS -CBC S-AS -CBC.. / /... S-AS -CBC S-AS -CBC.. / /.../ / -/ S-AS -CBC S-AS -CBC.. / /... -/ S-AS -CBC S-AS -CBC.....-/... S-AS -CBC S-AS -CBC.. -/ -/ S-AS -CCC S-AS -CCC.. -/ / -/... S-BS -CCC S-BS -CCC.. -/ S-BS -CCC S-BS -CCC / S-CS -CCC S-CS -CCC /... S-DS -CCC S-DS -CCC.....-/ S-DS -CCC S-DS -CCC.. -/ S-DS -CCC S-DS -CCC D-Frame with -C/-C Contactors on ISO Bus Bar Modules.. / /.../ / -/ S-AS -DBC S-AS -DBC.. / /.../ / -/ S-DS -DBC S-DS -DBC.. / /... -/ S-AS -DBC S-AS -DBC.. / /... -/ S-DS -DBC S-DS -DBC.. -/ S-AS -DBC S-AS -DBC.. -/ S-ES -DBC S-ES -DBC.. -/ -/ S-AS -DCC S-AS -DCC.. -/... -/ -/ S-BS -DCC S-BS -DCC.. -/... -/ -/ S-CS -DCC S-CS -DCC.. -/... -/ -/ S-ES -DCC S-ES -DCC.. -/ S-BS -DCC S-BS -DCC.. -/ S-CS -DCC S-CS -DCC.. -/ S-DS -DCC S-DS -DCC.. -/ S-ES -DCC S-ES -DCC.. -/ S-DS -DCC S-DS -DCC.. -/ S-ES -DCC S-ES -DCC.. -/ S-DS -DCC S-DS -DCC.. -/ -/ S-ES -DCC S-ES -DCC F-Frame with -C/-C Contactors on ISO Bus Bar Modules.. -/... -/ -/ S-ES -FCC S-ES -FCC.. -/ S-ES -FCC S-ES -FCC.. -/ S-ES -FCC S-ES -FCC.. -/ -/ S-ES -FCC S-ES -FCC.. -/ -/ S-GS -FCC S-GS -FCC.. -/ S-ES -FCC S-ES -FCC.. -/ S-FS -FCC S-FS -FCC.. -/ S-GS -FCC S-GS -FCC.. S-FS -FCC S-FS -FCC.. S-GS -FCC S-GS -FCC Horsepower ratings shown in the table are for reference. Final selection of the starter depends upon the actual motor full-load current. - Publication A-CAA-EN-P

305 Bulletin S/S Open Type Starters Product Selection & Coordination Ratings UL/CSA in Group Motor Installation, Continued Motor Current Adjustment Range [A] Hp Ratings as a UL Motor Controller in Group Motor Installations UL/CSA Hp and Coordination Ratings ( Hz) Max. Fuse or Circuit Breaker per NEC Max. Short-Circuit Current [ka] Type Coordination Type Coordination V AC V AC V AC V AC V AC V AC V AC V AC C-Frame with -C/-C Contactors on Panel Mounting Modules DOL Starters Reversing Starters.. S-AW -CAC S-AW -CAC.. S-AW -CAC S-AW -CAC.. S-AW -CAC S-AW -CAC.. S-AW -CAC S-AW -CAC.. / / S-AW -CBC S-AW -CBC.. / /... S-AW -CBC S-AW -CBC.. / /.../ / -/ S-AW -CBC S-AW -CBC.. / /... -/ S-AW -CBC S-AW -CBC.....-/... S-AW -CBC S-AW -CBC.. -/ -/ S-AW -CCC S-AW -CCC.. -/ / -/... S-BW -CCC S-BW -CCC.. -/ S-BW -CCC S-BW -CCC / S-CW -CCC S-CW -CCC /... S-DW -CCC S-DW -CCC.....-/ S-DW -CCC S-DW -CCC.. -/ S-DW -CCC S-DW -CCC D-Frame with -C/-C Contactors on Panel Mounting Modules.. / /.../ / -/ S-AW -DBC S-AW -DBC.. / /.../ / -/ S-DW -DBC S-DW -DBC.. / /... -/ S-AW -DBC S-AW -DBC.. / /... -/ S-DW -DBC S-DW -DBC.. -/ S-AW -DBC S-AW -DBC.. -/ S-EW -DBC S-EW -DBC.. -/ -/ S-AW -DCC S-AW -DCC.. -/... -/ -/ S-BW -DCC S-BW -DCC.. -/... -/ -/ S-CW -DCC S-CW -DCC.. -/... -/ -/ S-EW -DCC S-EW -DCC.. -/ S-BW -DCC S-BW -DCC.. -/ S-CW -DCC S-CW -DCC.. -/ S-DW -DCC S-DW -DCC.. -/ S-EW -DCC S-EW -DCC.. -/ S-DW -DCC S-DW -DCC.. -/ S-EW -DCC S-EW -DCC.. -/ S-DW -DCC S-DW -DCC.. -/ -/ S-EW -DCC S-EW -DCC F-Frame with -C/-C Contactors on Panel Mounting Modules.. -/... -/ -/ S-EW -FCC S-EW -FCC.. -/ S-EW -FCC S-EW -FCC.. -/ S-EW -FCC S-EW -FCC.. -/ -/ S-EW -FCC S-EW -FCC.. -/ -/ S-GW -FCC S-GW -FCC.. -/ S-EW -FCC S-EW -FCC.. -/ S-FW -FCC S-FW -FCC.. -/ S-GW -FCC S-GW -FCC.. S-FW -FCC S-FW -FCC.. S-GW -FCC S-GW -FCC Horsepower ratings shown in the table are for reference. Final selection of the starter depends upon the actual motor full-load current. Coil voltage code see page - Publication A-CAA-EN-P -

306 Bulletin S/S Open Type Starters Product Selection & Coordination Ratings UL/CSA as a UL Type F Combination Motor Controller Motor Current Adjustment Range [A] Hp Ratings as a UL Type F Combination Motor Controller Coil voltage code see page - UL/CSA Hp and Coordination Ratings ( Hz) Type Coordination Max. Short-Circuit Current [ka] Type Coordination V AC V AC V AC V AC Y/V AC Y/V AC Y/V AC Y/V AC C-Frame with -C/-C Contactors on Standard Bus Bar Modules DOL Starters Reversing Starters.. S-AT -CAC-TE S-AT -CAC-TE.. S-AT -CAC-TE S-AT -CAC-TE.. S-AT -CAC-TE S-AT -CAC-TE.. S-AT -CAC-TE S-AT -CAC-TE.. / / S-AT -CBC-TE S-AT -CBC-TE.. / /... S-AT -CBC-TE S-AT -CBC-TE.. / /.../ / -/ S-AT -CBC-TE S-AT -CBC-TE.. / /... -/ S-AT -CBC-TE S-AT -CBC-TE.....-/... S-AT -CBC-TE S-AT -CBC-TE.. -/ S-AT -CCC-TE S-AT -CCC-TE.. -/ / S-BT -CCC-TE S-BT -CCC-TE.. -/ S-BT -CCC-TE S-BT -CCC-TE / S-CT -CCC-TE S-CT -CCC-TE / S-DT -CCC-TE S-DT -CCC-TE.....-/ S-DT -CCC-TE S-DT -CCC-TE.. S-DT -CCC-TE S-DT -CCC-TE D-Frame with -C/-C Contactors on Standard Bus Bar Modules.. / /.../ / -/ S-AT -DBC-TE S-AT -DBC-TE.. / /.../ / -/ S-DT -DBC-TE S-DT -DBC-TE.. / /... -/ S-AT -DBC-TE S-AT -DBC-TE.. / /... -/ S-DT -DBC-TE S-DT -DBC-TE.. -/ S-AT -DBC-TE S-AT -DBC-TE.. -/ S-ET -DBC-TE S-ET -DBC-TE.. -/ -/ S-AT -DCC-TE S-AT -DCC-TE.. -/... -/ -/ S-BT -DCC-TE S-BT -DCC-TE.. -/... -/ -/ S-CT -DCC-TE S-CT -DCC-TE.. -/... -/ -/ S-ET -DCC-TE S-ET -DCC-TE.. -/ S-BT -DCC-TE S-BT -DCC-TE.. -/ S-CT -DCC-TE S-CT -DCC-TE.. -/ S-DT -DCC-TE S-DT -DCC-TE.. -/ S-ET -DCC-TE S-ET -DCC-TE.. -/ S-DT -DCC-TE S-DT -DCC-TE.. -/ S-ET -DCC-TE S-ET -DCC-TE.. -/ S-DT -DCC-TE S-DT -DCC-TE.. -/ -/ S-ET -DCC-TE S-ET -DCC-TE F-Frame with -C/-C Contactors on Standard Bus Bar Modules.. -/... -/ -/ S-ET -FCC-TE S-ET -FCC-TE.. -/ S-ET -FCC-TE S-ET -FCC-TE.. -/ S-ET -FCC-TE S-ET -FCC-TE.. -/ -/ S-ET -FCC-TE S-ET -FCC-TE.. -/ -/ S-GT -FCC-TE S-GT -FCC-TE.. -/ S-ET -FCC-TE S-ET -FCC-TE.. -/ S-FT -FCC-TE S-FT -FCC-TE.. -/ S-GT -FCC-TE S-GT -FCC-TE.. -/ S-HT -FCC-TE S-HT -FCC-TE.. S-FT -FCC-TE S-FT -FCC-TE.. S-GT -FCC-TE S-GT -FCC-TE.. S-HT -FCC-TE S-HT -FCC-TE.. S-JT -FCC-TE S-JT -FCC-TE Horsepower ratings shown in the table are for reference. Final selection of the starter depends upon the actual motor full-load current. This starter is not valid for application at this horsepower and voltage. - Publication A-CAA-EN-P

307 Bulletin S/S Open Type Starters Product Selection & Coordination Ratings UL/CSA as a UL Type F Combination Motor Controller, Continued Motor Current Adjustment Range [A] Hp Ratings as a UL Type F Combination Motor Controller Coil voltage code see page - UL/CSA Hp and Coordination Ratings ( Hz) Type Coordination Max. Short-Circuit Current [ka] Type Coordination V AC V AC V AC V AC Y/V AC Y/V AC Y/V AC Y/V AC C-Frame with -C/-C Contactors on ISO Bus Bar Modules DOL Starters Reversing Starters.. S-AS -CAC-TE S-AS -CAC-TE.. S-AS -CAC-TE S-AS -CAC-TE.. S-AS -CAC-TE S-AS -CAC-TE.. S-AS -CAC-TE S-AS -CAC-TE.. / / S-AS -CBC-TE S-AS -CBC-TE.. / /... S-AS -CBC-TE S-AS -CBC-TE.. / /.../ / -/ S-AS -CBC-TE S-AS -CBC-TE.. / /... -/ S-AS -CBC-TE S-AS -CBC-TE.....-/... S-AS -CBC-TE S-AS -CBC-TE.. -/ S-AS -CCC-TE S-AS -CCC-TE.. -/ / S-BS -CCC-TE S-BS -CCC-TE.. -/ S-BS -CCC-TE S-BS -CCC-TE / S-CS -CCC-TE S-CS -CCC-TE / S-DS -CCC-TE S-DS -CCC-TE.....-/ S-DS -CCC-TE S-DS -CCC-TE.. S-DS -CCC-TE S-DS -CCC-TE D-Frame with -C/-C Contactors on ISO Bus Bar Modules.. / /.../ / -/ S-AS -DBC-TE S-AS -DBC-TE.. / /.../ / -/ S-DS -DBC-TE S-DS -DBC-TE.. / /... -/ S-AS -DBC-TE S-AS -DBC-TE.. / /... -/ S-DS -DBC-TE S-DS -DBC-TE.. -/ S-AS -DBC-TE S-AS -DBC-TE.. -/ S-ES -DBC-TE S-ES -DBC-TE.. -/ -/ S-AS -DCC-TE S-AS -DCC-TE.. -/... -/ -/ S-BS -DCC-TE S-BS -DCC-TE.. -/... -/ -/ S-CS -DCC-TE S-CS -DCC-TE.. -/... -/ -/ S-ES -DCC-TE S-ES -DCC-TE.. -/ S-BS -DCC-TE S-BS -DCC-TE.. -/ S-CS -DCC-TE S-CS -DCC-TE.. -/ S-DS -DCC-TE S-DS -DCC-TE.. -/ S-ES -DCC-TE S-ES -DCC-TE.. -/ S-DS -DCC-TE S-DS -DCC-TE.. -/ S-ES -DCC-TE S-ES -DCC-TE.. -/ S-DS -DCC-TE S-DS -DCC-TE.. -/ -/ S-ES -DCC-TE S-ES -DCC-TE F-Frame with -C/-C Contactors on ISO Bus Bar Modules.. -/... -/ -/ S-ES -FCC-TE S-ES -FCC-TE.. -/ S-ES -FCC-TE S-ES -FCC-TE.. -/ S-ES -FCC-TE S-ES -FCC-TE.. -/ -/ S-ES -FCC-TE S-ES -FCC-TE.. -/ -/ S-GS -FCC-TE S-GS -FCC-TE.. -/ S-ES -FCC-TE S-ES -FCC-TE.. -/ S-FS -FCC-TE S-FS -FCC-TE.. -/ S-GS -FCC-TE S-GS -FCC-TE.. S-FS -FCC-TE S-FS -FCC-TE.. S-GS -FCC-TE S-GS -FCC-TE Horsepower ratings shown in the table are for reference. Final selection of the starter depends upon the actual motor full-load current. This starter is not valid for application at this horsepower and voltage. Publication A-CAA-EN-P -

308 Bulletin S/S Open Type Starters Product Selection & Coordination Ratings UL/CSA as a UL Type F Combination Motor Controller, Continued Motor Current Adjustment Range [A] Hp Ratings as a UL Type F Combination Motor Controller Coil voltage code see page - UL/CSA Hp and Coordination Ratings ( Hz) Type Coordination Max. Short-Circuit Current [ka] Type Coordination V AC V AC V AC V AC Y/V AC Y/V AC Y/V AC Y/V AC C-Frame with -C/-C Contactors on Panel Mounting Modules DOL Starters Reversing Starters.. S-AW -CAC-TE S-AW -CAC-TE.. S-AW -CAC-TE S-AW -CAC-TE.. S-AW -CAC-TE S-AW -CAC-TE.. S-AW -CAC-TE S-AW -CAC-TE.. / / S-AW -CBC-TE S-AW -CBC-TE.. / /... S-AW -CBC-TE S-AW -CBC-TE.. / /.../ / -/ S-AW -CBC-TE S-AW -CBC-TE.. / /... -/ S-AW -CBC-TE S-AW -CBC-TE.....-/... S-AW -CBC-TE S-AW -CBC-TE.. -/ S-AW -CCC-TE S-AW -CCC-TE.. -/ / S-BW -CCC-TE S-BW -CCC-TE.. -/ S-BW -CCC-TE S-BW -CCC-TE / S-CW -CCC-TE S-CW -CCC-TE / S-DW -CCC-TE S-DW -CCC-TE.....-/ S-DW -CCC-TE S-DW -CCC-TE.. S-DW -CCC-TE S-DW -CCC-TE D-Frame with -C/-C Contactors on Panel Mounting Modules.. / /.../ / -/ S-AW -DBC-TE S-AW -DBC-TE.. / /.../ / -/ S-DW -DBC-TE S-DW -DBC-TE.. / /... -/ S-AW -DBC-TE S-AW -DBC-TE.. / /... -/ S-DW -DBC-TE S-DW -DBC-TE.. -/ S-AW -DBC-TE S-AW -DBC-TE.. -/ S-EW -DBC-TE S-EW -DBC-TE.. -/ -/ S-AW -DCC-TE S-AW -DCC-TE.. -/... -/ -/ S-BW -DCC-TE S-BW -DCC-TE.. -/... -/ -/ S-CW -DCC-TE S-CW -DCC-TE.. -/... -/ -/ S-EW -DCC-TE S-EW -DCC-TE.. -/ S-BW -DCC-TE S-BW -DCC-TE.. -/ S-CW -DCC-TE S-CW -DCC-TE.. -/ S-DW -DCC-TE S-DW -DCC-TE.. -/ S-EW -DCC-TE S-EW -DCC-TE.. -/ S-DW -DCC-TE S-DW -DCC-TE.. -/ S-EW -DCC-TE S-EW -DCC-TE.. -/ S-DW -DCC-TE S-DW -DCC-TE.. -/ -/ S-EW -DCC-TE S-EW -DCC-TE F-Frame with -C/-C Contactors on Panel Mounting Modules.. -/... -/ -/ S-EW -FCC-TE S-EW -FCC-TE.. -/ S-EW -FCC-TE S-EW -FCC-TE.. -/ S-EW -FCC-TE S-EW -FCC-TE.. -/ -/ S-EW -FCC-TE S-EW -FCC-TE.. -/ -/ S-GW -FCC-TE S-GW -FCC-TE.. -/ S-EW -FCC-TE S-EW -FCC-TE.. -/ S-FW -FCC-TE S-FW -FCC-TE.. -/ S-GW -FCC-TE S-GW -FCC-TE.. S-FW -FCC-TE S-FW -FCC-TE.. S-GW -FCC-TE S-GW -FCC-TE Horsepower ratings shown in the table are for reference. Final selection of the starter depends upon the actual motor full-load current. This starter is not valid for application at this horsepower and voltage. - Publication A-CAA-EN-P

309 Bulletin S/S Open Type Starters Product Selection & Coordination Ratings UL/CSA as a UL Self Protected Type E Combination Motor Controller Motor Current Adjustment Range [A] UL/CSA Hp and Coordination Ratings ( Hz) Hp Ratings as a UL Self Protected Type E Combination Motor Controller Max. Short-Circuit Current [ka] DOL Starters Reversing Starters V AC V AC V AC V AC Y/V AC Y/V AC C-Frame with -C/-C Contactors on Standard Bus Bar Modules.. S-AT -CAC-TE S-AT -CAC-TE.. S-AT -CAC-TE S-AT -CAC-TE.. S-AT -CAC-TE S-AT -CAC-TE.. S-AT -CAC-TE S-AT -CAC-TE.. / / S-AT -CBC-TE S-AT -CBC-TE.. / /... S-AT -CBC-TE S-AT -CBC-TE.. / /.../ / -/ S-AT -CBC-TE S-AT -CBC-TE.. S-AT -CBC-TE S-AT -CBC-TE.. S-AT -CBC-TE S-AT -CBC-TE.. S-AT -CCC-TE S-AT -CCC-TE.. S-BT -CCC-TE S-BT -CCC-TE.. S-BT -CCC-TE S-BT -CCC-TE.. S-CT -CCC-TE S-CT -CCC-TE.. S-DT -CCC-TE S-DT -CCC-TE.. S-DT -CCC-TE S-DT -CCC-TE.. S-DT -CCC-TE S-DT -CCC-TE D-Frame with -C/-C Contactors on Standard Bus Bar Modules.. / /.../ / -/ S-AT -DBC-TE S-AT -DBC-TE.. / /.../ / -/ S-DT -DBC-TE S-DT -DBC-TE.. S-AT -DBC-TE S-AT -DBC-TE.. / /... -/ S-DT -DBC-TE S-DT -DBC-TE.. S-AT -DBC-TE S-AT -DBC-TE.. -/ S-ET -DBC-TE S-ET -DBC-TE.. S-AT -DCC-TE S-AT -DCC-TE.. S-BT -DCC-TE S-BT -DCC-TE.. S-CT -DCC-TE S-CT -DCC-TE.. -/... -/ -/ S-ET -DCC-TE S-ET -DCC-TE.. S-BT -DCC-TE S-BT -DCC-TE.. S-CT -DCC-TE S-CT -DCC-TE.. S-DT -DCC-TE S-DT -DCC-TE.. -/ S-ET -DCC-TE S-ET -DCC-TE.. S-DT -DCC-TE S-DT -DCC-TE.. -/ S-ET -DCC-TE S-ET -DCC-TE.. S-DT -DCC-TE S-DT -DCC-TE.. -/ -/ S-ET -DCC-TE S-ET -DCC-TE F-Frame with -C/-C Contactors on Standard Bus Bar Modules.. -/... -/ -/ S-ET -FCC-TE S-ET -FCC-TE.. -/ S-ET -FCC-TE S-ET -FCC-TE.. -/ S-ET -FCC-TE S-ET -FCC-TE.. -/ -/ S-ET -FCC-TE S-ET -FCC-TE.. -/ -/ S-GT -FCC-TE S-GT -FCC-TE.. -/ S-ET -FCC-TE S-ET -FCC-TE.. -/ S-FT -FCC-TE S-FT -FCC-TE.. -/ S-GT -FCC-TE S-GT -FCC-TE.. -/ S-HT -FCC-TE S-HT -FCC-TE.. S-FT -FCC-TE S-FT -FCC-TE.. S-GT -FCC-TE S-GT -FCC-TE.. S-HT -FCC-TE S-HT -FCC-TE.. S-JT -FCC-TE S-JT -FCC-TE Horsepower ratings shown in the table are for reference. Final selection of the starter depends upon the actual motor full-load current. This starter is not valid for application at this horsepower and voltage. Coil voltage code see page - Publication A-CAA-EN-P -

310 Bulletin S/S Open Type Starters Product Selection & Coordination Ratings UL/CSA as a UL Self Protected Type E Combination Motor Controller, Continued Motor Current Adjustment Range [A] Coil voltage code see page - UL/CSA Hp and Coordination Ratings ( Hz) Hp Ratings as a UL Self Protected Type E Combination Motor Controller Max. Short-Circuit Current [ka] DOL Starters Reversing Starters V AC V AC V AC V AC Y/V AC Y/V AC C-Frame with -C/-C Contactors on ISO Bus Bar Modules.. S-AS -CAC-TE S-AS -CAC-TE.. S-AS -CAC-TE S-AS -CAC-TE.. S-AS -CAC-TE S-AS -CAC-TE.. S-AS -CAC-TE S-AS -CAC-TE.. / / S-AS -CBC-TE S-AS -CBC-TE.. / /... S-AS -CBC-TE S-AS -CBC-TE.. / /.../ / -/ S-AS -CBC-TE S-AS -CBC-TE.. S-AS -CBC-TE S-AS -CBC-TE.. S-AS -CBC-TE S-AS -CBC-TE.. S-AS -CCC-TE S-AS -CCC-TE.. S-BS -CCC-TE S-BS -CCC-TE.. S-BS -CCC-TE S-BS -CCC-TE.. S-CS -CCC-TE S-CS -CCC-TE.. S-DS -CCC-TE S-DS -CCC-TE.. S-DS -CCC-TE S-DS -CCC-TE.. S-DS -CCC-TE S-DS -CCC-TE D-Frame with -C/-C Contactors on ISO Bus Bar Modules.. / /.../ / -/ S-AS -DBC-TE S-AS -DBC-TE.. / /.../ / -/ S-DS -DBC-TE S-DS -DBC-TE.. S-AS -DBC-TE S-AS -DBC-TE.. / /... -/ S-DS -DBC-TE S-DS -DBC-TE.. S-AS -DBC-TE S-AS -DBC-TE.. -/ S-ES -DBC-TE S-ES -DBC-TE.. S-AS -DCC-TE S-AS -DCC-TE.. S-BS -DCC-TE S-BS -DCC-TE.. S-CS -DCC-TE S-CS -DCC-TE.. -/... -/ -/ S-ES -DCC-TE S-ES -DCC-TE.. S-BS -DCC-TE S-BS -DCC-TE.. S-CS -DCC-TE S-CS -DCC-TE.. S-DS -DCC-TE S-DS -DCC-TE.. -/ S-ES -DCC-TE S-ES -DCC-TE.. S-DS -DCC-TE S-DS -DCC-TE.. -/ S-ES -DCC-TE S-ES -DCC-TE.. S-DS -DCC-TE S-DS -DCC-TE.. -/ -/ S-ES -DCC-TE S-ES -DCC-TE F-Frame with -C/-C Contactors on ISO Bus Bar Modules.. -/... -/ -/ S-ES -FCC-TE S-ES -FCC-TE.. -/ S-ES -FCC-TE S-ES -FCC-TE.. -/ S-ES -FCC-TE S-ES -FCC-TE.. -/ -/ S-ES -FCC-TE S-ES -FCC-TE.. -/ -/ S-GS -FCC-TE S-GS -FCC-TE.. -/ S-ES -FCC-TE S-ES -FCC-TE.. -/ S-FS -FCC-TE S-FS -FCC-TE.. -/ S-GS -FCC-TE S-GS -FCC-TE.. S-FS -FCC-TE S-FS -FCC-TE.. S-GS -FCC-TE S-GS -FCC-TE Horsepower ratings shown in the table are for reference. Final selection of the starter depends upon the actual motor full-load current. This starter is not valid for application at this horsepower and voltage. - Publication A-CAA-EN-P

311 Bulletin S/S Open Type Starters Product Selection & Coordination Ratings UL/CSA as a UL Self Protected Type E Combination Motor Controller, Continued Motor Current Adjustment Range [A] UL/CSA Hp and Coordination Ratings ( Hz) Hp Ratings as a UL Self Protected Type E Combination Motor Controller Max. Short-Circuit Current [ka] DOL Starters Reversing Starters V AC V AC V AC V AC Y/V AC Y/V AC C-Frame with -C/-C Contactors on Panel Mounting Modules.. S-AW -CAC-TE S-AW -CAC-TE.. S-AW -CAC-TE S-AW -CAC-TE.. S-AW -CAC-TE S-AW -CAC-TE.. S-AW -CAC-TE S-AW -CAC-TE.. / / S-AW -CBC-TE S-AW -CBC-TE.. / /... S-AW -CBC-TE S-AW -CBC-TE.. / /.../ / -/ S-AW -CBC-TE S-AW -CBC-TE.. S-AW -CBC-TE S-AW -CBC-TE.. S-AW -CBC-TE S-AW -CBC-TE.. S-AW -CCC-TE S-AW -CCC-TE.. S-BW -CCC-TE S-BW -CCC-TE.. S-BW -CCC-TE S-BW -CCC-TE.. S-CW -CCC-TE S-CW -CCC-TE.. S-DW -CCC-TE S-DW -CCC-TE.. S-DW -CCC-TE S-DW -CCC-TE.. S-DW -CCC-TE S-DW -CCC-TE D-Frame with -C/-C Contactors on Panel Mounting Modules.. / /.../ / -/ S-AW -DBC-TE S-AW -DBC-TE.. / /.../ / -/ S-DW -DBC-TE S-DW -DBC-TE.. S-AW -DBC-TE S-AW -DBC-TE.. / /... -/ S-DW -DBC-TE S-DW -DBC-TE.. S-AW -DBC-TE S-AW -DBC-TE.. -/ S-EW -DBC-TE S-EW -DBC-TE.. S-AW -DCC-TE S-AW -DCC-TE.. S-BW -DCC-TE S-BW -DCC-TE.. S-CW -DCC-TE S-CW -DCC-TE.. -/... -/ -/ S-EW -DCC-TE S-EW -DCC-TE.. S-BW -DCC-TE S-BW -DCC-TE.. S-CW -DCC-TE S-CW -DCC-TE.. S-DW -DCC-TE S-DW -DCC-TE.. -/ S-EW -DCC-TE S-EW -DCC-TE.. S-DW -DCC-TE S-DW -DCC-TE.. -/ S-EW -DCC-TE S-EW -DCC-TE.. S-DW -DCC-TE S-DW -DCC-TE.. -/ -/ S-EW -DCC-TE S-EW -DCC-TE F-Frame with -C/-C Contactors on Panel Mounting Modules.. -/... -/ -/ S-EW -FCC-TE S-EW -FCC-TE.. -/ S-EW -FCC-TE S-EW -FCC-TE.. -/ S-EW -FCC-TE S-EW -FCC-TE.. -/ -/ S-EW -FCC-TE S-EW -FCC-TE.. -/ -/ S-GW -FCC-TE S-GW -FCC-TE.. -/ S-EW -FCC-TE S-EW -FCC-TE.. -/ S-FW -FCC-TE S-FW -FCC-TE.. -/ S-GW -FCC-TE S-GW -FCC-TE.. S-FW -FCC-TE S-FW -FCC-TE.. S-GW -FCC-TE S-GW -FCC-TE Horsepower ratings shown in the table are for reference. Final selection of the starter depends upon the actual motor full-load current. This starter is not valid for application at this horsepower and voltage. Coil voltage code see page - Publication A-CAA-EN-P -

312 Bulletin S/S Open Type Starters Product Selection & Coordination Ratings IEC Type and Type Short-Circuit Coordination Motor Current Adjustment Range [A] kw Ratings Coil voltage code see page - IEC kw and Coordination Ratings ( Hz) Type Coordination Max. Short-Circuit Current [ka] Type Coordination V AC V AC V AC V AC V AC V AC V AC V AC V AC V AC V AC V AC C-Frame with -C/-C Contactors on Standard Bus Bar Modules DOL Starters Reversing Starters.... S-AT -CAC S-AT -CAC S-AT -CAC S-AT -CAC S-AT -CAC S-AT -CAC S-AT -CAC S-AT -CAC S-AT -CBC S-AT -CBC S-AT -CBC S-AT -CBC S-AT -CBC S-AT -CBC..... S-AT -CBC S-AT -CBC.... S-AT -CBC S-AT -CBC... S-AT -CCC S-AT -CCC..... S-BT -CCC S-BT -CCC..... S-CT -CCC S-CT -CCC... S-BT -CCC S-BT -CCC.... S-CT -CCC S-CT -CCC... S-DT -CCC S-DT -CCC.. S-DT -CCC S-DT -CCC... S-DT -CCC S-DT -CCC D-Frame with -C/-C Contactors on Standard Bus Bar Modules S-AT -DBC S-AT -DBC S-DT -DBC S-DT -DBC..... S-AT -DBC S-AT -DBC..... S-DT -DBC S-DT -DBC.... S-AT -DBC S-AT -DBC.... S-ET -DBC S-ET -DBC... S-AT -DCC S-AT -DCC..... S-BT -DCC S-BT -DCC..... S-CT -DCC S-CT -DCC..... S-ET -DCC S-ET -DCC... S-BT -DCC S-BT -DCC.... S-CT -DCC S-CT -DCC... S-DT -DCC S-DT -DCC... S-ET -DCC S-ET -DCC.. S-DT -DCC S-DT -DCC.. S-ET -DCC S-ET -DCC... S-DT -DCC S-DT -DCC... S-ET -DCC S-ET -DCC F-Frame with -C/-C Contactors on Standard Bus Bar Modules..... S-ET -FCC S-ET -FCC... S-ET -FCC S-ET -FCC.. S-ET -FCC S-ET -FCC... S-ET -FCC S-ET -FCC... S-GT -FCC S-GT -FCC... S-ET -FCC S-ET -FCC... S-FT -FCC S-FT -FCC... S-GT -FCC S-GT -FCC... S-HT -FCC S-HT -FCC... S-FT -FCC S-FT -FCC.. S-GT -FCC S-GT -FCC.. S-HT -FCC S-HT -FCC.. S-JT -FCC S-JT -FCC CMN-Frame with -C/-C Contactors on Standard Bus Bar Modules... S-HT -GCC S-HT -GCC... S-JT -GCC S-JT -GCC... S-KT -GCC S-KT -GCC.. S-JT -GCC S-JT -GCC.. S-KT -GCC S-KT -GCC kw ratings shown in the table are for reference. Final selection of the starter depends upon the actual motor full-load current. - Publication A-CAA-EN-P

313 Bulletin S/S Open Type Starters Product Selection & Coordination Ratings IEC Type and Type Short-Circuit Coordination, Continued Motor Current Adjustment Range [A] kw Ratings IEC kw and Coordination Ratings ( Hz) Type Coordination Max. Short-Circuit Current [ka] Type Coordination V AC V AC V AC V AC V AC V AC V AC V AC V AC V AC V AC V AC C-Frame with -C/-C Contactors on ISO Bus Bar Modules DOL Starters Reversing Starters.... S-AS -CAC S-AS -CAC S-AS -CAC S-AS -CAC S-AS -CAC S-AS -CAC S-AS -CAC S-AS -CAC S-AS -CBC S-AS -CBC S-AS -CBC S-AS -CBC S-AS -CBC S-AS -CBC..... S-AS -CBC S-AS -CBC.... S-AS -CBC S-AS -CBC... S-AS -CCC S-AS -CCC..... S-BS -CCC S-BS -CCC..... S-CS -CCC S-CS -CCC... S-BS -CCC S-BS -CCC.... S-CS -CCC S-CS -CCC... S-DS -CCC S-DS -CCC.. S-DS -CCC S-DS -CCC... S-DS -CCC S-DS -CCC D-Frame with -C/-C Contactors on ISO Bus Bar Modules S-AS -DBC S-AS -DBC S-DS -DBC S-DS -DBC..... S-AS -DBC S-AS -DBC..... S-DS -DBC S-DS -DBC.... S-AS -DBC S-AS -DBC.... S-ES -DBC S-ES -DBC... S-AS -DCC S-AS -DCC..... S-BS -DCC S-BS -DCC..... S-CS -DCC S-CS -DCC..... S-ES -DCC S-ES -DCC... S-BS -DCC S-BS -DCC.... S-CS -DCC S-CS -DCC... S-DS -DCC S-DS -DCC... S-ES -DCC S-ES -DCC.. S-DS -DCC S-DS -DCC.. S-ES -DCC S-ES -DCC... S-DS -DCC S-DS -DCC... S-ES -DCC S-ES -DCC F-Frame with -C/-C Contactors on ISO Bus Bar Modules..... S-ES -FCC S-ES -FCC... S-ES -FCC S-ES -FCC.. S-ES -FCC S-ES -FCC... S-ES -FCC S-ES -FCC... S-GS -FCC S-GS -FCC... S-ES -FCC S-ES -FCC... S-FS -FCC S-FS -FCC... S-GS -FCC S-GS -FCC... S-FS -FCC S-FS -FCC.. S-GS -FCC S-GS -FCC kw ratings shown in the table are for reference. Final selection of the starter depends upon the actual motor full-load current. Coil voltage code see page - Publication A-CAA-EN-P -

314 Bulletin S/S Open Type Starters Product Selection & Coordination Ratings IEC Type and Type Short-Circuit Coordination, Continued Motor Current Adjustment Range [A] kw Ratings Coil voltage code see page - IEC kw and Coordination Ratings ( Hz) Type Coordination Max. Short-Circuit Current [ka] Type Coordination V AC V AC V AC V AC V AC V AC V AC V AC V AC V AC V AC V AC C-Frame with -C/-C Contactors on Panel Mounting Modules DOL Starters Reversing Starters.... S-AW -CAC S-AW -CAC S-AW -CAC S-AW -CAC S-AW -CAC S-AW -CAC S-AW -CAC S-AW -CAC S-AW -CBC S-AW -CBC S-AW -CBC S-AW -CBC S-AW -CBC S-AW -CBC..... S-AW -CBC S-AW -CBC.... S-AW -CBC S-AW -CBC... S-AW -CCC S-AW -CCC..... S-BW -CCC S-BW -CCC..... S-CW -CCC S-CW -CCC... S-BW -CCC S-BW -CCC.... S-CW -CCC S-CW -CCC... S-DW -CCC S-DW -CCC.. S-DW -CCC S-DW -CCC... S-DW -CCC S-DW -CCC D-Frame with -C/-C Contactors on Panel Mounting Modules S-AW -DBC S-AW -DBC S-DW -DBC S-DW -DBC..... S-AW -DBC S-AW -DBC..... S-DW -DBC S-DW -DBC.... S-AW -DBC S-AW -DBC.... S-EW -DBC S-EW -DBC... S-AW -DCC S-AW -DCC..... S-BW -DCC S-BW -DCC..... S-CW -DCC S-CW -DCC..... S-EW -DCC S-EW -DCC... S-BW -DCC S-BW -DCC.... S-CW -DCC S-CW -DCC... S-DW -DCC S-DW -DCC... S-EW -DCC S-EW -DCC.. S-DW -DCC S-DW -DCC.. S-EW -DCC S-EW -DCC... S-DW -DCC S-DW -DCC... S-EW -DCC S-EW -DCC F-Frame with -C/-C Contactors on Panel Mounting Modules..... S-EW -FCC S-EW -FCC... S-EW -FCC S-EW -FCC.. S-EW -FCC S-EW -FCC... S-EW -FCC S-EW -FCC... S-GW -FCC S-GW -FCC... S-EW -FCC S-EW -FCC... S-FW -FCC S-FW -FCC... S-GW -FCC S-GW -FCC... S-FW -FCC S-FW -FCC.. S-GW -FCC S-GW -FCC kw ratings shown in the table are for reference. Final selection of the starter depends upon the actual motor full-load current. - Publication A-CAA-EN-P

315 Bulletin S/S Open Type Starters Product Selection Coil Voltage Codes Coil Voltage Codes for AC Control Voltage [V] Hz R K V W X Y KP D P S KG Hz Q J V X KP D KG H L / Hz KJ KY KP KD KG KL Voltage [V] Hz F VA T N G B M C Hz A T I E N B C / Hz KF KA KN KB Coil Voltage Codes for DC Control Contactor size A G Contactor size H J DC Voltages [V] Standard ZR ZQ ZJ ZW ZY ZZ ZB ZG ZE ZD ZP ZS ZA ZF ZT with Integrated Diode DJ with Electronic Coil EJ with Integrated Diode DR DQ DJ DW DY DZ DB DG DE DD DP DS DA DF DT - Publication A-CAA-EN-P -

316 Bulletin S/S Open Type Starters Options S Factory-Installed Options Change option code to desired auxiliary contact: S-AWD-CAC Contactor Auxiliaries without -SP Control Plug ISO Busbar Mount Standard Busbar Mount Panel Mount Option Description A A A A A A A A N.O. NA NA NA Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard N.O. + N.C. NA NA NA Available Available Available Available Available N.O. NA NA NA Available Available Available Available Available N.O. + N.C. NA NA NA Available NA NA Available NA N.O. + N.C. NA NA NA NA Available Available NA Available N.O. + N.C. NA NA NA Available NA NA Available NA Change option code to desired auxiliary contact: S-AWD-CAC Contactor Auxiliaries with -SP Control Plug ISO Busbar Mount Standard Busbar Mount Panel Mount Option Description A A A A A A A A N.O. Standard Standard NA Available Available Available Available Available N.O. + N.C. Available Available NA Available Available Available Available Available N.O. Available Available NA Available Available Available Available Available N.O. + N.C. NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA N.O. + N.C. NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA N.O. + N.C. NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA Change option code to desired auxiliary contact: S-AWD-CA Circuit Breaker Aux/Trip Contacts ISO Busbar Mount Standard Busbar Mount Panel Mount Option Description A A A A A A A A X Without Aux/Trip Contacts NA NA NA Available Available Available Available Available A N.C. Aux. NA NA NA Available Available NA Available Available B N.O. Aux. Available Available NA Available Available NA Available Available C N.O. + N.C. Aux. Standard Standard NA Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard D N.O. Aux. Available Available NA Available Available Available Available Available E N.C. Aux. NA NA NA Available Available Available Available Available R N.O. Trip + N.C. Aux NA NA NA Available Available NA Available Available S N.O. Trip + N.O. Aux Available Available NA Available Available NA Available Available Not available when an -SP Control Plug is selected. Add option code to desired auxiliary contact: S-AWD-CAC Additional Circuit Breaker Aux/Trip Contacts ISO Busbar Mount Standard Busbar Mount Panel Mount Option Description A A A A A A A A Blank Without Aux/Trip Contacts Available Available Available Available Available Available Available Available C N.O. + N.C. Aux. Available Available NA Available Available NA Available Available D N.O. Aux. Available Available NA Available Available NA Available Available E N.C. Aux. Available Available NA Standard Standard NA Standard Standard K N.C. (OL) Trip + N.C. (SC) Trip Available Available NA Available Available Available Available Available L N.O. (OL) Trip + N.O. (SC) Trip Available Available NA Available Available Available Available Available M N.C. (OL) Trip + N.O. (SC) Trip Available Available NA Available Available Available Available Available N N.O. (OL) Trip + N.C. (SC) Trip Available Available NA Available Available Available Available Available Q N.O. (SC) Trip + N.C. (SC) Trip Available Available NA Available Available NA Available Available Not available on A starters. Not available when an -SP Control Plug is selected on A starters. Add option code to desired auxiliary contact: S-AWD-CAC- Modifications/Accessories Option JE R V D KN KY TE SP Description Electronic Interface Surge Suppressor, RC Surge Suppressor, Varistor Surge Suppressor, Diode Lockable Knob, Black Lockable Knob, Red/Yellow Spacing Adapter for UL Type E Control Plug, Top Mount - Publication A-CAA-EN-P

317 Bulletin S/S Open Type Starters Options S Factory-Installed Options Change option code to desired auxiliary contact: S-AWD-CAC Contactor Auxiliaries without -SP Control Plug ISO Busbar Mount Standard Busbar Mount Panel Mount Option Description A A A A A A A A N.O. + N.C. NA NA NA Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard N.O. + N.C. NA NA NA Available Available Available Available Available Change option code to desired auxiliary contact: S-AWD-CAC Contactor Auxiliaries with -SP Control Plug ISO Busbar Mount Standard Busbar Mount Panel Mount Option Description A A A A A A A A N.O. + N.C. Standard Standard NA Available Available Available Available Available N.O. + N.C. Available Available NA Available Available Available Available Available Change option code to desired auxiliary contact: S-AWD-CA Circuit Breaker Aux/Trip Contacts ISO Busbar Mount Standard Busbar Mount Panel Mount Option Description A A A A A A A A X Without Aux/Trip Contacts NA NA NA Available Available Available Available Available A N.C. Aux. NA NA NA Available Available NA Available Available B N.O. Aux. Available Available NA Available Available NA Available Available C N.O. + N.C. Aux. Standard Standard NA Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard D N.O. Aux. Available Available NA Available Available Available Available Available E N.C. Aux. NA NA NA Available Available Available Available Available R N.O. Trip + N.C. Aux NA NA NA Available Available NA Available Available S N.O. Trip + N.O. Aux Available Available NA Available Available NA Available Available Not available when an -SP Control Plug is selected. Add option code to desired auxiliary contact: S-AWD-CAC Additional Circuit Breaker Aux/Trip Contacts ISO Busbar Mount Standard Busbar Mount Panel Mount Option Description A A A A A A A A Blank Without Aux/Trip Contacts Available Available Available Available Available Available Available Available C N.O. + N.C. Aux. Available Available NA Available Available NA Available Available D N.O. Aux. Available Available NA Available Available NA Available Available E N.C. Aux. Available Available NA Available Available NA Available Available K N.C. (OL) Trip + N.C. (SC) Trip Available Available NA Available Available Available Available Available L N.O. (OL) Trip + N.O. (SC) Trip Available Available NA Available Available Available Available Available M N.C. (OL) Trip + N.O. (SC) Trip Available Available NA Available Available Available Available Available N N.O. (OL) Trip + N.C. (SC) Trip Available Available NA Available Available Available Available Available Q N.O. (SC) Trip + N.C. (SC) Trip Available Available NA Available Available NA Available Available Not available on A starters. Not available when a -SP Control Plug is selected on A starters. Add option code to desired auxiliary contact: S-AWD-CAC- Modifications/Accessories Option JE R V D KN KY TE SP Description Electronic Interface Surge Suppressor, RC Surge Suppressor, Varistor Surge Suppressor, Diode Lockable Knob, Black Lockable Knob, Red/Yellow Spacing Adapter for UL Type E Control Plug, Top Mount Publication A-CAA-EN-P -

318 Bulletin S/S Open Type Starters Approximate Dimensions Dimensions are shown in millimeters. Dimensions are not intended for manufacturing purposes. Standard and ISO Busbar Mount Bulletin S Non-Reversing Starters (b) (c). (b) / (c). (b) /. (c). (b) /. (c) (b) (c) (b) / (c) (b) / (c) (b) / (c)... (d)... (d) Circuit Breaker: M-C / -D Contactor: -C... Reference Print: DGMD (a) (a) With additional side-mount aux. or trip contact(s) (b) Standard busbar mount with control plug (c) Iso busbar mount (d) Electronic interface Bulletin S Busbar Mount Circuit Breaker: M-F Contactor: -C... Reference Print: DGMF Bulletin S Busbar Mount (a) (a) With additional side-mount aux. or trip contact (b) Standard busbar mount with control plug (c) Iso busbar mount (d) Electronic interface (b) (c). (b) / (c). (b) /. (c). (b) /. (c) (b) (c) (b) / (c) (b) / (c) (b) / (c)... (d)... (d) Circuit Breaker: M-D (b) Standard busbar mount with control plug Contactor: -C... (c) Iso busbar mount Reference Print: DGMD (d) Electronic interface Bulletin S Busbar Mount Circuit Breaker: M-F Contactor: -C Reference Print: DGMF Bulletin S Busbar Mount (b) Standard busbar mount with control plug (c) Iso busbar mount (d) Electronic interface - Publication A-CAA-EN-P

319 Bulletin S/S Open Type Starters Approximate Dimensions Dimensions are shown in millimeters. Dimensions are not intended for manufacturing purposes. Standard and ISO Busbar Mount Bulletin S Reversing Starters (b) (c). (b) / (c). (b) /. (c). (b) /. (c) (b) (c) (b) / (c) (b) / (c) (b) / (c) (a) (d) (a) (d) Circuit Breaker: M-D Contactors: -C... Reference Print: RGMD (a) With additional side-mount aux. contacts (b) Standard busbar mount with control plug (c) Iso busbar mount (d) Electronic interfaces Bulletin S Busbar Mount Circuit Breaker: M-F Contactors: -C... Reference Print: RGMF Bulletin S Busbar Mount (a) With additional side-mount aux. contacts (b) Standard busbar mount with control plug (c) Iso busbar mount (d) Electronic interface (b) (c) (b) / (c).. (b) /. (c). (b) /. (c) (b) (c) (b) / (c) (b) / (c) (b) / (c) (a) (d) (a) (d) Circuit Breaker: M-D Contactors: -C... Reference Print: RGMD Bulletin S Busbar Mount (a) With additional side-mount aux. contacts (b) Standard busbar mount with control plug (c) Iso busbar mount (d) Electronic interface Circuit Breaker: M-F Contactors: -C Reference Print: RGMF (a) With additional side-mount aux. contacts (b) Standard busbar mount with control plug (c) Iso busbar mount (d) Electronic interface Bulletin S Busbar Mount Publication A-CAA-EN-P -

320 Bulletin S/S Open Type Starters Approximate Dimensions Dimensions are shown in millimeters. Dimensions are not intended for manufacturing purposes. Panel Mount Bulletin S Non-Reversing Starters (a) (b) (b). Circuit Breaker: M-C/D Contactor: -C... Reference Print: DWMD (b) (a) (a) With additional side-mount aux. or trip contact(s) (b) Control plug on top OR bottom side optional Bulletin S Panel Mount Circuit Breaker: M-F Contactor: -C... Reference Print: DWMF (b) (a) With additional side-mount aux. or trip contact (b) Control plug on top OR bottom side optional Bulletin S Panel Mount (b) (b). (b) (b) - Circuit Breaker: M-D Contactor: -C... (b) Control plug on top OR bottom side optional Reference Print: DWMD Bulletin S Panel Mount Circuit Breaker: M-F Contactor: -C Reference Print: DWMF Publication A-CAA-EN-P (a) With additional side-mount aux. or trip contact (b) Control plug on top OR bottom side optional Bulletin S Panel Mount

321 Bulletin S/S Open Type Starters Approximate Dimensions Dimensions are shown in millimeters. Dimensions are not intended for manufacturing purposes. Panel Mount Bulletin S Reversing Starters (b) (b). (b) (b) Circuit Breaker: M-C/D Contactors: -C... Reference Print: RWMD (a) (a) With additional side-mount aux. contacts (b) Control plug on top OR bottom side optional Bulletin S Panel Mount (a) Circuit Breaker: M-F (a) With additional side-mount aux. contacts Contactors: -C... (b) Control plug on top OR bottom side optional Reference Print: RWMF Bulletin S Panel Mount (b) (b). (a) (b) (a) (b) Circuit Breaker: M-D (a) With additional side-mount aux. contacts Contactors: -C... (b) Control plug on top OR bottom side optional Reference Print: RWMD Bulletin S Panel Mount Circuit Breaker: M-F Contactors: -C Reference Print: RWMF (a) With additional side-mount aux. contacts (b) Control plug on top OR bottom side optional Bulletin S Panel Mount Publication A-CAA-EN-P -

322 Bulletin S/S Open Type Starters Approximate Dimensions Dimensions are shown in millimeters. Dimensions are not intended for manufacturing purposes. Standard Busbar Mount Bulletin S Non-Reversing and Bulletin S Reversing Starters (b) (b) Circuit Breaker: -CMN Contactor: -C... (b) Standard busbar mount with control plug Reference Print: DGCM Bulletin S Busbar Mount Circuit Breaker: M-F (b) Standard busbar mount with control plug Contactor: -C... Reference Print: DGMF Bulletin S Busbar Mount (b) (b)... (a)... (a) Circuit Breaker: -CMN Contactors: -C... Reference Print: RGCM Bulletin S Busbar Mount (a) With additional side-mount aux. contacts (b) Standard busbar mount with control plug Circuit Breaker: M-F (a) With additional side-mount aux. contacts Contactors: -C... (b) Standard busbar adapter with control plug Reference Print: RGMF Bulletin S Busbar Mount - Publication A-CAA-EN-P

323 Bulletin T/T Open Type Starters Product Overview Bulletin T/T IEC Starters Non-reversing (Bul. T) and reversing (Bul. T) starters Current Range. A culus Listed Motor Controllers Type Coordination Type Coordination culus Listed Type E Self-Protected Combination Motor Controllers Assemblies consist of Bulletin M MCPs or F fuse holders and Bulletin -C contactors and Bulletin -E overload relays mounted on Bulletin A busbar or panel mounting modules Factory installed options include: Installation and wiring of Control Plug for auxiliary contacts. Installation of Lockable Twist Knob. Installation of Spacing Adapter for Type E Self-Protected Starters. Electronic Interface and Surge Suppressors for coil on -C. Additional auxiliary contacts for -C. Additional auxiliary or trip contacts on M. Table of Contents Product Selection... - Modifications... - Aproximate Dimensions... - Standards Compliance UL CSA., No. IEC -, - Certifications culus Listed (File No. E, Guide NKJH, NKJH) CE Marked Bulletin T starter with Bulletin -ED overload relay and red/yellow lockable knob, as factory-installed option Bulletin T starter with Bulletin -EC overload relay and red/yellow lockable knob, as factory-installed option Bulletin T starter with Bulletin -EC overload relay with control plug option (factory-wired inputs and outputs) Publication A-CAA-EN-P -

324 Bulletin T/T Open Type Starters Catalog Number Explanation Explanation Examples given in this section are for reference purposes. This basic explanation should not be used for product selection; not all combinations will produce a valid catalog number. T A S D Q A C CP TE Code T T - b Contactor Size Code Description A -C B -C C -C D -C E -C F -C G -C Code S T W a Bulletin Number Description DOL Starter with MCP Rev. Starter with MCP c Style Description On A ISO Busbar Module(s) On A Standard Busbar Module(s) On A Panel Mounting Module(s) d AC Coil Voltage Code Description Q V AC, Hz R V AC, Hz J V AC, Hz K V AC, Hz KJ V AC, / Hz V AC, Hz /V AC, V Hz W V AC, Hz V AC, Hz /V AC, X Hz Y V AC, Hz KY V AC, / Hz V AC, Hz /...V KP AC, Hz V AC, Hz /V AC, D Hz KD V AC, / Hz P V AC, Hz KL...V AC, / Hz H V AC, Hz L...V AC, Hz V AC, Hz /V AC, A Hz F...V AC, Hz KF V AC, / Hz VA...V AC, Hz V AC, Hz /V AC, T Hz E V AC, Hz...V AC, Hz /V N AC, Hz KN V AC, / Hz G...V AC, Hz a b c d e f g h i j d (cont d) g (cont d) i (cont d) DC Coil Voltage Code Description B V AC, Hz /V AC, Hz M V AC, Hz C V AC, Hz /V AC, Hz Contactor Size A G Code Description ZR...V DC ZQ V DC ZJ V DC DJ V DC with Diode EJ V DC Electronic ZW VDC ZY V DC ZZ V DC ZB V DC ZG V DC ZE V DC ZD V DC ZP V DC ZS V DC ZA V DC ZF V DC ZT V DC e Contactor Aux. Contacts Code Description N.O. N.O. + N.C. Circuit Breaker Frame Size Code Description Q C Frame R D Frame T F Frame F Bul. F fuse holder f g Circuit Breaker Current Range Code Description A. A A. A A. A A. A B. A B. A B. A B. A C A C A C A C A C A Publication A-CAA-EN-P Bul. F Fuse Holder Type C For A Class CC fuses F For A gl-gg fuses M For A midget fuses For A Class CC fuses w/ CL B.F.I. For A gl-gg fuses w/ FL B.F.I. For A midget fuses w/ ML B.F.I. h Circuit Breaker Aux. and Trip Contacts for M Select only one from each group Bottom Front Code Description X Without Aux. Trip Contacts A N.C. Aux. Contact B N.O. Aux. Contact N.O. + N.C. Aux. C Contact D N.O. Aux. Contact E N.C. Aux. Contact N.O. (SC+OL) + N.C. R Aux. Contact N.O. (SC+OL) + N.O. S Aux. Contact Right Side Code Description N.C. (SC+OL) + N.C. K (SC) N.O. (SC+OL) + N.O. L (SC) N.C. (SC+OL) + N.O. M (SC) N.O. (SC+OL) + N.C. N (SC) Q N.O. (SC) + N.C. (SC) Fuse Holder Aux.Contacts for F Bottom Front Code Description N.O. + N.C. early break C aux. contact i -ED/EE O/L Relay Code Description D -ED Cl., Man. Reset E -EE Cl., M./A. Reset Adjustment Range Code Description..A... A..B... A..C... A..D... A..E... A..F... A -EC Electronic O/L Relay Code Description C -EC ( Input / Output) C -EC ( Input / Output) Adjustment Range Code Description..P... A..A... A..B... A..C... A..D... A..E... A Modifications, Accessories Circuit Breaker Accessories Code Description TE Spacer Module KN Lockable Twist Knob, Black Lockable Twist Knob, KY Red/Yellow Coil Accessories Code Description JE Electronic Interface(s) D Surge Suppressor Diode R Surge Suppressor RC V Surge Suppressor Varistor Additional Contactor Auxiliaries (Side Mount) Code Description S N.C. S N.O. S N.O. + N.C. S N.O. Additional Contactor Auxiliaries (Front Mount) Code Description F N.O. + N.C. F N.O. F N.O. + N.C. Mounting System Accessories Code Description Micro Switch (ISO Modules MS only) Top Mount Control Plug (pull-apart terminal block with spring clamp SP terminals) for control circuit (standard Bus bar and panel mounting modules only) Standard for Starters on ISO Adapters, no code required j

325 Bulletin T/T Open Type Starters Product Selection Bulletin T Combination Starters UL/CSA Listed as Type E Self-Protected Combination Motor Controllers. These starters may provide the branch-circuit protection for each individual motor circuit. Publication A-CAA-EN-P -

326 Bulletin T/T Open Type Starters Product Selection & Coordination Ratings Group Motor and Type E Combination Motor Controllers (UL/CSA) The Bulletin T/T motor controllers can be used in a variety of applications. These starters can be used in a group motor application or as a stand-alone product without any additional short-circuit protection in the motor branch circuits. Most of the M-C/D motor protection circuit breakers used in the T/T starters are UL listed as a manual motor controller with instantaneous trip, short-circuit protection and is rated for group motor applications. Since there is no overload protection provided by these MCPs, a separate overload relay must be added to the motor branch circuit. A combination of a M motor circuit protector, -C contactor, and -E overload relay can be listed as a Type E self-protected combination motor controller. In this case, the M, -C, and -E must pass an additional electrical and mechanical operational test after a short-circuit. In some cases, this may require oversizing the M motor circuit protector or the -C contactor to achieve weld-free performance and meet the additional life requirements. Bulletin T/T starters utilizing the F fuse holders must be used with a separate disconnecting means, as these fuse holders are not rated as a disconnect switch. With Bulletin -EC, -ED, or EE Overload Relays UL/CSA in Group Motor Installations UL/CSA Hp and Coordination Ratings ( Hz) Max. Short-Circuit Current [ka] DOL Starters Reversing Starters Motor Current Hp Ratings as a UL Motor Controller in Group Max. Fuse Type Type Adjustment Motor Installations or C.B. per Type Coordination Coordination Coordination Range [A] V AC V AC V AC V AC NEC [A] V AC V AC V AC V AC C-Frame with -C/-C Contactors on Standard Bus Bar Modules.. T-AT -QAC-DA T-AT -QAC-DA.. T-AT -QAC-EA T-AT -QAC-EA.. / T-AT -QBC-DB T-AT -QBC-DB.. / T-AT -QBC-EB T-AT -QBC-EB.. / T-AT -QBC-CP.. / T-AT -QBC-CP T-AT -QBC-CP.. / / T-AT -QBC-CP.. / / T-AT -QBC-CP T-AT -QBC-CP.. / /.../ / -/ / T-AT -QBC-DC T-AT -QBC-DC.. / /.../ / -/ / T-AT -QBC-EC T-AT -QBC-EC.. / /.../ / -/ / T-AT -QBC-CA.. / /.../ / -/ / T-AT -QBC-CA T-AT -QBC-CA D-Frame with -C/-C Contactors on Standard Bus Bar Modules.. / / T-AT -RBC-CP.. / / T-AT -RBC-CP T-AT -RBC-CP.. / /.../ / -/ / T-AT -RBC-DC T-AT -RBC-DC.. / /.../ / -/ / T-AT -RBC-EC T-AT -RBC-EC.. / /.../ / -/ / T-AT -RBC-CA.. / /.../ / -/ / T-AT -RBC-CA T-AT -RBC-CA.. / / T-DT -RBC-CP.. / / T-DT -RBC-CP T-DT -RBC-CP.. / /.../ / -/ / T-DT -RBC-DC T-DT -RBC-DC.. / /.../ / -/ / T-DT -RBC-EC T-DT -RBC-EC.. / /.../ / -/ / T-DT -RBC-CA.. / /.../ / -/ / T-DT -RBC-CA T-DT -RBC-CA.. / / / / T-AT -RBC-DC T-AT -RBC-DC.. / / / / T-AT -RBC-EC T-AT -RBC-EC.. / / / / T-AT -RBC-CA.. / / / / T-AT -RBC-CA T-AT -RBC-CA.. / / / / T-DT -RBC-DC T-DT -RBC-DC.. / / / / T-DT -RBC-EC T-DT -RBC-EC.. / / / / T-DT -RBC-CA.. / / / / T-DT -RBC-CA T-DT -RBC-CA.. / -/ / T-AT -RBC-DD T-AT -RBC-DD.. / -/ / T-AT -RBC-ED T-AT -RBC-ED.. / -/ / -/ T-AT -RBC-CB.. / -/ / -/ T-AT -RBC-CB T-AT -RBC-CB. / / -/ T-BT -RCC-DD T-BT -RCC-DD. / / -/ T-BT -RCC-ED T-BT -RCC-ED. / / -/ -/ T-BT -RCC-CB. / / -/ -/ T-BT -RCC-CB T-BT -RCC-CB. / / -/ T-ET -RCC-ED T-ET -RCC-ED. / / -/ -/ T-ET -RCC-CB. / / -/ -/ T-ET -RCC-CB T-ET -RCC-CB. / / T-CT -RCC-DD T-CT -RCC-DD. / / T-CT -RCC-ED T-CT -RCC-ED. / / -/ T-CT -RCC-CB. / / -/ T-CT -RCC-CB T-CT -RCC-CB - Publication A-CAA-EN-P

327 Bulletin T/T Open Type Starters Product Selection & Coordination Ratings Motor Current Adjustment Range [A] UL/CSA Hp and Coordination Ratings ( Hz) Max. Short-Circuit Current [ka] Hp Ratings as a UL Motor Controller in Group Max. Fuse Type Type Motor Installations or C.B. per Type Coordination Coordination Coordination V AC V AC V AC V AC NEC [A] V AC V AC V AC V AC D-Frame with -C/-C Contactors on Standard Bus Bar Modules DOL Starters Reversing Starters. / / T-ET -RCC-ED T-ET -RCC-ED. / / -/ T-ET -RCC-CB. / / -/ T-ET -RCC-CB T-ET -RCC-CB. -/ -/ -/ T-DT -RCC-DE T-DT -RCC-DE. -/ -/ -/ T-DT -RCC-EE T-DT -RCC-EE. -/ -/ -/ T-DT -RCC-CC. -/ -/ -/ T-DT -RCC-CC T-DT -RCC-CC. -/ -/ -/ T-ET -RCC-EE T-ET -RCC-EE. -/ -/ -/ T-ET -RCC-CC. -/ -/ -/ T-ET -RCC-CC T-ET -RCC-CC F-Frame with -C/-C Contactors on Standard Bus Bar Modules. -/ -/ -/ T-ET -TCC-EE T-ET -TCC-EE. -/ -/ -/ T-ET -TCC-CC. -/ -/ -/ T-ET -TCC-CC T-ET -TCC-CC. -/ -/ -/ T-ET -TCC-EF T-ET -TCC-EF. -/ -/ -/ T-ET -TCC-CD. -/ -/ -/ T-ET -TCC-CD T-ET -TCC-CD. -/ -/ T-FT -TCC-EF T-FT -TCC-EF. -/ -/ T-FT -TCC-CD. -/ -/ T-FT -TCC-CD T-FT -TCC-CD. -/ -/ T-FT -TCC-EF T-FT -TCC-EF. -/ -/ T-FT -TCC-CD. -/ -/ T-FT -TCC-CD T-FT -TCC-CD. -/ -/ T-GT -TCC-EF T-GT -TCC-EF. -/ -/ T-GT -TCC-CD. -/ -/ T-GT -TCC-CD T-GT -TCC-CD -/ -/ T-HT -TCC-EG T-HT -TCC-EG. -/ -/ T-HT -TCC-CD. -/ -/ T-HT -TCC-CD T-HT -TCC-CD Hp ratings shown in the table are for reference. Final selection of the starter depends upon the actual motor full-load current. Coil voltage code see page - Publication A-CAA-EN-P -

328 Bulletin T/T Open Type Starters Product Selection & Coordination Ratings With Bulletin -EC, -ED, or EE Overload Relays UL/CSA in Group Motor Installations Motor Current Adjustment Range [A] UL/CSA Hp and Coordination Ratings ( Hz) Max. Short-Circuit Current [ka] Hp Ratings as a UL Motor Controller in Group Max. Fuse Type Type Motor Installations or C.B. per Type Coordination Coordination Coordination V AC V AC V AC V AC NEC [A] V AC V AC V AC V AC C-Frame with -C/-C Contactors on ISO Bus Bar Modules DOL Starters Reversing Starters.. T-AS -QAC-DA T-AS -QAC-DA.. T-AS -QAC-EA T-AS -QAC-EA.. / T-AS -QBC-DB T-AS -QBC-DB.. / T-AS -QBC-EB T-AS -QBC-EB.. / T-AS -QBC-CP.. / T-AS -QBC-CP T-AS -QBC-CP.. / / T-AS -QBC-CP.. / / T-AS -QBC-CP T-AS -QBC-CP.. / /.../ / -/ / T-AS -QBC-DC T-AS -QBC-DC.. / /.../ / -/ / T-AS -QBC-EC T-AS -QBC-EC.. / /.../ / -/ / T-AS -QBC-CA.. / /.../ / -/ / T-AS -QBC-CA T-AS -QBC-CA D-Frame with -C/-C Contactors on ISO Bus Bar Modules.. / / T-AS -RBC-CP.. / / T-AS -RBC-CP T-AS -RBC-CP.. / /.../ / -/ / T-AS -RBC-DC T-AS -RBC-DC.. / /.../ / -/ / T-AS -RBC-EC T-AS -RBC-EC.. / /.../ / -/ / T-AS -RBC-CA.. / /.../ / -/ / T-AS -RBC-CA T-AS -RBC-CA.. / / T-DS -RBC-CP.. / / T-DS -RBC-CP T-DS -RBC-CP.. / /.../ / -/ / T-DS -RBC-DC T-DS -RBC-DC.. / /.../ / -/ / T-DS -RBC-EC T-DS -RBC-EC.. / /.../ / -/ / T-DS -RBC-CA.. / /.../ / -/ / T-DS -RBC-CA T-DS -RBC-CA.. / / / / T-AS -RBC-DC T-AS -RBC-DC.. / / / / T-AS -RBC-EC T-AS -RBC-EC.. / / / / T-AS -RBC-CA.. / / / / T-AS -RBC-CA T-AS -RBC-CA.. / / / / T-DS -RBC-DC T-DS -RBC-DC.. / / / / T-DS -RBC-EC T-DS -RBC-EC.. / / / / T-DS -RBC-CA.. / / / / T-DS -RBC-CA T-DS -RBC-CA.. / -/ / T-AS -RBC-DD T-AS -RBC-DD.. / -/ / T-AS -RBC-ED T-AS -RBC-ED.. / -/ / -/ T-AS -RBC-CB.. / -/ / -/ T-AS -RBC-CB T-AS -RBC-CB. / / -/ T-BS -RCC-DD T-BS -RCC-DD. / / -/ T-BS -RCC-ED T-BS -RCC-ED. / / -/ -/ T-BS -RCC-CB. / / -/ -/ T-BS -RCC-CB T-BS -RCC-CB. / / -/ T-ES -RCC-ED T-ES -RCC-ED. / / -/ -/ T-ES -RCC-CB. / / -/ -/ T-ES -RCC-CB T-ES -RCC-CB. / / T-CS -RCC-DD T-CS -RCC-DD. / / T-CS -RCC-ED T-CS -RCC-ED. / / -/ T-CS -RCC-CB. / / -/ T-CS -RCC-CB T-CS -RCC-CB - Publication A-CAA-EN-P

329 Bulletin T/T Open Type Starters Product Selection & Coordination Ratings Motor Current Adjustment Range [A] UL/CSA Hp and Coordination Ratings ( Hz) Max. Short-Circuit Current [ka] Hp Ratings as a UL Motor Controller in Group Max. Fuse Type Type Motor Installations or C.B. per Type Coordination Coordination Coordination V AC V AC V AC V AC NEC V AC V AC V AC V AC D-Frame with -C/-C Contactors on ISO Bus Bar Modules DOL Starters Reversing Starters. / / T-ES -RCC-ED T-ES -RCC-ED. / / -/ T-ES -RCC-CB. / / -/ T-ES -RCC-CB T-ES -RCC-CB. -/ -/ -/ T-DS -RCC-DE T-DS -RCC-DE. -/ -/ -/ T-DS -RCC-EE T-DS -RCC-EE. -/ -/ -/ T-DS -RCC-CC. -/ -/ -/ T-DS -RCC-CC T-DS -RCC-CC. -/ -/ -/ T-ES -RCC-EE T-ES -RCC-EE. -/ -/ -/ T-ES -RCC-CC. -/ -/ -/ T-ES -RCC-CC T-ES -RCC-CC F-Frame with -C/-C Contactors on ISO Bus Bar Modules. -/ -/ -/ T-ES -TCC-EE T-ES -TCC-EE. -/ -/ -/ T-ES -TCC-CC. -/ -/ -/ T-ES -TCC-CC T-ES -TCC-CC. -/ -/ -/ T-ES -TCC-EF T-ES -TCC-EF. -/ -/ -/ T-ES -TCC-CD. -/ -/ -/ T-ES -TCC-CD T-ES -TCC-CD. -/ -/ T-FS -TCC-EF T-FS -TCC-EF. -/ -/ T-FS -TCC-CD. -/ -/ T-FS -TCC-CD T-FS -TCC-CD. -/ -/ T-FS -TCC-EF T-FS -TCC-EF. -/ -/ T-FS -TCC-CD. -/ -/ T-FS -TCC-CD T-FS -TCC-CD. -/ -/ T-GS -TCC-EF T-GS -TCC-EF. -/ -/ T-GS -TCC-CD. -/ -/ T-GS -TCC-CD T-GS -TCC-CD Hp ratings shown in the table are for reference. Final selection of the starter depends upon the actual motor full-load current. Coil voltage code see page - Publication A-CAA-EN-P -

330 Bulletin T/T Open Type Starters Product Selection & Coordination Ratings With Bulletin -EC, -ED, or EE Overload Relays UL/CSA in Group Motor Installations Motor Current Adjustment Range [A] UL/CSA Hp and Coordination Ratings ( Hz) Max. Short-Circuit Current [ka] Hp Ratings as a UL Motor Controller in Group Motor Max. Fuse or Type Type Installations C.B. per Type Coordination Coordination Coordination V AC V AC V AC V AC NEC [A] V AC V AC V AC V AC C-Frame with -C/-C Contactors on Panel Mounting Modules DOL Starters Reversing Starters.. T-AW -QAC-DA T-AW -QAC-DA.. T-AW -QAC-EA T-AW -QAC-EA.. / T-AW -QBC-DB T-AW -QBC-DB.. / T-AW -QBC-EB T-AW -QBC-EB.. / T-AW -QBC-CP.. / T-AW -QBC-CP T-AW -QBC-CP.. / / T-AW -QBC-CP.. / / T-AW -QBC-CP T-AW -QBC-CP.. / /.../ / -/ / T-AW -QBC-DC T-AW -QBC-DC.. / /.../ / -/ / T-AW -QBC-EC T-AW -QBC-EC.. / /.../ / -/ / T-AW -QBC-CA.. / /.../ / -/ / T-AW -QBC-CA T-AW -QBC-CA D-Frame with -C/-C Contactors on Panel Mounting Modules.. / / T-AW -RBC-CP.. / / T-AW -RBC-CP T-AW -RBC-CP.. / /.../ / -/ / T-AW -RBC-DC T-AW -RBC-DC.. / /.../ / -/ / T-AW -RBC-EC T-AW -RBC-EC.. / /.../ / -/ / T-AW -RBC-CA.. / /.../ / -/ / T-AW -RBC-CA T-AW -RBC-CA.. / / T-DW -RBC-CP.. / / T-DW -RBC-CP T-DW -RBC-CP.. / /.../ / -/ / T-DW -RBC-DC T-DW -RBC-DC.. / /.../ / -/ / T-DW -RBC-EC T-DW -RBC-EC.. / /.../ / -/ / T-DW -RBC-CA.. / /.../ / -/ / T-DW -RBC-CA T-DW -RBC-CA.. / / / / T-AW -RBC-DC T-AW -RBC-DC.. / / / / T-AW -RBC-EC T-AW -RBC-EC.. / / / / T-AW -RBC-CA.. / / / / T-AW -RBC-CA T-AW -RBC-CA.. / / / / T-DW -RBC-DC T-DW -RBC-DC.. / / / / T-DW -RBC-EC T-DW -RBC-EC.. / / / / T-DW -RBC-CA.. / / / / T-DW -RBC-CA T-DW -RBC-CA.. / -/ / T-AW -RBC-DD T-AW -RBC-DD.. / -/ / T-AW -RBC-ED T-AW -RBC-ED.. / -/ / -/ T-AW -RBC-CB.. / -/ / -/ T-AW -RBC-CB T-AW -RBC-CB. / / -/ T-BW -RCC-DD T-BW -RCC-DD. / / -/ T-BW -RCC-ED T-BW -RCC-ED. / / -/ -/ T-BW -RCC-CB. / / -/ -/ T-BW -RCC-CB T-BW -RCC-CB. / / -/ T-EW -RCC-ED T-EW -RCC-ED. / / -/ -/ T-EW -RCC-CB. / / -/ -/ T-EW -RCC-CB T-EW -RCC-CB. / / T-CW -RCC-DD T-CW -RCC-DD. / / T-CW -RCC-ED T-CW -RCC-ED. / / -/ T-CW -RCC-CB. / / -/ T-CW -RCC-CB T-CW -RCC-CB. / / T-EW -RCC-ED T-EW -RCC-ED. / / -/ T-EW -RCC-CB. / / -/ T-EW -RCC-CB T-EW -RCC-CB. -/ -/ -/ T-DW -RCC-DE T-DW -RCC-DE. -/ -/ -/ T-DW -RCC-EE T-DW -RCC-EE. -/ -/ -/ T-DW -RCC-CC. -/ -/ -/ T-DW -RCC-CC T-DW -RCC-CC. -/ -/ -/ T-EW -RCC-EE T-EW -RCC-EE. -/ -/ -/ T-EW -RCC-CC. -/ -/ -/ T-EW -RCC-CC T-EW -RCC-CC - Publication A-CAA-EN-P

331 Bulletin T/T Open Type Starters Product Selection & Coordination Ratings Motor Current Adjustment Range [A] Coil voltage code see page - UL/CSA Hp and Coordination Ratings ( Hz) Max. Short-Circuit Current [ka] Hp Ratings as a UL Motor Controller in Group Motor Max. Fuse or Type Type Installations C.B. per Type Coordination Coordination Coordination V AC V AC V AC V AC NEC [A] V AC V AC V AC V AC F-Frame with -C/-C Contactors on Panel Mounting Modules DOL Starters Reversing Starters. -/ -/ -/ T-EW -TCC-EE T-EW -TCC-EE. -/ -/ -/ T-EW -TCC-CC. -/ -/ -/ T-EW -TCC-CC T-EW -TCC-CC. -/ -/ -/ T-EW -TCC-EF T-EW -TCC-EF. -/ -/ -/ T-EW -TCC-CD. -/ -/ -/ T-EW -TCC-CD T-EW -TCC-CD. -/ -/ T-FW -TCC-EF T-FW -TCC-EF. -/ -/ T-FW -TCC-CD. -/ -/ T-FW -TCC-CD T-FW -TCC-CD. -/ -/ T-FW -TCC-EF T-FW -TCC-EF. -/ -/ T-FW -TCC-CD. -/ -/ T-FW -TCC-CD T-FW -TCC-CD. -/ -/ T-GW -TCC-EF T-GW -TCC-EF. -/ -/ T-GW -TCC-CD. -/ -/ T-GW -TCC-CD T-GW -TCC-CD Hp ratings shown in the table are for reference. Final selection of the starter depends upon the actual motor full-load current. Publication A-CAA-EN-P -

332 Bulletin T/T Open Type Starters Product Selection & Coordination Ratings Motor Current Adjustment Range [A] UL/CSA Hp and Coordination Ratings ( Hz) Hp Ratings as a UL Self Protected Type E Combination Motor Controller Max. Short-Circuit Current [ka] DOL Starters Reversing Starters V AC V AC V AC V AC Y/V AC Y/V AC C-Frame with -C/-C Contactors on Standard Bus Bar Modules.. T-AT -QAC-DA-TE T-AT -QAC-DA-TE.. T-AT -QAC-EA-TE T-AT -QAC-EA-TE.. / T-AT -QBC-DB-TE T-AT -QBC-DB-TE.. / T-AT -QBC-EB-TE T-AT -QBC-EB-TE.. / T-AT -QBC-CP-TE.. / T-AT -QBC-CP-TE T-AT -QBC-CP-TE.. /.../ T-AT -QBC-CP-TE.. /.../ T-AT -QBC-CP-TE T-AT -QBC-CP-TE.. / / / T-AT -QBC-DC-TE T-AT -QBC-DC-TE.. / / / T-AT -QBC-EC-TE T-AT -QBC-EC-TE.. / / / T-AT -QBC-CA-TE.. / / / T-AT -QBC-CA-TE T-AT -QBC-CA-TE D-Frame with -C/-C Contactors on Standard Bus Bar Modules.. /.../ T-AT -RBC-CP-TE.. /.../ T-AT -RBC-CP-TE T-AT -RBC-CP-TE.. / / / T-AT -RBC-DC-TE T-AT -RBC-DC-TE.. / / / T-AT -RBC-EC-TE T-AT -RBC-EC-TE.. / / / T-AT -RBC-CA-TE.. / / / T-AT -RBC-CA-TE T-AT -RBC-CA-TE.. /.../ / T-DT -RBC-CP-TE.. /.../ / T-DT -RBC-CP-TE T-DT -RBC-CP-TE.. / / / / -/ T-DT -RBC-DC-TE T-DT -RBC-DC-TE.. / / / / -/ T-DT -RBC-EC-TE T-DT -RBC-EC-TE.. / / / / -/ T-DT -RBC-CA-TE.. / / / / -/ T-DT -RBC-CA-TE T-DT -RBC-CA-TE.. /.../ /.../ / / T-DT -RBC-DC-TE T-DT -RBC-DC-TE.. /.../ /.../ / / T-DT -RBC-EC-TE T-DT -RBC-EC-TE.. /.../ /.../ / / T-DT -RBC-CA-TE.. /.../ /.../ / / T-DT -RBC-CA-TE T-DT -RBC-CA-TE. / / -/ T-ET -RCC-ED-TE T-ET -RCC-ED-TE. / / -/ -/ T-ET -RCC-CB-TE. / / -/ -/ T-ET -RCC-CB-TE T-ET -RCC-CB-TE. / / T-ET -RCC-ED-TE T-ET -RCC-ED-TE. / / T-ET -RCC-CB-TE. / / T-ET -RCC-CB-TE T-ET -RCC-CB-TE. -/ -/ -/ T-ET -RCC-EE-TE T-ET -RCC-EE-TE. -/ -/ -/ T-ET -RCC-CC-TE. -/ -/ -/ T-ET -RCC-CC-TE T-ET -RCC-CC-TE F-Frame with -C/-C Contactors on Standard Bus Bar Modules. -/ -/ -/ T-ET -TCC-EE-TE T-ET -TCC-EE-TE. -/ -/ -/ T-ET -TCC-CC-TE. -/ -/ -/ T-ET -TCC-CC-TE T-ET -TCC-CC-TE. -/ -/ -/ T-ET -TCC-EF-TE T-ET -TCC-EF-TE. -/ -/ -/ T-ET -TCC-CD-TE. -/ -/ -/ T-ET -TCC-CD-TE T-ET -TCC-CD-TE. -/ -/ -/ T-FT -TCC-EF-TE T-ET -TCC-EF-TE. -/ -/ -/ T-FT -TCC-CD-TE. -/ -/ -/ T-FT -TCC-CD-TE T-ET -TCC-CD-TE. -/ T-FT -TCC-EF-TE T-FT -TCC-EF-TE. -/ T-FT -TCC-CD-TE. -/ T-FT -TCC-CD-TE T-FT -TCC-CD-TE. -/ T-GT -TCC-EF-TE T-GT -TCC-EF-TE. -/ T-GT -TCC-CD-TE. -/ T-GT -TCC-CD-TE T-GT -TCC-CD-TE -/ -/ T-HT -TCC-EG-TE T-HT -TCC-EG-TE. -/ T-HT -TCC-CD-TE. -/ T-HT -TCC-CD-TE T-HT -TCC-CD-TE Horsepower ratings shown in the table are for reference. Final selection of the starter depends upon the actual motor full-load current. This starter is not valid for application at this horsepower and voltage. Coil voltage code see page - - Publication A-CAA-EN-P

333 Bulletin T/T Open Type Starters Product Selection & Coordination Ratings Motor Current Adjustment Range [A] UL/CSA Hp and Coordination Ratings ( Hz) Hp Ratings as a UL Self Protected Type E Combination Motor Controller Max. Short-Circuit Current [ka] DOL Starters Reversing Starters V AC V AC V AC V AC Y/V AC Y/V AC C-Frame with -C/-C Contactors on ISO Bus Bar Modules.. T-AS -QAC-DA-TE T-AS -QAC-DA-TE.. T-AS -QAC-EA-TE T-AS -QAC-EA-TE.. / T-AS -QBC-DB-TE T-AS -QBC-DB-TE.. / T-AS -QBC-EB-TE T-AS -QBC-EB-TE.. / T-AS -QBC-CP-TE.. / T-AS -QBC-CP-TE T-AS -QBC-CP-TE.. /.../ T-AS -QBC-CP-TE.. /.../ T-AS -QBC-CP-TE T-AS -QBC-CP-TE.. / / / T-AS -QBC-DC-TE T-AS -QBC-DC-TE.. / / / T-AS -QBC-EC-TE T-AS -QBC-EC-TE.. / / / T-AS -QBC-CA-TE.. / / / T-AS -QBC-CA-TE T-AS -QBC-CA-TE D-Frame with -C/-C Contactors on ISO Bus Bar Modules.. /.../ T-AS -RBC-CP-TE.. /.../ T-AS -RBC-CP-TE T-AS -RBC-CP-TE.. / / / T-AS -RBC-DC-TE T-AS -RBC-DC-TE.. / / / T-AS -RBC-EC-TE T-AS -RBC-EC-TE.. / / / T-AS -RBC-CA-TE.. / / / T-AS -RBC-CA-TE T-AS -RBC-CA-TE.. /.../ / T-DS -RBC-CP-TE.. /.../ / T-DS -RBC-CP-TE T-DS -RBC-CP-TE.. / / / / -/ T-DS -RBC-DC-TE T-DS -RBC-DC-TE.. / / / / -/ T-DS -RBC-EC-TE T-DS -RBC-EC-TE.. / / / / -/ T-DS -RBC-CA-TE.. / / / / -/ T-DS -RBC-CA-TE T-DS -RBC-CA-TE.. /.../ /.../ / / T-DS -RBC-DC-TE T-DS -RBC-DC-TE.. /.../ /.../ / / T-DS -RBC-EC-TE T-DS -RBC-EC-TE.. /.../ /.../ / / T-DS -RBC-CA-TE.. /.../ /.../ / / T-DS -RBC-CA-TE T-DS -RBC-CA-TE. / / -/ T-ES -RCC-ED-TE T-ES -RCC-ED-TE. / / -/ -/ T-ES -RCC-CB-TE. / / -/ -/ T-ES -RCC-CB-TE T-ES -RCC-CB-TE. / / T-ES -RCC-ED-TE T-ES -RCC-ED-TE. / / T-ES -RCC-CB-TE. / / T-ES -RCC-CB-TE T-ES -RCC-CB-TE. -/ -/ -/ T-ES -RCC-EE-TE T-ES -RCC-EE-TE. -/ -/ -/ T-ES -RCC-CC-TE. -/ -/ -/ T-ES -RCC-CC-TE T-ES -RCC-CC-TE F-Frame with -C/-C Contactors on ISO Bus Bar Modules. -/ -/ -/ T-ES -TCC-EE-TE T-ES -TCC-EE-TE. -/ -/ -/ T-ES -TCC-CC-TE. -/ -/ -/ T-ES -TCC-CC-TE T-ES -TCC-CC-TE. -/ -/ -/ T-ES -TCC-EF-TE T-ES -TCC-EF-TE. -/ -/ -/ T-ES -TCC-CD-TE. -/ -/ -/ T-ES -TCC-CD-TE T-ES -TCC-CD-TE. -/ -/ -/ T-FS -TCC-EF-TE T-ES -TCC-EF-TE. -/ -/ -/ T-FS -TCC-CD-TE. -/ -/ -/ T-FS -TCC-CD-TE T-ES -TCC-CD-TE. -/ T-FS -TCC-EF-TE T-FS -TCC-EF-TE. -/ T-FS -TCC-CD-TE. -/ T-FS -TCC-CD-TE T-FS -TCC-CD-TE. -/ T-GS -TCC-EF-TE T-GS -TCC-EF-TE. -/ T-GS -TCC-CD-TE. -/ T-GS -TCC-CD-TE T-GS -TCC-CD-TE Horsepower ratings shown in the table are for reference. Final selection of the starter depends upon the actual motor full-load current. This starter is not valid for application at this horsepower and voltage. Coil voltage code see page - Publication A-CAA-EN-P -

334 Bulletin T/T Open Type Starters Product Selection & Coordination Ratings Motor Current Adjustment Range [A] UL/CSA Hp and Coordination Ratings ( Hz) Hp Ratings as a UL Self Protected Type E Combination Motor Controller Max. Short-Circuit Current [ka] DOL Starters Reversing Starters V AC V AC V AC V AC Y/V AC Y/V AC C-Frame with -C/-C Contactors on Panel Mounting Modules.. T-AW -QAC-DA-TE T-AW -QAC-DA-TE.. T-AW -QAC-EA-TE T-AW -QAC-EA-TE.. / T-AW -QBC-DB-TE T-AW -QBC-DB-TE.. / T-AW -QBC-EB-TE T-AW -QBC-EB-TE.. / T-AW -QBC-CP-TE.. / T-AW -QBC-CP-TE T-AW -QBC-CP-TE.. /.../ T-AW -QBC-CP-TE.. /.../ T-AW -QBC-CP-TE T-AW -QBC-CP-TE.. / / / T-AW -QBC-DC-TE T-AW -QBC-DC-TE.. / / / T-AW -QBC-EC-TE T-AW -QBC-EC-TE.. / / / T-AW -QBC-CA-TE.. / / / T-AW -QBC-CA-TE T-AW -QBC-CA-TE D-Frame with -C/-C Contactors on Panel Mounting Modules.. /.../ T-AW -RBC-CP-TE.. /.../ T-AW -RBC-CP-TE T-AW -RBC-CP-TE.. / / / T-AW -RBC-DC-TE T-AW -RBC-DC-TE.. / / / T-AW -RBC-EC-TE T-AW -RBC-EC-TE.. / / / T-AW -RBC-CA-TE.. / / / T-AW -RBC-CA-TE T-AW -RBC-CA-TE.. /.../ / T-DW -RBC-CP-TE.. /.../ / T-DW -RBC-CP-TE T-DW -RBC-CP-TE.. / / / / -/ T-DW -RBC-DC-TE T-DW -RBC-DC-TE.. / / / / -/ T-DW -RBC-EC-TE T-DW -RBC-EC-TE.. / / / / -/ T-DW -RBC-CA-TE.. / / / / -/ T-DW -RBC-CA-TE T-DW -RBC-CA-TE.. /.../ /.../ / / T-DW -RBC-DC-TE T-DW -RBC-DC-TE.. /.../ /.../ / / T-DW -RBC-EC-TE T-DW -RBC-EC-TE.. /.../ /.../ / / T-DW -RBC-CA-TE.. /.../ /.../ / / T-DW -RBC-CA-TE T-DW -RBC-CA-TE. / / -/ T-EW -RCC-ED-TE T-EW -RCC-ED-TE. / / -/ -/ T-EW -RCC-CB-TE. / / -/ -/ T-EW -RCC-CB-TE T-EW -RCC-CB-TE. / / T-EW -RCC-ED-TE T-EW -RCC-ED-TE. / / T-EW -RCC-CB-TE. / / T-EW -RCC-CB-TE T-EW -RCC-CB-TE. -/ -/ -/ T-EW -RCC-EE-TE T-EW -RCC-EE-TE. -/ -/ -/ T-EW -RCC-CC-TE. -/ -/ -/ T-EW -RCC-CC-TE T-EW -RCC-CC-TE F-Frame with -C/-C Contactors on Panel Mounting Modules. -/ -/ -/ T-EW -TCC-EE-TE T-EW -TCC-EE-TE. -/ -/ -/ T-EW -TCC-CC-TE. -/ -/ -/ T-EW -TCC-CC-TE T-EW -TCC-CC-TE. -/ -/ -/ T-EW -TCC-EF-TE T-EW -TCC-EF-TE. -/ -/ -/ T-EW -TCC-CD-TE. -/ -/ -/ T-EW -TCC-CD-TE T-EW -TCC-CD-TE. -/ -/ -/ T-FW -TCC-EF-TE T-EW -TCC-EF-TE. -/ -/ -/ T-FW -TCC-CD-TE. -/ -/ -/ T-FW -TCC-CD-TE T-EW -TCC-CD-TE. -/ T-FW -TCC-EF-TE T-FW -TCC-EF-TE. -/ T-FW -TCC-CD-TE. -/ T-FW -TCC-CD-TE T-FW -TCC-CD-TE. -/ T-GW -TCC-EF-TE T-GW -TCC-EF-TE. -/ T-GW -TCC-CD-TE. -/ T-GW -TCC-CD-TE T-GW -TCC-CD-TE -/ -/ T-HW -TCC-EG-TE T-HW -TCC-EG-TE. -/ T-HW -TCC-CD-TE. -/ T-HW -TCC-CD-TE T-HW -TCC-CD-TE Horsepower ratings shown in the table are for reference. Final selection of the starter depends upon the actual motor full-load current. This starter is not valid for application at this horsepower and voltage. Coil voltage code see page - - Publication A-CAA-EN-P

335 Bulletin T/T Open Type Starters Product Selection & Coordination Ratings With Bulletin -EC, -ED, or EE Overload Relays UL/CSA as a Fused Motor Controller Motor Current Adjustment Range [A] UL/CSA Hp and Coordination Ratings ( Hz) Hp Ratings as a Fused Motor Controller Type Coordination Type Coordination V AC V AC V AC V AC Max. Class CC Fuse Max Short- Circuit Current Max. Class CC [ka], V AC Fuse Bulletin F Fuse Holder with -C/-C Contactors on Standard Bus Bar Modules DOL Starters Reversing Starters Max Short- Circuit Current [ka], V AC.. T-AT -FCC-DA T-AT -FCC-DA.. T-AT -FCC-EA T-AT -FCC-EA.. / T-AT -FCC-DB T-AT -FCC-DB.. / T-AT -FCC-EB T-AT -FCC-EB.. / T-AT -FCC-CP.. / T-AT -FCC-CP T-AT -FCC-CP.. / / / / T-AT -FCC-DC T-AT -FCC-DC.. / / / / T-AT -FCC-EC T-AT -FCC-EC.. / / / / T-AT -FCC-CA.. / / / / T-AT -FCC-CA T-AT -FCC-CA.. / / -/ T-AT -FCC-DD T-AT -FCC-DD.. / / -/ T-AT -FCC-ED T-AT -FCC-ED.. / / -/ T-AT -FCC-CB.. / / -/ T-AT -FCC-CB T-AT -FCC-CB.. / / -/ T-BT -FCC-DD T-BT -FCC-DD.. / / -/ T-BT -FCC-ED T-BT -FCC-ED.. / / -/ T-BT -FCC-CB.. / / -/ T-BT -FCC-CB T-BT -FCC-CB.. / / T-CT -FCC-DD T-CT -FCC-DD.. / / T-CT -FCC-ED T-CT -FCC-ED.. / / T-CT -FCC-CB.. / / T-CT -FCC-CB T-CT -FCC-CB.. -/ -/ -/ T-DT -FCC-DE T-DT -FCC-DE.. -/ -/ -/ T-DT -FCC-EE T-DT -FCC-EE.. -/ -/ -/ T-DT -FCC-CC.. -/ -/ -/ T-DT -FCC-CC T-DT -FCC-CC Horsepower ratings shown in the table are for reference. Final selection of the starter depends upon the actual motor full-load current. Coil voltage code see page - Publication A-CAA-EN-P -

336 Bulletin T/T Open Type Starters Product Selection & Coordination Ratings Motor Current Adjustment Range [A] UL/CSA Hp and Coordination Ratings ( Hz) Hp Ratings as a Fused Motor Controller Type Coordination Type Coordination V AC V AC V AC V AC Max. Class CC Fuse [A] Max Short- Circuit Current Max. Class CC [ka], V AC Fuse [A] Bulletin F Fuse Holder with -C/-C Contactors on Standard Bus Bar Modules DOL Starters Reversing Starters Max Short- Circuit Current [ka], V AC.. T-AT -FCC-DA T-AT -FCC-DA.. T-AT -FCC-EA T-AT -FCC-EA.. / T-AT -FCC-DB T-AT -FCC-DB.. / T-AT -FCC-EB T-AT -FCC-EB.. / T-AT -FCC-CP.. / T-AT -FCC-CP T-AT -FCC-CP.. / / / / T-AT -FCC-DC T-AT -FCC-DC.. / / / / T-AT -FCC-EC T-AT -FCC-EC.. / / / / T-AT -FCC-CA.. / / / / T-AT -FCC-CA T-AT -FCC-CA.. / / -/ T-AT -FCC-DD T-AT -FCC-DD.. / / -/ T-AT -FCC-ED T-AT -FCC-ED.. / / -/ T-AT -FCC-CB.. / / -/ T-AT -FCC-CB T-AT -FCC-CB.. / / -/ T-BT -FCC-DD T-BT -FCC-DD.. / / -/ T-BT -FCC-ED T-BT -FCC-ED.. / / -/ T-BT -FCC-CB.. / / -/ T-BT -FCC-CB T-BT -FCC-CB.. / / T-CT -FCC-DD T-CT -FCC-DD.. / / T-CT -FCC-ED T-CT -FCC-ED.. / / T-CT -FCC-CB.. / / T-CT -FCC-CB T-CT -FCC-CB.. -/ -/ -/ T-DT -FCC-DE T-DT -FCC-DE.. -/ -/ -/ T-DT -FCC-EE T-DT -FCC-EE.. -/ -/ -/ T-DT -FCC-CC.. -/ -/ -/ T-DT -FCC-CC T-DT -FCC-CC Horsepower ratings shown in the table are for reference. Final selection of the starter depends upon the actual motor full-load current. Coil voltage code see page - - Publication A-CAA-EN-P

337 Bulletin T/T Open Type Starters Product Selection & Coordination Ratings Motor Current Adjustment Range [A] UL/CSA Hp and Coordination Ratings ( Hz) Hp Ratings as a Fused Motor Controller Type Coordination Type Coordination V AC V AC V AC V AC Max. Class CC Fuse [A] Max Short- Circuit Current [ka], V AC Max. Class CC Fuse [A] Bulletin F Fuse Holder with -C/-C Contactors on Panel Mounting Modules DOL Starters Reversing Starters Max Short- Circuit Current [ka], V AC.. T-AW -FCC-DA T-AW -FCC-DA.. T-AW -FCC-EA T-AW -FCC-EA.. / T-AW -FCC-DB T-AW -FCC-DB.. / T-AW -FCC-EB T-AW -FCC-EB.. / T-AW -FCC-CP.. / T-AW -FCC-CP T-AW -FCC-CP.. / / / / T-AW -FCC-DC T-AW -FCC-DC.. / / / / T-AW -FCC-EC T-AW -FCC-EC.. / / / / T-AW -FCC-CA.. / / / / T-AW -FCC-CA T-AW -FCC-CA.. / / -/ T-AW -FCC-DD T-AW -FCC-DD.. / / -/ T-AW -FCC-ED T-AW -FCC-ED.. / / -/ T-AW -FCC-CB.. / / -/ T-AW -FCC-CB T-AW -FCC-CB.. / / -/ T-BW -FCC-DD T-BW -FCC-DD.. / / -/ T-BW -FCC-ED T-BW -FCC-ED.. / / -/ T-BW -FCC-CB.. / / -/ T-BW -FCC-CB T-BW -FCC-CB.. / / T-CW -FCC-DD T-CW -FCC-DD.. / / T-CW -FCC-ED T-CW -FCC-ED.. / / T-CW -FCC-CB.. / / T-CW -FCC-CB T-CW -FCC-CB.. -/ -/ -/ T-DW -FCC-DE T-DW -FCC-DE.. -/ -/ -/ T-DW -FCC-EE T-DW -FCC-EE.. -/ -/ -/ T-DW -FCC-CC.. -/ -/ -/ T-DW -FCC-CC T-DW -FCC-CC Horsepower ratings shown in the table are for reference. Final selection of the starter depends upon the actual motor full-load current. Coil voltage code see page - Publication A-CAA-EN-P -

338 Bulletin T/T Open Type Starters Product Selection & Coordination Ratings IEC Type and Type Short-Circuit Coordination Motor Current Adjustment Range [A] kw Ratings IEC kw and Coordination Ratings ( Hz) Type Coordination Max. Short-Circuit Current [ka] Type Coordination V AC V AC V AC V AC V AC V AC V AC V AC V AC V AC V AC V AC C-Frame with -C/-C Contactors on Standard Bus Bar Modules DOL Starters Reversing Starters T-AT -QAC-DA T-AT -QAC-DA T-AT -QAC-EA T-AT -QAC-EA T-AT -QBC-DB T-AT -QBC-DB T-AT -QBC-EB T-AT -QBC-EB T-AT -QBC-CP T-AT -QBC-CP T-AT -QBC-CP T-AT -QBC-CP T-AT -QBC-CP T-AT -QBC-CP T-AT -QBC-DC T-AT -QBC-DC T-AT -QBC-EC T-AT -QBC-EC T-AT -QBC-CA T-AT -QBC-CA T-AT -QBC-CA D-Frame with -C/-C Contactors on Standard Bus Bar Modules T-AT -RBC-CP T-AT -RBC-CP T-AT -RBC-CP T-AT -RBC-DC T-AT -RBC-DC T-AT -RBC-EC T-AT -RBC-EC T-AT -RBC-CA T-AT -RBC-CA T-AT -RBC-CA T-DT -RBC-CP T-DT -RBC-CP T-DT -RBC-CP T-DT -RBC-DC T-DT -RBC-DC T-DT -RBC-EC T-DT -RBC-EC T-DT -RBC-CA T-DT -RBC-CA T-DT -RBC-CA..... T-AT -RBC-DC T-AT -RBC-DC..... T-AT -RBC-EC T-AT -RBC-EC..... T-AT -RBC-CA..... T-AT -RBC-CA T-AT -RBC-CA..... T-DT -RBC-DC T-DT -RBC-DC..... T-DT -RBC-EC T-DT -RBC-EC..... T-DT -RBC-CA..... T-DT -RBC-CA T-DT -RBC-CA.... T-AT -RBC-DD T-AT -RBC-DD.... T-AT -RBC-ED T-AT -RBC-ED.... T-AT -RBC-CB.... T-AT -RBC-CB T-AT -RBC-CB.... T-BT -RCC-DD T-BT -RCC-DD.... T-BT -RCC-ED T-BT -RCC-ED.... T-BT -RCC-CB.... T-BT -RCC-CB T-BT -RCC-CB.... T-ET -RCC-ED T-ET -RCC-ED.... T-ET -RCC-CB.... T-ET -RCC-CB T-ET -RCC-CB... T-CT -RCC-DD T-CT -RCC-DD... T-CT -RCC-ED T-CT -RCC-ED... T-CT -RCC-CB... T-CT -RCC-CB T-CT -RCC-CB.. T-ET -RCC-ED T-ET -RCC-ED.. T-ET -RCC-CB.. T-ET -RCC-CB T-ET -RCC-CB.. T-DT -RCC-DE T-DT -RCC-DE.. T-DT -RCC-EE T-DT -RCC-EE.. T-DT -RCC-CC.. T-DT -RCC-CC T-DT -RCC-CC.. T-ET -RCC-EE T-ET -RCC-EE.. T-ET -RCC-CC.. T-ET -RCC-CC T-ET -RCC-CC - Publication A-CAA-EN-P

339 Bulletin T/T Open Type Starters Product Selection & Coordination Ratings Motor Current Adjustment Range [A] kw Ratings Coil voltage code see page - IEC kw and Coordination Ratings ( Hz) Type Coordination Max. Short-Circuit Current [ka] Type Coordination V AC V AC V AC V AC V AC V AC V AC V AC V AC V AC V AC V AC F-Frame with -C/-C Contactors on Standard Bus Bar Modules DOL Starters Reversing Starters.. T-ET -TCC-EE T-ET -TCC-EE.. T-ET -TCC-CC.. T-ET -TCC-CC T-ET -TCC-CC... T-FT -TCC-EE T-FT -TCC-EE... T-FT -TCC-CC... T-FT -TCC-CC T-FT -TCC-CC.. T-ET -TCC-EF T-ET -TCC-EF.. T-ET -TCC-CD.. T-ET -TCC-CD T-ET -TCC-CD.. T-FT -TCC-EF T-FT -TCC-EF.. T-FT -TCC-CD.. T-FT -TCC-CD T-FT -TCC-CD.. T-GT -TCC-EF T-GT -TCC-EF.. T-GT -TCC-CD.. T-GT -TCC-CD T-GT -TCC-CD.. T-FT -TCC-EF T-FT -TCC-EF.. T-FT -TCC-CD.. T-FT -TCC-CD T-FT -TCC-CD. T-GT -TCC-EF T-GT -TCC-EF. T-GT -TCC-CD =. T-GT -TCC-CD T-GT -TCC-CD T-HT -TCC-EG T-HT -TCC-EG. T-HT -TCC-CD =. T-HT -TCC-CD T-HT -TCC-CD kw ratings shown in the table are for reference. Final selection of the starter depends upon the actual motor full-load current. Publication A-CAA-EN-P -

340 Bulletin T/T Open Type Starters Product Selection & Coordination Ratings Motor Current Adjustment Range [A] kw Ratings IEC kw and Coordination Ratings ( Hz) Type Coordination Max. Short-Circuit Current [ka] Type Coordination V AC V AC V AC V AC V AC V AC V AC V AC V AC V AC V AC V AC C-Frame with -C/-C Contactors on ISO Bus Bar Modules DOL Starters Reversing Starters T-AS -QAC-DA T-AS -QAC-DA T-AS -QAC-EA T-AS -QAC-EA T-AS -QBC-DB T-AS -QBC-DB T-AS -QBC-EB T-AS -QBC-EB T-AS -QBC-CP T-AS -QBC-CP T-AS -QBC-CP T-AS -QBC-CP T-AS -QBC-CP T-AS -QBC-CP T-AS -QBC-DC T-AS -QBC-DC T-AS -QBC-EC T-AS -QBC-EC T-AS -QBC-CA T-AS -QBC-CA T-AS -QBC-CA D-Frame with -C/-C Contactors on ISO Bus Bar Modules T-AS -RBC-CP T-AS -RBC-CP T-AS -RBC-CP T-AS -RBC-DC T-AS -RBC-DC T-AS -RBC-EC T-AS -RBC-EC T-AS -RBC-CA T-AS -RBC-CA T-AS -RBC-CA T-DS -RBC-CP T-DS -RBC-CP T-DS -RBC-CP T-DS -RBC-DC T-DS -RBC-DC T-DS -RBC-EC T-DS -RBC-EC T-DS -RBC-CA T-DS -RBC-CA T-DS -RBC-CA..... T-AS -RBC-DC T-AS -RBC-DC..... T-AS -RBC-EC T-AS -RBC-EC..... T-AS -RBC-CA..... T-AS -RBC-CA T-AS -RBC-CA..... T-DS -RBC-DC T-DS -RBC-DC..... T-DS -RBC-EC T-DS -RBC-EC..... T-DS -RBC-CA..... T-DS -RBC-CA T-DS -RBC-CA.... T-AS -RBC-DD T-AS -RBC-DD.... T-AS -RBC-ED T-AS -RBC-ED.... T-AS -RBC-CB.... T-AS -RBC-CB T-AS -RBC-CB.... T-BS -RCC-DD T-BS -RCC-DD.... T-BS -RCC-ED T-BS -RCC-ED.... T-BS -RCC-CB.... T-BS -RCC-CB T-BS -RCC-CB.... T-ES -RCC-ED T-ES -RCC-ED.... T-ES -RCC-CB.... T-ES -RCC-CB T-ES -RCC-CB... T-CS -RCC-DD T-CS -RCC-DD... T-CS -RCC-ED T-CS -RCC-ED... T-CS -RCC-CB... T-CS -RCC-CB T-CS -RCC-CB.. T-ES -RCC-ED T-ES -RCC-ED.. T-ES -RCC-CB.. T-ES -RCC-CB T-ES -RCC-CB.. T-DS -RCC-DE T-DS -RCC-DE.. T-DS -RCC-EE T-DS -RCC-EE.. T-DS -RCC-CC.. T-DS -RCC-CC T-DS -RCC-CC.. T-ES -RCC-EE T-ES -RCC-EE.. T-ES -RCC-CC.. T-ES -RCC-CC T-ES -RCC-CC - Publication A-CAA-EN-P

341 Bulletin T/T Open Type Starters Product Selection & Coordination Ratings Motor Current Adjustment Range [A] kw Ratings Coil voltage code see page - IEC kw and Coordination Ratings ( Hz) Type Coordination Max. Short-Circuit Current [ka] Type Coordination V AC V AC V AC V AC V AC V AC V AC V AC V AC V AC V AC V AC F-Frame with -C/-C Contactors on ISO Bus Bar Modules DOL Starters Reversing Starters.. T-ES -TCC-EE T-ES -TCC-EE.. T-ES -TCC-CC.. T-ES -TCC-CC T-ES -TCC-CC... T-FS -TCC-EE T-FS -TCC-EE... T-FS -TCC-CC... T-FS -TCC-CC T-FS -TCC-CC.. T-ES -TCC-EF T-ES -TCC-EF.. T-ES -TCC-CD.. T-ES -TCC-CD T-ES -TCC-CD.. T-FS -TCC-EF T-FS -TCC-EF.. T-FS -TCC-CD.. T-FS -TCC-CD T-FS -TCC-CD.. T-GS -TCC-EF T-GS -TCC-EF.. T-GS -TCC-CD.. T-GS -TCC-CD T-GS -TCC-CD.. T-FS -TCC-EF T-FS -TCC-EF.. T-FS -TCC-CD.. T-FS -TCC-CD T-FS -TCC-CD. T-GS -TCC-EF T-GS -TCC-EF. T-GS -TCC-CD. T-GS -TCC-CD T-GS -TCC-CD kw ratings shown in the table are for reference. Final selection of the starter depends upon the actual motor full-load current. Publication A-CAA-EN-P -

342 Bulletin T/T Open Type Starters Product Selection & Coordination Ratings Motor Current Adjustment Range [A] kw Ratings IEC kw and Coordination Ratings ( Hz) Type Coordination Max. Short-Circuit Current [ka] Type Coordination V AC V AC V AC V AC V AC V AC V AC V AC V AC V AC V AC V AC C-Frame with -C/-C Contactors on Panel Mounting Modules DOL Starters Reversing Starters T-AW -QAC-DA T-AW -QAC-DA T-AW -QAC-EA T-AW -QAC-EA T-AW -QBC-DB T-AW -QBC-DB T-AW -QBC-EB T-AW -QBC-EB T-AW -QBC-CP T-AW -QBC-CP T-AW -QBC-CP T-AW -QBC-CP T-AW -QBC-CP T-AW -QBC-CP T-AW -QBC-DC T-AW -QBC-DC T-AW -QBC-EC T-AW -QBC-EC T-AW -QBC-CA T-AW -QBC-CA T-AW -QBC-CA D-Frame with -C/-C Contactors on Panel Mounting Modules T-AW -RBC-CP T-AW -RBC-CP T-AW -RBC-CP T-AW -RBC-DC T-AW -RBC-DC T-AW -RBC-EC T-AW -RBC-EC T-AW -RBC-CA T-AW -RBC-CA T-AW -RBC-CA T-DW -RBC-CP T-DW -RBC-CP T-DW -RBC-CP T-DW -RBC-DC T-DW -RBC-DC T-DW -RBC-EC T-DW -RBC-EC T-DW -RBC-CA T-DW -RBC-CA T-DW -RBC-CA..... T-AW -RBC-DC T-AW -RBC-DC..... T-AW -RBC-EC T-AW -RBC-EC..... T-AW -RBC-CA..... T-AW -RBC-CA T-AW -RBC-CA..... T-DW -RBC-DC T-DW -RBC-DC..... T-DW -RBC-EC T-DW -RBC-EC..... T-DW -RBC-CA..... T-DW -RBC-CA T-DW -RBC-CA.... T-AW -RBC-DD T-AW -RBC-DD.... T-AW -RBC-ED T-AW -RBC-ED.... T-AW -RBC-CB.... T-AW -RBC-CB T-AW -RBC-CB.... T-BW -RCC-DD T-BW -RCC-DD.... T-BW -RCC-ED T-BW -RCC-ED.... T-BW -RCC-CB.... T-BW -RCC-CB T-BW -RCC-CB.... T-EW -RCC-ED T-EW -RCC-ED.... T-EW -RCC-CB.... T-EW -RCC-CB T-EW -RCC-CB... T-CW -RCC-DD T-CW -RCC-DD... T-CW -RCC-ED T-CW -RCC-ED... T-CW -RCC-CB... T-CW -RCC-CB T-CW -RCC-CB.. T-EW -RCC-ED T-EW -RCC-ED.. T-EW -RCC-CB.. T-EW -RCC-CB T-EW -RCC-CB.. T-DW -RCC-DE T-DW -RCC-DE.. T-DW -RCC-EE T-DW -RCC-EE.. T-DW -RCC-CC.. T-DW -RCC-CC T-DW -RCC-CC.. T-EW -RCC-EE T-EW -RCC-EE.. T-EW -RCC-CC.. T-EW -RCC-CC T-EW -RCC-CC - Publication A-CAA-EN-P

343 Bulletin T/T Open Type Starters Product Selection & Coordination Ratings Motor Current Adjustment Range [A] Coil voltage code see this page Coil Voltage Codes for AC Control Voltage [V] - V V - - Hz R K V W X Y KP D P S KG Hz Q J V X KP D KG H L / Hz KJ KY KP KD KG KL Voltage [V] - kw Ratings Hz F VA T N G B M C Hz A T I E N B C / Hz KF KA KN KB Coil Voltage Codes for DC Control IEC kw and Coordination Ratings ( Hz) Type Coordination Max. Short-Circuit Current [ka] Type Coordination V AC V AC V AC V AC V AC V AC V AC V AC V AC V AC V AC V AC F-Frame with -C/-C Contactors on Panel Mounting Modules DOL Starters Reversing Starters.. T-EW -TCC-EE T-EW -TCC-EE.. T-EW -TCC-CC.. T-EW -TCC-CC T-EW -TCC-CC... T-FW -TCC-EE T-FW -TCC-EE... T-FW -TCC-CC... T-FW -TCC-CC T-FW -TCC-CC.. T-EW -TCC-EF T-EW -TCC-EF.. T-EW -TCC-CD.. T-EW -TCC-CD T-EW -TCC-CD.. T-FW -TCC-EF T-FW -TCC-EF.. T-FW -TCC-CD.. T-FW -TCC-CD T-FW -TCC-CD.. T-GW -TCC-EF T-GW -TCC-EF.. T-GW -TCC-CD.. T-GW -TCC-CD T-GW -TCC-CD.. T-FW -TCC-EF T-FW -TCC-EF.. T-FW -TCC-CD.. T-FW -TCC-CD T-FW -TCC-CD. T-GW -TCC-EF T-GW -TCC-EF. T-GW -TCC-CD. T-GW -TCC-CD T-GW -TCC-CD kw ratings shown in the table are for reference. Final selection of the starter depends upon the actual motor full-load current. DC Voltages [V] Standard ZR ZQ ZJ ZW ZY ZZ ZB ZG ZE ZD ZP ZS ZA ZF ZT with Integrated Diode DJ with Electronic Coil EJ - Publication A-CAA-EN-P -

344 Bulletin T/T Open Type Starters Factory-Installed Options T Factory-Installed Options Change option code to desired auxiliary contact: T-AWD-CAC Contactor Auxiliaries without -SP Control Plug ISO Busbar Mount Standard Busbar Mount Panel Mount Option Description A A A A A A A A N.O. NA NA NA Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard N.O. + N.C. NA NA NA Available Available Available Available Available N.O. NA NA NA Available Available Available Available Available N.O. + N.C. NA NA NA Available NA NA Available NA N.O. + N.C. NA NA NA NA Available Available NA Available N.O. + N.C. NA NA NA Available NA NA Available NA Change option code to desired auxiliary contact: T-AWD-CAC Contactor Auxiliaries with -SP Control Plug ISO Busbar Mount Standard Busbar Mount Panel Mount Option Description A A A A A A A A N.O. Standard Standard NA Available Available Available Available Available N.O. + N.C. Available Available NA Available Available Available Available Available N.O. Available Available NA Available Available Available Available Available N.O. + N.C. NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA N.O. + N.C. NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA N.O. + N.C. NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA Change option code to desired auxiliary contact: T-AWD-CA Circuit Breaker Aux/Trip Contacts ISO Busbar Mount Standard Busbar Mount Panel Mount Option Description A A A A A A A A X Without Aux/Trip Contacts NA NA NA Available Available Available Available Available A N.C. Aux. NA NA NA Available Available NA Available Available B N.O. Aux. Available Available NA Available Available NA Available Available C N.O. + N.C. Aux. Standard Standard NA Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard D N.O. Aux. Available Available NA Available Available Available Available Available E N.C. Aux. NA NA NA Available Available Available Available Available R N.O. Trip + N.C. Aux NA NA NA Available Available NA Available Available S N.O. Trip + N.O. Aux Available Available NA Available Available NA Available Available Not available when an -SP Control Plug is selected. Add option code to desired auxiliary contact: T-AWD-CAC Additional Circuit Breaker Aux/Trip Contacts ISO Busbar Mount Standard Busbar Mount Panel Mount Option Description A A A A A A A A Blank Without Aux/Trip Contacts Available Available Available Available Available Available Available Available C N.O. + N.C. Aux. Available Available NA Available Available NA Available Available D N.O. Aux. Available Available NA Available Available NA Available Available E N.C. Aux. Available Available NA Standard Standard NA Standard Standard K N.C. (OL) Trip + N.C. (SC) Trip Available Available NA Available Available Available Available Available L N.O. (OL) Trip + N.O. (SC) Trip Available Available NA Available Available Available Available Available M N.C. (OL) Trip + N.O. (SC) Trip Available Available NA Available Available Available Available Available N N.O. (OL) Trip + N.C. (SC) Trip Available Available NA Available Available Available Available Available Q N.O. (SC) Trip + N.C. (SC) Trip Available Available NA Available Available NA Available Available Not available on A starters. Not available when an -SP Control Plug is selected on A starters. Add option code to desired auxiliary contact: T-AWD-CAC- Modifications/Accessories Option R V D KN KY TE SP Description Surge Suppressor, RC Surge Suppressor, Varistor Surge Suppressor, Diode Lockable Knob, Black Lockable Knob, Red/Yellow Spacing Adapter for UL Type E Control Plug, Top Mount - Publication A-CAA-EN-P

345 Bulletin T/T Open Type Starters Factory-Installed Options T Factory-Installed Options Change option code to desired auxiliary contact: T-AWD-CAC Contactor Auxiliaries without -SP Control Plug ISO Busbar Mount Standard Busbar Mount Panel Mount Option Description A A A A A A A A N.O. + N.C. NA NA NA Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard N.O. + N.C. NA NA NA Available Available Available Available Available Change option code to desired auxiliary contact: T-AWD-CAC Contactor Auxiliaries with -SP Control Plug ISO Busbar Mount Standard Busbar Mount Panel Mount Option Description A A A A A A A A N.O. + N.C. Standard Standard NA Available Available Available Available Available N.O. + N.C. Available Available NA Available Available Available Available Available Change option code to desired auxiliary contact: T-AWD-CA Circuit Breaker Aux/Trip Contacts ISO Busbar Mount Standard Busbar Mount Panel Mount Option Description A A A A A A A A X Without Aux/Trip Contacts NA NA NA Available Available Available Available Available A N.C. Aux. NA NA NA Available Available NA Available Available B N.O. Aux. Available Available NA Available Available NA Available Available C N.O. + N.C. Aux. Standard Standard NA Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard D N.O. Aux. Available Available NA Available Available Available Available Available E N.C. Aux. NA NA NA Available Available Available Available Available R N.O. Trip + N.C. Aux NA NA NA Available Available NA Available Available S N.O. Trip + N.O. Aux Available Available NA Available Available NA Available Available Add option code to desired auxiliary contact: T-AWD-CAC Additional Circuit Breaker Aux/Trip Contacts ISO Busbar Mount Standard Busbar Mount Panel Mount Option Description A A A A A A A A Blank Without Aux/Trip Contacts Available Available Available Available Available Available Available Available C N.O. + N.C. Aux. Available Available NA Available Available NA Available Available D N.O. Aux. Available Available NA Available Available NA Available Available E N.C. Aux. Available Available NA Available Available NA Available Available K N.C. (OL) Trip + N.C. (SC) Trip Available Available NA Available Available Available Available Available L N.O. (OL) Trip + N.O. (SC) Trip Available Available NA Available Available Available Available Available M N.C. (OL) Trip + N.O. (SC) Trip Available Available NA Available Available Available Available Available N N.O. (OL) Trip + N.C. (SC) Trip Available Available NA Available Available Available Available Available Q N.O. (SC) Trip + N.C. (SC) Trip Available Available NA Available Available NA Available Available Not available on A starters. Not available when a -SP Control Plug is selected on A starters. Add option code to desired auxiliary contact: T-AWD-CAC- Modifications/Accessories Option R V D KN KY TE SP Description Surge Suppressor, RC Surge Suppressor, Varistor Surge Suppressor, Diode Lockable Knob, Black Lockable Knob, Red/Yellow Spacing Adapter for UL Type E Control Plug, Top Mount Publication A-CAA-EN-P -

346 Bulletin T/T Open Type Starters Approximate Dimensions Dimensions are shown in millimeters. Dimensions are not intended for manufacturing purposes. (b) (c).... (b) / (c) (b) / (c) (b) / (c) (b) (c).... (b) / (c) (b) / (c) (a) (d) (a + d) Circuit Breaker: M-C / -D Contactor: -C... Motor Protection Relay: -ED / -EE (a) With additional side-mount aux. or trip contact(s) (b) Standard busbar adapter with control plug (c) Iso busbar adapter with control plug (d) With -E* side-mount module Circuit Breaker: M-C / -D Contactor: -C... Motor Protection Relay: -EC... (a) (a) With additional side-mount aux. or trip contact(s) (b) Standard busbar adapter (c) Iso busbar adapter (b) (c). (b) / (c) (b) / (c) (b) / (c) (b) (c).... (b) / (c) (b) / (c)... (d) Circuit Breaker: M-D Contactor: -C... Motor Protection Relay: -EE (b) Standard busbar adapter with control plug (c) Iso busbar adapter with control plug (d) With -E* side-mount module Circuit Breaker: M-D Contactor: -C... Motor Protection Relay: -EC... (b) Standard busbar adapter (c) Iso busbar adapter - Publication A-CAA-EN-P

347 Bulletin T/T Open Type Starters Approximate Dimensions Dimensions are shown in millimeters. Dimensions are not intended for manufacturing purposes. (b) (c) (b) / (c). (b) /. (c). (b) /. (c) (b) (c) (b) / (c). (b) /. (c) (a) (d) (a + d) (a) Circuit Breaker: M-F Contactor: -C... Motor Protection Relay: -EE (a) With additional side-mount aux. or trip contact (b) Standard busbar adapter with control plug (c) Iso busbar adapter with control plug (d) With -E* side-mount module Circuit Breaker: M-F Contactor: -C... Motor Protection Relay:.EC... (a) With additional side-mount aux. or trip contact (b) Standard busbar adapter (c) Iso busbar adapter (b) (c) (b) / (c). (b) /. (c). (b) /. (c) (b) (c)... (b) / (c). (b) /. (c)... Circuit Breaker: M-F Contactor: -C Motor Protection Relay: -EE (d) (b) Standard busbar adapter with control plug (c) Iso busbar adapter with control plug (d) With -E* side-mount module Circuit Breaker: M-F Contactor: -C Motor Protection Relay: -EC... (b) Standard busbar adapter (c) Iso busbar adapter Publication A-CAA-EN-P -

348 Bulletin T/T Open Type Starters Approximate Dimensions Dimensions are shown in millimeters. Dimensions are not intended for manufacturing purposes. (b) (c). (b) / (c) (b) / (c) (b) / (c) (b) (c).... (b) / (c) (b) / (c)... (a) Circuit Breaker: M-C / -D Contactors: -C... Motor Protection Relay: -ED / -EE (a) With additional side-mount aux. contacts (b) Standard busbar adapter with control plug (c) Iso busbar adapter with control plug (a) Circuit Breaker: M-C / -D Contactors: -C... Motor Protection Relay: -EC... (a) With additional side-mount aux. contacts (b) Standard busbar adapter (c) Iso busbar adapter (b) (c) (b) / (c). (b) / (c) (b) / (c) (b) (c)... (b) / (c). (b) / (c)... (a) (a) Circuit Breaker: M-D Contactors: -C... Motor Protection Relay: -EE (a) With additional side-mount aux. contacts (b) Standard busbar adapter with control plug (c) Iso busbar adapter with control plug Circuit Breaker: M-D Contactors: -C... Motor Protection Relay: -EC... (a) With additional side-mount aux. contacts (b) Standard busbar adapter (c) Iso busbar adapter - Publication A-CAA-EN-P

349 Bulletin T/T Open Type Starters Approximate Dimensions Dimensions are shown in millimeters. Dimensions are not intended for manufacturing purposes. (b) (c) (b) / (c). (b) /. (c). (b) /. (c) (b) (c)... (b) / (c). (b) /. (c)... (a) Circuit Breaker: M-F Contactors: -C... Motor Protection Relay: -EE (a) With additional side-mount aux. contacts (b) Standard busbar adapter with control plug (c) Iso busbar adapter with control plug (a) Circuit Breaker: M-F Contactors: -C... Motor Protection Relay: -EC... (a) With additional side-mount aux. contacts (b) Standard busbar adapter (c) Iso busbar adapter (b) (c) (b) / (c). (b) /. (c). (b) /. (c) (b) (c)... (b) / (c). (b) /. (c)... (a) (a) Circuit Breaker: M-F Contactors: -C Motor Protection Relay: -EE (a) With additional side-mount aux. contacts (b) Standard busbar adapter with control plug (c) Iso busbar adapter with control plug Circuit Breaker: M-F Contactors: -C Motor Protection Relay: -EC... (a) With additional side-mount aux. contacts (b) Standard busbar adapter (c) Iso busbar adapter Publication A-CAA-EN-P -

350 Bulletin T/T Open Type Starters Approximate Dimensions Dimensions are shown in millimeters. Dimensions are not intended for manufacturing purposes. (b) Circuit Breaker: M-F Contactor: -C... Motor Protection Relay: -EE (b) Standard busbar adapter with control plug Circuit Breaker: M-F Contactor: -C... Motor Protection Relay: -EC... (b) (a) (a) Circuit Breaker: M-F Contactors: -C... Motor Protection Relay: -EE (a) With additional side-mount aux. contacts (b) Standard busbar adapter with control plug Circuit Breaker: M-F Contactors: -C... Motor Protection Relay: -EC... (a) With additional side-mount aux. contacts - Publication A-CAA-EN-P

351 Bulletin T/T Open Type Starters Approximate Dimensions Dimensions are shown in millimeters. Dimensions are not intended for manufacturing purposes. (a) (b) (a).. (b) (a). (d). (d) Circuit Breaker: M-C / -D Contactors: -C... Motor Protection Relay: -ED / -EE (a) With additional side-mount aux. or trip contact(s) (b) Control plug on top OR bottom side optional (d) With -E* side-mount module Circuit Breaker: M-C / -D Contactors: -C... Motor Protection Relay: -EC... (a) (a) With additional side-mount aux. or trip contact(s) (b).. (b). (d) Circuit Breaker: M-D Contactor: -C... Motor Protection Relay: -EE (b) Control plug on top OR bottom side optional (d) With -E* side-mount module Circuit Breaker: M-D Contactor: -C... Motor Protection Relay:.EC... Publication A-CAA-EN-P -

352 Bulletin T/T Open Type Starters Approximate Dimensions Dimensions are shown in millimeters. Dimensions are not intended for manufacturing purposes. (a) (a) (b) (b). (d) Circuit Breaker: M-F Contactor: -C... Motor Protection Relay: -EE (a) With additional side-mount aux. or trip contact (b) Control plug on top OR bottom side optional (d) With -E* side-mount module Circuit Breaker: M-F Contactor: -C... Motor Protection Relay:.EC... (a) With additional side-mount aux. or trip contact (b) Circuit Breaker: M-F Contactor: -C Motor Protection Relay: -EE (d) (b) (b) Control plug on top OR bottom side optional (d) With -E* side-mount module Circuit Breaker: M-F Contactor: -C Motor Protection Relay: -EC... - Publication A-CAA-EN-P

353 Bulletin T/T Open Type Starters Approximate Dimensions Dimensions are shown in millimeters. Dimensions are not intended for manufacturing purposes. (b).. (b) (a) Circuit Breaker: M-C / -D Contactors: -C... Motor Protection Relay: -ED / -EE (a) With additional side-mount aux. contacts (b) Control plug on top OR bottom side optional (a) Circuit Breaker: M-C / -D Contactors: -C... Motor Protection Relay: -EC... (a) With additional side-mount aux. contacts (b).. (b) (a) (a) Circuit Breaker: M-D Contactors: -C... Motor Protection Relay: -EE (a) With additional side-mount aux. contacts (b) Control plug on top OR bottom side optional Circuit Breaker: M-D Contactors: -C... Motor Protection Relay: -EC... (a) With additional side-mount aux. contacts Publication A-CAA-EN-P -

354 Bulletin T/T Open Type Starters Approximate Dimensions Dimensions are shown in millimeters. Dimensions are not intended for manufacturing purposes. (b) (b) (a) Circuit Breaker: M-F Contactors: -C... Motor Protection Relay: -EE (a) With additional side-mount aux. contacts (b) Control plug on top OR bottom side optional (b) (a) Circuit Breaker: M-F Contactors: -C... Motor Protection Relay: -EC... (a) With additional side-mount aux. contacts (a) (b) (a) Circuit Breaker: M-F Contactors: -C Motor Protection Relay: -EE (a) With additional side-mount aux. contacts (b) Control plug on top OR bottom side optional Circuit Breaker: M-F Contactors: -C Motor Protection Relay: -EC... (a) With additional side-mount aux. contacts - Publication A-CAA-EN-P

355 Bulletin / Eco and Compact Combination Starters Product Overview Bulletin Eco and Compact Combination Starters Current range:... A Bulletin E/E modular Eco starters Bulletin S/S Pre-wired compact starters Uses Bulletin M motor protection circuit breakers (MPCBs) and Bulletin -C or -K contactors culus Listed for control and protection of motor loads Type or Type Coordination Mounts to top hat rail(s) or screw mounts Your order must include: cat. no. of the starter selected and, if required, cat. no. of any accessories. Table of Contents Product Selection... - Factory-Installed Modifications... - Standards Compliance IEC/EN -, -, --, - IEC/EN - CSA., No. UL Certifications culus Listed (File No. E, Guide NKJH, NKJH) CE Marked Eco Starter with -K Miniature Contactor Eco Starter with -C IEC Contactor Reversing Eco Starter with -K Miniature Contactor Reversing Eco Starter with -C IEC Contactor Compact Combination Starter ( A) Compact Combination Starter ( A) Reversing Compact Combination Starter ( A) AC Coils DC Coils V DC only V DC only V DC only Standards Compliance culus Listed See this page CE IEC Type Coordination See pages - and page - Components MPCB M-C M-C,-D M-C M-C,-D M-C,-D M-F M-C,-D Contactor -K -C -K -C -C -C -C Publication A-CAA-EN-P -

356 Bulletin / Eco and Compact Combination Starters Catalog Number Explanation Explanation Examples given in this section are for reference purposes. This basic explanation should not be used for product selection; not all combinations will produce a valid catalog number. Code S S - a S A N D C A C TE Bulletin Number Starter Type Description DOL Starter with MPCB Rev Starter with MPCB b Contactor Size Code Description A -C B -C C -C D -C E -C F -C G -C Code N Code Q R J K KJ V W X Y KY KP D KD P KL H L A F KF VA T E N KN G B M C c Style Description Open Style Screw mount (), mm top hat rail mount () or mm top hat rail mount () d AC Coil Voltage Description V AC, Hz V AC, Hz V AC, Hz V AC, Hz V AC, / Hz V AC, Hz /V AC, Hz V AC, Hz V AC, Hz /V AC, Hz V AC, Hz V AC, / Hz V AC, Hz /...V AC, Hz V AC, Hz /V AC, Hz V AC, / Hz V AC, Hz...V AC, / Hz V AC, Hz...V AC, Hz V AC, Hz /V AC, Hz...V AC, Hz V AC, / Hz...V AC, Hz V AC, Hz /V AC, Hz V AC, Hz...V AC, Hz /V AC, Hz V AC, / Hz...V AC, Hz V AC, Hz /V AC, Hz V AC, Hz V AC, Hz /V AC, Hz a b c d e f g h i d, continued DC Coil Voltage Bul. S only Code Description ZR...V DC ZQ V DC ZJ V DC DJ V DC with Diode EJ V DC electronic ZW V DC ZY V DC ZZ V DC ZB V DC ZG V DC ZE V DC ZD V DC ZP V DC ZS V DC ZA V DC ZF V DC ZT V DC Also available for Bulletin S Contactor Aux. Contacts Code Description N.O. (S only) N.O. + N.C. (Bul. S and S, contactor sizes E G only) Code C D F Code A A A A B B B B B C C C C C C e f Circuit Breaker Frame Size Description C Frame D Frame F Frame g Circuit Breaker Current Range Description... A... A... A... A... A... A... A... A... A... A... A... A... A... A... A Publication A-CAA-EN-P h Circuit Breaker Aux. and Trip Contacts for M Bottom Front Code Description C N.O. + NC Aux. Contact D N.O. Aux. Contact R N.O. (SC+OL) + NC Aux. Contact S N.O. (SC+OL) + N.O. Aux. Contact Modifications, Accessories Circuit Breaker Accessories Code Description TE Spacer Module KN Lockable Twist Knob, Black KY Lockable Twist Knob, Red/Yellow Additional CB Auxiliaries (Side Mount) Code Description A N.C. A N.O. A N.O. + N.C. Additional CB Trip Contacts (Side Mount) Code Description R N.O. Thermal-Mag + N.O. Mag Only R N.O. Thermal-Mag + N.C. Mag Only R N.C. Thermal-Mag + N.O. Mag Only R N.C. Thermal-Mag + N.C. Mag Only M N.O. Mag Only + N.C. Mag Only Coil Accessories Code Description JE Electronic Interface(s) D Surge Suppressor Diode R Surge Suppressor RC V Surge Suppressor Varistor Additional Contactor Auxiliaries (Side Mount) Code Description S N.C. S N.O. S N.O. + N.C. S N.O. Additional Contactor Auxiliaries (Front Mount) Code Description F N.O. + N.C. F N.O. F N.O. + N.C. i

357 Bulletin / Eco and Compact Combination Starters Catalog Number Explanation Explanation Examples given in this section are for reference purposes. This basic explanation should not be used for product selection; not all combinations will produce a valid catalog number. Code E E a E A N D C A X TE Bulletin Number Starter Type Description DOL Starter with MPCB Rev Starter with MPCB b Contactor Size Code Description A -C B -C C -C D -C KM -K KN -K KP -K c Style Code Description Open Style mm top hat rail mount N () d AC Coil Voltages for Contactor Size A-D Code Description Q V AC, Hz R V AC, Hz J V AC, Hz K V AC, Hz KJ V AC, / Hz V V AC, Hz/V AC, Hz W V AC, Hz X V AC, Hz/V AC, Hz Y V AC, Hz KY V AC, / Hz KP V AC, Hz/...V AC, Hz D V AC, Hz/V AC, Hz KD V AC, / Hz P V AC, Hz KL...V AC, / Hz H V AC, Hz L...V AC, Hz A V AC, Hz /V AC, Hz F...V AC, Hz KF V AC, / Hz VA...V AC, Hz T V AC, Hz/V AC, Hz E V AC, Hz N...V AC, Hz/V AC, Hz KN V AC, / Hz G...V AC, Hz B V AC, Hz/V AC, Hz M V AC, Hz C V AC, Hz/V AC, Hz a b c d e f g h i d, continued DC Coil Voltages for Contactor Size A D Code Description EJ V DC electronic AC Coil Voltages for Contactor Size KM KP Code Description KJ V AC, / Hz D V AC, Hz/V AC, Hz KF V AC, / Hz KA V AC, / Hz KN V AC, / Hz B V AC, Hz/V AC, Hz VC V AC, Hz/V AC, Hz DC Coil Voltage for Contactor Sizes KM KP Code Description ZQ V DC ZJ V DC DJ V DC with integrated diode ZD V DC ZS V DC ZA V DC ZT V DC Contactor Aux. Contacts Code Description N.C. (E, or E-KM KP) N.O. (E, or E-KM KP) N.O. + N.C. (E-A D) Code C D Code A A A A B B B B B C C C C e f Circuit Breaker Frame Size Description C Frame D Frame g Circuit Breaker Current Range Description... A... A... A... A... A... A... A... A... A... A... A... A... A h Circuit Breaker Aux. and Trip Contacts for M Bottom Front Code Description X Without Aux. Trip Contacts A N.C. Aux. Contact B N.O. Aux. Contact C N.O. + N.C. Aux. Contact D N.O. Aux. Contact R N.O. (SC+OL) + N.C. Aux. Contact S N.O. (SC+OL) + N.O. Aux. Contact Modifications, Accessories Circuit Breaker Accessories Code Description TE Spacing Adapter KN Lockable Twist Knob, Black KY Lockable Twist Knob, Red/Yellow Additional CB Auxiliaries (Side Mount) Code Description A N.C. A N.O. A N.O. + N.C. Additional CB Trip Contacts (Side Mount) Code Description R N.O. Thermal-Mag + N.O. Mag Only R N.O. Thermal-Mag + N.C. Mag Only R N.C. Thermal-Mag + N.O. Mag Only R N.C. Thermal-Mag + N.C. Mag Only M N.O. Mag Only + N.C. Mag Only Coil Accessories Code Description JE Electronic Interface(s) D Surge Suppressor Diode R Surge Suppressor RC V Surge Suppressor Varistor Additional Contactor Auxiliaries (Side Mount) Code Description S N.C. S N.O. S N.O. + N.C. S N.O. Additional Contactor Auxiliaries (Front Mount) Code Description F N.O. + N.C. F N.O. F N.O. + N.C. i Publication A-CAA-EN-P -

358 Bulletin E/E Eco Starters Product Selection Bulletin E Direct On-Line Eco Starters Note: Verify that the motor protection circuit breaker can be set to the rated motor current! E/E Modular Eco Starter using Bulletin M Motor Protection Circuit Breaker and Bulletin -K/-K Mini Contactors and Bulletin -C/-C MCS Contactors Mounting Options: Snap Fixing on () mm top hat rail I > M ~ Group Motor, Type E and Type F Combination Motor Controllers (UL/CSA) The E/E motor controllers can be used in a variety of applications. These starters can be used in a group motor application or as a stand-alone product without any additional short-circuit protection in the motor branch circuits. Most of the M-C/D motor protection circuit breakers used in the E/E starters are UL Listed as a manual Type E self-protected combination motor controller. Although there are many tests involved, one of the critical tests a self-protected combination motor controller must pass is to perform electrical ops. and an additional mechanical ops. after a short circuit. By definition, a Type F combination motor controller consists of a Type E manual self protected combination motor controller and a magnetic or solid-state motor controller (such as a -C contactor or an SMC). As with a manual Type E self-protected combination motor controller, additional short-circuit protection is not required for the individual motor circuits. A combination of a M manual self protected combination motor controller and -C contactor can be listed as a Type E self-protected combination motor controller. In this case, the M and -C must pass the additional electrical and mechanical operational test. In some cases, this may require over sizing of the M motor protection circuit breaker or the -C contactor to achieve weld-free performance and meet the additional life requirements. - Publication A-CAA-EN-P

359 Bulletin E/E Eco Starters Product Selection & Coordination Ratings UL/CSA in Group Motor Installations Motor Current Adjustment Range [A] UL/CSA Hp Ratings ( Hz) Max. Short-Circuit Current [ka] DOL Starter Reversing Starter Max. Fuse or Hp Ratings as a UL Motor Controller in Group Motor Circuit Installations Breaker per Type Coordination Type Coordination V V V V NEC [A] V V V V C-Frame with -K/-K Mini Contactors.. E-KMN -CAX E-KMN -CAX.. E-KMN -CAX E-KMN -CAX.. E-KMN -CAX E-KMN -CAX.. E-KMN -CAX E-KMN -CAX.. / / E-KMN -CBX E-KMN -CBX.. / / E-KMN -CBX E-KMN -CBX.. / / / / -/... E-KMN -CBX E-KMN -CBX.. / / -/ E-KMN -CBX E-KMN -CBX.....-/... E-KNN -CBX E-KNN -CBX.. -/ E-KNN -CCX E-KNN -CCX.. -/... -/ -/ E-KPN -CCX E-KPN -CCX.. -/ -/ E-KPN -CCX E-KPN -CCX C-Frame with -C/-C Contactors.. E-AN -CAX E-AN -CAX.. E-AN -CAX E-AN -CAX.. E-AN -CAX E-AN -CAX.. E-AN -CAX E-AN -CAX.. / / E-AN -CBX E-AN -CBX.. / /... E-AN -CBX E-AN -CBX.. / /.../ / -/ E-AN -CBX E-AN -CBX.. / /... -/ E-AN -CBX E-AN -CBX.....-/... E-AN -CBX E-AN -CBX.. -/ -/ E-AN -CCX E-AN -CCX.. -/ / -/... E-BN -CCX E-BN -CCX.. -/ E-BN -CCX E-BN -CCX /... E-DN -CCX E-DN -CCX.....-/ E-DN -CCX E-DN -CCX.. -/ E-DN -CCX E-DN -CCX D-Frame with -C/-C Contactors.. / /.../ / -/ E-AN -DBX E-AN -DBX.. / /.../ / -/ E-DN -DBX E-DN -DBX.. / /... -/ E-AN -DBX E-AN -DBX.. / /... -/ E-DN -DBX E-DN -DBX.. -/ E-AN -DBX E-AN -DBX.. -/ -/ E-AN -DCX E-AN -DCX.. -/... -/ -/ E-BN -DCX E-BN -DCX.. -/... -/ -/ E-CN -DCX E-CN -DCX.. -/ E-BN -DCX E-BN -DCX.. -/ E-CN -DCX E-CN -DCX.. -/ E-DN -DCX E-DN -DCX.....-/ E-DN -DCX E-DN -DCX.. -/ E-DN -DCX E-DN -DCX Hp ratings shown in the table are for reference. Final selection of the starter depends upon the actual motor full-load current. Coil voltage code see page - Publication A-CAA-EN-P -

360 Bulletin E/E Eco Starters Product Selection & Coordination Ratings UL/CSA as a UL Type F Combination Motor Controller Motor Current Adjustment Range [A] UL/CSA Hp Ratings ( Hz) Max. Short-Circuit Current [ka] Hp Ratings as a UL Type F Combination Motor Controller Type Coordination Type Coordination DOL Starter Reversing Starter V V V V Y/V Y/V Y/V Y/V C-Frame with Bulletin -K/-K Mini Contactors.. E-KMN -CAX-TE E-KMN -CAX-TE.. E-KMN -CAX-TE E-KMN -CAX-TE.. E-KMN -CAX-TE E-KMN -CAX-TE.. E-KMN -CAX-TE E-KMN -CAX-TE.. / / E-KMN -CBX-TE E-KMN -CBX-TE.. / / E-KMN -CBX-TE E-KMN -CBX-TE.. / / / / -/ /... E-KMN -CBX-TE E-KMN -CBX-TE.. / / -/ E-KMN -CBX-TE E-KMN -CBX-TE.....-/... E-KNN -CBX-TE E-KNN -CBX-TE.. -/ E-KNN -CCX-TE E-KNN -CCX-TE.. -/... -/ E-KPN -CCX-TE E-KPN -CCX-TE.. -/ E-KPN -CCX-TE E-KPN -CCX-TE C-Frame with Bulletin -C/-C Contactors.. E-AN -CAX-TE E-AN -CAX-TE.. E-AN -CAX-TE E-AN -CAX-TE.. E-AN -CAX-TE E-AN -CAX-TE.. E-AN -CAX-TE E-AN -CAX-TE.. / / E-AN -CBX-TE E-AN -CBX-TE.. / /... E-AN -CBX-TE E-AN -CBX-TE.. / /.../ / -/ E-AN -CBX-TE E-AN -CBX-TE.. / /... -/ E-AN -CBX-TE E-AN -CBX-TE.....-/... E-AN -CBX-TE E-AN -CBX-TE.. -/ E-AN -CCX-TE E-AN -CCX-TE.. -/ / E-BN -CCX-TE E-BN -CCX-TE.. -/ E-BN -CCX-TE E-BN -CCX-TE / E-CN -CCX-TE E-CN -CCX-TE / E-DN -CCX-TE E-DN -CCX-TE.....-/ E-DN -CCX-TE E-DN -CCX-TE.. E-DN -CCX-TE E-DN -CCX-TE D-Frame with Bulletin -C/-C Contactors.. / /.../ / -/ E-AN -DBX-TE E-AN -DBX-TE.. / /.../ / -/ E-DN -DBX-TE E-DN -DBX-TE.. / /... -/ E-AN -DBX-TE E-AN -DBX-TE.. / /... -/ E-DN -DBX-TE E-DN -DBX-TE.. -/ E-AN -DBX-TE E-AN -DBX-TE.. -/ -/ E-AN -DCX-TE E-AN -DCX-TE.. -/... -/ -/ E-BN -DCX-TE E-BN -DCX-TE.. -/... -/ -/ E-CN -DCX-TE E-CN -DCX-TE.. -/ E-BN -DCX-TE E-BN -DCX-TE.. -/ E-CN -DCX-TE E-CN -DCX-TE.. -/ E-DN -DCX-TE E-DN -DCX-TE.....-/ E-DN -DCX-TE E-DN -DCX-TE.. -/ E-DN -DCX-TE E-DN -DCX-TE Hp ratings shown in the table are for reference. Final selection of the starter depends upon the actual motor full-load current. This starter is not valid for application at this horsepower and voltage. Coil voltage code see page - - Publication A-CAA-EN-P

361 Bulletin E/E Eco Starters Product Selection & Coordination Ratings UL/CSA as a UL Self-Protected Type E Combination Motor Controller Motor Current Adjustment Range [A] UL/CSA Hp Ratings ( Hz) Hp Ratings as a UL Self-Protected Type E Combination Motor Controller Max. Short-Circuit Current [ka] DOL Starter Reversing Starter V V V V Y/V Y/V C-Frame with Bulletin -K/-K Mini Contactors.. E-KMN -CAX-TE E-KMN -CAX-TE.. E-KMN -CAX-TE E-KMN -CAX-TE.. E-KMN -CAX-TE E-KMN -CAX-TE.. E-KMN -CAX-TE E-KMN -CAX-TE.. E-KMN -CBX-TE E-KMN -CBX-TE.. E-KMN -CBX-TE E-KMN -CBX-TE.. E-KMN -CBX-TE E-KMN -CBX-TE.. E-KMN -CBX-TE E-KMN -CBX-TE.. E-KNN -CBX-TE E-KNN -CBX-TE.. E-KNN -CCX-TE E-KNN -CCX-TE.. E-KPN -CCX-TE E-KPN -CCX-TE.. E-KPN -CCX-TE E-KPN -CCX-TE C-Frame with Bulletin -C/-C Contactors.. E-AN -CAX-TE E-AN -CAX-TE.. E-AN -CAX-TE E-AN -CAX-TE.. E-AN -CAX-TE E-AN -CAX-TE.. E-AN -CAX-TE E-AN -CAX-TE.. / / E-AN -CBX-TE E-AN -CBX-TE.. / /... E-AN -CBX-TE E-AN -CBX-TE.. / /.../ / -/ E-AN -CBX-TE E-AN -CBX-TE.. E-AN -CBX-TE E-AN -CBX-TE.. E-AN -CBX-TE E-AN -CBX-TE.. E-AN -CCX-TE E-AN -CCX-TE.. E-BN -CCX-TE E-BN -CCX-TE.. E-BN -CCX-TE E-BN -CCX-TE.. E-CN -CCX-TE E-CN -CCX-TE.. E-DN -CCX-TE E-DN -CCX-TE.. E-DN -CCX-TE E-DN -CCX-TE.. E-DN -CCX-TE E-DN -CCX-TE D-Frame with Bulletin -C/-C Contactors.. / /.../ / -/ E-AN -DBX-TE E-AN -DBX-TE.. / /.../ / -/ E-DN -DBX-TE E-DN -DBX-TE.. E-AN -DBX-TE E-AN -DBX-TE.. / /... -/ E-DN -DBX-TE E-DN -DBX-TE.. E-AN -DBX-TE E-AN -DBX-TE.. E-AN -DCX-TE E-AN -DCX-TE.. E-BN -DCX-TE E-BN -DCX-TE.. E-CN -DCX-TE E-CN -DCX-TE.. E-BN -DCX-TE E-BN -DCX-TE.. E-CN -DCX-TE E-CN -DCX-TE.. E-DN -DCX-TE E-DN -DCX-TE.. E-DN -DCX-TE E-DN -DCX-TE.. E-DN -DCX-TE E-DN -DCX-TE Hp ratings shown in the table are for reference. Final selection of the starter depends upon the actual motor full-load current. This starter is not valid for application at this horsepower and voltage. Coil voltage code see page - Publication A-CAA-EN-P -

362 Bulletin E/E Eco Starters Product Selection & Coordination Ratings IEC Type and Type Short-Circuit Coordination Motor Current Adjustment Range [A] IEC kw Ratings for Standard Motors, rpm Max. Short-Circuit Current [ka] Max. Short-Circuit Current [ka] DOL Starter Reversing Starter Max. kw, Hz Type Coordination Type Coordination V V V V V V V V V V V V C-Frame with Bulletin -K/-K Mini Contactors... E-KMN -CAX E-KMN -CAX..... E-KMN -CAX E-KMN -CAX..... E-KMN -CAX E-KMN -CAX..... E-KMN -CAX E-KMN -CAX..... E-KMN -CBX E-KMN -CBX..... E-KMN -CBX E-KMN -CBX..... E-KMN -CBX E-KMN -CBX..... E-KMN -CBX E-KMN -CBX..... E-KNN -CBX E-KNN -CBX... E-KNN -CCX E-KNN -CCX... E-KPN -CCX E-KPN -CCX... E-KPN -CCX E-KPN -CCX C-Frame with Bulletin -C/-C Contactors.... E-AN -CAX E-AN -CAX E-AN -CAX E-AN -CAX E-AN -CAX E-AN -CAX E-AN -CAX E-AN -CAX E-AN -CBX E-AN -CBX E-AN -CBX E-AN -CBX E-AN -CBX E-AN -CBX..... E-AN -CBX E-AN -CBX.... E-AN -CBX E-AN -CBX... E-AN -CCX E-AN -CCX..... E-BN -CCX E-BN -CCX..... E-CN -CCX E-CN -CCX... E-BN -CCX E-BN -CCX.... E-CN -CCX E-CN -CCX... E-DN -CCX E-DN -CCX.. E-DN -CCX E-DN -CCX... E-DN -CCX E-DN -CCX D-Frame with Bulletin -C/-C Contactors E-AN -DBX E-AN -DBX E-DN -DBX E-DN -DBX..... E-AN -DBX E-AN -DBX..... E-DN -DBX E-DN -DBX.... E-AN -DBX E-AN -DBX... E-AN -DCX E-AN -DCX..... E-BN -DCX E-BN -DCX..... E-CN -DCX E-CN -DCX... E-BN -DCX E-BN -DCX.... E-CN -DCX E-CN -DCX... E-DN -DCX E-DN -DCX.. E-DN -DCX E-DN -DCX... E-DN -DCX E-DN -DCX kw ratings shown in the table are for reference. Final selection of the starter depends upon the actual motor full-load current. Coil voltage code see page - - Publication A-CAA-EN-P

363 Bulletin E/E Eco Starters Product Selection Coil Voltage Bulletin E/E Eco Starters with Bulletin -K/-K Mini Contactors Coil Voltage Codes for AC or DC Control Voltage [V] Hz D Hz D B VC / Hz KJ KF KA KN Voltage [V] DC ZQ ZJ ZD ZS ZA ZT DC w/ Diode DJ Bulletin E/E Eco Starters with Bulletin -C/-C MCS Contactors Coil Voltage Codes for AC or DC Control Voltage [V] Hz R K V W X Y KP D P S KG L Hz Q J V X KP D KG H L / Hz KJ KY KP KD KG KL Voltage [V] Hz F VA T N G B M C Hz A T I E N B C / Hz KF KA KN KB Voltage [V] DC EJ... Publication A-CAA-EN-P -

364 Bulletin S/S Compact Combination Starters Product Selection Bulletin S Direct On-Line Compact Starters S Compact Starter using Bulletin M Motor Protection Circuit Breaker and Bulletin -C Contactor Short-Circuit Coordination Type "" and "" according to IEC -- Complete unit, ready for connection with internal wiring Accessories: Bulletin M Circuit Breakers and -C Contactors Removable cover IEC and culus Certified Auxiliary Contacts Wired to Terminal Block at Bottom of Starter Assembly Mounting Versions: - Screw Fixing - Snap Fixing on () or () mm top hat rails - Snap Fixing on () mm top hat rail I > M ~ Group Motor, Type E and Type F Combination Motor Controllers (UL/CSA) The S/S motor controllers can be used in a variety of applications. These starters can be used in a group motor application or as a stand alone product without any additional short-circuit protection in the motor branch circuits. Most of the M-C/D motor protection circuit breakers used in the S/S starters are UL Listed as a manual Type E self-protected combination motor controller. Although there are many tests involved, one of the critical tests that the self-protected combination motor controller must pass is to perform electrical ops. and an additional mechanical ops. after a short circuit. By definition, a Type F combination motor controller consists of a Type E manual self-protected combination motor controller and a magnetic or solid-state motor controller (e.g., a -C contactor or an SMC). As with a manual Type E self-protected combination motor controller, additional short-circuit protection is not required for the individual motor circuits. The combination of a M manual self-protected combination motor controller and -C contactor can be listed as a Type E self-protected combination motor controller. In this case, the M and -C must pass the additional electrical and mechanical operational test. In some cases, this may require oversizing the M motor protection circuit breaker or the -C contactor to achieve weld-free performance and meet the additional life requirements. NOTE: Verify that the motor protection circuit breaker can be set to the rated motor current. - Publication A-CAA-EN-P

365 Bulletin S/S Compact Combination Starters Product Selection & Coordination Ratings UL/CSA in Group Motor Installations Motor Current Adjustment Range [A] UL/CSA Hp Ratings ( Hz) Max. Short-Circuit Current [ka] Max. Fuse or Hp Ratings as a UL Motor Controller in Group Motor Circuit Reversing Starter Installations Breaker per Type Coordination Type Coordination DOL Starter (AC coils only) V V V V NEC [A] V V V V C-Frame with Bulletin -C/-C Contactors.. S-AN -CAC S-AN -CAC.. S-AN -CAC S-AN -CAC.. S-AN -CAC S-AN -CAC.. S-AN -CAC S-AN -CAC.. / / S-AN -CBC S-AN -CBC.. / /... S-AN -CBC S-AN -CBC.. / /.../ / -/ S-AN -CBC S-AN -CBC.. / /... -/ S-AN -CBC S-AN -CBC.....-/... S-AN -CBC S-AN -CBC.. -/ -/ S-AN -CCC S-AN -CCC.. -/ / -/... S-BN -CCC S-BN -CCC.. -/ S-BN -CCC S-BN -CCC / S-CN -CCC S-CN -CCC /... S-DN -CCC S-DN -CCC.....-/ S-DN -CCC S-DN -CCC.. -/ S-DN -CCC S-DN -CCC D-Frame with Bulletin -C/-C Contactors.. / /.../ / -/ S-AN -DBC S-AN -DBC.. / /.../ / -/ S-DN -DBC S-DN -DBC.. / /... -/ S-AN -DBC S-AN -DBC.. / /... -/ S-DN -DBC S-DN -DBC.. -/ S-AN -DBC S-AN -DBC.. -/ -/ S-AN -DCC S-AN -DCC.. -/... -/ -/ S-BN -DCC S-BN -DCC.. -/... -/ -/ S-CN -DCC S-CN -DCC.. -/ S-BN -DCC S-BN -DCC.. -/ S-CN -DCC S-CN -DCC.. -/ S-DN -DCC S-DN -DCC.....-/ S-DN -DCC S-DN -DCC.. -/ S-DN -DCC S-DN -DCC F-Frame with Bulletin -C/-C Contactors.. -/... -/ -/ S-EN -FCC.. -/ S-EN -FCC.. -/ S-EN -FCC.. -/ -/ S-EN -FCC.. -/ -/ S-GN -FCC.. -/ S-EN -FCC.. -/ S-FN -FCC.. -/ S-GN -FCC.. S-FN -FCC.. S-GN -FCC Hp ratings shown in the table are for reference. Final selection of the starter depends upon the actual motor full-load current. Coil voltage code see page - Publication A-CAA-EN-P -

366 Bulletin S/S Compact Combination Starters Product Selection & Coordination Ratings UL/CSA as a UL Type F Combination Motor Controller Motor Current Adjustment Range [A] UL/CSA Hp Ratings ( Hz) Max. Short-Circuit Current [ka] Hp Ratings as a UL Type F Combination Motor Controller Type Coordination Type Coordination DOL Starter Reversing Starter V V V V Y/V Y/V Y/V Y/V C-Frame with Bulletin -C/-C Contactors and Spacing Adapter.. S-AN -CAC-TE S-AN -CAC-TE.. S-AN -CAC-TE S-AN -CAC-TE.. S-AN -CAC-TE S-AN -CAC-TE.. S-AN -CAC-TE S-AN -CAC-TE.. / / S-AN -CBC-TE S-AN -CBC-TE.. / /... S-AN -CBC-TE S-AN -CBC-TE.. / /.../ / -/ S-AN -CBC-TE S-AN -CBC-TE.. / /... -/ S-AN -CBC-TE S-AN -CBC-TE.....-/... S-AN -CBC-TE S-AN -CBC-TE.. -/ S-AN -CCC-TE S-AN -CCC-TE.. -/ / S-BN -CCC-TE S-BN -CCC-TE.. -/ S-BN -CCC-TE S-BN -CCC-TE / S-CN -CCC-TE S-CN -CCC-TE / S-DN -CCC-TE S-DN -CCC-TE.....-/ S-DN -CCC-TE S-DN -CCC-TE.. S-DN -CCC-TE S-DN -CCC-TE D-Frame with Bulletin -C/-C Contactors and Spacing Adapter.. / /.../ / -/ S-AN -DBC-TE S-AN -DBC-TE.. / /.../ / -/ S-DN -DBC-TE S-DN -DBC-TE.. / /... -/ S-AN -DBC-TE S-AN -DBC-TE.. / /... -/ S-DN -DBC-TE S-DN -DBC-TE.. -/ S-AN -DBC-TE S-AN -DBC-TE.. -/ -/ S-AN -DCC-TE S-AN -DCC-TE.. -/... -/ -/ S-BN -DCC-TE S-BN -DCC-TE.. -/... -/ -/ S-CN -DCC-TE S-CN -DCC-TE.. -/ S-BN -DCC-TE S-BN -DCC-TE.. -/ S-CN -DCC-TE S-CN -DCC-TE.. -/ S-DN -DCC-TE S-DN -DCC-TE.....-/ S-DN -DCC-TE S-DN -DCC-TE.. -/ S-DN -DCC-TE S-DN -DCC-TE F-Frame with Bulletin -C/-C Contactors and Spacing Adapter.. -/... -/ -/ S-EN -FCC-TE.. -/ S-EN -FCC-TE.. -/ S-EN -FCC-TE.. -/ -/ S-EN -FCC-TE.. -/ -/ S-GN -FCC-TE.. -/ S-EN -FCC-TE.. -/ S-FN -FCC-TE.. -/ S-GN -FCC-TE.. S-FN -FCC-TE.. S-GN -FCC-TE Hp ratings shown in the table are for reference. Final selection of the starter depends upon the actual motor full-load current. This starter is not valid for application at this horsepower and voltage. Coil voltage code see page - - Publication A-CAA-EN-P

367 Bulletin S/S Compact Combination Starters Product Selection & Coordination Ratings UL/CSA as a UL Self-Protected Type E Combination Motor Controller Motor Current Adjustment Range [A] UL/CSA Hp Ratings ( Hz) Hp Ratings as a UL Self-Protected Type E Combination Motor Controller Max. Short-Circuit Current [ka] DOL Starter Reversing Starter V V V V Y/V Y/V C-Frame with Bulletin -C/-C Contactors and Spacing Adapter.. S-AN -CAC-TE S-AN -CAC-TE.. S-AN -CAC-TE S-AN -CAC-TE.. S-AN -CAC-TE S-AN -CAC-TE.. S-AN -CAC-TE S-AN -CAC-TE.. / / S-AN -CBC-TE S-AN -CBC-TE.. / /... S-AN -CBC-TE S-AN -CBC-TE.. / /.../ / -/ S-AN -CBC-TE S-AN -CBC-TE.. S-AN -CBC-TE S-AN -CBC-TE.. S-AN -CBC-TE S-AN -CBC-TE.. S-AN -CCC-TE S-AN -CCC-TE.. S-BN -CCC-TE S-BN -CCC-TE.. S-BN -CCC-TE S-BN -CCC-TE.. S-CN -CCC-TE S-CN -CCC-TE.. S-DN -CCC-TE S-DN -CCC-TE.. S-DN -CCC-TE S-DN -CCC-TE.. S-DN -CCC-TE S-DN -CCC-TE D-Frame with Bulletin -C/-C Contactors and Spacing Adapter.. / /.../ / -/ S-AN -DBC-TE S-AN -DBC-TE.. / /.../ / -/ S-DN -DBC-TE S-DN -DBC-TE.. S-AN -DBC-TE S-AN -DBC-TE.. / /... -/ S-DN -DBC-TE S-DN -DBC-TE.. S-AN -DBC-TE S-AN -DBC-TE.. S-AN -DCC-TE S-AN -DCC-TE.. S-BN -DCC-TE S-BN -DCC-TE.. S-CN -DCC-TE S-CN -DCC-TE.. S-BN -DCC-TE S-BN -DCC-TE.. S-CN -DCC-TE S-CN -DCC-TE.. S-DN -DCC-TE S-DN -DCC-TE.. S-DN -DCC-TE S-DN -DCC-TE.. S-DN -DCC-TE S-DN -DCC-TE F-Frame with Bulletin -C/-C Contactors and Spacing Adapter.. -/... -/ -/ S-EN -FCC-TE.. -/ S-EN -FCC-TE.. -/ S-EN -FCC-TE.. -/ -/ S-EN -FCC-TE.. -/ -/ S-GN -FCC-TE.. -/ S-EN -FCC-TE.. -/ S-FN -FCC-TE.. -/ S-GN -FCC-TE.. S-FN -FCC-TE.. S-GN -FCC-TE Hp ratings shown in the table are for reference. Final selection of the starter depends upon the actual motor full-load current. This starter is not valid for application at this horsepower and voltage. Coil voltage code see page - Publication A-CAA-EN-P -

368 Bulletin S/S Compact Combination Starters Product Selection & Coordination Ratings IEC Type and Type Short-Circuit Coordination Motor Current Adjustment Range [A] IEC kw Ratings for Standard Motors, rpm Max. Short-Circuit Current [ka] Max. kw, Hz Type Coordination Type Coordination DOL Starter Reversing Starter V V V V V V V V V V V V C-Frame with Bulletin -C/-C Contactors.... S-AN -CAC S-AN -CAC S-AN -CAC S-AN -CAC S-AN -CAC S-AN -CAC S-AN -CAC S-AN -CAC S-AN -CBC S-AN -CBC S-AN -CBC S-AN -CBC S-AN -CBC S-AN -CBC..... S-AN -CBC S-AN -CBC.... S-AN -CBC S-AN -CBC... S-AN -CCC S-AN -CCC..... S-BN -CCC S-BN -CCC..... S-CN -CCC S-BN -CCC... S-BN -CCC S-BN -CCC.... S-CN -CCC S-CN -CCC... S-DN -CCC S-DN -CCC.. S-DN -CCC S-DN -CCC... S-DN -CCC S-DN -CCC D-Frame with Bulletin -C/-C Contactors S-AN -DBC S-AN -DBC S-DN -DBC S-DN -DBC..... S-AN -DBC S-AN -DBC..... S-DN -DBC S-DN -DBC.... S-AN -DBC S-AN -DBC... S-AN -DCC S-AN -DCC..... S-BN -DCC S-BN -DCC..... S-CN -DCC S-CN -DCC... S-BN -DCC S-BN -DCC.... S-CN -DCC S-CN -DCC... S-DN -DCC S-DN -DCC.. S-DN -DCC S-DN -DCC... S-DN -DCC S-DN -DCC F-Frame with Bulletin -C/-C Contactors..... S-EN -FCC... S-EN -FCC.. S-EN -FCC... S-EN -FCC... S-GN -FCC... S-EN -FCC... S-FN -FCC... S-GN -FCC... S-FN -FCC.. S-GN -FCC kw ratings shown in the table are for reference. Final selection of the starter depends upon the actual motor full-load current. Coil voltage code see page - - Publication A-CAA-EN-P

369 Bulletin S/S Compact Combination Starters Product Selection Coil Voltage Codes Bulletin S/S Compact Combination Starters Coil Voltage Codes for AC Control [V] AC, Hz R K V W X Y KP D P S KG L AC, Hz Q J V X KP D KG H L AC, / Hz [V] KJ KY KP KD KG KL AC, Hz F VA T N G B M C AC, Hz A T I E N B C AC, / Hz KF KA KN KB Coil Voltage Codes for DC Control (Bulletin S only) Standard [V] ZR ZQ ZJ ZW ZY ZZ ZB ZG ZE ZD ZP ZS ZA ZF ZT with Integrated Diode DC DJ Electronic EJ Also available for Bulletin S starters. - Publication A-CAA-EN-P -

370 Bulletin / Eco & Compact Combination Starters Factory-Installed Options Bulletin E/E/S/S Factory-Installed Modifications Note: For modifications change (option code ) and add (option code ) for desired features to cat. no. Change option code X to desired auxiliary contact: E-KMND-CAX Bulletin M Auxiliary and Trip Contacts E E S S X Without Auxiliary and Trip Contacts Standard Standard NA NA A Auxiliary Contact N.C. Available Available NA NA B Auxiliary Contact N.O. Available Available NA NA C Auxiliary Contact N.O. + N.C. Available Available Standard Standard D Auxiliary Contact N.O. Available Available Available Available E Auxiliary Contact N.C. Available Available Available Avaiable R N.O. Trip + N.C. Auxiliary Contact Available Available Available Available S N.O. Trip + N.O. Auxiliary Contact Available Available Available Available Add desired option codes AFTER auxiliary contact option code: S-AND-CAX-KY Modifications, Accessories E E S S JE Electronic Interfaces (-C) Available Available Available Available R Surge Suppressor RC (-C) Available Available Available Available V Surge Suppressor Varistor (-C) Available Available Available Available D Surge Suppressor Diode (-C) Available Available Available Available KN Lockable Twist Knob (M) - Black Available Available Available Available KY Lockable Twist Knob (M) - Red/Yellow Available Available Available Available TE Spacing Adapter for UL Type E and Type F Available Available Available Available Additional Contactor Auxiliaries (Side Mount) S N.C. Available Available Available Available S N.O. Available Available Available Available S N.O. + N.C. Available Available Available Available S N.O. Available Available Available Available Additional Contactor Auxiliaries (Front Mount) F N.O. + N.C. Available Available NA NA F N.O. Available Available NA NA F N.O. + N.C. Available Available NA NA Additional Bulletin M Auxiliaries (Side Mount) A N.C. Available Available Available Available A N.O. Available Available Available Available A N.O. + N.C. Available Available Available Available Additional Bulletin M Trip Contacts (Side Mount) R N.O. Thermal-Mag + N.O. Mag Only Available Available Available Available R N.O. Thermal-Mag + N.C. Mag Only Available Available Available Available R N.C. Thermal-Mag + N.O. Mag Only Available Available Available Available R N.C. Thermal-Mag + N.C. Mag Only Available Available Available Available M N.O. Mag Only + N.C. Mag Only Available Available Available Available E and S Reversing Eco Starters will have two of these accessories installed (one on each contactor). Not available on E/E Eco starters with -K/-K mini contactors. - Publication A-CAA-EN-P

371 Bulletin / Eco & Compact Combination Starters Wiring Diagrams Wiring Diagrams IEC Wiring Diagram S-A D Trip Contact With Electronic Interface JE -JE Option IEC Wiring Diagram S-E G Trip Contact With Electronic Interface JE -JE Option Publication A-CAA-EN-P -

372 Bulletin / Eco and Compact Combination Starters Approximate Dimensions Dimensions are shown in millimeters (inches). Dimensions are not intended to be used for manufacturing purposes. E-KM/E-KN/E-KP M-C-N M-C-TE E-KM/E-KN/E-KP M-C-N M-C-TE - Publication A-CAA-EN-P

373 Bulletin / Eco and Compact Combination Starters Approximate Dimensions Dimensions are shown in millimeters. Dimensions are not intended to be used for manufacturing purposes. E/E-A D a a b b b c c E Eco Starters E-AN E-DN (-/) () (-/). (-/) (-/) E Reversing Eco Starters E-AN E-DN (-/) (/) () (-/). (-/) (-/) S-A D S-AN, -ANEJ, S-BN, -BNEJ, S-CN, -CNEJ, S-DN, -DNEJ S-ANZ, -ANDJ, S-BNZ, -BNDJ, S-CNZ, -CNDJ S-DNZ, -DNDJ A [mm] M-C M-D M-C. M-D. M-C M-D B [mm]. -FA, -FC -FPT -FL C [mm] -FA, -FC. -FA, -FC Publication A-CAA-EN-P -

374 Bulletin / Eco & Compact Combination Starters Approximate Dimensions Dimensions are shown in millimeters. Dimensions are not intended to be used for manufacturing purposes. S-A D Safety Clearance - Publication A-CAA-EN-P

375 Bulletin / Eco & Compact Combination Starters Approximate Dimensions Dimensions are shown in millimeters. Dimensions are not intended to be used for manufacturing purposes. S-E and S-F Approximate Dimensions S-G Approximate Dimensions S-EN, -ENEJ S-FN, -FNEJ S-ENZ, -ENDJ S-FNZ, -FNDJ M-F A [mm] B [mm] C [mm] -FB. -FPT. -FL. -FB. A [mm] B [mm] S-GN. M-F S-GNZ, -GNDJ. -FB -FPT -FL C [mm] -FB Publication A-CAA-EN-P -

376 Bulletin H/H/M, -C, -C, -C, -C, -C IEC Enclosed Starters Product Overview Starter Type H/H M C/C -C -C Non-reversing (H)/reversing (H) Combination Motor protection circuit breaker only Non-reversing (C)/reversing (C) Combination Reversing Non-combination Non-reversing Non-combination AC Coils DC Coils UL/CSA IEC CE Components M (MPCB) -C Contactor Overload Relay R Disconnect Max. Current A A A A (plastic enclosure), A (metal enclosure) A (plastic enclosure), A (metal enclosure) Enclosure Material Metal Metal Molded plastic Molded plastic or metal Molded plastic or metal Enclosure Type IP (Type //) IP (Type //) IP (Type /R/K) IP (Type ) and IP (Type //) - metal enclosures IP (Type /X/) - plastic enclosures IP (Type ) and IP (Type //) - metal enclosures IP (Type /X/) - plastic enclosures Product Selection Page - Page - Page - Page - Page - -C -C -C Starter Type Reversing combination Non-reversing combination Non-reversing combination AC Coils DC Coils UL/CSA IEC CE Components Motor Protection Circuit Breaker Motor Circuit Protector -C Contactor Overload Relay R Disconnect Max. Current A A A Enclosure Material Standard Metal Metal Enclosure Type IP (Type ) and IP (Type //) IP (Type ) and IP (Type //) IP (Type ) and IP (Type //) Product Selection Page - Page - Page - For IEC enclosed starter solutions from A, contact your local Rockwell Automation sales office or Allen-Bradley distributor. CE approved with plastic enclosures only. - Publication A-CAA-EN-P

377 Bulletin H/H/M IEC Enclosed Starters Product Overview/Product Selection Bulletin H starter in enclosure size A Bulletin H/H/M Enclosed Combination Starters and Motor Protectors Bulletin H/H enclosed combination starters consist of a Bulletin M motor protection circuit breaker and a Bulletin C/C contactor in a metallic Type // enclosure. Bulletin M enclosed motor protection circuit breakers consist of a Bulletin M motor protection circuit breaker in a metallic Type // enclosure. Table of Contents Product Selection... - Modifications... - Enclosure Dimensions... - Features Bulletin H starter in enclosure size C Current range. A culus Listed for control and protection of motor loads Motor disconnect Short-circuit and overload protection Motor switching (magnetic) Factory-installed options include Pushbuttons, selector switches, and pilot lights Control transformer Auxiliary and trip indication contacts Standards Compliance UL CSA. No. Certifications culus Listed (File No. E, Guide NKJH, NKJH) Product Selection Reversing and Non-reversing Starters The "A" size box accommodates: -H Non-Reversing Starters -Motors up to Hp/V ( A) - pilot devices The "B" size box accommodates: -H Non-Reversing Starters AND H Reversing Starters -Motors up to Hp/V ( A) -Control Transformer and pilot devices The "C" size box accommodates: H Non-Reversing Starters AND H Reversing Starters -Motors up to Hp/V ( A) -Control Transformer and pilot devices Publication A-CAA-EN-P -

378 Bulletin H/H/M IEC Enclosed Starters Product Selection Type E and Type F Combination Motor Controllers (UL/CSA) Most of the M-C/D motor protection circuit breakers used in the H/H starters are UL Listed as a manual Type E self-protected combination motor controller. Although there are many tests involved, one of the critical tests a self-protected combination motor controller must pass is to perform electrical ops. and an additional mechanical ops. after a short circuit. By definition, a Type F combination motor controller consists of a Type E manual self protected combination motor controller and a magnetic or solid-state motor controller (such as a -C contactor or an SMC). As with a manual Type E self-protected combination motor controller, additional short-circuit protection is not required for the individual motor circuits. A combination of a Bulletin M manual self-protected combination motor controller and -C contactor can be listed as a Type E selfprotected combination motor controller. In this case, the M and -C must pass the additional electrical and mechanical operational test. In some cases, this may require oversizing of the M motor protection circuit breaker or the -C contactor to achieve weld-free performance and meet the additional life requirements. Product Selection and Coordination Ratings (UL/CSA as a UL Type F Combination Motor Controller) Motor Current Adjustment Range [A] Hp Ratings as a UL Type F Combination Motor Controller Max. Short-Circuit Current [ka] Type Coordination Y/ V Y/ V Type Coordination Y/ V Y/ V Non-Reversing Starter Enclosure Size Reversing Starter V V V V A Frame Size.. H-AF -CAX A H-AF -CAX B.. H-AF -CAX A H-AF -CAX B.. H-AF -CAX A H-AF -CAX B.. H-AF -CAX A H-AF -CAX B.. / / H-AF -CBX A H-AF -CBX B.. / /... H-AF -CBX A H-AF -CBX B.. / /.../ / -/ H-AF -DBX A H-AF -DBX B.. / /... -/ H-AF -DBX A H-AF -DBX B.. / /... -/ H-DF -DBX A H-DF -DBX B.. -/ H-AF -DBX A H-AF -DBX B.. -/ H-EF -DBX C H-EF -DBX C.. -/... -/ -/ H-BF -DCX A H-BF -DCX B.. -/... -/ -/ H-EF -DCX C H-EF -DCX C.. -/ H-CF -DCX A H-CF - DCX B.. -/ H-EF -DCX C H-EF -DCX C.. H-DF -DCX A H-DF - DCX B.. -/ H-DF -DCX A H-DF - DCX C A Frame Size.. -/... -/ -/ H-EF -FCX C H-EF -FCX C.. -/ H-EF -FCX C H-EF -FCX C.. -/ H-EF -FCX C H-EF -FCX C.. -/ -/ H-EF -FCX C H-EF -FCX C.. -/ H-FF -FCX C H-FF -FCX C.. H-GF -FCX C H-GF -FCX C Line Voltage Codes see page - Coil Voltage Codes see page - Hp ratings shown in the table are for reference. Final selection of the starter depends upon the actual motor full-load current. This starter is not valid for application at this horsepower and voltage. Enclosure Size - Publication A-CAA-EN-P

379 Bulletin H/H/M IEC Enclosed Starters Product Selection Product Selection and Coordination Ratings (UL/CSA as a UL Self-Protected Type E Combination Motor Controller) Motor Current Adjustment Range [A] UL/CSA Hp and Coordination Ratings ( Hz) Hp Ratings as a UL Self-Protected Type E Combination Motor Controller V V V V Max. Short- Circuit Current [ka] Y/ V Y/ V A Frame Size Non-Reversing Starter Enclosure Size Reversing Starter.. H-AF -CAX A H-AF -CAX B.. H-AF -CAX A H-AF -CAX B.. H-AF -CAX A H-AF -CAX B.. H-AF -CAX A H-AF -CAX B.. / / H-AF -CBX A H-AF -CBX B.. / /... H-AF -CBX A H-AF -CBX B.. / /.../ / -/ H-AF -DBX A H-AF -DBX B.. / /.../ / -/ H-DF -DBX A H-DF -DBX B.. H-AF -DBX A H-AF -DBX B.. / /... -/ H-DF -DBX A H-DF -DBX B.. H-AF -DBX A H-AF -DBX B.. -/ H-EF -DBX C H-EF -DBX C.. H-BF -DCX A H-BF -DCX B.. -/... -/ -/ H-EF -DCX C H-EF -DCX C.. H-CF -DCX A H-CF -DCX B.. -/ H-EF -DCX C H-EF -DCX C.. H-DF -DCX A H-DF -DCX B.. H-EF -DCX C H-EF -DCX C.. H-DF -DCX A H-DF -DCX C.. -/ H-EF -DCX C H-EF -DCX C A Frame Size.. -/... -/ -/ H-EF -FCX C H-EF -FCX C.. -/ H-EF -FCX C H-EF -FCX C.. -/ H-EF -FCX C H-EF -FCX C.. -/ -/ H-EF -FCX C H-EF -FCX C.. -/ H-FF -FCX C H-FF -FCX C.. H-GF -FCX C H-GF -FCX C Line Voltage Codes see page - Coil Voltage Codes see page - Hp ratings shown in the table are for reference. Final selection of the starter depends upon the actual motor full-load current. This starter is not valid for application at this horsepower and voltage. Enclosure Size Publication A-CAA-EN-P -

380 Bulletin H/H/M IEC Enclosed Starters Product Selection Enclosed Motor Protectors Self-protected UL Type E manual combination motor controller ka at V ka at V AC control Rated Operational Current [A] ka ka Motor Current Adjustment Range [A] Magnetic Trip Current [A] Maximum Hp, -phase V V V V A Frame Size Enclosure Size.... M-F-CAX A.... M-F-CAX A.... M-F-CAX A.... M-F-CAX A.... M-F-CBX A... M-F-CBX A M-F-DBX A.. M-F-DBX A.... M-F-DBX A.. M-F-DCX A M-F-DCX A.. M-F-DCX A.. M-F-DCX A A Frame Size.. M-F-FCX C M-F-FCX C.. M-F-FCX C. M-F-FCX C M-F-FCX C M-F-FCX C - Publication A-CAA-EN-P

381 Bulletin H/H Factory Installed Modifications Note: For modifications add (option code ) for desired features to cat. no. Add desired option codes. Example: H-AND-CAX-KY JE R V D S S S S A A A R R R R M Coil Options Electronic Interfaces (-C) Surge Suppressor RC (-C) Surge Suppressor Varistor (-C) Surge Suppressor Diode (-C) Additional Contactor Auxiliaries (Side Mount) N.C. N.O. N.O. + N.C. N.O. Additional M Auxiliaries (Side Mount) N.C. N.O. N.O. + N.C. Additional M Trip Contacts (Side Mount) N.O. Thermal-Mag + N.O. Mag Only N.O. Thermal-Mag + N.C. Mag Only N.C. Thermal-Mag + N.O. Mag Only N.C. Thermal-Mag + N.C. Mag Only N.O. Mag Only + N.C. Mag Only Control Options Push Button H Start-Stop / H For-Rev-Stop M RM Multifunction Push Button H Start-Stop / H For- Rev-Stop Multifunction Push Button H Start-Stop-Pilot Light Selector Switch H Hand-Off-Auto / H For-Off-Rev R RW Pilot Light (red, ON) (H only) Pilot Light (red FOR, White REV) (H only) P Control Transformer (not available with enclosure size A) KY Bulletin M External Handle Red/Yellow M Factory Installed Modifications (Enclosed) Note: For modifications add (option code ) for desired features to cat. no. Add desired option codes. Example: M-F-CAX-UVB UV SN A A A R R R R M Bulletin H/H/M IEC Enclosed Starters Modifications Undervoltage Trip Shunt Trip Additional M Auxiliaries (Side Mount) N.C. N.O. N.O. + N.C. Additional M Trip Contacts (Side Mount) N.O. Thermal-Mag + N.O. Mag Only N.O. Thermal-Mag + N.C. Mag Only N.C. Thermal-Mag + N.O. Mag Only N.C. Thermal-Mag + N.C. Mag Only N.O. Mag Only + N.C. Mag Only Modifications H - One per contactor, for a total of two per option code. Starters in enclosure size "A" will change to enclosure size "B" when a control transformer is factory installed. Auxiliary contacy option "A" is required when seelcting this control transformer. Line and Coil Voltage Codes Line Voltage Codes The as listed is incomplete. Select a line voltage code from the table below to complete the Example: V Hz: H-AF -CAX becomes H-AFH -CAX. Line Voltages [V] Hz H A B C Hz F N KN G Coil Voltage Codes The as listed is incomplete. Select a coil voltage code from the table below to complete the Example: V Hz: H-AFH -CAX becomes H-AFHD-CAX. Standard Coil Voltages [V] AC, Hz K D P F N B AC, Hz J D H A T B C AC, / Hz KJ KD DC Standard Coil Voltages [V] Standard ZJ With integrated diode KJ Publication A-CAA-EN-P -

382 Bulletin H/H/M IEC Enclosed Starters Enclosure Dimensions Dimensions in mm. Dimensions are not intended to be used for manufacturing purposes. Enclosure Style A Enclosure Style B Enclosure Style C - Publication A-CAA-EN-P

383 Bulletin C IEC Enclosed Combination Starters Product Overview/Product Selection Product Selection Ratings According to IEC -- Coordinated Breaking Capacity, I q [ka] /V AC V AC Bulletin C/C Enclosed Combination Starters Bulletin C enclosed combination Direct-On-Line starters consist of a Bulletin M motor protection circuit breaker and a Bulletin -C contactor in an impact-resistant molded Type /R/K (IP ) enclosure. Bulletin C enclosed combination Direct-On-Line starters consist of a Bulletin M motor protection circuit breaker and a Bulletin -C contactor in an impact-resistant molded Type /R/K (IP ) enclosure. Compact design. A current range culus Listed for control and protection of motor loads Motor disconnect Short-circuit and overload protection Motor switching (magnetic) V AC Your order must include: of the combination starter selected, coil voltage code, motor protection circuit breaker suffix code, and if required, factory-installed modifications suffix code and/or of any accessories. Output Power, AC- [kw] Ratings as a UL Type F Combination Motor Controller Coordinated Breaking Capacity, I q, Type [ka] -Phase Hp Table of Contents Product Selection... this page Accessories... - Modifications... - Approximate Dimensions... - Standards Compliance EN/IEC -- CSA C. No. UL Certifications culus Listed (File E, Guide NKJH, NKJH) IP (Type /R/K) Raintight, Dusttight, Corrosion-Resistant Molded Plastic Enclosure With START/STOP Multifunction Push Button ( Functions) / Setting Range [A] Type Type Type Type V AC V AC V AC V V V V V V.... C-L -CAX-M C-L -CAX-M..... C-L -CAX-M C-L -CAX-M..... C-L -CAX-M C-L -CAX-M..... C-L -CAX-M C-L -CAX-M..... / C-L -CBX-M C-L -CBX-M..... / / C-L -CBX -M C-L -CBX-M..... / / -/ C-L -CBX-M C-L -CBX-M.... / / C-L -CBX-M C-L -CBX-M.... / / C-L -DBX-M C-L -DBX-M... -/ C-L -CBX-M C-L -CBX-M... -/ C-L -DBX-M C-L -DBX-M. C-L -CCX-M C-L -CCX-M. -/ C-L -DCX-M C-L -DCX-M... C-L -CCX-M C-L -CCX-M... -/ C-L -DCX-M C-L -DCX-M... C-L -CCX-M C-L -CCX-M... -/ C-L -DCX-M C-L -DCX-M. C-L -CCX-M C-L -CCX-M. C-L -DCX-M C-L -DCX-M. C-L -CCX-M C-L -CCX-M. C-L -DCX-M C-L -DCX-M Hp ratings shown in the table are for reference. Final seletion of the starter depends upon the actual motor full-load current and service factor. Bulletin M Motor Protection Circuit Breaker comes separately as a kit. Coil Voltage Code The as listed is incomplete. Select a Coil Voltage Code from the table below to complete the Example: V, Hz/V, Hz: C-L -DC-M becomes C-LD-DC-M. [V] Hz Hz D B Hz D B / Hz KJ KF KN Publication A-CAA-EN-P -

384 Bulletin IEC Reversing Starters Product Overview/Product Selection/Accessories -CAK -CABAF--P Type Metal Enclosure with Liftoff Cover Bulletin IEC Reversing Starters Impact-resistant molded plastic enclosures IP (Type /X/) Selection of metal enclosures IP (Type ) and IP (Type //) Bimetallic Class overload relays Solid-state overload relays Compact design Meets international standards Bulletin enclosed starters use Bulletin reversing contactors and Bulletin solid-state overload relays. These reversing starters ( A) incorporate a dual interlock that provides both mechanical and electrical interlocking in a single unit. A normally open auxiliary contact is also included on each contactor. Table of Contents Product Selection... - Accessories... - Modifications... - Approximate Dimensions... - Standards Compliance EN/IEC -- VDE CSA C. No. UL Certifications culus Listed (File E, Guide NLDX, NLDX) Your order must include: of the reversing starter selected, coil voltage code, overload relay suffix code, and, if required, factoryinstalled modifications suffix code and/or of any accessories. Product Selection Enclosed Type Molded Plastic, AC Operated Ratings (AC, AC) kw Hp -Phase -Phase -Phase Max I e [A] V/ V V V V V V V E Plus Overload Relay Full Load Current Range [A] IP (Type, X, ) Watertight, Dustight Corrosion-Resistant Molded Plastic Enclosure With START/STOP Multifunction Push Button ( functions) and Reset / -/ -/.. -CL EC-M- / -/ -/. -CL ED-M- -/ / -/. -CL ED-M- -/. -CL ED-M- -/. -CL EE-M- Coil Voltage Code The as listed is incomplete. Select a Coil Voltage Code from the table below to complete the Example: -CL ED-M- becomes -CLDED-M-. [V] Hz Hz D B Hz D B / Hz KJ KF KN Accessories Description E Plus DeviceNet and Protection Module Communicates motor diagnostic data via DeviceNet, includes additional I/O, and provides enhanced motor protection options. E Plus EtherNet/IP and Protection Module Communicates motor diagnostic data via EtherNet/IP, includes additional I/O, and provides enhanced motor protection options. E Plus Jam Protection Module Provides Jam protection with adjustable trip level and trip delay setting. The module also provides an input to allow remote reset of a trip. E Plus Ground Fault Module Provides adjustable ma A ground fault protection. The module also provides an input to allow remote reset of a trip. E Plus Ground Fault/Jam Module Provides adjustable ma A ground fault and fixed jam protection. The module also provides an input to allow remote reset of a trip. E Plus PTC Module Provides terminals for connection up to six PTC thermistor sensors. Sensors react to actual temperature and therefore provide enhanced motor protection. Module also provides an input to allow remote reset of a trip. E Plus Remote Reset Module Provides an input to allow remote reset of a trip. Modifications, including pilot lights and selector switches, are available through the Modified Standards Program. Send Modified Standard quote requests to RADBQuote@ra.rockwell.com. - Publication A-CAA-EN-P -EDN -ETN -EJM -EGF -EGJ -EPT -ERR

385 Bulletin IEC Reversing Starters Product Selection Enclosed Type Sheet Metal, AC-Operated Max I e [A] kw Ratings (AC, AC) IP (Type ) General Purpose Sheet Metal Enclosure Hp (Lift-off cover through -C) -Phase -Phase -Phase V/ V V V V V V V IP (Type //) Watertight, Dusttight Sheet Metal Enclosure (Hinged Cover) / -/ -/ -CA -CF -/ / -/ -CA -CF -/ -CA -CF -/ -CA -CF -/ -CA -CF -/ -CA -CF -/ -CA -CF -CA -CF -CA -CF -/ -CA -CF Coil Voltage Code The as listed is incomplete. Select a Coil Voltage Code from the table below to complete the Example: -CA becomes -CAB. AC Voltage Common Control Hz A T N G B M Coil Voltage Code Hz H L A N B C Separate Control Hz K Y D (without transformer) Coil Voltage Code Hz J X D T Overload Relay Code The as listed is incomplete. Select an overload relay code from page - to complete the For single-phase (Ø) applications, consult your local Rockwell Automation sales office or Allen-Bradley distributor. When selecting a factory-installed control circuit transformer (see Modifications page -), use the Common Control Coil Voltage Code to denote the transformer primary voltage. The starter coil and transformer secondary voltage will both be V by default. Example: -CFB -P will have a transformer with a V primary/v secondary and a V starter coil. If a starter coil voltage other than V is desired, a second Coil Voltage Code must be added to denote the coil/transformer secondary voltage. Example: -CFBJ -P will have a transformer with a V primary/v secondary and a V starter coil. Publication A-CAA-EN-P -

386 Bulletin IEC Non-Reversing Starters Product Overview/Product Selection -CABAF--R-P IP (Type ) Metal Enclosure with Lift-off Cover Bulletin IEC Non-Reversing Starters Impact-resistant molded enclosures ( A) IP (Type /X/) Selection of metal enclosures ( A) IP (Type ) IP (Type //) Bimetallic Class overload relays Solid-state overload relays Compact design Meets international standards Bulletin enclosed starters are designed using Bulletin contactors ( A) and Bulletin bimetallic (Class ) or solidstate overload relays in a metal or molded plastic enclosure. Your order must include: of the starter selected, coil voltage code, overload relay suffix code, and, if required, factory-installed modifications suffix code and/or cat. no. of any accessories. Table of Contents Product Selection... this page Accessories... - Modifications... - Approximate Dimensions... - Standards Compliance EN/IEC -- VDE CSA C. No. UL Certifications culus Listed (File E, Guide NLDX, NLDX) Molded Plastic Enclosures Product Selection AC-Operated Starters Enclosed Type Molded Plastic Ratings (AC, AC) With START (Green) kw Hp and STOP (Raised Red) Push Buttons With RESET (Blue) Push Button -Phase -Phase -Phase Max I e [A] V/V V V V V V V V IP (EN/IEC Only) ABS V- Molded Plastic Enclosure ( E-AS) / -/ -/.. -CV EC- -CV EC- / -/ -/. -CV ED- -CV ED- -/ / -/. -CV ED- -CV ED- -/. -CV ED- -CV ED- -/. -CV EE- -CV EE- IP (Type, X, K) Watertight, Dustight Corrosion-Resistant Small Molded Plastic Enclosure ( E-CS) / -/ -/.. -CK EC- -CK EC- / -/ -/. -CK ED- -CK ED- -/ / -/. -CK ED- -CK ED- -/. -CK ED- -CK ED- -/. -CK EE- -CK EE- With START/STOP Multifunction Push Button ( Functions) and Reset IP (Type, X, K) Watertight, Dustight Corrosion-Resistant Large Molded Plastic Enclosure ( E-CS) / -/ -/.. -CL EC-M- / -/ -/. -CL ED-M- -/ / -/. -CL ED-M- -/. -CL ED-M- -/. -CL EE-M- -/. -CL EF-M- -/. -CL EF-M- -/. -CL EF-M- Coil Voltage Code The as listed is incomplete. Select a Coil Voltage Code from the table below to complete the Example: -CK ED-M- becomes -CKLDED-M-. [V] Hz Hz D B Hz D B / Hz KJ KF KN - Publication A-CAA-EN-P

387 Bulletin IEC Non-Reversing Starters Accessories/Product Selection Accessories Description E Plus DeviceNet and Protection Module Communicates motor diagnostic data via DeviceNet, includes additional I/O, and provides enhanced motor protection options. E Plus EtherNet/IP and Protection Module Communicates motor diagnostic data via EtherNet/IP, includes additional I/O, and provides enhanced motor protection options. E Plus Jam Protection Module Provides Jam protection with adjustable trip level and trip delay setting. The module also provides an input to allow remote reset of a trip. E Plus Ground Fault Module Provides adjustable ma A ground fault protection. The module also provides an input to allow remote reset of a trip. E Plus Ground Fault/Jam Module Provides adjustable ma A ground fault and fixed jam protection. The module also provides an input to allow remote reset of a trip. E Plus PTC Module Provides terminals for connection up to six PTC thermistor sensors. Sensors react to actual temperature and therefore provide enhanced motor protection. Module also provides an input to allow remote reset of a trip. E Plus Remote Reset Module Provides an input to allow remote reset of a trip. Modifications, including pilot lights and selector switches, are available through the Modified Standards Program. Send Modified Standard quote requests to RADBQuote@ra.rockwell.com. Enclosed Type Sheet Metal Max I e [A] Ratings (AC, AC) IP (Type ) kw Hp General Purpose Sheet Metal Enclosure (Liftoff Cover) -Phase -Phase -Phase V/V V V V V V V IP (Type,, ) Watertight, Dusttight Sheet Metal Enclosure (Hinged Cover) / -/ -/ -CA -CF -/ / -/ -CA -CF -/ -CA -CF -/ -CA -CF -/ -CA -CF -/ -CA -CF -/ -CA -CF -CA -CF -CA -CF -/ -CA -CF Coil Voltage Code The as listed is incomplete. Select a Coil Voltage Code from the table below to complete the Example: - CA becomes -CAB. -EDN -ETN -EJM -EGF -EGJ -EPT -ERR AC Voltage [V] Common Control Hz A T N G B M Coil Voltage Code Hz H L A N B C Separate Control (without transformer) Hz K Y D Coil Voltage Code Hz J X D T Overload Relay Code The as listed is incomplete. Select an overload relay code from page - to complete the Select an overload relay code from E Plus Overload Relay for Ø Applications: Phase Loss Protection, Class or to complete the Bimetal overload relays are not available in molded plastic enclosed starters. When selecting a factory-installed control circuit transformer (see page -), use the Common Control Coil Voltage Code to denote the transformer primary voltage. The starter coil and transformer secondary voltage will both be V by default. Example: -CFB -P will have a transformer with a V primary/v secondary and a V starter coil. If a starter coil voltage other than V is desired, a second Coil Voltage Code must be added to denote the coil/transformer secondary voltage. Example: -CFBJ -P will have a transformer with a V primary/v secondary and a V starter coil. Control Circuit transformers are not available in molded plastic enclosures Publication A-CAA-EN-P -

388 Bulletin IEC Reversing Combination Starters Product Overview/Product Selection Fusible Disconnect Type -CFBAH-RW-P IP (Type,,) Metal Enclosure with Hinged Cover Bulletin IEC Reversing Combination Starters Selection of metal enclosures IP (Type ) and IP (Type //) Bimetallic Class overload relay Solid-state overload relays Compact design Meets international standards Can be modified in the field Handle with defeater mechanism Padlockable handle (up to three padlocks) Bulletin Combination starters use a Bulletin reversing contactor, a Bulletin bimetallic (Class ) or solid-state overload relay, and a Bulletin R rotary disconnect switch. Reversing starters ( A A) incorporate a dual interlock that provides both mechanical and electrical interlocking in a single unit. A normally open auxiliary contact is also included on each contactor. Table of Contents Product Selection... this page Accessories... - Modifications... - Approximate Dimensions... - Standards Compliance EN/IEC -- VDE CSA C. No. UL Certifications culus Listed (File E, Guide NLDX, NLDX) Your order must include: of the reversing combination starter selected, coil voltage code, overload relay suffix code, and, if required, factory-installed modifications suffix code and/or of any accessories. Product Selection Fusible Disconnect Type AC Operated Max I e [A] Ratings (AC, AC) IP (Type ) General-Purpose Sheet Metal Enclosure Hp (Hinged Cover) IP (Type,, ) Watertight, Dusttight Sheet Metal Enclosure (Hinged Cover) kw -Phase -Phase Fuse Clip Rating V V V V V Amperes/UL Class -/ A/Class J -CA -CF -/ -/ A/Class J -CA -CF -/ A/Class J -CA -CF -/ A/Class J -CA -CF A/Class J -CA -CF A/Class J -CA -CF A/Class J -CA -CF Coil Voltage Code The as listed is incomplete. Select a Coil Voltage Code from the table below to complete the Example: -CA becomes -CAB. Voltage V V V V Common Control Coil Voltage Code H A B C V Separate Control (without transformer) Hz Coil Voltage Code AD AD CD CD Overload Relay Code The as listed is incomplete. Select an overload relay code from page - to complete the When selecting a factory-installed control circuit transformer (see Modifications page -), use the Common Control Coil Voltage Code to denote the transformer primary voltage. The starter coil and transformer secondary voltage will both be V by default. Example: -CFB -P will have a transformer with a V primary/v secondary and a V starter coil. If a starter coil voltage other than V is desired, a second Coil Voltage Code must be added to denote the coil/transformer secondary voltage. Example: -CFBJ -P will have a transformer with a V primary/v secondary and a V starter coil. - Publication A-CAA-EN-P

389 Bulletin IEC Fused Combination Starters Product Overview/Product Selection - CFBAF-- IP (Type,,) Metal Enclosure with Hinged Cover Bulletin IEC Combination Starters Bulletin is the first true IEC combination starter on the market, in that the enclosure and components have been designed to specific IEC standard requirements. The Bulletin combination starter consists of a Bulletin Contactor, Bulletin bimetallic (Class ) or solid-state overload relay and Bulletin R fused disconnect switch installed in a common enclosure. These full-voltage combination starters are designed to provide the disconnecting means, short-circuit protection (with suitable fuses), control and overload protection for three-phase squirrel-cage motors. All starters include a normally open auxiliary contact as standard. Table of Contents Product Selection... this page Accessories... - Modifications... - Approximate Dimensions... - Standards Compliance EN/IEC -- VDE CSA C. No. UL Certifications culus Listed (File E, Guide NKJH, NKJH) Your order must include: of the combination starter selected, coil voltage code, overload relay suffix code, and, if required, factoryinstalled modifications suffix code and/or of any accessories. Product Selection AC-Operated Starters Fusible Disconnect Type Max I e [A] Ratings (AC, AC) IP (Type ) General Purpose Sheet Metal Enclosure (Hinged Cover) IP (Type //) Watertight, Dusttight Sheet Metal Enclosure (Hinged Cover) Hp -Phase Fuse Clip Rating V V V V Amperes/ UL Class -/ A/Class CC -CA -CF -/ A/Class J -CA -CF -/ A/Class J -CA -CF -/ A/Class J -CA -CF A/Class J -CA -CF A/Class J -CA -CF A/Class J -CA -CF Non-Fusible Disconnect Type Compact design Can be modified in the field Selection of enclosures IP (Type ) IP (Type //) Ratings (AC, AC) Hp Bimetallic Class overload relays Solid-state overload relays Fusible or non-fusible versions Handle with defeater mechanism Padlockable handle with up to three padlocks IP (Type ) General Purpose Sheet Metal Enclosure (Hinged Cover) IP (Type //) Watertight, Dusttight Sheet Metal Enclosure (Hinged Cover) Max I e -Phase [A] V V V V -/ -CA -DNF -CF -DNF -/ -CA -DNF -CF -DNF -/ -CA -DNF -CF -DNF -/ -CA -DNF -CF -DNF -CA -DNF -CF -DNF -CA -DNF -CF -DNF -CA -DNF -CF -DNF Coil Voltage Code The as listed is incomplete. Select a Coil Voltage Code from the table below to complete the Example: - CA becomes -CAB. Voltage [V] Common Control H A B C Coil Voltage Code Hz V Separate Control (without transformer) HD AD BD CD Coil Voltage Code Overload Relay Code The as listed is incomplete. Select an overload relay code from page - to complete the When selecting a factory-installed control circuit transformer (see Modifications page -), use the Common Control Coil Voltage Code to denote the transformer primary voltage. The starter coil and transformer secondary voltage will both be V by default. Example: -CFB- -P will have a transformer with a V primary/v secondary and a V starter coil. If a starter coil voltage other than V is desired, a second Coil Voltage Code must be added to denote the coil/transformer secondary voltage. Example: -CFBJ- -P will have a transformer with a V primary/v secondary and a V starter coil. The Bul. -TI bi-metallic overload relays are not available for this product selection. Publication A-CAA-EN-P -

390 Bulletin IEC Circuit Breaker Combination Starters Product Overview/Product Selection -CFBAH-R- IP (Type,,) Metal Enclosure with Hinged Cover Bulletin IEC Combination Starters Compact design Can be modified in the field Selection of enclosures IP (Type ) IP (Type //) Bimetallic Class overload relays Solid-state overload relays Handle defeater mechanism Padlockable handle with up to three padlocks Adjustable instantaneous trip circuit breaker Bulletin combination starter consists of a Bulletin contactor, Bulletin bimetallic (Class ) or solid-state overload relay and a motor circuit protector installed in a common enclosure. These fullvoltage combination starters are designed to provide the disconnecting means, short-circuit protection, control and overload protection for three-phase squirrel-cage motors. All starters include a normally open auxiliary contact as standard. Table of Contents Product Selection... this page Accessories... - Modifications... - Approximate Dimensions... - Standards Compliance EN/IEC -- VDE CSA C. No. UL Certifications culus Listed (File E, Guide NKJH, NKJH) Your order must include: of the combination starter selected, coil voltage code, overload relay suffix code, and, if required, factoryinstalled modifications suffix code and/or of any accessories. Product Selection Circuit Breaker Type - AC Operated Max I e [A] Overload Relay Code The as listed is incomplete. Select an overload relay code from page - to complete the For design E motor applications, consult your local Rockwell Automation sales office or Allen-Bradley distributor. When selecting a factory-installed control circuit transformer (see Modifications page -), use the Common Control Coil Voltage Code to denote the transformer primary voltage. The starter coil and transformer secondary voltage will both be V by default. Example: -CFB -P will have a transformer with a V primary/v secondary and a V starter coil. If a starter coil voltage other than V is desired, a second Coil Voltage Code must be added to denote the coil/transformer secondary voltage. Example: -CFBJ -P will have a transformer with a V primary/v secondary and a V starter coil. The Bul. -TI bi-metallic overload relays are not available for this product selection. - Ratings (AC, AC) IP (Type ) General Purpose Sheet Metal Enclosure Hp (Hinged Cover) -Phase V V V V Publication A-CAA-EN-P IP (Type //) Watertight, Dusttight Sheet Metal Enclosure (Hinged Cover) / / -CA - -CF - / / / -CA - -CF - / -/ -CA - -CF - -/ -/ -/ -CA - -CF - -CA - -CF - -/ -/ -/ -CA - -CF - -CA - -CF - -CA - -CF - -CA - -CF - -CA - -CF - -/ -CA - -CF - -CA - -CF - -CA - -CF - -CA - -CF - -CA - -CF - -CA - -CF - -CA - -CF - -CA - -CF - -CA - -CF - -CA - -CF - -CA - -CF - Coil Voltage Code The as listed is incomplete. Select a Coil Voltage Code from the table below to complete the Example: -CA - becomes -CAB -. Voltage [V] Common Control H A B C Coil Voltage Code Hz V Separate Control (without transformer) HD AD BD CD Coil Voltage Code

391 Bulletin Enclosed Starter Line Accessories Field Installed Accessories For Bulletins,,,, and Red "ON" Pilot Light Full Voltage Type Green Pilot Light Full Voltage Type Description For Use With Bulletin No. Enclosure Type V -PLR V All Metal Lift-off, Metal Hinged, and Molded Plastic -PLR V -PLR V V V V H All Metal Hinged -PLR -PLR -PLR -PLG V All Metal Lift-off, Metal -PLG Hinged, and Molded Plastic V All -PLG Dual "ON" Pilot Light Forward Red Reverse White Full Voltage Type V V, Metal Hinged -PLRW -PLRW Pilot Device Mounting Bracket (required when mounting pilot devices in metal lift-off enclosures), Metal Lift-off -BR Control Circuit Fuse Block For Class CC rejection type fuses (fuses not included) All Metal Lift-off and Metal Hinged -R Grounding Bushing Adapts to / in. N.P.T., PG. & BS mm threads Molded Plastic -GR Single Pole N.O. Auxiliary Contact for Disconnect Switch Closing Button For.mm Round Panel Hole, Metal Hinged -GA All All -N "OFF-ON" Selector Switch -Position Maintained All Metal Lift-off and Metal Hinged -MT Does not include legend plate. See page - for Bulletin F Legend Plate. Legend Plates for use on metal-hinged enclosures only. Requires mounting bracket -BR when using metal lift-off enclosures. An auxiliary contact adaptor, R-AA, is required when installing auxiliary contact, -GA. required for disconnect switch. Publication A-CAA-EN-P -

392 Bulletin Enclosed Starter Line Accessories Field Installed Accessories For Bulletins,,,, and Description "HAND-OFF-AUTO" Selector Switch -Position Maintained, Includes Legend Plate "FORWARD-OFF-REVERSE" Selector Switch -Position Maintained "START-STOP" Push Button Flush green "I/START" Extended red "O/STOP" "START" Push Button Flush green "START" For Use With Bulletin No. Enclosure Type,,,, Metal Lift-off and Metal Hinged -MT H Metal Hinged -MT, Metal Lift-off and Metal Hinged -MT, Metal Lift-off -MS H Metal Hinged -MS All Metal Hinged -MS "ON-OFF" Push Button, Metal Lift-off -MS "FORWARD, REVERSE-STOP" Push Button "STOP" Push Button Flush red "STOP" "ON" Push Button Flush green "ON" "OFF" Push Button Flush red "OFF" Metal Lift-off -MS All Metal Hinged -MS All Metal Hinged -MS All Metal Hinged -MS "FORWARD, REVERSE-STOP" Push Buttons, Metal Hinged -MS "START" Push Button Flush green "START" and "STOP" Push Button Flush red "STOP" H Metal Hinged -MS "RESET" Push Button Wiring Kit for Starters IEC ModCenter Wiring Kit for Transformers IEC ModCenter All Metal Lift-off and Metal Hinged -MR H -WH -W -W H -WT, -WT Requires mounting bracket -BR when using metal lift-off enclosures. Requires reset adapter -RA for -T bimetallic overload relay and reset adapter -ERA for Bulletin E Plus electronic overload relay. - Publication A-CAA-EN-P

393 Bulletin Enclosed Starter Line Accessories Field Installed Modifications Full Voltage Non-Reversing Starters and Lighting Contactors (Bulletins with metal enclosures, L) Listed on this and the following pages are factory-installed modifications and special features which are available for the low voltage (V maximum) starters listed in this catalog. To order, add a dash followed by the suffix number listed in these tables to the end of the product Example: -CADAE- Suffix Code Enclosure Design C/C A C/C B C/C C L- C C/C D C C C C C C Description of Modification START-STOP Push Button Metal Lift-off A A A NA A A A A A A A Metal Hinged A A A NA A A A A A A A ON-OFF Push Button E Metal Lift-off A A A A A A A A A A A Metal Hinged A A A A A A A A A A A HAND-OFF-AUTO Selector Switch Metal Lift-off A A A A A A A A A A A Metal Hinged A A A A A A A A A A A OFF-ON Selector Switch E Metal Lift-off A A A A A A A A A A A Metal Hinged A A A A A A A A A A A RUN-Red Pilot Light R A A A NA A A A A A A A RUN-Green Pilot Light G Plastic Lift-off A A A NA A A A A A A A RUN-Yellow Pilot Light Y A A A NA A A A A A A A Red LED Pilot Light (V) R Plastic Lift-off A A A NA A NA NA NA NA NA NA Red LED Pilot Light (V) R Plastic Lift-off A A A NA A NA NA NA NA NA NA Control Circuit Transformer Metal Lift-off A A A A A A A A A A A Primary and Secondary Fuse P Provided (Standard Capacity) Metal Hinged A A A A A A A A A A A Plastic Lift-off A A A NA A NA NA NA NA NA NA External Reset Metal Lift-off A A A NA A A A A A A A Metal Hinged A A A NA A A A A A A A Control Circuit Fuse Block Fuses Metal Lift-off A A A A A A A A A A A Provided Metal Hinged A A A A A A A A A A A Additional N.O. N.C. (Side Metal Lift-off NA NA NA A NA NA NA NA NA NA NA Mount) Auxiliary Contact on Contactor (L only) Metal Hinged NA NA NA A NA NA NA NA NA NA NA Additional N.O. N.C. (Side Metal Lift-off A A A A A A A A A A A Mount) Auxiliary Contact on Contactor Metal Hinged A A A A A A A A A A A Additional N.O. N.C. (Front Metal Lift-off A A A A A A A A A A A Mount) Auxiliary Contact on T Contactor Metal Hinged A A A A A A A A A A A With Bulletin F Integrated LED Module. Pilot light is available for control voltages of Vor less. If applicable, seelct a transformer. For starters with molded plastic lift-off enclosures, the voltage of the LED module must equal the starter's coil voltage. Non-Reversing Circuit Breaker Combination Starters (Bulletin ) Description of Modification Suffix Code Enclosure Design C C C C C C C C C C START-STOP Push Button ALL NA NA NA NA A NA A A A NA HAND-OFF-AUTO ALL NA NA NA NA A NA A A A NA Red Pilot Light R ALL NA NA NA NA A NA A A A NA Control Circuit Transformer Primary and Secondary Fuse Provided (Standard P ALL NA NA NA NA A NA A A A NA Capacity) External Reset ALL NA NA NA NA A NA A A A NA Control Circuit Fuse Block Fuses Provided ALL NA NA NA NA A NA A A A NA Additional N.O. - N.C. (Side Mount) Auxiliary Contact on Contactor ALL NA NA NA NA A NA A A A NA Additional N.O. - N.C. (Front Mount) Auxiliary Contact on Contactor T ALL NA NA NA NA A NA A A A NA A=Available Option NA=Not Available When ordering in Canada, use suffix. Primary fusing is not required by the Canadian Electrical Code. Publication A-CAA-EN-P -

394 Bulletin Enclosed Starter Line Accessories Field Installed Modifications Full Voltage Reversing and Multi-Speed Starters (Bulletin with metal enclosures) Description of Modification Suffix Code Enclosure Design C C C C C C C C C C FOR-REV-STOP Push Buttons ( Only) Metal Lift-off A A A A A A A A A NA Metal Hinged A A A A A A A A A A FOR-OFF-REV Selector Switch ( Only) Metal Lift-off A A A A A A A A A NA Metal Hinged A A A A A A A A A A Red FOR/ White REV Pilot Lights ( Only) RW Metal Hinged A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A Control Circuit Transformer Primary and Secondary Fuse Provided (Standard Capacity) P ALL A A A A A A A A A A External Reset ( Only) ALL A A A A A A A A A A Control Circuit Fuse Block Fuses Provided ALL A A A A A A A A A A Additional N.O. N.C. (Side Mount) Auxiliary Contact on Each Contactor ALL A A A A A A A A A A Additional N.O. N.C. (Front Mount) Auxiliary Contact on Each Contactor T ALL A A A A A A A A A A Reversing and Non-Reversing Fusible Combination Starters (Bulletins, ) Description of Modification Suffix Code Enclosure Design C C C C C C C C C C START-STOP Push Button ( Only) ALL A A NA A A NA A A A NA FOR-REV-STOP Push Buttons ( Only) ALL A A NA A A NA A A A NA HAND-OFF-AUTO Selector Switch ( Only) ALL A A NA A A NA A A A NA FOR-REV-STOP Selector Switch ( Only) ALL A A NA A A NA A A A NA Red Pilot Light ( Only) R ALL A A NA A A NA A A A NA Red FOR/ White REV Pilot Lights ( Only) RW ALL A A NA A A NA A A A NA Control Circuit Transformer Primary and Secondary Fuse Provided (Standard Capacity) P ALL A A NA A A NA A A A NA External Reset ALL A A NA A A NA A A A NA Fuse Cover For Disconnect Switch ALL A A NA A A NA A A A NA Control Circuit Fuse Block Fuses Provided ALL A A NA A A NA A A A NA N.O. Auxiliary Contact On Disconnect Switch ALL A A NA A A NA A A A NA Additional N.O. N.C. (Side Mount) Auxiliary Contact on Contactor ( Only) ALL A A NA A A NA A A A NA Additional N.O. N.C. (Side Mount) Auxiliary Contact on each Contactor ( Only) ALL A A NA A A NA A A A NA Additional N.O. N.C. (Front Mount) Auxiliary Contact on Contactor ( Only) T ALL A A NA A A NA A A A NA Additional N.O. N.C. (Front Mount) Auxiliary Contact on each Contactor ( Only) T ALL A A NA A A NA A A A NA A=Available Option NA=Not Available Transformer Type. When ordering in Canada, use suffix. Primary fusing is not required by the Canadian Electrical Code. - Publication A-CAA-EN-P

395 Bulletin Enclosed Starter Line Accessories Field Installed Approximate Dimensions Dimensions are shown in millimeters (inches). Dimensions are not intended to be used for manufacturing purposes. Bul. Line Starters Approximate Dimensions Bulletin Plastic Lift-Off Enclosure Cat. Nos. E-AS, -AS, -CS, -CS Plastic Enclosures. (.). (.). (.) (.) (.) (.) Ø. (Ø.) Ø. (Ø.). (.) (.) (.). (.) (.) Ø. (Ø.). (.). (.). (.) Cat. Nos. E-CS, -CSR, and -CCR Plastic Enclosures [.] [.]. [.] [.]. [.]. [.]. [.] Ø. [Ø.] Ø [Ø.]. [.]. [.] Ø [Ø.]. [.] [.] [.] [.]. [.] [.] [.] [.] [.] [.] [.] Rotary operator alternatively (for maintained control). [.] [.] Pozidriv No. (. x.). Nm lb-in E-CCR x... mm² x No.... AWG Pozidriv No.. Nm lb-in Publication A-CAA-EN-P -

396 Bulletin Enclosed Starter Line Accessories Field Installed Approximate Dimensions Approximate dimensions are shown in millimeters (inches). Dimensions are not to be used for manufacturing purposes. [.] [.] [.] [.] [.] [.]. [.] Ø [Ø.]. [.] [.] [.] [.] [.]. [.] Rotary operator alternatively (for maintained control) [.] [.] [.]. [.] [.] Pozidriv No. (. x.). Nm lb-in x... mm² x No.... AWG Pozidriv No.. Nm lb-in [.] E-CSR [.] [.] [.] [.] [.]. [.] Ø [Ø.]. [.] [.] [.] [.] [.] [.] [.] [.] [.]. [.] Rotary operator alternatively (for maintained control) [.] Pozidriv No. (. x.). Nm lb-in E-CS x... mm² x No.... AWG Pozidriv No.. Nm lb-in - Publication A-CAA-EN-P

397 Bulletin Enclosed Starter Line Accessories Field Installed Approximate Dimensions Bulletin Metal Lift-Off Enclosures Type (IP). (.) B C D A F E. (.) dia. For / or M Screw mtg. holes Contactor Size A Height B Width C Depth D E F IP (Type ) General Purpose Metal Lift-Off Enclosure for Bulletin (Without Transformer) C C C C (-/) (-/) () (-/) (-/) (/) C C C C C C C C C C () (-/) () (-/) (-/) (-/) () (-/) () () (-/) (-/) IP (Type ) General Purpose Metal Lift-Off Enclosure for Bulletin (With Transformer) () (-/) (-/) (-/) () (-/) () () (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (/). (/) (/). (/). (/). (/) Publication A-CAA-EN-P -

398 Bulletin Enclosed Starter Line Accessories Field Installed Approximate Dimensions Dimensions are shown in millimeters (inches). Dimensions are not intended to be used for manufacturing purposes. Bulletins and E Metal Lift-Off Enclosures Type (IP). (.) B C D A F E. (.) dia. For / or M Screw mtg. holes Metal Lift-Off Contactor Size A Height B Width C Depth D E F G (dia.) IP (Type ) General Purpose Metal Lift-off Enclosure for Bulletin and E (Without Transformer) C C C C C C C C C C C (-/) (-/) (-/) () (-/) (-/) (-/) () (-/) (-/) () (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/). (/). (/). (/) (/) IP (Type ) General Purpose Metal Lift-Off Enclosure for Bulletin and E (With Transformer) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) () (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) Bulletins,, and Metal Hinged Enclosures Type (IP), Type // (IP). (/). (/) (-) Contactor Size A Height B Width C Depth D E F G (dia.) IP (Type ) and IP (Type //) General Purpose Metal Hinged Enclosure for Bulletin (With and Without Transformer) C C C C C C C C C C C C (-/) () (-/) () (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) () (-/) (-/) (/) IP (Type ) and IP (Type //) General Purpose Metal Hinged Enclosure for Bulletin (With and Without Transformer) (-/) (-/) () (-/) (-/) () (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) () () (-/) (-/) (-/) (/) IP (Type ) and IP (Type //) General Purpose Metal Hinged Enclosure for Bulletin (With and Without Transformer) () () (-/) (-/) (-/) (/). (/). (/). (/). (/). (/). (/) - Publication A-CAA-EN-P

399 Bulletin Enclosed Starter Line Accessories Field Installed Approximate Dimensions Dimensions are shown in millimeters (inches). Dimensions are not intended to be used for manufacturing purposes. Bulletin Metal Hinged Enclosures Type // (IP) Contactor Size A Height B Width C Depth D E F G (dia.) C C C C C C C C C C C C (-/) (//) () (-/) (-/) (-/) () IP (Type //) Metal Hinged Enclosure for Bulletin (Without Transformer) (-/) (-/) () (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) () () (-/) IP (Type //) Metal Hinged Enclosure for Bulletin (With Transformer) (-/) (-/) (-/) () (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) Bulletins and E Metal Hinged Enclosures Type // (IP) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) () () () (-/) (-/) (-/) (/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (/). (/). (/) (/). (/). (/). (/) (/) Contactor Size A Height B Width C Depth D E (Mtg.) F G (dia.) C C C C C C C C C C C C C C (-/) (-/) (//) () (-/) (-/) () () IP (Type //) Metal Hinged Enclosure for Bulletins and E (Without Transformer) (-/) (-/) (-/) () (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) () () () (-/) IP (Type //) Metal Hinged Enclosure for Bulletins and E (With Transformer) (-/) (-/) () () (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) () () (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (/) (-/) (-/) (/) (/). (/). (/). (/) (/). (/). (/) (/) (/) Publication A-CAA-EN-P -

400 Bulletin Enclosed Starter Line Accessories Field Installed Approximate Dimensions Dimensions are shown in millimeters (inches). Dimensions are not intended to be used for manufacturing purposes. Bulletins and Metal Hinged Enclosures with Extra Space Type R (IP) G F B E H D A. (.) Dia.. (.) Mtg. Holes C. (.) (/) K J. (.) Dia. Mtg. Holes Contactor Size A Height B Width C Depth D E F G H J K C C C C B B B () () () () IP (Type R) Rainproof Metal Hinged Enclosure for Bulletins and (With and Without Transformer) (-/) (-/) () () (-/) (-/) () () () () () () (-/) (-/) () () (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) () () (-/) (-/) () () (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) - Publication A-CAA-EN-P

401 Bulletin E IEC Enclosures Product Overview/Product Selection Molded Plastic Lift-Off Metal Lift-Off Metal Hinged Enclosure Enclosures for IEC Starters The Allen-Bradley Bulletin E Starter Enclosures are designed for a multitude of IEC starter configurations. The Bulletin E Enclosures are available in metal or plastic, and are suitable for either indoor or outdoor environments. The enclosures are rated UL Type,,, X,, K (IP to IP). Plastic Enclosures for IEC Starters Cat. Nos. E-A_ and E-C_ plastic enclosures are designed to save installation time and to expand flexibility using the many available configurations. Two types available: IP UL General Purpose: High-grade acrylonitrile butadiene styrene (ABS) for indoor use IP UL, X, K: Heavy-duty polycarbonate (PC) for harsh indoor or outdoor environmental conditions Knockouts for mm and mm metric cable glands Sealable cover screws Non-corrosive parts Easy to access terminals and molded connection kits Reduces installation time and complexity Table of Contents Product Selection... - Bulletin -C/- C Accessories... - Bulletin -C/- C Approximate Dimensions... - Overload Relays... - Standards Compliance Cat. Nos. E-A_ and E-C_ plastic enclosures EN / IEC EN / IEC -- UL UL CSA., No. Approvals Cat. Nos. E-A_ and E-C_ plastic enclosures CE Marked culus Listed Product Selection IP (IEC Only) General Purpose Molded Plastic Lift-Off Enclosure Bulletin No. Enclosure w/ Reset Enclosure w/ Start & Stop/Reset Enclosure w/ Start & Stop/Reset C C E C C E-AS E-AS IP (UL Type, X, ) Raintight, Dusttight, Corrosion-Resistant, Molded Plastic Enclosure Bulletin No. Enclosure Enclosure w/ Start & C C E w/ Reset Stop/Reset Enclosure only C C E-CS E-CS C C E-CS C C E-CSR C C C C When used with -SHB or -SHRY operating handle, rating is IP (Type /R/K). E- CCR Publication A-CAA-EN-P -

402 Bulletin E IEC Enclosures Product Selection/Modifications IP (Type ) General Purpose Metal Lift-off Enclosure Bulletin No. E Enclosure Mounting Plate C C E-BA C C C C E-BA C C, C, C, C C C, C, C, C C, C, C E-BA C C, C, C, C E-BA C C E-BA C, C, C, C C C C C, C, C, C C E-BA C E-BA E-P Without control circuit transformer. With control circuit transformer. IP (Type ) General Purpose Metal Hinged Enclosure Bulletin No. E Enclosure Mounting Plate C C E-DAT E-PT C C C C E-DAT E-PT IP (Type,, ) Raintight, Dusttight, Metal Hinged Enclosure Bulletin No. E Enclosure Mounting Plate C C C C E-DF E-P C C C C C C C C C C E-DF E-P C C C C E-DF E-P C C E-DF E-P C C C C C C C C C C E-DF E-P C C E-DFT E-PT C C C C E-DFT E-PT Without control circuit transformer. With control circuit transformer. - Publication A-CAA-EN-P

403 Bulletin Line Control, Load, and Disconnect Switches Product Overivew Bulletin Line Overview Bulletin E Bulletin L Bulletin R Next Generation Product Type Inductive load-rated load switch Inductive load-rated control/load switch Fused and non-fused rotary disconnects Current Range A A A, A Main Applications Functionality UL, CSA ratings "suitable as at-motor disconnect" - or -pole switch configurations for OFF-ON or changeover applications ( A switches) - or -pole switch configurations for OFF-ON or changeover applications ( A switches) UL, CSA ratings "suitable as at-motor disconnect" - to -pole multifunction switch control configurations for OFF-ON, changeover, Star-Delta (Wye-Delta), reversing, ammeter, voltmeter, and step switch applications Also available in custom control configurations up to circuits for any unique control switching application. UL ratings "suitable as service entrance disconnecting means" UL, CSA ratings "suitable as atmotor disconnect" - or -pole fusible or non-fusible disconenct for standard OFF-ON or emergency stop in a main panel disconnect application th pole available as modular accessory Test mode switch position Mounting Styles Front/door or base/din Rail mounting Front/door or base/din Rail mounting Base/DIN Rail mounting Handles Open Switch or Enclosed Handle colors in grey/black and red/yellow and padlockable versions Legend plates available in -I international markings and text styles Open switch (large frame Bul. E open style only) Enclosed: IP thermoplastic enclosure or UL/CSA rated enclosure Uniformly styled handles: selector knob, disk style, rectangular style, and keyoperated versions (Type //R, IP) Handle colors in grey/black and red/yellow and padlockable versions Legend plates available in -I international markings and text styles Open switch Available in rotary styles, UL Type /R//X/, IP, standard, or test mode versions Handle colors in black and red/yellow and padlockable versions A/ A legend markers (optional) uses -MSX markers Open switch Enclosed: UL/CSA rated enclosure UL/CSA Electrical Ratings: Rated Voltage U e V AC V AC V AC Rated Current I e V V A, V Rated Power P e [FLA] Varies w/ - or -phase switch, voltage Varies w/ - or -phase switch, voltage Varies w/ - or -phase switch, voltage Short-Circuit Ratings ka ka ka Switching Rate [ops/h]. million ( A switches) Mechanical Life [ops]. million ( A and A switches) million. million ( A and A switches) IEC Rated Current I e AC- V V V AC-A V V Varies w/ - or -phase switch, voltage AC-A V V Varies w/ - or -phase switch, voltage Ambient Operational Temp. - + C (- + F) - + C (- + F) - + C (- + F) Ambient Enclosed Temp. - + C (- + F) - + C (- + F) - + C (- + F) Ambient Storage Temp. - + C (- + F) - + C (- + F) - + C (- + F) Protection class per IEC Optional Accessories Standards/Certifications Switch bodies: IP IP handles Multi-length shafts and shaft extension kits Terminal covers UL CSA C., No. IEC - Low Voltage Switchgear and Controlgear part CE Switch bodies: IP IP handles Multi-length shafts and shaft extension kits Terminal covers UL CSA C., No. IEC - Low Voltage Switchgear and Controlgear part CE Switch bodies: IP Fuse carriers: IP IP handles Multi-length shafts Auxiliary contacts Terminal covers NFPA internal handle UL, UL CSA C., No. IEC - Low Voltage Switchgear and Controlgear part CE Product Selection Page - Page - Page - Publication A-CAA-EN-P -

404 Bulletin E IEC Load Switches, A Overview Bulletin E IEC Load Switches Suitable as At-Motor Disconnect Switch (UL),,,,,, A Inductive Load-Rated Switches IP/ UL Type //R/ Operating Handles IPLX Finger-Safe Terminals - and -Pole Versions; Add-on Accessory Poles to Make -, -, - and -Pole Units Front/Door or DIN/Base Mounting Configurations Available in OFF-ON and Changeover Configurations - and -Pole Enclosed Switches Optional Thermoplastic Enclosures Positive-Guided Actuation Padlockable Handles Available (up to padlocks) Table of Contents Product Selection... - Accessories... - Specifications... - Approximate Dimensions... - Standards Compliance IEC - IEC - Low-voltage switchgear and control gear part UL CSA: C. No. Certifications UL Listed (File No. E, Guide NLRV) CSA Certified (LR ) IEC, VDE and BS CE RINA Italian Naval Registry CCC Description Bulletin E load switches are designed for use as local motor isolation and disconnect switch applications. Available with - and -pole versions with add-on additional poles, grounding and neutral terminals and auxiliary contacts, Bulletin Es share the same operating handles as the Bulletin L Control and Load Switches. Bulletin E switches are offered in two mounting styles, Front/Door and Base/DIN configurations for a variety of installations. Switch body styles for Bulletin E base-mounted switches include standard interlock shaft; Bulletin E front-mounted switches include standard shaft. Two-position OFF-ON switch is used to connect or disconnect a variety of inductive loads, including solenoids, valves, magnetic starters, relays, and motors. Handles featuring marked legend plates are available in Selector-Knob, Disk-Style, Rectangular-Style and Key-Operated versions. Selector-Knob versions are available in three sizes. Most handles are available in colors of Grey/Black or Red/Yellow and have padlockable versions. - Publication A-CAA-EN-P

405 Bulletin E IEC Load Switches, A Catalog Number Explanation/Product Selection Explanation E A Small-Frame Switches (Handles listed on page -) -Pole Base Mount -Pole Front Mount -Pole Base Mount -Pole Front Mount Code A E a Installation Type Description Base/DIN Mounting Front/Door Mounting E A b Load Size Code Description A A A A A A A a b c c Function/Circuit Diagram Ref. # Code Function Description Circuit Diagram Ref. # OFF/ON -Pole, -Position ( ) OFF/ON -Pole, -Position ( ) OFF/ON -Pole, -Position ( - inverted) Changeover -Pole, -Position ( ) Frequently Ordered OFF-ON -Pole Switch (includes operating shaft) (Handles listed on page -) Function Switching Angle OFF Function Switching Angle OFF ON ON No. of Circuits No. of Circuits Contact Target Configuration X = Contact Closed O = Contact Open Handle Position Base-Mounted Front-Mounted OFF/ ON/ ACA Rated Power V Rated Current [A] [kw] at V AC Hz AC Hz Ø.. E-A- E-E- E-A- E-E- O O O Contact Target Configuration X = Contact Closed O = Contact Open OFF-ON -Pole Switch (includes operating shaft) Handle Position Base-Mounted Front-Mounted OFF/ ON/ ACA Rated Power V Rated Current [A] [kw] at V AC Hz AC Hz Ø.. E-A- E-E- O O O O O O See Catalog No. Explanation for more load size and change-over switch options. X X X X X X X X X OFF-ON -Pole Switch (includes operating shaft) E-A- E-E-. E-A- E-E- E-A- E-E- E-A- E-E- E-A- E-E- Frequently Ordered OFF-ON -Pole Switch (includes operating shaft) (Handles listed on page -) E-A- E-E- E-A- E-E-. E-A- E-E- E-A- E-E- E-A- E-E- E-A- E-E- Publication A-CAA-EN-P -

406 Bulletin E IEC Load Switches, A Product Selection/Catalog Number Explanation Bulletin E/L Handles (for use with Bulletin E Switches) Color Handles (Includes Legend Plate and Control Knob) Red/Yellow (Emergency Stop colors) Type I (IP, UL Type /R/) Type L (IP, UL Type /R/) With Locking For One Padlock (Padlock Not Included) Type N (IP, UL Type /R/) Bulletin L handles are available in both screw fixing and. mm mounting hole style. Black/Grey (Standard Operation colors) Handle Type E L G N L Degree of Protection Handle Color Bezel Plate Size For Use With Black/Grey E- A x mm L-E A, - (-/ x -/ in.) L-A A, - IP (UL Type ) (UL Type /R/) IP (UL Type /R/) IP (UL Type /R/) Type A (IP, UL Type /R/) Red/Yellow Black/Grey Red/Yellow Red/Yellow Type E (IP, UL Type /R/) With Locking For One Padlock (Padlock Not Included) x mm (-/ x -/ in.) x mm (-/ x -/ in.) x mm (-/ x -/ in.) x mm (-/ x -/ in.) x mm (-/ x -/ in.) x mm (-/ x -/ in.) x mm (-/ x -/ in.) x mm (-/ x -/ in.) Type G (IP, UL Type /R/) These handles are for use with - and - (ON-OFF) switches only and are dual marked with ON-OFF and -. Explanation Code HC HE Code Use with Handle Type A, E, I, L S A, E, I, L G, N S A, I G, N a Installation Type. mm Mounting Hole Style Handle (for use with front-mounted switches) Screw-Mounting Handle (for use with front- and base-mounted switches) b Handle Legend Plate Size mm x mm (-/ in. x -/ in.) mm x mm (-/ in. x -/ in.) mm x mm (-/ in. x -/ in.) mm x mm (-/ in. x -/ in.) mm x mm (-/ in. x -/ in.) mm x mm (-/ in. x -/ in.) mm x mm (-/ in. x -/ in.) L HE N Use With E Switch Size E- A E- A E- A E- A E- A E- A E- A a b c d c Code Legend Plate Type Color A Square Grey/Black I Square Red/Yellow E Square/Lockable Grey/Black L Square/Lockable Red/Yellow G N S Disc/Lockable (up to locks) Disc/Lockable (up to locks) Large Square with extra legend area Grey/Black Red/Yellow Grey/Black For. mm mounting hole style handle (code HC), select either handle type A, E, I, or L with x mm legend plate size (code ) only or handle type G or N with x mm legend plate size (code ) only. Order E- A Type G and N handles as E-HEN- or E-HEG- Use Type G and N with ON-OFF function only (selection "d", code -) R-HE front-mounting switch only Frequently Ordered L Handles OFF-ON Base/Front-Mounted - and -Pole Switch Handles (Switch Body listed on page -) E- A L-E A, - L-A A, - E- A E- A L-E A, - L-A A, - E- A E- A E- A L-E A, - L-A A, - E- A L-E A, - Legend Plate Marking - L-HEE- OFF-ON L-HEE-I - L-HEL- OFF-ON - OFF-ON - OFF-ON - OFF-ON - OFF-ON - OFF-ON Type S (IP, UL Type /R/) d Code Description Legend Marking O-I ON I OFF-ON -- (Reversing) -- ( degrees) (Changeover) O-I I OFF-ON OFF OFF ON L-HEL-I E-HEG- L-HEG- L-HEG- E-HEN- L-HEN- - OFF-ON L-HEN- - L-HCL- OFF-ON L-HCL-I - Publication A-CAA-EN-P

407 Bulletin E IEC Load Switches, A Catalog Number Explanation/Product Selection Bulletin E Open and Enclosed Switch Kits Explanation Code A E Y a Installation Type Base/DIN Mounting, open type switch Front/Door Mounting, open type switch Enclosed Base Mounting Switch With Handle (Uses IP ABS thermoplastic enclosure) Code E Y N b Load Size A A A A A A A a b c d Code For A Enclosed Switch: use "M" (-pole enclosure has M/ knockouts, -pole A enclosure has M/ knockouts). For / A Enclosed Switch with M/ metric knockouts: use M or M. c Configuration -Pole OFF/ON ( ) -Pole OFF/ON ( ) Code N G A N G A d Handle Style E-HEN- (use with A Switch) E-HEG- (use with A Switch) L-HEA- (use with A Switch) L-HEN- (use with A Switch) L-HEG- (use with A Switch) L-HEA- (use with A Switch) Frequently Ordered Switch Kits OFF-ON Front- and Base-Mounted -Pole Switch With L-HEN- Red/Yellow Handle Function Switching Angle OFF ON Rated Current [A] ACA Rated Power [kw] at V AC V AC Hz, Ø Base-Mounting Distribution Switches (handles are pre-assembled to switch) Function Switching Angle OFF ON No. of Circuits Base-Mounted Front-Mounted. E-A--N E-E--N E-A--N E-E--N. E-A--N E-E--N Contact Target OFF/ O O O ON/ X X X Handle Color Frequently Ordered Enclosures - and -Pole Enclosed Switches With L-HEN- Red/Yellow Operating Handles No. of Poles Function Switching Angle OFF ON Legend Plate Marking Lockable (One Padlock) Rated Current [A] ACA Rated Power [kw] at V AC V AC Hz, Ø E-A--R Red/Yellow - Yes Black/Grey - No E-A--Q Red/Yellow - Yes E-A--R Black/Grey - No E-A--Q Rated Current [A] Handle Color E-Y--N E-Y--N E-Y--N Red/Yellow E-Y--N Uses Base-Mounted Switches Red/Yellow E-Y--N Publication A-CAA-EN-P -

408 Bulletin E IEC Load Switches, A Product Selection/Catalog Number Explanation Bulletin E Enclosed Disconnect Load Switches with R Handles (with Defeater, suitable for padlocks) E-FA Painted Steel Enclosure UL Type //, IP E-CA Stainless Steel Enclosure UL Type /X, IP E-KA Non-Metallic Enclosure UL Type //X, IP E-AA Metallic Enclosure UL Type, IP E-GA Painted Steel Enclosure UL Type //, IP E-DA Stainless Steel Enclosure UL Type /X, IP Explanation Code FA GA CA DA KA AA a Enclosure Type UL Type //, IP Painted Steel, Hinged, for A switches UL Type //, IP Painted Steel, Hinged, in x x in. size, for A -pole switches UL Type /X, IP Stainless Steel, Hinged, for A switches UL Type /X, IP Stainless Steel, Hinged, in x x in. size, for A -pole switches UL Type //X, IP Non-Metallic, for A switches UL Type, IP Painted Steel, Hinged, for A switches (Same enclosure as FA without gasketing) E FA E P P Code a b c d d e b Load Size A A A A A A A Code Blank E c Handle Color (R-HS ) Grey/Black Red/Yellow Code Blank d Left Side + Right Side Modifications No Option -P N.O. + N.C. Auxiliary Contacts -PL N.O. + N.C.L.B. Auxiliary Contacts -P N.O. + N.C. Auxiliary Contacts -PD -NP -PE -TN Code Blank N.O. E.B. Additional Pole Grounding Pole Neutral Pole e Switch Type -pole switch - Pole switch Modifications: Up to two suffix codes may be added to an enclosed disconnect load switch. See Guidelines, page -. If only one accessory is chosen, it is mounted on the left side of the switch. To order the cat. no. E-FA/FA or E-CA/CA in the larger /A sized enclosure, add an "X" after the handle color. For example, E-FAE becomes E-FAEX. GA and DA type enclosures: use with -pole A switches only. Special order; allow for longer delivery time. Frequently Ordered Bulletin E Enclosed Switches with Bulletin R Handle Description Rated Current (A) Dimension Reference Handle Color A Black E-CA Red/Yellow E-CAE Stainless steel Black E-CA enclosure, A IP/Type /X Red/Yellow E-CAE A Black E-CA Red/Yellow E-CAE A Black E-FA Red/Yellow E-FAE Painted steel Black E-FA enclosure, A IP/Type // Red/Yellow E-FAE A Black E-FA Red/Yellow E-FAE Non-metallic Black E-KA enclosure, C IP/Type /X Red/Yellow E-KAE Modifications: Up to two suffix codes may be added to an enclosed disconnect load switch. See Guidelines, page -. If only one accessory is chosen, it is mounted on the left side of the switch. - Publication A-CAA-EN-P

409 Bulletin E IEC Load Switches, A Accessories IEC Load Switch Accessories E-E A, Front/Door Mounting () -Pole Auliliary Contact or () -Pole Auliliary Contact or Grounding Terminal or Additional Pole Neutral Terminal or () -Pole Auliliary Contact or () -Pole Auliliary Contact E-A A, Base/DIN Rail Mounting () -Pole Auliliary Contact or () -Pole Auliliary Contact or Grounding Terminal Additional Pole or Neutral Terminal or () -Pole Auliliary Contact or () -Pole Auliliary Contact Accessory Configuration Guidelines Accessory drawings represent modular, snap-on features of Bulletin E accessories. They are not suggesting possible accessory configurations. Use the following guidelines for choosing E accessory configurations. Up to two accessories may be added to the Bulletin E switch body. For the E,,,, or A switches, the early break auxiliary contact (-PD) may only be used in the following configurations: As a single unit on either side of the switch As a single unit on a side when used with a switch + th pole (-NP) As a single unit on a side when used with a switch + ground terminal (-PE) As a single unit on a side when used with a switch + neutral terminal (-TN) No other auxiliary contact may be used in combinations with an early break auxiliary contact (-PD) Other combinations of auxiliary contacts are permissable. For the E and A switches, any combination of auxiliary contacts, th pole, ground terminal, neutral terminal, and -PD is permissable. Publication A-CAA-EN-P -

410 Bulletin E IEC Load Switches, A Accessories Auxiliary Contacts No. of Auxiliary Contacts For Use With N.O. + N.C. E-A E-A-P E-E E-E-P N.O. + N.C.L.B. E-A E-A-PL E-E E-E-PL N.O. + N.C. E-A E-A-P E-E E-E-P E-A E-A-PD N.O.E.B. E-A... E-A-PD E-E E-E-PD E-E... E-E-PD Additional Pole, N.O. For Use With E-A E-A E-A E-A E-A E-A E-A E-E E-E E-E E-E E-E E-E E-E E-A-NP E-A-NP E-A-NP E-A-NP E-A-NP E-A-NP E-A-NP E-E-NP E-E-NP E-E-NP E-E-NP E-E-NP E-E-NP E-E-NP -Pole Mechanical Coupling For Use With E- E-G E-/ E-G E-/ E-G E-/ E-G Earthing/Grounding Terminal For Use With E-A E-A/ E-A/ E-A/ E-E E-E/ E-E/ E-E/ E-A-PE E-A-PE E-A-PE E-A-PE E-E-PE E-E-PE E-E-PE E-E-PE Neutral Terminal For Use With E-A E-A/ E-A/ E-A/ E-E E-E/ E-E/ E-E/ E-A-TN E-A-TN E-A-TN E-A-TN E-E-TN E-E-TN E-E-TN E-E-TN A maximum of two side-mount accessories may be added to a E switch (one on each side). ABS Thermoplastic Enclosure IP, For High-Impact Applications (grounding screw included) Description No. of Poles For Use With E-A/ L-G E-A/ E-G For PG cable glands E-A/ E-A/ E-G E-A/ E-A/ L-GM E-A/ E-GM For metric cable glands E-A/ E-A/ E-GM E-A/ - Publication A-CAA-EN-P

411 Bulletin E IEC Load Switches, A Accessories Noryl Thermoplastic Enclosures IP, For Corrosion-Prone Applications (grounding screw included) Description No. of Poles For Use With For PG cable glands For metric cable glands E-A/ L-G E-A/ E-A/ E-A/ E-A/ E-G E-G E-A/ L-GM E-A/ E-A/ E-A/ E-A/ E-GM E-GM Description For Use With Pkg. Qty. Additional Earth/Ground and Neutral L-G, G, G, G E-G Terminals For Thermoplastic Enclosure L-G and G E-G Terminal Covers No. of Poles For Use With E- E--C E- E--C E-/ E--C E-/ E--C E-/ E--C E-/ E--C E-/ E--C E-/ E--C User must order () Bulletin E -Pole Switches separately. Coupling for changeover switch not available. Changeover switch must be ordered as a factory-assembled device (e.g., E-A-). Operating Shafts Length Construction Pkg. Qty. mm (-/ in.) Plastic L-G Standard Shaft (for front-mount switches) Metal E-G mm (-/ in.) Plastic L-G (Standard Length) Metal E-G mm (-/ in.) Plastic L-G Metal E-G Interlock Shaft (for base-mount switches) mm (-/ in.) Plastic L-G Bulletin E Load Switch Shaft Selection for use with E and L Thermoplastic Enclosures Rated Current [A] -Pole Switches (- suffix) -Pole Switches (- suffix) Changeover Switches (- suffix) E-E E-A E-E E-A E-E E-A plastic shaft ( L-G) plastic shaft ( L-G) plastic shaft ( L-G) metallic shaft (Cat. No. E-G) metallic shaft (Cat. No. E-G) metallic shaft (Cat. No. E-G) metallic shaft (Cat. No. E-G) plastic shaft ( L-G) plastic shaft ( L-G) plastic shaft ( L-G) metallic shaft (Cat. No. E-G) metallic shaft (Cat. No. E-G) metallic shaft (Cat. No. E-G) metallic shaft (Cat. No. E-G) metallic shaft (Cat. No. E-G) metallic shaft (Cat. No. E-G) metallic shaft (Cat. No. E-G) metallic shaft (Cat. No. E-G) metallic shaft (Cat. No. L-G) metallic shaft (Cat. No. E-G) metallic shaft (Cat. No. E-G) metallic shaft (Cat. No. E-G) metallic shaft (Cat. No. E-G) metallic shaft (Cat. No. E-G) metallic shaft (Cat. No. E-G) metallic shaft (Cat. No. E-G) metallic shaft (Cat. No. E-G) metallic shaft (Cat. No. E-G) metallic shaft (Cat. No. E-G) metallic shaft (Cat. No. E-G) metallic shaft (Cat. No. E-G) metallic shaft (Cat. No. E-G) metallic shaft (Cat. No. E-G) metallic shaft (Cat. No. E-G) metallic shaft (Cat. No. E-G) metallic shaft (Cat. No. E-G) metallic shaft (Cat. No. E-G) metallic shaft (Cat. No. E-G) metallic shaft (Cat. No. E-G) metallic shaft (Cat. No. E-G) metallic shaft (Cat. No. E-G) metallic shaft (Cat. No. E-G) Publication A-CAA-EN-P -

412 Bulletin E IEC Load Switches, A Accessories/Other Accessories Shaft Extension Kits Shaft Extension Length For Use With Pkg. Qty. mm (/ in.) Per Extension E-A L-G Metal Shaft Extensions With Padlock Provision in OFF Position Length For Use With Pkg. Qty. mm (-/ -/ in.) mm (-/ -/ in.) Metal Shaft Adaptor Kits For use with R Type /X Handles Metal shaft adaptor kits for use with R Type /X handles kit includes bezel adapter and R-R operating shaft. Operating handle ( R-HS) must be ordered separately. Metal Shaft Extension For modification of L-G/ G when used with any switches other than -position, rotation. E-A Other Accessories L/E. mm Mounting Hole Style Handles (Type B, D) (For Front-Mounted Switches) Description L-G L-G For Use With Pkg. Qty. E-A E-G E-A L-G. mm Mounting Hole Style Handles (IP) Handle Style: Knob Lever with Latch (For Use With E-E A, -) or L- E A L-HCB- Type B Type D. mm Mounting Hole Style Handles Key Removal Position (Includes Latch) For Use With L-E A, E-E A, -. mm Mounting Hole Style Handles Key Removal Position (Includes Latch) For Use With L-E A, E-E A, -. mm Mounting Hole Style Handles Key Removal Position (Includes Latch) For Use With L-E A, E-E A, - L-HCDC- L-HCDD- L-HCDG- Accessory Description Pkg. Qty. Control Knob, Black, with Locking Facility (Use / in. max. hasp lock.) (Locks in,,, L-GN and positions) Control Knob, Red, with Locking Facility (Use / in. max. hasp lock) L-GR These locking knobs can only be added to the "HE" style actuators. If a locking knob is desired on a "HC" style actuator, it has to be ordered as part of the main catalog number. For example, L-HCE-. - Publication A-CAA-EN-P

413 Bulletin E IEC Load Switches, A Other Accessories Accessory Description Pkg. Qty. Control Knob, Type P Control Knob, Black, mm (-/ in.) Diameter Control Knobs, Type P Control Knob, Red, mm (-/ in.) Diameter Control Knob, Black, L =. mm (-/ in.) Control Knob, Black, L = mm (-/ in.) Control Knob, Red, L =. mm (-/ in.) Control Knob, Red, L = mm (-/ in.) L-GN L-GR L-GN L-GN L-GR L-GR Standard Black Control Knob Rectangular Front Frame Rectangular front frame with blank nameplate L = x mm (-/ x -/ in.) Rectangular front frame with blank nameplate L = x mm (-/ x -/ in.) L-G L-G Additional Legend Plates/Frames Color Legend Size For Use With Pkg. Quantity Black/Grey Black/Grey. mm x mm / in. x -/ in. x mm / x -/ in. Size Type G and N style handles, Cat. Nos. L- HEG/N Size Type G and N style handles, Cat. Nos. L- HEG/N Legend Plate Marking (Blank) MAIN SWITCH HAUPSCHALTER INTERR. PRINCIPALE INTERR. PRINCIPAUX INTERR. PRINCIPAL HUVUDBRYTARE WAHLSCHALTER EMERGENCY OFF (Blank) MAIN SWITCH HAUPTSCHALTER INTERR. PRINCIPALE INTERR. PRINCIPAUX INTERR. PRINCIPAL HUVUDBRYTARE WAHLSCHALTER EMERGENCY OFF L-G L-GA L-GB L-GC L-GD L-GE L-GF L-GG L-GH L-G L-GA L-GB L-GC L-GD L-GE L-GF L-GG L-GH Legend Plates with Bezel Legend Plate Color Silver Yellow Pkg. Quantity Custom-Engraved legend plates available. To order, use publication L-PP_-EN-P. Legend Plate Marking - OFF-ON Blank Legend Plate L-A- L-A-I L-A- L-A- L-A-I L-A- L-A- L-A-I L-A- L-I- L-I-I L-I- L-I- L-I-I L-I- L-I- L-I-I L-I- Publication A-CAA-EN-P -

414 Bulletin E IEC Load Switches, A Other Accessories Shaft for Enclosures Enclosure Type Suitable For L (Base-Mounted Switches) No. of Contacts Shaft Suitable For Use with E Switch No. of Poles Shaft Required L-G L-A() / L-G E-A() and L-G L-G L-A() / Standard L-A() / L-G ( x x mm) L-A() / Standard L-G L-A() / L-G L-G L-A() / L-G L-A() / Standard L-A() / L-G ( x x mm) L-A() / Standard E-G E-A() and L-G E-G E-A() Standard ( x x mm) E-G E-A() and E-G E-G E-A() Standard ( x x mm) Accessory Combinations in Enclosure Enclosure Type Switch No. of Poles Shaft L-G (ABS) L-G (Noryl) E-A() L-G Aux. Contacts (single or double) X X X Additional Pole Block X Neutral Terminal Block On Switch Ground Terminal Block Neutral Terminal Block On Enclosure X X X X X X X X X X ( x x mm) X X X X X X X X X X E-G (ABS) X X X X E-A() L-G E-G (Noryl) X X X X X X X X X X X X ( x x mm) E-A() E-G X X X X X X X X X X E-G (ABS) X X X X E-A() E-G E-G (Noryl) X X X X X X X X X X X X ( x x mm) E-A() E-G L+R X X Ground Terminal Block - Publication A-CAA-EN-P

415 Bulletin E IEC Load Switches, A Specifications Electrical Ratings Performance Data A A A A A A A Aux. IEC Applications Contacts Rated operational voltage (U e ): IEC [V] Rated operational voltage ( U e ): UL, CSA [V] Rated isolation voltage ( U i ): IEC/UL, CSA [V] / / / / / / / / Rated impulse voltage ( U imp ): UL, CSA [kv] Test voltage, ( U i ) minute [kv] Lost power per pole [W] Rated frequency [Hz] / / / / / / / / Conventional free air thermal current I th [A] Conventional enclosed thermal current I e [A] Rated current I e AC-/ Non-inductive or only slightly inductive loads [A] AC-A Switching of resistive loads with slight overload Rated power P e AC-A Occasional switching of Ø motors V [kw].... and other highly inductive loads V [kw]. (criterion for selecting main switches) V [kw].. V [kw]... AC- Squirrel-cage motors; starting and stopping of running motors V [kw]... V [kw]... Short circuit current (co-ordination type ) [ka] Rated conditional short-circuit current Maximum fuse rating of circuit (type g,g) /V [A] Rated short-time current I cw ( s) [A] V [A] Rated breaking capacity ACA (cosφ.) V [A] V [A] DC switching capacity /V [A] Rated current I e pole V [A] V [A]. V [A] V [A] poles V [A] in V [A] DC-A For resistive loads, series V [A].. T ms V [A]..... U e max = V V [A] poles V [A] in series V [A] V [A]... Rated power P e DC-A, DC-, DC- V [kw] For inductive loads, T ms See standards compliance listed on page -. Suitable also for SEV. poles in series V [kw]..... V [kw] V [kw] V [kw] Publication A-CAA-EN-P -

416 Bulletin E IEC Load Switches, A Specifications Electrical Ratings, Continued Performance Data A A A A A A A Aux. UL/CSA Applications Contacts Continuous current [A] Heavy Pilot Duty [AC] A A A A Standard Duty [DC] Q Motor rating Hz FLA V, P Hp. FLA V, P Hp Single-phase ( FLA.. poles) V, P Hp. V, P FLA... Hp. V, P FLA.... Hp. Three-phase V, P FLA.. Hp. V, P FLA Hp. V, P FLA Hp Mechanical Data Performance Data A A A A Aux. Contacts Protection class according to IEC Motor rating Hz handles IP IP IP IP IP switch bodies IP IP IP IP IP Mechanical life [million operations]..... Max wire gauges Terminal size per IEC - A A A A xa rigid wire fine strands / conductor / conductor AWG mm AWG mm () /() () /() () /() (). /(). () /() (). /(). () /() (). /() () /() (). /(). () /() (). /(). () /() () /() () /() () /().... Environmental Data Storage Operation + C ( + F) + C ( + F) - Publication A-CAA-EN-P

417 Bulletin E IEC Load Switches, A Appropriate Dimensions Dimensions are shown in millimeters (inches). Dimensions are not intended to be used for manufacturing purposes. Front Installation E-E (/) (/). (/) Dia.. (/) -Pole -Pole Handles P Q L-HEA L-HEI L-HES E-HEN E-HEG L-HEA L-HEI L-HES L-HEN L-HEG (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) x (-/ x -/) x (-/ x -/) x (-/ x -/) x (-/ x -/) x (-/ x -/) x (-/ x -/) x (-/ x -/) x (-/ x -/) x (-/ x -/) x (-/ x -/) Switch Body Use with B B F H L G E-E E-E/ E-E/ E-E/ (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) N/A N/A (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) () (-/) (-/) (-/) Does not apply to E-/A, -Pole Switches. Use B dimensions for -pole devices. For -pole switches, add in. to the "L" dimension. (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) E-E Switch Body with L-HCA Handle for. mm Hole Mounting Style Type L E-E () E-E/. (-/) E-E/. (-/) E-E/. (-/) Publication A-CAA-EN-P -

418 Bulletin E IEC Load Switches, A Appropriate Dimensions Dimensions are shown in millimeters (inches). Dimensions are not intended to be used for manufacturing purposes. Base Mounting E-A -Pole -Pole Handles P Q L-HEA (-/) L-HEI (-/) L-HES (-/) E-HEN (-/) E-HEG (-/) L-HEA (-/) L-HEI (-/) L-HES (-/) L-HEN (-/) L-HEG (-/) x (-/ x -/) x (-/ x -/) x (-/ x -/) x (-/ x - /) x (-/ x - /) x (-/ x -/) x (-/ x -/) x (-/ x -/) x (-/ x -/) x (-/ x -/) Cover Requirements For Use With Y min. X Y max. X E-A (/) (-/). (/) (-/) E-A/ (/) (-/). (/) (-/) E-A/. (/) (-/). (/) (-/) E-A/. (/) (-/). (/) (-/) Switch Body Use With D E F F G H L J E-A. (/) E-A/. (/) E-A/. (/) (- /) (- /) (- /) E-A/. (/) (-/) (- /) (- /) (- /). (- /) For -pole switches, add in. to the "L" dimension.. (/) (- /) (/) (-/) (/). (/) (- /) (- /) (- /) (- /) (- /) (- /) (- /) (- /) (- /) (-/) (- /) (- /) (-/) (- /) - Publication A-CAA-EN-P

419 Bulletin E IEC Load Switches, A Appropriate Dimensions Dimensions are shown in millimeters (inches). Dimensions are not intended to be used for manufacturing purposes. Base Mounting E-A E-A Switch Body with L-G Shaft Extension Shaft extensions Switch body L With shaft extension (-/) With shaft extensions (-/) With shaft extensions () With shaft extensions (-/) With shaft extensions (-/) With shaft extensions (-/) For -pole switches, add in. to the "L" dimension. Switch Body E-A E-A / E-A / E-A / (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) Shaft L-G L-G L-G Y.. (/ /) (/ /) (/) (/) Handles Type B Q P L-HEA L-HEI E-HEG E-HEN L-HEA L-HEI L-HEN L-HEG (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) x (-/ x -/) x (-/ x -/) x (-/ x -/) x (-/ x -/) x (-/ x -/) x (-/ x -/) x (-/ x -/) x (-/ x -/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) Publication A-CAA-EN-P -

420 Bulletin E IEC Load Switches, A Appropriate Dimensions Dimensions are shown in millimeters (inches). Dimensions are not intended to be used for manufacturing purposes. Base Installation E-A E-A Switch Body with Metal Shaft Extension L-G L-G A (-/ -/) (-/ -/) E-A E-A/ E-A/ E-A/ L () (-/) (-/) (-/) Base and Front Installation For -pole switches, add in. to the "L" dimension. E with Auxiliary Contact Block Installed E with -Pole, Ground and Neutral Terminals Contacts N.O. + N.C. N.O. + N.C. M (/) (/) E- E-/ E-/ E-/ M. (/) (/). (/) (/) - Publication A-CAA-EN-P

421 Bulletin E IEC Load Switches, A Appropriate Dimensions Dimensions are shown in millimeters (inches). Dimensions are not intended to be used for manufacturing purposes. Base Mounting E-A Thermoplastic Enclosures Complete Switches E-Y E-Y/ E-Y/ Poles Enclosures ABS Noryl and E-G E-G and L-G L-G E-G E-G and E-G E-G E-G E-G E-Y/ and E-G E-G Height A (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) Width B (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) M/M / mm M/M / mm Knockouts ØD PG/PG./. mm PG/PG./. mm PG/PG./. mm PG/PG./. mm PG/PG./. mm PG/PG./. mm PG/PG./. mm Mounting Holes E (-/) On Center (-/) On Center On Center (-/) (-/) F (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) Empty enclosures not available for purchase. E-A units have knockout on each end. all others have knockouts on each end. A letter "M" in the catalog number indicates metric knockouts; the unit is otherwise supplied with PG knockouts. All mounting holes have a. mm (/ in. ) diameter. E-A / E-A / E-A / No. of Extensions With extension (-/) (-/) (-/) With extensions (-/) (-/) (-/) With extensions (-/) (-/) (-/) With extensions (-/) (-/) (-/) With extensions (-/) () (-/) With extensions (-/) (-/) (-/) When more than modules are used, attach the first one to the switch body using the screws supplied with the extension ( L-G). Depth H (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) Publication A-CAA-EN-P -

422 Bulletin E IEC Load Switches, A Appropriate Dimensions Dimensions are shown in millimeters (inches). Dimensions are not intended to be used for manufacturing purposes. E Enclosed Switches with R Handles () / (.) dia. mtg. holes () / (.) dia. mtg. holes Cat. Nos. E-CA, E-FA, E-AA E-KA / (.) -/ (.) -/ (.) -/ (.) (.) () / (.) dia. mtg. holes Cat. Nos. E-CA, E-FA, E-AA Cat. Nos. E-CAX X, E-FAX X, E-AAX X () / (.) Dia. Mtg. Holes / (.) -/ (.) E-KA () - (.) Dia. Mtg. Holes () -/ () -/ () () -/ () E-DA, E-GA - Publication A-CAA-EN-P

423 Bulletin E IEC Load Switches, A Overview Bulletin E IEC Load Switches At-Motor Disconnect Switch (UL),,, A Versions of Inductive Load-Rated Switches IP/UL Type //R/ Operating Handles IPLX Finger-Safe Terminals - and -Pole Versions Front/Door or DIN/Base Mounting Configurations Updated Black Appearance OFF-ON Configurations Box Lug and Bolt-on Terminals Available Switches Include Operating Shaft Suitable as Motor Disconnect Bulletin E load switches are designed for use as local motor isolation and for disconnect switch applications. They are available in - and -pole versions with add-on grounding and neutral terminals and auxiliary contacts. Bulletin E switches are offered in two mounting styles, Front/Door and Base/DIN configurations, for a variety of installations. Switch body styles for Bulletin E base-mounted switches include standard interlock shaft; Bulletin E front-mounted switches include standard shaft. Table of Contents Product Selection... - Accessories... - Specifications... - Approximate Dimensions... - Standards Compliance IEC IEC - IEC - Low-voltage switchgear and control gear part UL CSA C., No. Certifications culus Listed (Box Lug Version) (UL File No. E, Guide NLRV, NLRV) UR Recognized (Bolt-on Version) (UL File No. E NLRV, NLRV) CE Bulletin E Switches A OFF-ON Switch with Box Lugs (UL Listed) OFF-ON Switch with Bolt-on Wiring (UR Recognized)) -pole Base Mounted -pole Front Mounted -pole Base Mounted -pole Front Mounted -pole Base Mounted -pole Front Mounted -pole Base Mounted -pole Front Mounted Catalog Number Explanation a Installation Type Code Description A Base Mounting w/box Lugs UL Listed E A a b c b Load Size Code Description A B Base Mounting w/bolt-on Wiring UR Recognized A E Front Mounting w/box Lugs UL Listed A F Front Mounting w/bolt-on Wiring UR Recognized A cm shaft included with switch c Configuration Code Function Description OFF-ON -Pole, -position ( degrees) OFF-ON -Pole, -position ( degrees) Publication A-CAA-EN-P -

424 Bulletin E IEC Load Switches, A Product Selection/Accessories Frequently Ordered E Switches (see Explanation for additional load sizes in - and -pole configurations) Description Base-mounting switch w/ box lugs A No. of Poles Rated Current AC Rated kw V AC Hz V AC Hz Ø E-A- Base-mounting switch w/ box lugs A E-A- Base-mounting switch w/ box lugs A E-A- Base-mounting switch w/ box lugs A E-A- Base-mounting switch w/ bolt-on wiring A E-B- Base-mounting switch w/ bolt-on wiring A E-B- Front-mounting switch w/ box lugs A E-E- Front-mounting switch w/ bolt-on wiring A E-F- Front-mounting switch w/ bolt-on wiring A E-F- Front-mounting switch w/ bolt-on wiring A E-F- cm shaft included with switch. Accessories Handles E -... A Handles with Screw Fixing (Includes Legend Plate and Control Knob) Type A Type I Type G Type N Degree of Protection Color Legend Plate Size For Use With Legend Marking IP (UL Type /R/) Black/Grey Red/Yellow Black/Grey Red/Yellow x mm -/ x -/ in. x mm -/ x -/ in. x mm -/ x -/ in. x mm -/ x -/ in. x mm -/ x -/ in. x mm -/ x -/ in. x mm -/ x -/ in. x mm -/ x -/ in. E- A E- A Accessories E -... A Auxiliary Contacts - N.O. / N.C. For Use With E-A-,E-B- E-A-,E-B- OFF ON E-HEA- E-HEA- E-HEI- E-HEI- E-HEG- E-HEG- E-HEN- E-HEN- E-AB-P- E-AB-P- E-E-,E-F- E-E-,E-F- E-EF-P- E-EF-P- - Publication A-CAA-EN-P

425 Bulletin E IEC Load Switches, A Accessories Earthing/Grounding Terminal For Use With E-A-,E-E- E-AE-PE E-A-,E-E- E-AE-PE E-B-,E-F- E-B,E-F E-B,E-F E-BF-PE E-BF-PE E-BF-PE Neutral Terminal For Use With E-A-,E-E- E-AE-TN E-A-,E-E- E-B-,E-F- E-B,E-F E-AE-TN E-BF-TN E-BF-TN E-B,E-F E-BF-TN Shaft Extension Length For Use With cm E-A or E-B A Base- Mounted Switches E-AB Legend Additional Name Plate and Frame Terminal Cover For Use With E-A- E-E- covers per pole E-AE-C E-A- E-E- covers per pole E-AE-C E-B- E-F- covers per pole E-BF-C E-B- E-F- covers per pole E-BF-C Color Legend Size For Use With Legend Marking Pkg. Qty. MAIN SWITCH L-GA Size Type G and N Style HAUPTSCHALTER L-GB Handles, Cat. Nos. INTERR. PRINCIPALE L-GC Black/Grey L-HEG/N x mm INTERR. PRINCIPAUX L-GD mm x mm / x -/ in. mm x mm INTERR. PRINCIPAL L-GE mm x mm HUVUDBRYTARE L-GF mm x mm legend frames WAHLSCHALTER L-GG Black/Grey EMERGENCY OFF L-GH Publication A-CAA-EN-P -

426 Bulletin E IEC Load Switches, A Specifications IEC Performance Data for E E- E- E- - Rated insulation voltage U i : [V] Rated impulse withstand voltage U imp [kv] Test voltage min [kv].... Rated voltage U e [V] Rated frequency [Hz] / / / / Rated thermal current I th open [A] Rated thermal current I the enclosed [A] Rated current I e AC- / Non-inductive or slightly induc. load AC-A Switching of resistive loads with slight [A] overload Rated power P e V [kw] AC-A Occasional switching of motor and other highly inductive loads V [kw] V [kw] V [kw] AC- Squirrel-cage motors: starting and stopping of running motors V [kw] V [kw] Conditional rated short-circuit current /V [ka] Max. fuse rating of circuit (type gg) [A] Rated short-time current I cw S [A] Rated breaking capacity V [A] AC-A (cos φ.) V [A] V [A] Valid for line with grounded common neutral termination, overvoltage category III, pollution degree. Other values on request. Not suitable for load-switching applications (AC- A) above V. DC Switching Capacity E- E- E- E- Rated current I e Rated voltage [V] No. Poles in series DC-A [A] For resistive loads T ms [A] [A] Rated voltage [V] No. Poles in series [A] [A] [A] Rated power P e Rated voltage [V] No. Poles in series DC-A, DC- [kw].. For Inductive loads T. ms [kw]. [kw].. [kw]. [kw].. Rated Power P e Rated voltage [V] No. Poles in series DC-A, DC- [kw].. For Inductive loads T ms [kw]. [kw].. [kw].. [kw]... - Publication A-CAA-EN-P

427 Bulletin E IEC Load Switches, A Specifications UL CSA Performance Data for E E- E- E- E- Rated Insulation Voltage [V] Rated voltage [V] Continuous current [A] Ampere rating for general use [A] Heavy Pilot Duty [AC] Standard Duty [DC] Motor rating Hz V, P [FLA] [Hp]. V, P [FLA] -phase ( poles) [Hp] V, P [FLA] [Hp] V, P [FLA] [Hp] V, P [FLA] [Hp] V, P [FLA] -Phase [Hp] V, P [FLA] [Hp] V, P [FLA] [Hp] Mechanical Data E- E- E- E- Handles IP IP IP IP Protection class according to IEC Front side Front unit IP IP IP IP Box lugs IP IP IP IP Bolt-on straight version IP IP IP IP bent version Mechanical life [Million operations].... Box lugs max. wire gauges Terminal sizes according to IEC - Gauge No. B B B B Fine strands, conductor Max. [mm] Min. [mm] Rigid wire, conductor Max. [mm] Min. [mm] Wire gauges according to UL/CSA Max. [AWG] / / [MCM] Min. [AWG] Tightening torque [N m]/[lb in] / / / / When provided with terminal covers. Publication A-CAA-EN-P -

428 Bulletin E IEC Load Switches, A Specifications/Approximate Dimensions Certifications Catalog No. or Designation UL-Listed (marked with UL) UR-Recognized (marked with UR) UL-Listed for Canada (marked with cul) UR-Recognized for Canada (marked with cur) CE E-A E-E A A A E-A E-E A A A E-A E-E A A A E-A E-E A A A E-B E-F A A A E-B E-F A A A E-B E-F A A A E-B E-F A A A Aux. switch blocks Z Z Z Z Z Ground terminal Z Z Z Z Z Neutral terminal Z Z Z Z Z A = Certified Z = accessories are covered by the approval for the switch Approximate Dimensions Dimensions are shown in millimeters (inches). Dimensions are not intended to be used for manufacturing purposes. Front-Installation Box Lugs, - and -Pole max. E mm Switch Body E-E [A] A B C D E F G H I (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) M x. bolts supplied with switch. Threaded hole. (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/). (-/). (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) M M M M - Publication A-CAA-EN-P

429 Bulletin E IEC Load Switches, A Approximate Dimensions Dimensions are shown in millimeters (inches). Dimensions are not intended to be used for manufacturing purposes. Front-Installation Bolt-on Terminals, - and -Pole Switch Body E-F [A] A B C D E F G H I L M N O P (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/). (-/). (-/). (-/). (-/). (-/). (-/) M x. bolts supplied with switch. Threaded hole. Bolts and nuts supplied with switch. Through-hole. Base-Mounting Box Lugs, - and -Pole (/) (/) (/) (/) (/) (/) (/) (/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (/) (/) (/) (/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) M M M M M M M M max. D mm Switch Body E-A [A] A B C D E F G H I L (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/). (-/). (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (/) (/) (/) (/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/). (/). (/). (/). (/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) Publication A-CAA-EN-P -

430 Bulletin E IEC Load Switches, A Approximate Dimensions Dimensions are shown in millimeters (inches). Dimensions are not intended to be used for manufacturing purposes. Base-Mounting Bolt-on Terminals, - and -Pole Switch Body E-B [A] A B C D E F G H I L M N O P Q (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/). (-/). (-/). (-/). (-/). (-/). (-/) (/) (/) (/) (/) (/) (/) (/) (/) () () (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (/) (/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (/) (/) (/) (/) M (/) M (/) M (/) M (/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/). (/). (/). (/). (/) Box Ground and Neutral Terminal FRONT BASE Switch Body E-F [A] A B C D E F. (-/). (-/). (-/). (-/) (-/) (-/). (-/). (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/). (-/). (-/). (-/). (-/) (-/) (-/). (-/). (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) - Publication A-CAA-EN-P

431 Bulletin E IEC Load Switches, A Approximate Dimensions Dimensions are shown in millimeters (inches). Dimensions are not intended to be used for manufacturing purposes. Bolt Ground and Neutral Terminal FRONT BASE Switch Body E-F [A] A B C D E F G H I L M N. (-/). (-/). (-/). (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (/) (/) (/) (/) M (/) M (/) M (/) M (/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (/) (/) (/) (/). (-/). (-/). (-/). (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (/) (/) (/) (/) M (/) M (/) M (/) M (/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (/) (/) (/) (/) Auxiliary Contacts FRONT BASE Terminal Cover Switch Body E-F [A] A B. (). () (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/). (-/). (-/) Publication A-CAA-EN-P -

432 Bulletin E IEC Load Switches, A Approximate Dimensions Dimensions are shown in millimeters (inches). Dimensions are not intended to be used for manufacturing purposes. Door Clutches L for Standard Shaft mm (-/ -/ in.) Shaft must be cut to standard length at installation Use E-AB shaft extension accessory to extend beyond the standard shaft length. Handles (Type E-HE-A-I-G-N) - Publication A-CAA-EN-P

433 Bulletin E IEC Load Switches, A Approximate Dimensions Dimensions are shown in millimeters (inches). Dimensions are not intended to be used for manufacturing purposes. Handles (Type E-HE-A-I-G-N) Type A and I Type G and N Additional Name Plate Frame and legend snaps on to handle bezel. Fits size and handles. Publication A-CAA-EN-P -

434 Bulletin L IEC Control and Load Switches Overview Bulletin L IEC Control and Load Switches,,,,, and A inductive load-rated switch IP water spray and dustproof handles IP finger-safe terminals Switches available for OFF-ON, changeover, star-delta (wye-delta), reversing, ammeter, voltmeter and step switch configurations -Pole versions Front/door- or base/ DIN Rail-mounting configurations Thermoplastic enclosures IP Suitable as motor disconnect (UL ) Bulletin L control and load switches are flexible, adaptable, timeand space-saving devices. Switches are available as front/door- or Base/DIN rail-mounting versions. Uniformly styled handles, featuring marked legend plates, are available in Selector-Knob, Disk-Style, Rectangular-Style and Key-Operated versions. Selector-Knob versions are available in three sizes. Most handles are available in grey/black or red/yellow and have padlockable versions. A new thermoplastic enclosure features constructions of impactresistant ABS or corrosion resistant NORYL materials. Both shallow and deep versions include mm DIN mounting Rail, grounding and neutral terminals, and captive cover screws. Enclosures may be ordered with or without cover openings for handle mounting. Enclosures are rated for use in IP (UL Type,, R, ) environments. Table of Contents Product Overview... this page Product Selection... - Accessories... - Switching Diagrams.. - Specifications... - Approximate Dimensions... - Standards Compliance IEC - Low-voltage switchgear and control gear part UL CSA: C. No. Product Overview OFF-ON Switch Ammeter Switch Changeover Switch OFF-ON Switch Two-position switch used to connect or disconnect a variety of inductive loads including: solenoids, handles, valves, magnetic starters and relays. Ammeter Switch Multi-position switch used to connect one or more phases of an electrical supply to an ammeter, so that the current in each phase can be displayed on one ammeter. Changeover Switch Two-position switch used in control applications to change between alternate power supplies. This device can typically be used to manually switch power supplies from a primary source to a standby/emergency supply in the event of a power outage. Certifications UL Listed (File No. E, Guide NLRV) CSA Certified (LR ) Meets IEC, VDE and BS Standard requirements CE Star-Delta (Wye- Delta) Switch Step Switch Star-Delta (Wye-Delta) Switch Three-position (Off-Wye-Delta) switch used to manually control reduced-voltage motor starting. Operating the switch manually changes the wiring configuration of the motor from a star configuration to delta configuration after the controller operator has determined that the motor is up to operating speed. Step Switch Multi-position switch used to connect a variety of loads to an electrical supply in a pre-determined logical sequence. A typical application would be temperature control of a heating oven or furnace. Voltmeter Switch Voltmeter Switch Multi-position switch used to connect two lines of the electrical supply system to a voltmeter so that the voltage between the lines (phase-to-phase or phase-to-neutral) can be displayed on one voltmeter. Reversing Switch Reversing Switch Three-phase, three-position (Forward-Off- Reverse) switch used to manually control a motor s direction of rotation. Operating the switch changes the wiring configuration of the motor to operate in the forward or reverse direction. - Publication A-CAA-EN-P

435 Bulletin L IEC Control and Load Switches Product Selection/Catalog Number Explanation Bulletin L Control and Load Switches Base/DIN Rail Mounting Front/Door Mounting Base/DIN Rail Mounting Front/Door Mounting Front/Door Mounting Code A E C A Base Mount A Front Mount A and A Base Mount A and A Front Mount Catalog Number Explanation a Installation Type Description Base/DIN Mounting Front/Door Mounting Front/Door Mounting (For use with A and A switches only. Use when selecting. mm hole-mounting style handle.) L A a b c d b Load Size A and A Front Mount, for use with. mm mounting hole style handle Code Description Code Description A A A A A A c Code Function Configuration Use with Switch Style : Circuit Diagram Ref. No. -Position ( degrees) L-E, A, poles On/Off -Position ( degrees) L-E or L-A, A, poles -Position ( degrees-inverted) L-E or L-A, A, poles - (without, degrees) L-E, A, poles or L-A, A, poles - (without, degrees) L-E, A, poles -- (with, degrees, spring return) L-E, A, poles Change-Over -- (with, degrees) L-E or L-A, A, poles -- (with, degrees, spring return) L-E, A, poles -- (with, degrees) L-E, A, poles -- (with, degrees) -- ( degrees) L-E or L-A, A, pole L-E, A, poles --- ( degrees) L-E, A, poles L-A, A, poles ---- ( degrees) L-E or L-A, A, pole ( degrees) -- ( degrees) L-E, A, poles --- ( degrees) ---- ( degrees) L-E, A, pole ( degrees) Step Switch ---- ( degrees) ( degrees) L-E, A, poles -- ( degrees) --- ( degrees) L-E or L-A, A, pole ---- ( degrees) L-E, A, poles ( degrees) -- ( degrees) --- ( degrees) L-E, A, poles ---- ( degrees) ( degrees) -Y-Δ (/ degrees) Star-Delta L-E or L-A, A, poles -Y-Δ (/ degrees) (Wye-Delta) -Y-Δ ( degrees) L-E, A, poles -- ( degrees) L-E or L-A, A, poles Reversing -- ( degrees) L-E, A, poles -RN-SN-TN-TR-ST-RS ( degrees) Voltmeter -RS-ST-TR ( degrees) --- ( degrees) L-E or L-A, A, pole Ammeter ---- ( degrees) - ( degrees inverted) Not all possible configurations are available. Some configurations may have longer delivery times and minimum order quantities. When choosing front mount style L-E for A or A, use the L-C code only if a L-HC style handle is being used. Code d No. of Poles Description Pole Poles Poles Poles Poles Poles Publication A-CAA-EN-P -

436 Bulletin L IEC Control and Load Switches Product Selection Frequently Ordered L Switches Base/Front-Mounted Switches (Switch Handles listed on page -) ON-OFF Switch Body (Includes Shaft) OFF ON No. of Poles Contact Target Configuration X = Contact Closed O = Contact Open Control Knob Position OFF/ ON/ No. of Circuits -Circuit ON-OFF Switch O X -Circuit ON-OFF Switch -Circuit ON-OFF Switch -Circuit ON-OFF Switch -Circuit ON-OFF Switch Reversing Switch Body (Includes Shaft) No. of Poles -Circuit Reversing Switch O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X Contact Target Configuration X = Contact Closed O = Contact Open Control Knob Position No. of Circuits O X X O X O O O O O X O O X X Rated Current [A] Mounting Type Front/Door L-E- Base/DIN L-A- Front/Door L-E- Base/DIN L-A- Front/Door L-E- Front/Door L-E- Base/DIN L-A- Front/Door L-E- Front/Door L-E- Base/DIN L-A- Front/Door L-E- Base/DIN L-A- Front/Door L-E- Base/DIN L-A- Front/Door L-E- Base/DIN L-A- Front/Door L-E- Base/DIN L-A- Base/DIN L-A- Front/Door L-E- Base/DIN L-A- Front/Door L-E- Front/Door L-E- Base/DIN L-A- Front/Door L-E- Base/DIN L-A- Front/Door L-E- Rated Current [A] Mounting Type Front/Door L-E- - Publication A-CAA-EN-P

437 Bulletin L IEC Control and Load Switches Product Selection Bulletin L Handles (for use with Bulletin L Switches) Color Handles (Includes Legend Plate and Control Knob) Red/Yellow (Emergency Stop colors) Type I Type L With Locking For One Padlock (Padlock Not Included) Type N Bulletin L handles are available in both screw fixing and. mm mounting hole style. IP, UL Type /R/ for all L Handles Black/Grey (Standard Operation colors) Type A Type E With Locking For One Padlock (Padlock Not Included) Type G These handles are for use with - and - (ON-OFF) switches only and are dual marked with ON-OFF and -. Catalog Number Explanation L HE N a b c d Type S Code HC HE Code a Installation Type. mm Mounting Hole Style Handle (for use with front-mounted switches) Screw-Mounting Handle (for use with front- and base-mounted switches) Use with Handle Type A, E, I, L S A, E, I, L G, N S b Handle Legend Plate Size Use With L Switch Size mm x mm (-/ in. x -/ in.) L-A A mm x mm (-/ in. x -/ in.) mm x mm (-/ in. x -/ in.) mm x mm (-/ in. x -/ in.) mm x mm (-/ in. x -/ in.) Use Type G and N with ON-OFF function only (selection "d"). L-E E L-C C L-A A L-E A Code Legend Plate Type Color A Square Grey/Black I Square Red/Yellow E Square/Lockable Grey/Black L Square/Lockable Red/Yellow G N S Disc/Lockable (up to locks) Disc/Lockable (up to locks) Large Square with extra legend area c d See Table on the next page. Grey/Black Red/Yellow Grey/Black Publication A-CAA-EN-P -

438 Bulletin L IEC Control and Load Switches Product Selection d Code Description Legend Marking Code Description Legend Marking Code Description Legend Marking O-I --- ( Step Switch) --- ( Step Switch) I OFF-ON ---- ( Step Switch) ---- ( Step Switch) O-I ON ( Step Switch) ( Step Switch) OFF I OFF-ON -- ( Step Switch) -Y-Δ ( / Star- Delta Switch) O-I OFF --- ( Step Switch) -Y-Δ ( / Star- Delta Switch) ON I OFF-ON ---- ( Step Switch) -Y-Δ ( Star-Delta Switch) - ( Changeover without O) ( Step Switch) Same as Code. Use order code. - ( Changeover without O) ---- ( Step Switch) -RN-SN-TN-TR-ST- RS ( Voltmeter Switch) -- ( Changeover with spring return) ( Step Switch) -RS-ST-TR ( Voltmeter Switch) -- ( Changeover with O) -- ( Step Switch) --- ( Ammeter Switch c.t.'s) Same as Code. Use order code. --- ( Step Switch) --- ( Ammeter Switch c.t.'s) -- (Reversing Changeover with O) ---- ( Step Switch) - ( Ammeter Switch c.t.) -- ( Changeover with O) ( Step Switch) -- ( Step Switch) -- ( Step Switch) - Publication A-CAA-EN-P

439 Bulletin L IEC Control and Load Switches Product Selection Frequently Ordered L Handles Base/Front-Mounted Switch Handles (Switch Body listed on page -) Handle Type Degree of Protection Handle Color Legend Plate Size For Use With Legend Plate Marking mm x mm (-/ in. x -/ in.) L-E A, - L-HCA- A E L G N IP IP (UL Type /R/) Black/Grey Black/Grey Red/Yellow Black/Grey Red/Yellow L IP (UL Type /R/) Red/Yellow mm x mm (-/ in. x -/ in.) mm x mm (-/ in. x -/ in.) x mm (-/ x -/ in.) x mm (-/ x -/ in.) x mm (-/ x -/ in.) x mm (-/ x -/ in.) x mm (-/ x -/ in.) L-E A, - L-A A, - L-E A, - L-A A, - E- A L-E A, - L-A A, - E- A L-E A, - L-A A, - E- A L-E A, - L-A A, - E- A L-E A, - L-A A, - L-E A, - -- L-HEA- L-HEA- - L-HEE- OFF-ON L-HEE-I - L-HEL- OFF-ON - OFF-ON - OFF-ON L-HEL-I L-HEG- L-HEN- - L-HCL- OFF-ON L-HCL-I For. mm mounting hole style (code HC), select either handle type A, E, I, or L with x mm legend plate size (code ) only or handle type G or N with x mm legend plate size (code ) only. Rectangular Knob Handle (Includes Legend Plate and Control Knob) Color Black/Grey Locking Provision None. mm Mounting Hole Style Knob and Keyed Type Handles Legend Plate Size mm x mm (-/ in. x -/ in.) For Use With L-A A switches ONLY Fixing Screw Legend Marking - L-HEP- OFF-ON L-HEP-I Description Fixing Pkg. Qty.. mm Mounting Hole Style Handles (IP) Handle Style: Knob Lever with Latch (For Use With E-E A, -) or L-E A. mm Mounting Hole Style L-HCB- Type B. mm Mounting Hole Style Handles Key Removal Position (Includes Latch) For Use With L-E A, E-E A, - L-HCDC- Type D. mm Mounting Hole Style Handles Key Removal Position (Includes Latch) For Use With L-E A, E-E A, -. mm Mounting Hole Style Handles Key Removal Position (Includes Latch) For Use With L-E A, E-E A, -. mm Mounting Hole Style Handles Key Removal Position (Includes Latch) For Use With L-E A, E-E A -. mm Mounting Hole Style L-HCDD- L-HCDG- L-HCDH- Publication A-CAA-EN-P -

440 Bulletin L IEC Control and Load Switches Accessories Standard Black Control Knob Rectangular Front Frame Control Knob, With Locking Facility Description Pkg. Qty. Cat. No. Control Knob, Black, L =. mm (-/ in.) L-GN Control Knob, Black, L = mm (-/ in.) L-GN Control Knob, Red, L =. mm (-/ in.) L-GR Control Knob, Red, L = mm (-/ in.) L-GR Rectangular front frame with blank nameplate L = x mm (-/ x -/ in.) Rectangular front frame with blank nameplate L = x mm (-/ x -/ in.) Control Knob, Black, with Locking Facility (Use / in. max. hasp lock.) (Locks in,,, and positions) Control Knob, Red, with Locking Facility (Use / in. max. hasp lock) Control Knob, Type P Control Knob, Black, mm (-/ in.) Diameter Control Knobs, Type P Control Knob, Red, mm (-/ in.) Diameter L-G L-G L-GN L-GR L-GN L-GR Large Control Knob, mm (-/ in.) Diameter; IP, Black L-GN Control Knob, mm (-/ in.) Diameter; IP, Black L-GN Use Bulletin F Legend Frames and Inserts Blank Legend Plate, mm x mm (-/ in. x -/ in.) L-B Blank Legend Plate, mm x mm (-/ in. x -/ in.) L-B Terminal Cover Base/DIN For L-A Terminal Cover Front (Door) For L-E Terminal Cover Base/DIN For L-A Terminal Cover Front (Door) For L-E L-A-C L-E-C L-A-C L-E-C These locking knobs can only be added to the "HE" style actuators. If a locking knob is desired on a "HC" style actuator, it has to be ordered as part of the main catalog number. For example, L-HCE-. - Publication A-CAA-EN-P

441 Bulletin L IEC Control and Load Switches Accessories IP Use With Switch L-A/ L-A/ L-E/ Number of Contacts ABS Required Shaft Noryl Material Required Shaft L-G L-G L-G L-G L-G L-G L-G L-G L-G L-G L-G L-G L-G L-G L-G L-G L-G L-G L-G L-G L-G L-G L-G L-G L-G L-G L-G L-G L-G L-G L-G L-G L-G L-G L-G L-G L-E/ Use With Size Handles L-G L-G L-G L-G Covers must be drilled for operating handle by user. Does not include earth/ground neutral terminal. Refer to the switching diagrams that follow to determine the number of switch contacts. Description Pkg. Qty. Metal Shaft Extension with Padlock Provision ON Switch in OFF Position L = mm (-/. -/ in.) Metal Shaft Extension with Padlock Provision ON Switch in OFF Position L = mm (-/. -/ in.) L-G L-G Metal Shaft Extension For modification of L-G/ G when used with any switches other than -position, rotation. L-G Standard Interlock Shaft For Use With L-A = mm (-/ in.) Interlock Shaft For Use With L-A = mm (-/ in.) Interlock Shaft For Use With L-A = mm (-/ in.) L-G L-G L-G For Use With L-A Base-Mounted switches only. Shaft Extension Including Coupling For Use With L-A = mm (/ in.) Standard Shaft For Use With L-E = mm (-/ in.) L-G L-G Publication A-CAA-EN-P -

442 Bulletin L IEC Control and Load Switches Switching Diagrams Circuit Diagram Nos. Contact target tables: X = Contact Closed [Blank] = Contact Open - Publication A-CAA-EN-P

443 Bulletin L IEC Control and Load Switches Switching Diagrams Circuit Diagram Nos. Publication A-CAA-EN-P -

444 Bulletin L IEC Control and Load Switches Switching Diagrams Circuit Diagram Nos. - Publication A-CAA-EN-P

445 Bulletin L IEC Control and Load Switches Switching Diagrams Circuit Diagram Nos. Publication A-CAA-EN-P -

446 Bulletin L IEC Control and Load Switches Specifications Electrical Ratings Performance Data A A A A A A IEC Applications Rated voltage U e IEC- [V] Isolating conditions acc. to VDE fulfilled up to rated impulse voltage Uimp [kv] Thermal rated current I th C IEC- [A] Thermal rated current I the C IEC- [A] Rated current I e AC-/ AC-A AC- ACA AC- and A data for one contact in series. - Non-inductive or slightly inductive loads/ switching of resistive loads with slight overload Non-inductive or slightly inductive loads Switching of mixed resistive and inductive loads with slight overload Switching of inductive drives, motors, valves, and electromagnets. IEC- V [A] SEV V [A] IEC- IEC- Publication A-CAA-EN-P V V V V V [A] [A] [A] [A] [A]. DC switching capacity Contacts in series Rated current I e Rated Voltage [V] [A] [A] [A] DC-A For resistive loads, T ms [A]. [A].... U e max = V [A].... Rated making/breaking capacity (=. x I e ) [A]. x Rated voltage [V] [A] For resistive loads, T I th ms [A]... [A].. U e max = V [A].... [A].... Rated current I e Rated voltage [V] [A] [A].. For inductive loads T = ms [A].. Rated voltage [V] [A]..... [A].... [A].. Rated making/breaking capacity (=. x I e ). x Rated voltage [V] [A].... [A].... For inductive loads T = ms [A] U e max = V [A]..... [A] Power Lost [W] Rated power P e Contacts in series Rated voltage [V] DC-A, DC-, DC- For inductive loads, T ms See standards compliance listed on page page -. [kw] [kw].... [kw] [kw].... [kw] [kw].... [kw].... [kw].... [kw].... [kw].....

447 Bulletin L IEC Control and Load Switches Specifications Electrical Ratings Performance Data, Continued A A A A A A IEC Applications, Continued Rated making/breaking capacity (= x I e ) Rated Voltage [V]. DC-A, DC-, DC-.. For inductive loads, T. ms... Rated breaking capacity Rated power P e AC- AC- AC- Slip-ring motors: starting, reversing and electric braking; star/delta starting Squirrel-cage motors: starting and stopping of running motors Squirrel-cage motors: starting, reversing, electric braking, inching See standards compliance listed on page -. IEC- Ø -pole IEC- Ø -pole Ø -pole IEC- Ø -pole Ø -pole Contacts in series at V. [cos j] at V. [cos j] at V.[cos j] V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V [A] [A] [A] [A] [A] [A] [A] [A] [A] [A] [A] [A] [A] [kw] [kw] [kw] [kw] [kw] [kw] [kw] [kw] [kw] [kw] [kw] [kw] [kw] [kw] [kw] [kw] [kw] [kw] [kw] [kw] Publication A-CAA-EN-P -

448 Bulletin L IEC Control and Load Switches Specifications Electrical Ratings Performance Data, Continued A A A A A A IEC Applications, Continued AC-A Occasional switching of motors and other highly inductive loads (criterion for selecting main switches) IEC- Ø -pole Ø -pole V V V V V V V Short-circuit ratings Rated short-time current (s) [ka rms ] Strongest series fuse, not in [A] (gl characteristic) enclosure Conditional rated shortcircuit [ka] Switch Rate electrical [ops/h] CSA and UL Applications Rated Voltage U e [V AC] Ampere Rating Pilot Duty Contact class General Use Non-inductive or slightly inductive load Rated power P e UL (CSA) (FLA) (FLA) (FLA) (FLA) Standard motor DOL rating (similar to AC-) Heavy motor load, reversing Rating (similar to AC-) Max. back-up fuse Short Circuit Ratings Maximum Short Circuit Prospective Fault Current Maximum Fuse Size Ø -pole Ø -pole Ø -pole (gg characteristic) V V V V V V V V V V [kw] [kw] [kw] [kw] [kw] [kw] [kw] [A] [Hp] [Hp] [Hp] [Hp] [Hp] [Hp] [Hp] [Hp] [Hp] [Hp] [A] [ka] A (.) (.) (.) (.). (.) (.) (.) (.) A. () (.). (). (). (.). (.) (.) (.)..... (.) (.) (.) () () () (.) (.).... (.) () () (). () () (). ().. (.). () () () () (). () () [A] Switching Rate electrical [ops/h] Mechanical Data Performance Data / A / A / A Protection class acc. to IEC Handles Switch Bodies Mechanical Endurance [mil.ops] Switching rate mechanical [ops/h] Maximum Wire Gauges Environmental Data rigid wire fine strands AWG [mm] AWG [mm] IP IP () (). () (). IP IP () (). () (). Performance Data /// A / A Ambient temperature Operation Storage + C ( + F) + C ( + F) Does not apply to switches in enclosure. Suitable for switching off-load (AC-) above V, but only up to V for switches with screws at the rear. See standards compliance listed on page page -. IP IP () () () (). + C ( + F) + C ( + F). (.) () () () () () () () - Publication A-CAA-EN-P

449 Bulletin L IEC Control and Load Switches Approximate Dimensions Dimensions are shown in millimeters (inches). Dimensions are not intended to be used for manufacturing purposes. L-C for Central Fixing (L-HC ) L-HCD L-HCB L-HCA Dia. (-/) L No. of Contacts L-C/... (-/). (-/) (-/). (-/) (-/) L for Front (Door) Installation Mounting Dimensions L-E / L-E / L-E / L-E / L No. of Contacts L-E/... (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) L-E/.... (-/) (-/). (-/) (-/). (-/) L-E/... (-/). (-/) (-/). (-/) (-/) Publication A-CAA-EN-P -

450 Bulletin L IEC Control and Load Switches Approximate Dimensions Dimensions are shown in millimeters (inches). Dimensions are not intended to be used for manufacturing purposes. Control Knob P Q L-HEA... L-HEI... (-/) (-/) x (-/) L-HES... (-/) x (-/) L-HEA... L-HEI... (-/) x (-/) L-HES... (-/) x (-/) L-HEN... L-HEG... (-/) L-A for Base/DIN Rail Installation L-A / (-/) x (-/) Dia.. (/) Control Knob L-A / L No. of Contacts Y Dimension Min.. (/) Max.. (/) L-A/... (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) L-A/... (-/). (-/) (-/). (-/) L-A/.... (-/) (-/). (-/) (-/) P B Q L-HEA L-HEI (-/) (-/) x (-/) L-HES (-/) x (-/) (-/) L-HEA (-/) x (-/) L-HEI L-HES (-/) (-/) x (-/) L-HEN L-HEG With DIN () Rail +. mm (/) (-/) (-/) x (-/) - Publication A-CAA-EN-P

451 Bulletin L IEC Control and Load Switches Approximate Dimensions Dimensions are shown in millimeters (inches). Dimensions are not intended to be used for manufacturing purposes. L-A With Shaft Extension L-G Extensions Dia.. (.) No. of Contacts with No. of Extensions Shaft No. of Extensions With extension With extensions With extensions With extensions With extensions With extensions Control Knob L-A/... mm (.) L-A/....mm (.) L-A/ L No. of Contacts (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/). (-/). (-/). (-/). (-/). (-/). (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/). (-/). (-/). (-/). (-/). (-/). (-/). (-/). (-/). (-/). (-/). (-/). (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (). (-/). (-/). (-/). (-/). (-/). (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) Q B L-HEA L-HEI L-HEA L-HEI L-HEN L-HEG (-/) x (-/) (-/) (-/) x (-/) (-/) x (-/) (-/) When more than modules are used, attach the first one to the switch body using the screws supplied with the extension ( L-G). Mounting on DIN () Rails. Publication A-CAA-EN-P -

452 Bulletin L IEC Control and Load Switches Approximate Dimensions Dimensions are shown in millimeters (inches). Dimensions are not intended to be used for manufacturing purposes. L-A With Metal Shafts A L-G (-/) (-/) L-G (-/) (-/) L No. of Contacts L-A/... (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) L-A/... (-/). (-/) (-/). (-/) L-A/.... (-/) (-/). (-/) (-/) Modular Shaft Extensions ( L-G) Select No. of Extension Modules and Shaft for use with enclosures. No. of Extension Modules Required End Shaft L-A/ Enclosure Mounting Depth L-A/ (-/).. (-/ -/). (-/ -/) (-/) (-/ -/) (-/ -/) (-/) (-/ -/) (-/ -/) (-/).. (-/ ) (-/ -/) (-/). (-/ -/). (-/ -/) (-/). (-/ -/). (-/ -/) (-/).. (-/ -/) (-/ -/) (-/). (-/ -/). (-/ -/) (-/). (-/ -/). (-/ -/) (-/).. (-/ -/) (-/ -/) (-/). (-/ -/). (-/ -/) (-/). (-/ -/). (-/ -/) (-/).. (-/ -/) (-/ -/) (-/). (-/ -/). (-/ -/) (-/). (-/ -/). (-/ -/) (-/).. (-/ -/) (-/ -/) (-/). (-/ -/). (-/ -/) (-/). (-/ -/). (-/ -/) (-/).. (-/ -/) (-/ -/) (-/). (-/ -/). (-/ -/) (-/). (-/ -/). (-/ -/) When more than modules are used, attach the first one to the switch body using the screws supplied with the extension ( L-G). With DIN () Rail +. mm (/) For DIN Rail-mounted devices, remember to deduct the offset distance provided by the rail. For example, deduct. mm (/ in.) from the mounting depth for Bulletin L switch body mounted on DIN rail. One mm (-/ in) end shaft is supplied with all Bulletin L Switch Bodies. - Publication A-CAA-EN-P

453 Bulletin L IEC Control and Load Switches Approximate Dimensions Dimensions are shown in millimeters (inches). Dimensions are not intended to be used for manufacturing purposes. L-A With L-HEP- L Installation on DIN ( mm) Rails +. mm (/ in.) No. of Contacts L-A/... (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) L-A/.... (-/) (-/). (-/) (-/) L-A/... (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) L-E With Terminal Cover A B C D L-E/ (-/). (-/) (/). (/) L-E/ (-/). (-/) (/). (/) L-E/ (-/) (-/) (/). (/) L-A With Terminal Cover A B C D L-A/ (-/). (-/) (/). (/) L-A/ (-/). (-/) (/). (/) L-A/. (-/) (-/) (/) (/) Enclosure L-G L-G L-G/G G/G L-G/G G/G Publication A-CAA-EN-P -

454 Bulletin R IEC Fused and Non-Fused Disconnects, & A Overview Bulletin R Next Generation Global Fused and Non-Fused Disconnects A A Sizes Fused switch versions: - BS - DIN - CSA HRCII-C - CSA HRCI-MISC - UL Class J - UL Class CC - NFC Non-fused switches Operating handle ingress ratings: - IP (Type ) - IP (Type R,,,, X) Handle with or without test mode Padlockable handle for up to three padlocks Up to auxiliary contacts can be added per switch Suitable as service entrance disconnecting means (UL ) Suitable as at-motor disconnecting means (UL ) Certifications UL Listed (File No. E, Guide NLRV; File No. E, Guide WHTY) CSA Certified (File No. LR) CE Table of Contents Product Selection Open Switches... this page NFPA Operating Shaft/Handle Kits... - Specifications... - Proper Selection of Disconnect Switches - Fuse Description... - Standards Compliance IEC /EN- BS EN- VDE CSA. No. NEMA KS- UL UL The Bulletin R line of fused and non-fused global disconnect switches provides the flexibility to meet worldwide applications. These rodoperated disconnect switches incorporate removable fuse carriers that have high short circuit protection ratings. The disconnect switches are UL Listed and CSA Certified and are designed to meet IEC -, VDE, DIN, BS and applicable NEMA requirements. Product Selection Open Switches Catalog Number Explanation a Fuse Type Code Description UL Class CC, CSA Type HRCI-MISC C ( A) UL Class J, CSA Type HRCI-J ( A or J A) H CSA Type HRCII-C ( A or A) B BS ( A, A, or A) D DIN ( A or A) F NFC ( A, A, or A) N Non-fused ( A or A) R-J- R J S a b c d Fourth pole, additional auxiliary contacts and handle options available in accessory section. Limit of total auxiliary contact blocks total for test and standard positions. b Load Size Code Description Dimensional Ref. A (BS) A A (NFC) A A (CC, J, HRCI-J) A A (non-fused) A A (HRCII-C) B A (BS, NFC) A A (DIN) B A (J, HRCI-J, HRCII-C) B A (non-fused) B A (BS, DIN, NFC) B See page - for dimensional reference data. Non-fused disconnect switches must use separately installed fuses for upstream shortcircuit protection No. of Poles Code Description -pole switch Code Blank S c d Fuse Indication Configuration No fuse status indication Fuse status indication - Publication A-CAA-EN-P

455 Bulletin R IEC Fused and Non-Fused Disconnects, & A Product Selection UL/CSA Fused Disconnect Switches Rated Current [A] Maximum Hp Ratings R-J- -Phase ( Hz) -Phase ( Hz) DC V V V V V V V UL Class CC and CSA HRCI-MISC Fuses Fuse Dim. Ref.. A CC, HRCI-Misc A R-C- UL Class J and CSA HRCI-J Fuses. A Class J, HRCI-J A R-J- A Class J, HRCI-J B R-J- CSA HRCII-C Fuses. A HRCII-C B R-H- A HRCII-C B R-H- Time delay fuses may be required to utilize the disconnect switch at its maximum horsepower rating. Non-Fused Disconnect Switches Fuse Description Non-fused disconnect switches must use separately installed fuses for upstream short circuit protection. Rated Current [A] R-N- Non-Fused Maximum Hp Ratings -Phase ( Hz) -Phase ( Hz) DC V V V V V V V Dim. Ref.. A R-N- B R-N- A UL-rated device has I the of A per IEC. A UL-rated device has I the of A per IEC. Publication A-CAA-EN-P -

456 Bulletin R IEC Fused and Non-Fused Disconnects, & A Product Selection IEC Fused Disconnect Switches BS Fused Disconnect Switches R-F- R-F- Load Rating I e [A] Ratings (AC) With Fuse Links -Phase Maximum kw ( Hz) /V //V /V Fuse Dim. Ref.. BS A A R-B-. BS A A R-B-. BS A B R-B- DIN Fused Disconnect Switches Load Rating I e [A] Ratings (AC) With Fuse Links -Phase Maximum kw ( Hz) /V //V /V Fuse Dim. Ref.. NH B R-D-. NH B R-D- NFC Fused Disconnect Switches Load Rating I e [A] Ratings (AC) With Fuse Links -Phase Maximum kw ( Hz) /V //V /V Fuse Dim. Ref.. NFC x mm A R-F-. NFC x mm A R-F-. NFC x mm B R-F- - Publication A-CAA-EN-P

457 Bulletin R IEC Fused and Non-Fused Disconnects, & A Product Selection Accessories th Pole Modules Rated Current [A] Maximum Hp Ratings -Phase ( Hz) -Phase ( Hz) DC V V V V V V V Non-Fused Fuse Dim. Ref.. A R--NN B R--NN UL Class CC and CSA HRCI-MISC Fuses. A CC, HRCI-Misc A R--NC UL Class J and CSA HRCI-J Fuses. A J, HRCI-J A R--NJ A J, HRCI-J B R--NJ CSA HRCII-C Fuses. A HRCII-C B R--NH A HRCII-C B R--NH Time delay fuses may be required to utilize the disconnect at its maximum horsepower rating. A UL, A IEC A UL, A IEC BS Fuses Load Rating I e [A] DIN Fuses Ratings (AC) With Fuse Links -Phase Maximum kw ( Hz) /V //V /V Fuse Dim. Ref.. BS A A R--NB. BS A A R--NB. BS A B R--NB Load Rating I e [A] NFC Fuses Ratings (AC) With Fuse Links -Phase Maximum kw ( Hz) /V //V /V Fuse Dim. Ref.. NH B R--ND. NH B R--ND Load Rating I e [A] Ratings (AC) With Fuse Links -Phase Maximum kw ( Hz) /V //V /V Fuse Dim. Ref.. NFC x mm A R--NF. NFC x mm A R--NF. NFC x mm B R--NF For fuse status indication add S to catalog number, example: R--NN becomes R--NNS. Publication A-CAA-EN-P -

458 Bulletin R IEC Fused and Non-Fused Disconnects, & A Product Selection Operating Handles (Accepts Padlocks) For Use With Description Color Degree of Protection A, A, B, B A, A, B, B OSHA Lockout/Tag Out Compliance (LOTO) Test mode handle with defeater Standard handle with defeater Standard handle without defeater Black (Type R,,,, X) IP R-HST Red/Yellow (Type R,,,, X) IP R-HSTE Black Red/Yellow Black Red/Yellow (Type ) IP (Type R,,,, X) IP (Type ) IP (Type R,,,, X) IP (Type ) IP R-HS R-HS R-HSE R-HSE R-HS-N (Type R,,,, X) IP R-HS-N (Type ) IP R-HSE-N (Type R,,,, X) IP R-HSE-N OSHA CFR Section mandates that disconnects be able to be locked out while in the OFF position during servicing. All Bulletin R handles comply with this important safety requirement. (Please see NFPA Article for disconnect requirements of motor applications) Operating Shafts Disconnect Switch Dim. Ref. A, A, B, B Operating Shaft Type Standard Length Extended Length Operating Shaft Length Approx. Dim. [mm (in.)] (.) (.) Disconnect Switch Dim. Ref. Enclosure Working Depth Minimum Approx. Dim. [mm (in.)] Maximum Approx. Dim. [mm (in.)] A, B (.) (.) A, B (.) (.) A, B (.) (.) A, B (.) (.) R-R R-R - Publication A-CAA-EN-P

459 Bulletin R IEC Fused and Non-Fused Disconnects, & A Product Selection Complete UL/CSA Disconnect Switch Kits Includes disconnect switch, operating handle with defeater mechanism and operating shaft, NFPA handle, auxiliary contacts, and padlock attachment. Product Selection Kits Catalog Number Explanation Switch body Operating handle NFPA Handle and shaft R J S TY N a b c d e f a Fuse Type Code Description UL Class CC, CSA Type HRCI-MISC C ( A) UL Class J, CSA Type HRCI-J ( A or J A) H CSA Type HRCII-C ( A or A) B BS ( A, A, or A) D DIN ( A or A) F NFC ( A, A, or A) N Non-fused ( A or A) No. of Poles Code Description -pole switch Fuse Indication Code Configuration Blank No fuse status indication S Fuse status indication Class C and J fuses only c d Code R R N N f Shaft & NFPA Handle Description -R shaft ( in.) -R shaft ( in.) -NHR NFPA handle with in. shaft and guard tube -NHR NFPA handle with in. shaft and guard tube b Load Size Code Description Dimensional Ref. A (BS) A A (NFC) A A (CC, J, HRCI-J) A A (Non-Fused) A A (HRCII-C) B A (BS, NFC) A A (DIN) B A (J, HRCI-J, HRCII-C) B A (Non-Fused) B A (BS, DIN, NFC) B See page - for dimensional reference data. Non-fused disconnect switches must use separately installed fuses for upstream shortcircuit protection Code PY PB TY TB LY LB e External Handle Description Std/pistol red/yellow handle, /X, IP ( R-HSE) Std/pistol black handle, /X, IP ( R-HS) Test mode red/yellow handle, /X, IP ( R-HSTE) Test mode black handle, /X, IP ( R-HST) Extended length red/yellow handle, /X, IP ( R-HSEL) Extended length black handle, /X, IP ( R-HSL) Publication A-CAA-EN-P -

460 Bulletin R IEC Fused and Non-Fused Disconnects, & A Catalog Number Explanation UL Enclosed Disconnect Switches (Fused and Non-Fused) Catalog Number Explanation R-KA Non-Metallic Enclosure UL Type //X, IP R-FA Painted Steel Enclosure UL Type //, IP R-CA Stainless Steel Enclosure UL Type /X, IP R C J S TB P a b c d e f g Enclosure Type Code Description K Thermoplastic, Type /X F Painted metal, Type // C Stainless steel, Type /X a b Fuse Type Code Description UL Class CC, CSA Type HRCI-MISC C ( A) UL Class J, CSA Type HRCI-J ( A or J A) H CSA Type HRCII-C ( A or A) B BS ( A, A, or A) D DIN ( A or A) F NFC ( A, A, or A) N Non-fused ( A or A) c Load Size Code Description Dimensional Ref. A (BS) A A (NFC) A A (CC, J, HRCI-J) A A (Non-Fused) A A (HRCII-C) B A (BS, NFC) A A (DIN) B A (J, HRCI-J, HRCII-C) B A (Non-Fused) B A (BS, DIN, NFC) B d No. of Poles Code Description -pole switch Fuse Indication Code Configuration Blank No fuse status indication S Fuse status indication Class C and J fuses only e Code PY PB TY TB LY LB Code Blank P f External Handle Description Std/pistol red/yellow handle, /X, IP ( R-HSE) Std/pistol black handle, /X, IP ( R-HS) Test mode red/yellow handle, /X, IP ( R-HSTE) Test mode black handle, /X, IP ( R-HST) Extended length red/yellow handle, /X, IP ( R-HSEL) Extended length black handle, /X, IP ( R-HSL) g Other Accessories Configuration No accessory Padlock attachment See page - for dimensional reference data. Non-fused disconnect switches must use separately installed fuses for upstream shortcircuit protection - Publication A-CAA-EN-P

461 Bulletin R IEC Fused and Non-Fused Disconnects, & A Accessories NFPA Operating Shaft/Handle Kits An internal handle that permits operation of the disconnect switch when the panel door is open, in compliance with NFPA. Other Accessories Description NFPA Handle Kit Includes NFPA handle, operating shaft, and R-PLA padlocking attachment Shaft Length [mm (in.)] Disconnect Switch Dim Ref. Pkg. Qty. () A, A, B, B R-NHR () A, A, B, B R-NHR Description Operating Shaft Guide Allows easier coupling of shaft to operating handle if misalignment occurs between switch and enclosure after assembly installation Shaft Guard Provides extra protection against contact with shaft Operating Shaft Coupler Used with Cat. Nos. R-R and R-R shafts to extend shaft length an additional. in. Operating Handle Instruction Label Describes the function of the operating handle for opening the enclosure door with the disconnect switch in the ON and OFF position Disconnect Switch Dim Ref. Pkg. Qty. A, A, B, B R-HSG A, A, B, B R-RG A, A, B, B R-SC ALL R-L Replacement Mounting Hardware Pkg. Qty. Description For Use With () M x. set screw, () shaft clip and () M x. mounting screws () M x. set screw, () shaft clip and () M x. mounting screws A, A R--HDWR B, B R--HDWR Replacement Fuse Hardware Terminal Shields Description For Use With Pkg. Qty. M x. Fuse screws R BS Fuse Types R-BS-M M x. Fuse screws R BS Fuse Types R-BS-M Description Disconnect Switch Dim Ref. Quantity Required Per Disconnect Switch Pkg. Qty. A Terminal Shield (three terminals) A, A R--C A Terminal Shield (three terminal) B, B R--C A Terminal Shield (one terminal) A, A R--C A Terminal Shield (one terminal) B, B R--C For use on either line or load side of disconnect switch. Publication A-CAA-EN-P -

462 Bulletin R IEC Fused and Non-Fused Disconnects, & A Accessories Disconnect Switch Padlock Accessory For padlock with ø mm Replacement Fuse Carriers Disconnect Switch Dim Ref. Pkg. Qty. A, A, B, B R-PLA Description Pkg. Quantity A CC Fuse Carrier R-C-FC A J Fuse Carrier R-J-FC A J Fuse Carrier R-J-FC A BS Fuse Carrier R-B-FC A BS Fuse Carrier R-B-FC A BS Fuse Carrier R-B-FC A CSA HRCII-C Fuse Carrier R-H-FC R-J-FC A CSA HRCII-C Fuse Carrier R-H-FC A DIN Fuse Carrier R-D-FC A DIN Fuse Carrier R-D-FC A NFC Fuse Carrier R-F-FC A NFC Fuse Carrier R-F-FC A NFC Fuse Carrier R-F-FC A Non-Fuse Carrier R-N-FC R-J-FCS A Non-Fuse Carrier R-N-FC For fuse status indication add S to catalog number, example: R-J-FC becomes R-J-FCS. Auxiliary Contact Blocks Description Contact Material Pkg. Quantity N.O. F-X N.C. F-X Contact Block N.O.E.M. F-XE Note: Sold only in multiples of. N.C.L.B. F-XL Order (quantity of) to receive one package of pieces. Latch N.O. with stab terminals F-XT not included. N.C. with stab terminals F-XT N.O. spring-clamp F-Q F-X N.C. spring-clamp F-Q Also used for test mode function. Multi-tap Lugs Description Wire Size Dimension Reference Pkg. Quantity Multi-Tap Terminal Lugs Load side only () AWG (). mm () AWG (). mm A (R-J), A (R-N) B (R-JG), B (R-NG) R--MTL R--MTL - Publication A-CAA-EN-P

463 Bulletin R IEC Fused and Non-Fused Disconnects, & A Specifications Fused Disconnect Switches For UL Class Fuses and CSA HRCI-J Electrical Ratings R-C- R-J- R-J- CSA Fuse Type/UL Fuse Type Class CC/HRCI-MISC Class J/HRCI-J Class J/HRCI-J Maximum Fuse Cartridge Size [A] Maximum Voltage AC DC [V] [V] Ampere Rating [A] Maximum Short Circuit Prospective Fault Current [ka] Fuse Operating Characteristics Maximum Hp, -Phase AC V, Hz V, Hz V, Hz V, Hz Maximum Hp, -Phase AC V, Hz V, Hz Maximum Hp, DC V DC V DC [Hp] [Hp] [Hp] [Hp] [Hp] [Hp] [Hp] [Hp] Time Delay. Non-Time Delay... Time Delay.. Non-Time Delay... Time Delay Mechanical Data R-C-, R-J- R-J- Degree of Protection (per IEC -) IP IP Switch Only IP IP Switch with Terminal Shield & Fuse Carriers Mechanical Endurance Operations Operating Torque (Maximum) Terminal Capacity Power Terminals Auxiliary Contact Terminals N m lb in mm AWG mm AWG.. # #. # # Maximum Number of Auxiliary Circuits Approximate Weight Minimum Enclosure Size Approximate dimensions in millimeters (inches) Switch Dimension Reference (See dimension drawings.) kg lbs Height Width Depth.. (-/) (-/) (-/) CSA HRCI-MISC fuses must also be UL Listed as Class CC fuses. Based on Rockwell Automation tests in accordance with the requirements as defined in CSA C. No., IEC - and UL. A.. # #. # #.. (-/) (-/) (-/) B Non-Time Delay... Publication A-CAA-EN-P -

464 Bulletin R IEC Fused and Non-Fused Disconnects, & A Specifications Non-Fused Disconnect Switches For CSA and UL Class Applications Electrical Ratings R-N- R-N- Maximum Fuse Cartridge Size Maximum Voltage AC DC [V] [V] Ampere Rating [A] Maximum Short Circuit Prospective Fault Current [ka] Fuse Operating Characteristics Time Delay Non-Time Delay Time Delay Non-Time Delay Maximum Hp, -Phase AC Maximum Hp, -Phase AC Maximum Hp, DC V, Hz V, Hz V, Hz V, Hz V, Hz V, Hz V DC V DC [Hp] [Hp] [Hp] [Hp] [Hp] [Hp] [Hp] [Hp].. Power Lost [W] Non-fused disconnect switches must be used with separately installed fuses. When using CSA HRCI-J, HRCI-MISC (also UL Listed as Class CC) or HRCI-T fuses, and UL Class J, CC or T fuses. Based on Rockwell Automation tests in accordance with the requirements as defined in CSA C. No., IEC -, UL and UL. Degree of Protection (per IEC -) Switch Only Switch with Terminal Shield & Fuse Carriers Mechanical Data R-N- R-N- Mechanical Endurance Operations Operating Torque (Maximum) Terminal Capacity Power Terminals Auxiliary Contact Terminals N m lb in mm AWG mm AWG IP IP.. # #. # # Maximum Number of Auxiliary Circuits Approximate Weight Minimum Enclosure Size Approximate dimensions in millimeters (inches) Switch Dimension Reference (See dimension drawings) kg lbs Height Width Depth Non-fused disconnect switches must be used with separately installed fuses. All Bulletin R Disconnect Switch Cat. Nos., A Range.. (-/) (-/) (-/) Environmental Data Ambient Temperature Open... C ( F) - + (- +) Enclosed... C ( F) - + (- +) Storage... C ( F) - + (- +) Altitude (per IEC -), + C (+ F) Relative Humidity (per IEC -) + C (+ F) A... IP IP.. # #. # #.. (-/) (-/) (-/) B... - Publication A-CAA-EN-P

465 Bulletin R IEC Fused and Non-Fused Disconnects, & A Specifications Fused Disconnect Switches For CSA HRCII-C Fuses Electrical Ratings R-H- R-H- CSA Fuse Type HRCII-C HRCII-C Maximum Fuse Cartridge Size [A] Maximum Voltage AC [V] Ampere Rating [A] Maximum Short Circuit Prospective Fault Current Maximum Hp, -Phase AC V, Hz V, Hz V, Hz V, Hz Maximum Hp, -Phase AC V, Hz V, Hz Degree of Protection (per IEC -) Switch Only Switch with Terminal Shield & Fuse Carriers [ka] [Hp] [Hp] [Hp] [Hp] [Hp] [Hp].. Mechanical Data R-H- R-H- Mechanical Endurance Operations Operating Torque (Maximum) Terminal Capacity Power Terminals Auxiliary Contact Terminals N m lb in mm AWG mm AWG IP IP.. # #. # # Maximum Number of Auxiliary Circuits Approximate Weight Minimum Enclosure Size Approximate dimensions in millimeters (inches) Switch Dimension Reference (See dimension drawings.) kg lbs Height Width Depth.. (-/) (-/) (-/) Based on Rockwell Automation tests in accordance with the requirements as defined in CSA C. No. and IEC -. B IP IP.. # #. # #.. (-/) (-/) (-/) B Publication A-CAA-EN-P -

466 Bulletin R IEC Fused and Non-Fused Disconnects, & A Specifications Fused Disconnect Switches For BS Fuses Note: Table continued on pages - -. Electrical Ratings R-B- R-B- R-B- Fuse Type BS Dimension A A A, A Rated Insulation Voltage (U i ) [V] Rated Conditional Short-Circuit Current [ka] (r.m.s.) at V Rated Operational Current AC-A (I e ) Fuse Links Shorting Links Fuse Links Fuse Links Shorting Links /V Hz //V Hz V Hz /V Hz Rated Operational Current AC-A (I e ) /V Hz //V Hz V Hz /V Hz [A] [A] [A] [A] [A] [A] [A] [A] Rated Thermal Current (l the ) [A] Maximum kw, AC-A -Phase /V Hz //V Hz V Hz /V Hz [kw] [kw] [kw] [kw]. Maximum Fuse Rating [A] Maximum Motor Circuit Fuse Link M M M Maximum Fuse Cut-off Current [ka]... Rated Short Time Current, Second [ka] Degree of Protection (per IEC -) Switch Only Switch with Terminal Shield & Fuse Carriers.. Mechanical Data R-B- R-B- R-B- IP IP Mechanical Endurance Operations Operating Torque (Maximum) Terminal Capacity Power Terminals Auxiliary Contact Terminals N m lb in mm mm AWG.. # #. # #.... IP IP.. # #. # # Maximum Number of Auxiliary Circuits Approximate Weight Minimum Enclosure Size Approximate dimensions in millimeters (inches) Switch Dimension Reference (See dimension drawings.) kg lbs Height Width Depth.. (-/) (-/) (-/).. (-/) (-/) (-/).. IP IP.. # #. # #... (-/) (-/) (-/) A A B Fuses must be selected with regard to the maximum prospective fault current of the system and the maximum cut-off current of the fuse when subjected to that maximum fault current. The maximum fuse cut-off current as specified for each disconnect switch must not be exceeded. Based on Rockwell Automation tests in accordance with the requirements as defined in IEC -. - Publication A-CAA-EN-P

467 Bulletin R IEC Fused and Non-Fused Disconnects, & A Specifications Fused Disconnect Switches For DIN Fuses Electrical Ratings Cat No. R-D- R-D- Fuse Type DIN Dimension, Rated Insulation Voltage (U i ) [V] Rated Conditional Short-Circuit Current (r.m.s.) at V [ka] Rated Operational Current AC-A (I e ) Fuse Links Fuse Links /V Hz //V Hz V Hz /V Hz Rated Operational Current AC-A (I e ) /V Hz //V Hz V Hz /V Hz [A] [A] [A] [A] [A] [A] [A] [A] Rated Thermal Current (l the ) [A] Maximum kw, AC-A -Phase /V Hz //V Hz V Hz /V Hz [kw] [kw] [kw] [kw] Maximum Fuse Rating [A] Maximum Motor Circuit Fuse Link Maximum Fuse Cut-off Current [ka] Rated Short Time Current, Second [ka].... Mechanical Data R-D- R-D- Degree of Protection (per IEC -) Switch Only Switch with Terminal Shield & Fuse Carriers Mechanical Endurance Operations Operating Torque (Maximum) Terminal Capacity Power Terminals Auxiliary Contact Terminals N m lb in mm AWG mm AWG IP IP.. # #. # # Maximum Number of Auxiliary Circuits Approximate Weight Minimum Enclosure Size Approximate dimensions in millimeters (inches) Switch Dimension Reference (See dimension drawings.) kg lbs Height Width Depth.. (-/) (-/) (-/).. IP IP.. # #. # #.. (-/) (-/) (-/) Fuses must be selected with regard to the maximum prospective fault current of the system and the maximum cut-off current of the fuse when subjected to that maximum fault current. The maximum fuse cut-off current as specified for each disconnect switch must not be exceeded. Based on Rockwell Automation tests in accordance with the requirements as defined in IEC -. B B Publication A-CAA-EN-P -

468 Bulletin R IEC Fused and Non-Fused Disconnects, & A Specifications Wiring Schematic UL LISTED, CSA CERTIFIED DIMENSION REFERENCE CIRCUIT R-C- R-J- R-J- R-H- R-H- A A B B B R-N- R-N- A B IEC SWITCHES DIMENSION REFERENCE CIRCUIT R-B- R-B- R-B- R-D- R-D- R-F- R-F- R-F- A A B B B A A B R- * - (See -pole Dimension Reference) for Fused Switches - Publication A-CAA-EN-P

469 Bulletin R IEC Fused and Non-Fused Disconnects, & A Approximate Dimensions Dimensions in millimeters (inches). Dimensions are not intended to be used for manufacturing purposes. Disconnect Switch Dimension References A, A, B, and B ( A and A) D W FD A E H Disconnect Switch Dimension Reference Approximate Dimensions mm (in) H W D A B C E FD A (-/) (-/) () (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) -M, -# A (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) -M, -# B (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) N/A N/A -M, -# B (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) N/A N/A -M,-# C B Mounting holes for backward compatibility with Bulletin R legacy switches. Operating Handles R-HS /HST dia. dia. Publication A-CAA-EN-P -

470 Bulletin R IEC Fused and Non-Fused Disconnects, & A Approximate Dimensions Dimensions in millimeters (inches). Dimensions are not intended to be used for manufacturing purposes. Disconnect Switch Dim. Ref.: A, A, B, B ( A and A) Enclosure and Operating Handle Enclosure Installation Dimensions R-B- R-B- R-C- R-F- R-J- Dimension Reference A B C D E F Maximum Minimum Minimum Maximum Minimum Minimum Minimum Maximum A (-/) (-/). (- /) (-/) (-/) (-/). (/) / (/) R-N- A (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/). (/) / (/) R-B- R-D- R-D- R-F- R-H- R-H- R-J- B (-/) (-/). (- /) (-/) (-/) (-/). (/) / (/) R-N- B (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/). (/) / (/) - Publication A-CAA-EN-P

471 Bulletin R IEC Fused and Non-Fused Disconnects, & A Approximate Dimensions Dimensions in millimeters (inches). Dimensions are not intended to be used for manufacturing purposes. Universal Internal Handle Dimensions L X Y Z Catalog No. R -NHR R -NHR mm (in.) mm (in.) L X Y Z (max) () () (-/) (-/) () () (-/) (-/) Y D W W X Y H R-B-* R-B-* R-C-* Catalog No. R-F-* R-F-* R-J-* Dim. Ref. A mm (in.) H (-/) W (-/) W (/) D (min) (-/) X (-/) Y () R-B-* R-D-* R-D-* R-F-* R-N-* R-N-* R-H-* R-H-* R-J-* A B B mm (in.) mm (in.) mm (in.) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (/) (/) (/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) () () () Publication A-CAA-EN-P -

472 Bulletin R IEC Fused and Non-Fused Disconnects, & A Approximate Dimensions Dimensions in millimeters (inches). Dimensions are not intended to be used for manufacturing purposes. Enclosure Installation Dimensions A B A B. -/ F C E D ENCLOSURE INSTALLATION DIMENSIONS CAT. DIM. REF. A MINIMUM A MINIMUM B MINIMUM B MINIMUM MINIMUM C MAXIMUM D MINIMUM E MINIMUM MINIMUM F MAXIMUM R-B-* R-C-* R-J-* R-D-* R-H-* R-H-* R-J-* R-N-* R-F-* R-B-* R-F-* R-B-* R-D-* R-F-* R-N-* A A B B mm in. mm in. mm in. mm in. -/ -/ -/ -/ -/ -/ -/ -/ -/ -/ -/ -/ -/ -/ -/ -/ -/ -/ -/ -/ -/ -/ -/ -/. /. /. /. /. /. /. /. / *Dimensions common for R or R shaft lengths - Publication A-CAA-EN-P

473 Bulletin R IEC Fused and Non-Fused Disconnects, & A Applications Proper Selection of Disconnect Switches Applications Within Canada and the United States General The requirements for disconnect switches used in motor branch circuits rated V and less are defined in Article, Part J of the U.S. National Electrical Code (NEC), NFPA. Canadian Electrical Code (CEC) requirements are very similar in the area of motor branch circuit disconnect requirements. For simplicity, we will treat the NEC and CEC requirements as being the same and reference specific sections of the U.S. National Electrical Code. The requirements for properly sizing a disconnect switch are dependent on the type of application. The NEC refers to two types of applications: single motor and combination loads. A combination load consists of an application where two or more motors are used together or where one or more motors are used in combination with other loads, such as resistance heaters. Single Motor Applications Section - Paragraph (a) states that the disconnect switch must have an ampere rating of at least % of the full-load current rating of the motor. Example : For a motor with a full-load current of A, the disconnect switch must be rated at least. A ( x.). If the disconnecting means under evaluation is rated in horsepower, the selection of the disconnect switch is even more straightforward; a disconnect switch must have a horsepower rating equal to, or greater than the horsepower rating of the motor at the applicable voltage. Example : For a motor with a Hp rating at V AC, the disconnect switch must be rated at least Hp at V AC. If the disconnect switch is rated in horsepower, and UL Listed, UL Component Recognized, or CSA Certified, it will meet the requirements for the % full load current rating stipulated by the NEC. Combination Load Applications Section - Paragraph (c) addresses the rating of the disconnecting means for combination loads. This paragraph essentially requires that the loads that may be simultaneous on a single disconnecting means be combined to provide equivalent fullload and locked-rotor currents for what is then to be considered as a single motor for the purpose of selecting the appropriate disconnecting means. This means that it is necessary to identify the particular combination of connected loads which can be operating simultaneously and will result in the maximum full-load and lockedrotor current sums. The individual full-load current values are to be selected from Tables -, -, or - and the locked-rotor values are to be from Table -. The equivalent single motor full-load current is the sum of the simultaneously operating motor full-load currents and the rating in amperes of other loads operating at the same time. The equivalent locked-rotor current is the sum of the simultaneously started motors locked-rotor currents and the full-load currents of the remaining operating motor and non-motor loads. The disconnecting means shall have a current rating equal to or greater than % of the equivalent single motor full-load current and have a horsepower rating equal to or greater than the horsepower rating determined from the equivalent locked-rotor summation. Consider the following V application: Load Hp Full-Load Current [A] Motor. (simultaneous) Motor. (not included) Motor. (simultaneous) Motor. (simultaneous) Other. (simultaneous) Total Equivalent. (simultaneous) Motor is not included in the total since it cannot operate simultaneously with the other motors, therefore, the disconnect switch must be rated at least A (. x.). Consider now the locked-rotor current analysis for the same application: Load Hp Full-Load Current [A] Motor (.FLA). (simultaneous) Motor. (not included) Motor. (simultaneous) Motor. (simultaneous) Other. (simultaneous) Total Equivalent. (simultaneous) Note again that Motor cannot operate simultaneously with the other loads. The largest equivalent locked-rotor current occurs when motors and start together while the other loads marked simultaneous are already operating. Since Motor is not starting with Motors and, its full-load current will be added to the total instead of its locked-rotor current. Table -, which provides the correlation between locked-rotor currents and Hp ratings, shows that a Hp rating is the equivalent for. locked-rotor amperes. Therefore, the disconnect selected for this application must have a current rating of at least A and a Hp rating of at least Hp. In this case a Bulletin R rated for A and Hp at V would be an appropriate choice. What can be seen from this analysis is that, depending upon the number of motors that can start simultaneously, the actual size of the required disconnect is sometimes determined by the equivalent full load current ( A) and other times by the equivalent horsepower determined from the locked rotor analysis ( Hp). Applications Outside the United States and Canada General Disconnect switches designed to IEC Standards and used in applications outside of North America are selected based on the ampere, horsepower, or kilowatt rating of the disconnect switch, under various utilization categories. Utilization categories for disconnect switches are as follows: Nature of Current AC Utilization Category Frequent Operation Infrequent Operation AC-A AC-B AC-A AC-A AC-B AC-B AC-A AC-B Typical Applications Connecting and disconnecting under no load conditions Switching of resistive loads including moderate overloads Switching of mixed resistive and inductive loads, including moderate overloads Switching of motor loads or other highly inductive loads The use of these utilization categories is not permitted in the U.S. For any application, the disconnect switch rating (A. Hp, or kw) must be greater than or equal to the application full-load current or power (Hp or kw), in the appropriate utilization category. Example : For a V Hz distribution application (AC-A), with a A full load current, the disconnect switch must be rated at least A at V Hz for use in AC-A applications. Example : For a V Hz motor application (AC-A), with a kw rating, the disconnect switch must be rated at least kw at V Hz for use in AC-A applications. Publication A-CAA-EN-P -

474 Bulletin R IEC Fused and Non-Fused Disconnects, & A Fuse Description Fuse Description With Bulletin R Fused Disconnect Switches Bulletin R Fused Disconnect Switches have been designed to accept a variety of fuses for worldwide application flexibility. Following is a brief summary of typical fuse specifications, where the fuses are typically used, and which Bulletin R disconnect switches will accommodate each fuse type. Fuse manufacturers should be contacted for more specific information about each fuse type. Fuses are not available from Rockwell Automation. BS Fuses ( A shown) Dimensions in millimeters (inches). Dimensions are not intended to be used for manufacturing purposes. IEC fuse type: Fuse-link for bolted connection Voltage rating: /V AC Interrupting rating: ka Standard cartridge sizes: A, A, A, A, B, B, B, B Typical ampere ratings: A Construction: Blade type for bolted connection Can be installed on Bulletin R disconnect switch Cat. Nos: RNAP, NAP, NAP, NAP, NAP, NBP, NBP Where used: United Kingdom, Australia, New Zealand, Asia Standard cartridge size A Standard cartridge sizes A, A, A Standard cartridge sizes B, B, B, B Ampere Dim. Ref. Range [A] A B D E F G H K A. (-/). (/). (-/). (/). (/). (-/). (/). (/) Dim. Ref. Ampere Range [A] A B D E F G H J K A. (-/). (/). (-/). (/). (/). (-/). (/). (/). (/) A. (-/). (/). (-/). (/). (/). (-/). (/). (/). (/) A. (-/). (-/). (-/). (/). (/). (-/. (/). (/). (-/) Dim. Ref. Ampere Range [A] A B D E F G H J M B. (-/). (-/). (-/). (/). (/). (-/). (/). (/). (-/) B. (-/). (-/). (-/). (/). (/). (-/). (/). (/). (-/) B. (-/). (-/). (-/). (). (/). (-/). (/). (/). (-/) B. (-/). (-/). (-/). (). (/). (-/). (/). (/). (-/) - Publication A-CAA-EN-P

475 Bulletin R IEC Fused and Non-Fused Disconnects, & A Fuse Description DIN Fuses ( A shown) Dimensions in millimeters only. Dimensions are not intended to be used for manufacturing purposes. IEC fuse type: Fuse-link with blade contacts Voltage rating: /V AC Interrupting rating:, A Standard cartridge sizes:,, and Typical ampere ratings: A Construction: Blade type Can be installed on Bulletin R disconnect switch Cat. Nos: RNDP, NDP, NDP, NDP Where used: Europe, South America, Middle East and India Size Max. Rated Current [A] a a a a b (min.) d e (max.) e (max.) e e ±. f. ±. ±. ±. ±. ±. ± ±. ±. ±. ± ±. ±. ± With Bulletin R Fused Disconnect Switches, Continued CSA HRCI and UL Class Fuses ( A shown) Dimensions in millimeters (inches). Dimensions are not intended to be used for manufacturing purposes. UL fuse type: Class CC CSA fuse type: HRCI-MISC Voltage rating: V AC Interrupting rating: A Standard cartridge sizes: A Typical ampere ratings: A Construction: Ferrule type Can be installed on Bulletin R disconnect switch Cat. No: R-NCP Where used: North America CSA HRCI and UL Class Fuses ( A shown) Dimensions in millimeters (inches). Dimensions are not intended to be used for manufacturing purposes. CSA fuse type: HRCI-J UL fuse type: Class J Voltage rating: V AC Interrupting rating: A Standard cartridge sizes:,,,, and A Typical ampere ratings: A; Blade type for bolted connection Can be installed on Bulletin R disconnect switch Cat. Nos: R-NJP, NJP, NJP, NJP, NJP Where used: North America Publication A-CAA-EN-P -

476 Bulletin R IEC Fused and Non-Fused Disconnects, & A Fuse Description CSA HRCII Fuses ( A shown) Dimensions in millimeters (inches). Dimensions are not intended to be used for manufacturing purposes. CSA fuse type: HRCII-C Voltage rating: V AC Interrupting rating: A Standard cartridge sizes:,,,, and A Typical ampere ratings: A Construction: Blade type for bolted connection Can be installed on Bulletin R disconnect switch Cat. Nos: R-NAP, NAP, NHP, NHP, NHP Where used: Canada Standard Cartridge Sizes,, and A Standard Cartridge Size A Standard Cartridge Size A Current Range [A] A B C D E F G H J. (-/). (-/). (). (/). (/). (/). (/). (/). (/). (-/). (-/). (). (/). (/). (/). (/). (-/). (/). (-/). (-/). (-/). (-/). (/). (/). (/). (-/). (/). (-/). (-/). (). (-/). (/). (/). (/). (/). (-/). (-/). (). (-/). (). (/). (/). (). (/). (-/). (-/). (). (). (). (/). (/). (). (/) - Publication A-CAA-EN-P

477 Bulletin R IEC Fused and Non-Fused Disconnects, A Overview/Product Selection Standards Compliance IEC --/EN- BS EN- VDE CSA. No. NEMA KS- UL Bulletin R Global Fused and Non-Fused Disconnects A A sizes Open or enclosed switches Fused switch versions: - BS - DIN - CSA HRCII-C - CSA HRCI-J - UL Class J - UL Class CC Non-fused switches Operating handle ingress ratings: - IP (Type ) - IP (Type R,,,, X) Handle with or without defeater mechanism Padlockable handle with up to three padlocks Up to auxiliary contacts can be added per switch Suitable as service entrance disconnecting means (UL ) Certifications UL Listed (File No. E, Guide WHTY) CSA Certified (File No. LR) CE ASTA Certified LOVAG Certified Table of Contents Product Selection... this page Accessories... - Specifications... - Renewal Parts... - Approximate Dimensions... - Proper Selection of Disconnect Switches - Fuse Description... - The Bulletin R line of fused and non-fused global disconnect switches provides the flexibility to meet worldwide applications. These rodoperated disconnect switches incorporate onboard fuse carriers thus reducing panel space requirements and have high short circuit protection ratings. The disconnect switches are UL Listed, CSA, ASTA and LOVAG Certified and are designed to meet IEC -, VDE, DIN, BS and applicable NEMA requirements. Your order must include: ) the desired disconnect switch Note the disconnect switch dimension reference, ) the appropriate operating handle and operating shaft corresponding to the dimension reference of the disconnect switch, ) if required, of any accessories. Product Selection UL/CSA Fused Disconnect Switches R-NJP Maximum Hp Ratings Rated -Phase ( Hz) -Phase ( Hz) DC Current Dim. [A] V V V V V V V V Fuse Ref. CSA HRCII-C FUSES A HRCII-C D R-NHP A HRCII-C E R-NHP A HRCII-C F R-NHP UL CLASS J AND CSA HRCI-J FUSES. A CLASS J C R-NJP A CLASS J D R-NJP A CLASS J F R-NJP Time delay fuses may be required to utilize the disconnect switch at its maximum horsepower rating. Only CSA Certified HRCI-J and UL Listed Class J fuses are suitable for use with these disconnect switches. Line and load terminals use mm Allen-type wrench; will not accept terminal lugs. Publication A-CAA-EN-P -

478 Bulletin R IEC Fused and Non-Fused Disconnects, A Product Selection UL/CSA Non-Fused Disconnect Switches Fuse Description Non-fused disconnect switches must use separately installed fuses for upstream short circuit protection. Rated Current [A] Non-Fused Maximum Hp Ratings -Phase ( Hz) -Phase ( Hz) DC V V V V V V V V Dim. Ref. -/ C R-NNP D R-NNP F R-NNP Line and Load Terminals use mm Allen-type wrench; will not accept terminal lugs. BS Fused Disconnect Switches Load Rating I e [A] With Fuse Links -Phase Maximum kw ( Hz) / / V Load Rating I e [A] Ratings (AC) With Shorting Links -Phase Maximum kw ( Hz) / / V / V V / V / V V / V Fuse Dim. Ref. BS A C R-NAP BS A D R-NAP BS B, B E R-NBP BS B, B B, B F R-NBP - Publication A-CAA-EN-P

479 Bulletin R IEC Fused and Non-Fused Disconnects, A Product Selection DIN Fused Disconnect Switches Load Rating I e [A] With Fuse Links -Phase Maximum kw ( Hz) Ratings (AC) /V //V V /V Fuse Dim. Ref. DIN C R-NDP DIN, D R-NDP DIN E R-NDP DIN, F R-NDP Series C only. Operating Handles (Accepts Padlocks) For Use With Description Color Degree of Protection Standard orientation with defeater Black/Grey Red/Yellow IP (Type ) IP (Type R,,,, X) IP (Type ) IP (Type R,,,, X) R-HM R-HM R-HME R-HME C, C, D, D, E, E, F Standard orientation without defeater rotated orientation with defeater Black/Grey Red/Yellow Black/Grey Red/Yellow IP (Type ) R-HM-N IP (Type R,,,, X) R-HM-N IP (Type ) R-HME-N IP (Type R,,,, X) R-HME-N IP (Type ) R-HM-N IP (Type R,,,, X) R-HM-N IP (Type ) R-HME-N IP (Type R,,,, X) R-HME-N rotated orientation without defeater Black/Grey Red/Yellow IP (Type ) R-HM-N IP (Type R,,,, X) R-HM-N IP (Type ) R-HME-N IP (Type R,,,, X) R-HME-N Publication A-CAA-EN-P -

480 Bulletin R IEC Fused and Non-Fused Disconnects, A Product Selection NFPA Operating Shaft/Handle Kits An internal handle that permits operation of the disconnect switch when the panel door is open, in compliance with NFPA. Operating Shafts Description NFPA Handle Kit Includes NFPA handle and operating shaft Disconnect Switch Dim. Ref. Operating Shaft Type C, C, D, D mm square size E, E, F. mm square size Operating Shaft Length [mm (in.)] () R-NHR () R-NHR () R-NHR () R-NHR Disconnect Switch Dim. Ref. C, C, D, D E, E, F Complete UL/CSA Disconnect Switch Kits Operating Shaft Type Standard Length Extended Length Standard Length Extended Length Operating Shaft Length Approx. Dim. [mm (in.)] Disconnect Switch Dim. Ref. Includes Disconnect Switch, Operating Handle with Defeater Mechanism and Operating Shaft Enclosure Working Depth Minimum Approx. Dim. [mm (in.)] Maximum Approx. Dim. [mm (in.)] (.) C, C (.) (.) R-R (.) D, D (.) (.) R-R (.) (.) (.) R-R E, E, F (.) (.) (.) R-R Rated Current [A] Maximum Horsepower Ratings -Phase ( Hz) V V V V Disconnect Switch Fuse Dim. Ref. None C A Class J C None D A Class J D None F A Class J F Operating Shaft Type Standard Length Time delay fuses may be required to utilize the disconnect switch at its maximum horsepower ratings. Only UL Listed Class J and CSA Certified HRCI-J fuses are suitable for use with these disconnect switches. Operating Handle Degree of Protection!P (Type, R,, X, ) Handle Color Black/Grey Red/Yellow Black/Grey Red/Yellow Black/Grey Red/Yellow Black/Grey Red/Yellow Black/Grey Red/Yellow Black/Grey Red/Yellow R-NNPR R-NNPER R-NJPR R-NJPER R-NNPR R-NNPER R-NJPR R-NJPER R-NNPR R-NNPER R-NJPR R-NJPER - Publication A-CAA-EN-P

481 Bulletin R IEC Fused and Non-Fused Disconnects, A Product Selection/Accessories UL Enclosed Disconnect Switches (Fused and Non-Fused) Rated Current [A] -Phase (Hz) Maximum Horsepower Ratings -Phase (Hz) Stainless Steel Enclosure V V V V V V Fuse Type Dim. Ref. -/ IP (Type //) Watertight Dusttight Sheet Metal Enclosure IP (Type /X) Watertight, Corrosion- Resistant Stainless Steel Enclosure IP (Type /X) Watertight, Corrosion- Resistant Non-Metallic Enclosure Class J Fused C R-FJP R-CJP R-KJP None C R-FNP R-CNP R-KNP Class J Fused D R-FJP R-CJP R-KJP None D R-FNP R-CNP R-KNP Class J Fused F R-FJP R-CJP R-KJP None F R-FNP R-CNP R-KNP Black operating handles supplied as standard. To order Red/Yellow Handles, add string suffix E to the Example: R-FJPE. Accessories Modifications for Enclosed Bulletin R Switches (max. contact blocks/ auxiliary contacts per switch) Description Uses Suffix Code Auxiliary Contact ( N.O. + N.C.) -GA - Auxiliary Contact ( N.O.) -GA - Auxiliary Contact ( N.C.) -GA - Publication A-CAA-EN-P -

482 Bulletin R IEC Fused and Non-Fused Disconnects, A Accessories Accessories Description Disconnect Switch Dim Ref. Pkg. Qty. Shaft Guard Provides extra protection against contact with shaft C, C, D, D, E, E, F R-RG Fuse Covers Disconnect Switch Dim Ref. C C Quantity Required Per Disconnect Switch R-FCC R-FCC D, D R-FCD E, E R-FCE Terminal Shields R-FCD F R-FCF When using the R-FCF on a R-NJP or R-NHP, the switch shall be de-rated to A. Disconnect Switch Dim Ref. Quantity Required Per Disconnect Switch C, C R-LNC D, D R-LNC E, E R-LNC F R-LNC For use on either Line or Load Side of Disconnect Switch. Disconnect switch Cat. Nos: R-NN**P and R-NJ**P are provided as standard with a line side terminal shield. Terminal Lugs Disconnect Switch Dim Ref. Conductor Range Pkg. Qty. D (R-NHP) D (R-NJP, -NNP, - NAP) D E, E, F # / AWG mm mm # MCM AWG mm mm # MCM AWG mm mm -LE -LF -LG F Two / MCM AWG Two mm mm -LH Multi-tap Lugs Description Rated Current Wire Size Dimension Reference Pkg. Quantity Multi-Tap Terminal Lugs Load side only () AWG (). mm C (R-MN, - NJ, -NA, - ND) R--MTL () AWG (). mm D (R-NJ, - NN, -NA) R--MTL Multi-Tap Terminal Lugs Load side only () AWG (). mm F (R-NH, - NJ, -NN, - NB, -ND) R--MTL - Publication A-CAA-EN-P

483 Bulletin R IEC Fused and Non-Fused Disconnects, A Accessories Auxiliary Contacts Disconnect Switch Dim Ref. Description C, C, D, D, E, E, F, F Auxiliary contact (side-mounted) No. of Auxiliary Contacts N.O. -GA N.C. -GA C, C, D, D, E, E, F, F Two-pole auxiliary contact for disconnect switch N.O./ N.C. -GA -GA C, C, D, D, E, E, F, F N.O. N.O. -GA C, C, D, D, E, E, F, F Two-pole N.C. auxiliary contact for disconnect switch N.C. -GA C, C, D, D, E, E, F, F Auxiliary support for circuits per switch R-A See page - for contact ratings. A maximum of four () contact blocks ( auxiliary contacts) can be installed on each disconnect switch. When more than two () contact blocks are used, a support kit R-A must be used. Shorting Links For BS Switches Only Disconnect Switch Dim Ref. Description For Use with D BS Size A R-NAP R-SLA E BS Size B, B R-NBP F BS Size B, B R-NBP R-SLB Publication A-CAA-EN-P -

484 Bulletin R IEC Fused and Non-Fused Disconnects, A Specifications Fused Disconnect Switches For BS Fuses Electrical Ratings R-NAP R-NAP R-NBP R-NBP Fuse Type BS Dimension A A B, B B, B, B, B Rated Insulation Voltage (U i ) [V] Maximum Short Circuit Prospective Fault Current Rated Operational Current AC-A (I e ) /V Hz //V Hz V Hz /V Hz Rated Operational Current AC-A (I e ) /V Hz //V Hz V Hz /V Hz [ka] [A] [A] [A] [A] [A] [A] [A] [A] Fuse Links Shorting Links Fuse Links Shorting Links Fuse Links Shorting Links Fuse Links Rated Thermal Current (l the ) [A] Maximum kw, AC-A -Phase /V Hz //V Hz V Hz /V Hz [kw] [kw] [kw] [kw] Maximum Fuse Rating [A] Maximum Motor Circuit Fuse Link M M ED M Maximum Fuse Cut-off Current [ka] Rated Short Time Current, Second [ka]. Degree of Protection (per IEC ) Switch Only Switch with Terminal Shield & Fuse Cover(s) Mechanical Data R-NAP R-NAP R-NBP R-NBP IP IP Mechanical Endurance Operations Operating Torque (Maximum) Terminal Capacity Power Terminals Auxiliary Contact Terminals N m lb in mm AWG mm AWG.. # #. # # IP IP. #-MCM. # # IP IP. #-MCM. # # IP IP. Shorting Links Two Two / MCM. # # Maximum Number of Auxiliary Circuits Approximate Weight Minimum Enclosure Size Approximate dimensions in millimeters (inches) Switch Dimension Reference (See dimension drawings on pages - and - -.) kg lbs Height Width Depth.. () (-/) (-/).. () (-/) ().. () (-/) (-/).. () (-/) (-/) C D E F Fuses must be selected with regard to the maximum prospective fault current of the system and the maximum cut-off current of the fuse when subjected to that maximum fault current. The maximum fuse cut-off current as specified for each disconnect switch must not be exceeded. Based on Rockwell Automation tests in accordance with the requirements as defined in IEC -. - Publication A-CAA-EN-P

485 Bulletin R IEC Fused and Non-Fused Disconnects, A Specifications Fused Disconnect Switches For DIN Fuses Electrical Ratings Cat No. R-NDP R-NDP R-NDP R-NDP Fuse Type DIN Dimension,, Rated Insulation Voltage (U i ) [V] Maximum Short Circuit Prospective Fault Current [ka] Rated Operational Current AC-A (I e ) Fuse Links Fuse Links Fuse Links Fuse Links /V Hz //V Hz V Hz /V Hz Rated Operational Current AC-A (I e ) /V Hz //V Hz V Hz /V Hz [A] [A] [A] [A] [A] [A] [A] [A] Rated Thermal Current (l the ) [A] Maximum kw, AC-A -Phase /V Hz //V Hz V Hz /V Hz [kw] [kw] [kw] [kw] Maximum Fuse Rating [A] Maximum Motor Circuit Fuse Link Maximum Fuse Cut-off Current [ka] Rated Short Time Current, Second [ka]. Degree of Protection (per IEC ) Switch Only Switch with Terminal Shield & Fuse Cover(s) Mechanical Data R-NDP R-NDP R-NDP R-NDP IP IP Mechanical Endurance Operations Operating Torque (Maximum) Terminal Capacity Power Terminals Auxiliary Contact Terminals N m lb in mm AWG mm AWG.. # #. # # IP IP. # MCM. # # IP IP. # MCM. # # IP IP. Two Two / MCM. # # Maximum Number of Auxiliary Circuits Approximate Weight Minimum Enclosure Size Approximate dimensions in millimeters (inches) Switch Dimension Reference (See dimension drawings on pages - and - -.) kg lbs Height Width Depth.. () (-/) (-/).. () (-/) (-/).. () (-/) (-/).. () (-/) (-/) C D E F Fuses must be selected with regard to the maximum prospective fault current of the system and the maximum cut-off current of the fuse when subjected to that maximum fault current. The maximum fuse cut-off current as specified for each disconnect switch must not be exceeded. Based on Rockwell Automation tests in accordance with the requirements as defined in IEC -. Publication A-CAA-EN-P -

486 Bulletin R IEC Fused and Non-Fused Disconnects, A Specifications Fused Disconnect Switches For CSA HRCII-C Fuses Electrical Ratings R-NHP R-NHP R-NHP CSA Fuse Type HRCII-C HRCII-C HRCII-C Maximum Fuse Cartridge Size [A] Maximum Voltage AC [V] Ampere Rating [A] Maximum Short Circuit Prospective Fault Current Maximum Hp, -Phase AC V Hz V Hz V Hz V Hz Maximum Hp, -Phase AC V Hz V Hz Degree of Protection (per IEC ) Switch Only Switch with Terminal Shield & Fuse Cover(s) [ka] [Hp] [Hp] [Hp] [Hp] [Hp] [Hp] Mechanical Data R-NHP R-NHP R-NHP Mechanical Endurance Operations Operating Torque (Maximum) Terminal Capacity Power Terminals Auxiliary Contact Terminals N m lb in. mm AWG mm AWG IP IP. # #/. # # IP IP. # MCM. # # IP IP. Two Two / MCM. # # Maximum Number of Auxiliary Circuits Approximate Weight Minimum Enclosure Size Approximate dimensions in millimeters (inches) kg lbs. Height Width Depth Switch Dimension Reference (See dimension drawings on -, -, - and -.).. (-/) (-/) ().. () (-/) (-/).. () (-/) (-/) D E F Based on Rockwell Automation tests in accordance with the requirements as defined in CSA C. No. and IEC -. - Publication A-CAA-EN-P

487 Bulletin R IEC Fused and Non-Fused Disconnects, A Specifications Fused Disconnect Switches For CSA HRCI-J and UL Class Fuses Electrical Ratings R-NJP R-NJP R-NJP CSA Fuse Type/UL Fuse Type HRCI-J/Class J HRCI-J/Class J HRCI-J/Class J Maximum Fuse Cartridge Size [A] Maximum Voltage AC DC [V] [V] Ampere Rating [A] Maximum Short Circuit Prospective Fault Current [ka] Fuse Operating Characteristics Maximum Hp, -Phase AC V Hz V Hz V Hz V Hz Maximum Hp, -Phase AC V Hz V Hz Maximum Hp, DC V DC V DC [Hp] [Hp] [Hp] [Hp] [Hp] [Hp] [Hp] [Hp] Time Delay. Non-Time Delay. Time Delay Non-Time Delay Time Delay Non-Time Delay Only CSA Certified HRCI-J and HRCI-MISC (also UL Listed as Class CC) fuses and UL Listed Class J and CC fuses are suitable for use with these disconnect switches. Degree of Protection (per IEC ) Switch Only Switch with Terminal Shield & Fuse Cover(s) Mechanical Data R-NJP R-NJP R-NJP Mechanical Endurance Operations Operating Torque (Maximum) Terminal Capacity Power Terminals Auxiliary Contact Terminals N m lb in mm AWG mm AWG IP IP.. # #. # # IP IP. # MCM. # # IP IP. Two Two / MCM. # # Maximum Number of Auxiliary Circuits Approximate Weight Minimum Enclosure Size Approximate dimensions in millimeters (inches) Switch Dimension Reference (See dimension drawings on -, - and -.) kg. lbs Height Width Depth.. () (-/) (-/).. () (-/) ().. () (-/) (-/) C D F Only CSA Certified HRCI-J) fuses and UL Listed Class J fuses are suitable for use with these disconnect switches. Based on Rockwell Automation tests in accordance with the requirements as defined in CSA C. No., IEC - and UL. Publication A-CAA-EN-P -

488 Bulletin R IEC Fused and Non-Fused Disconnects, A Specifications Non-Fused Disconnect Switches For CSA and UL Class Applications Electrical Ratings R-NNP R-NNP R-NNP Maximum Fuse Cartridge Size Maximum Voltage AC DC [V] [V] Ampere Rating [A] Maximum Short Circuit Prospective Fault Current [ka] Fuse Operating Characteristics Time Delay Non-Time Delay Time Delay Non-Time Delay Time Delay Non-Time Delay Maximum Hp, - Phase AC Maximum Hp, - Phase AC Maximum Hp, DC V Hz V Hz V Hz V Hz V Hz V Hz V DC V DC [Hp] [Hp] [Hp] [Hp] [Hp] [Hp] [Hp] [Hp] Power Lost [W] Non-fused disconnect switches must be used with separately installed CSA Certified HRCI-J or HRCI-T fuses; or UL Listed Class J or T fuses. When using CSA HRCI-J or HRCI-T fuses, and UL Class J or T fuses. Based on Rockwell Automation tests in accordance with the requirements as defined in CSA C. No., IEC - and UL. Degree of Protection (per IEC ) Switch Only Switch with Terminal Shield & Fuse Cover(s) Mechanical Data R-NNP R-NNP R-NNP IP IP Mechanical Endurance Operations Operating Torque, Max. N m (lb in). (). (). () Terminal Capacity Power Terminals Auxiliary Contact Terminals mm AWG mm AWG. # #. # # IP IP # MCM. # # IP IP Two Two / MCM. # # Maximum Number of Auxiliary Circuits Approximate Weight Minimum Enclosure Size Approximate dimensions in millimeters (inches) kg lbs Height Width Depth Switch Dimension Reference (See dimension drawings on -, - and -.).. () (-/) (-/).. () (-/) ().. () (-/) (-/) C D F Non-fused disconnect switches must be used with separately installed CSA Certified HRCI-J, HRCI-T fuses; or UL Listed Class J or T fuses. Based on Rockwell Automation tests in accordance with the requirements as defined in CSA C. No., IEC -, and UL. All Bulletin R Disconnect Switches, A, A, A Range Environmental Data Ambient Temperature Open C (- + F) Enclosed C (- + F) Storage C (- + F) Altitude (per IEC -), + C (+ F) Relative Humidity (per IEC -) + C (+ F) - Publication A-CAA-EN-P

489 Bulletin R IEC Fused and Non-Fused Disconnects, A Specifications/Renewal Parts Auxiliary Contact Ratings for -GA AC Rating DC Rating U e [V] l e [A] U e [V] l e [A].. Thermal Current Amperes. EEMAC/NEMA A, P. Insulation Voltage IEC (U i ). Wiring Schematic..... R-NHP R-NHP R-NHP R-NJP R-NJP R-NJP R-NNP R-NNP R-NNP D E F C D F C D F R-NAP R-NAP R-NBP R-NBP C D E F Renewal Parts Hardware Kits (Includes switch/fuse mounting hardware and operating rod cotter pin) Disconnect Switch Dim. Ref. R-NAP R-NNP C, C R-NJP R-NAP R-NNP D, D R-NJP R-NDP Hardware Kit Part No Disconnect Switch Dim. Ref. R-NHP R-NDP R-NBP E, E R-NHP R-NDP R-NHP R-NDP R-NBP F R-NNP R-NJP Hardware Kit Part No Publication A-CAA-EN-P -

490 Bulletin R IEC Fused and Non-Fused Disconnects, A Approximate Dimensions Dimensions in millimeters (inches). Dimensions are not intended to be used for manufacturing purposes. Disconnect Switch Dimension References C, C, D, D, E, E and F (,, and A) Disconnect Switch Dimension Reference Approximate Dimensions H W D A B FD C (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) -M (-/) C (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) -M (-/) D (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) -M (-/) D (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) -M (-/) E (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) -M (-/) E (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) -M (-/) F (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) -M (-/) Operating Handles R-HM /-HM dia. dia. - Publication A-CAA-EN-P

491 Bulletin R IEC Fused and Non-Fused Disconnects, A Approximate Dimensions Dimensions in millimeters (inches). Dimensions are not intended to be used for manufacturing purposes. Disconnect Switch Dim. Ref.: C, C, D, D ( A and A) Four () M x.. N m lb-in. Four () Ø. (. dia.) Ø -/ ( dia.) (-/). (-/) (-/). (-/) (-/) The switch is capable of accepting four (). diameter (/ dia.) screws for mounting. NFPA Operating Handles/Shafts Cat. Nos. R-NHR C C Disconnect C R-NH R-NJ R-NN R-NB R-NB R-ND R-NJ R-NN R-NA R-ND R-NH R-NH R-NA R-ND R-ND R-NJ R-NN mm. in mm. in Enclosure Installation Dimensions Dimension Reference C C D D A B C H T W Minimum Minimum Minimum Maximum Minimum Minimum Maximum (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) () () (-/) (-/) () (-/) () () () () () () () (). (/). (/). (/). (/). (/). (/). (/). (/) Single Pole Aux. Cont. (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) Minimum Two Pole Aux. Cont. (-/) (-/) () () Publication A-CAA-EN-P -

492 Bulletin R IEC Fused and Non-Fused Disconnects, A Approximate Dimensions Dimensions in millimeters (inches). Dimensions are not intended to be used for manufacturing purposes. Disconnect Switch and Operating Handle Installation Dimensions Dimension Reference D E F G J K L M N P Q C, C D, D (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/). (/) (-/). (/). (/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) Disconnect Switch Dim. Ref.: E, E, F ( and A) Four () M x.. N m lb-in. Four () Ø. (. dia.) Ø -/ ( dia.) (-/). (-/) (-/). (-/) (-/) The switch is capable of accepting four (). diameter (/ dia.) screws for mounting. Enclosure Installation Dimensions A B C H T W Minimum Dimension Reference Minimum Minimum Minimum Maximum Minimum Minimum Maximum Single Pole Aux. Cont. Two Pole Aux. Cont. E (-/) () (-/) () (). (/). (/) (-/) () E (-/) () (-/) () (). (/). (/) (-/) () F (-/) () (-/) () (). (/). (/) (-/) (-/) Disconnect Switch and Operating Handle Installation Dimensions Dimension Reference D E F G J K L M N P Q E E F (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (/) (/) (/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) - Publication A-CAA-EN-P

493 Bulletin R IEC Fused and Non-Fused Disconnects, A Approximate Dimensions Dimensions in millimeters (inches). Dimensions are not intended to be used for manufacturing purposes. IP (Type //) Watertight, Dusttight Sheet Metal Enclosure A G. (.) D C. (/) E F H B [A] Type Dim. Ref. A B C D E F G H Non-Fused & Fused Non-Fused & Fused Non-Fused & Fused. (/) A & A (-/) B & B (-/) C (-/) Four Mounting Holes Ø. (.) External Mounting Feet Optional -F (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) IP (Type //) Watertight, Dusttight Sheet Metal Enclosure A D C. (/). (/) H E F B [A] Type Dim. Ref. A B C D E F G H Non-Fused & Fused Non-Fused & Fused D F () () G () (). (/) Four Mounting Holes Ø. (.) External Mounting Feet Optional -F (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) Publication A-CAA-EN-P -

494 Bulletin R IEC Fused and Non-Fused Disconnects, A Approximate Dimensions Dimensions in millimeters (inches). Dimensions are not intended to be used for manufacturing purposes. Type /X Watertight, Corrosion-Resistant Stainless Steel Enclosure A A G D C B E F [A] Type Dim. Ref. A A B C D E F G H Non-Fused A (-/) (- /) Fused A (-/) (-/) Non-Fused & Fused B & B (-/) (-/) External Mounting Feet Optional -F (-/) (- /) (- /) (- /) (- /) (- /) (-/) ( ) (-/ (-/) (-/) () (-/) () (- /) (- /) (-/) (-/) Type /X Watertight, Corrosion-Resistant Stainless Steel Enclosure A. (/) D C. (/) E F H B G Four Mounting Holes Ø.. (.) (/) External Mounting Feet Optional -F [A] Type Dim. Ref. A A B C D E F G H Non-Fused & Fused C () () (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) Non-Fused & Fused D () () (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) Non-Fused & Fused F () () (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) - Publication A-CAA-EN-P

495 Bulletin R IEC Fused and Non-Fused Disconnects, A Approximate Dimensions Dimensions in millimeters (inches). Dimensions are not intended to be used for manufacturing purposes. IP (Type //X/) Corrosion-Resistant, Non-Metallic Enclosure K D A K. C. A (/) H (/) H D C F B J F B J. (-/) G Four Slot Mounting Holes x (. x.) R-K_P, -KP and A switch Switch Size [A] A B C D F G J K / (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) () () (/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) () () (/). (-/) G Four Slot Mounting Holes x (. x.) R-K_P A switch IP (Type //X/) Corrosion-Resistant, Non-Metallic Enclosure (/) () (.) dia. mounting holes Switch Size [A] A B C D F G J K (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) () () (/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (-/) (/) Publication A-CAA-EN-P -

496 Bulletin R-FC IEC Fused and Non-Fused Disconnects Overview/Product Selection Standards Compliance for Disconnect Switch IEC --/EN- BS EN- VDE CSA. No. NEMA KS- UL Certifications UL Listed (File No. E, Guide WHTY) CSA Certified (File No. LR) CE ASTA Certified LOVAG Certified The Bulletin R-FC cable-operated disconnect with interlock is another Rockwell Automation exclusive, providing a fully compliant solution to the changes in the National Fire Protection Association (NFPA ). The new R-FC combines the small size of the R IEC next generation disconnect with the flexibility of a cable-operated mechanism to provide an NFPA IEC solution for flange style enclosures. The R-FC bracketed mechanism for R and A devices attaches to the R next generation disconnect switch base and operates the ON-OFF action via cable to a standard F handle. The R-FC handle/interlock mechanism provides the no-tools operation and the secondary interlock as required by NFPA changes. The R-FC cable-operated disconnect is offered in ft cable lengths, allowing a variety of placement options for the R disconnect within the enclosure. The handle (ordered separately) is available in different styles: plastic, stainless steel, or painted metal. Product Selection Bulletin R-FC NFPA Compliant IEC Fused and Non-Fused Disconnects with Cable-Operated Handle for Flange-Style Enclosures Cable-operated disconnect kit with interlock Open switches Compatible with all Bulletin R and A Next Generation fused and non-fused disconnects (sold separately) Uses Bulletin F handles (sold separately) IP (Type R,,,, X) Padlockable handle mounts to flange-styled enclosures Cable options available in ft. lengths NFPA Compliant Table of Contents Product Selection... this page Approximate Dimensions... - Description Cable Length ft. R-FC Cable-operated disconnect switch with handle ft. R-FC ft. R-FC ft. R-FC - Publication A-CAA-EN-P

497 Bulletin R-FC IEC Fused and Non-Fused Disconnects Approximate Dimensions Approximate Dimensions Dimensions are in millimeters (inches). Dimensions are not intended to be used for manufacturing purposes.. (). ( - /) mm (in.) ( - /). () Ref.. () Min. Publication A-CAA-EN-P -

498 Bulletin R-SDK IEC Fused and Non-Fused Disconnects Overview/Product Selection R-SDK Side-Mount Disconnect Switch Kit for all Bul. R and A Next Generation switches and R-HS handles R-SDK NFPA Compliant IEC Fused and Non-Fused Disconnects, Side-Mounted Kit Used with all / A Next Generation fused and non-fused disconnects and Bul R-HS handles (both sold separately) Open switches Operating handle ingress ratings: IP (Type R,,,, X) Padlockable handle The R-SDK side-mount handle provides NFPA compliancy with a bracketed switch and interlock system that is another Allen-Bradley exclusive. The R-HS rotary handle is mounted to the side of the enclosure and attaches to the R next generation disconnect and interlock mechanism. The side handle remains connected to the switch and interlock mechanism at all times. This solution provides the single, side handle design with the NFPA compliancy of the secondary interlock. This kit is used with the R-HS family of disconnect handles (sold separately). Table of Contents Product Selection... this page Approximate Dimensions... - Standards Compliance and Certifications Standards Compliance for Disconnect Switch IEC --/EN- BS EN- VDE CSA. No. NEMA KS- UL Standards Compliance for Kit: Side-Mount Handle Mechanism with Disconnect Switch UL CSA. No. Product Selection Certifications UL Listed (File No. E, Guide WJAZ) CSA Certified (File No. LR) CE Certifications for Kit: Side-Mount Handle Mechanism with Disconnect Switch UL Listed (File No. E, Guide WHTY) CSA Certified (File No. LR) Description For Use With Side-Mounted Kit (Disconnect Mechanism and Bracket) All Bul. R Next Generation / A disconnects and Bul. R-HS handles R-SDK - Publication A-CAA-EN-P